





> 























t 

















« 






. 










» 
















w 

# 







MANNER OF ATTACKING A CASTLE IN THE MIDDLE AGES 




PETER PARLEY’S 


COMMON SCHOOL 


HISTORY. 



ILLUSTRATED BY ENGRAVINGS 

A NEW EDITION, 

REVISED AND BROUGHT DOWN TO THE PRESENT TIME. 


I 


PHILADELPHIA: 

PUBLISHED BY E. H. BUTLER & CO 

1851 . 





> > 
» > > 


% 








4-H3 

cU i 2 l 



ADVERTISEMENT. 


The design of this work is to furnish a clear outline of Universal History, suited 
to Common Schools. It is intended for beginners, and is therefore written in a simple 
style, and, to render it convenient both for the pupil and teacher, it is divided into brief 
paragraphs and short chapters. Ample questions for examination are appended to the 
work. The teacher will doubtless find it better, in many cases, to substitute questions 
of his own, adapting them to the various capacities of his pupil. 

The publishers believe that the manner in which the work is prepared, together with 
its cheapness, will render it fit to be introduced into the Common Schools throughout our 
country. It will be seen that a pupil may commit the whole volume to memory during a 
winter’s schooling; and, if in this brief space a clear outline of Universal History may 
be established in the memory, it is obvious that the subject is worthy the attention of 
every person interested in education. 


Entered according to the Act of Congress, in the year 1849, by 
E. H. BUTLER, 

in the Clerk’s Office of the District Court of the Eastern District of 


Pennsylvania. 


NOTE TO THE REVISED EDITION. 


In this revised edition, the Author has corrected a few errors, introduced recent events, 
and attempted certain emendations, where criticism had suggested their propriety. For 
the sake of greater convenience, the questions are arranged at the bottom of the pages. 
The chapters, however, are the same as before, and no change has been made which will 
render it inconvenient to use this edition in the same classes with previous editions. 






hAthaoge 


19 6 




O u •> 


INTRODUCTION. 


(HATTER FAos 

I. Parley begins by telling about History, Geography, and other matters, ...9 

II. Parley begins by telling how the World is divided into Land and Water, ..10 

III. About the inhabitants of Asia, Africa, and other Countries, 13 

IV. About the different Kinds of People in the World, 13 

ASIA. 

V. About the Climate, Productions, Mountains, People, and Animals, of Asia, 

and other things, .....14 

VI. About the Creation. The Deluge, ....17 

VII. How Noah and his Family came out of the Ark. Howthu People settled 

in the Land of Shinar. About Babel, 18 

VIII. More about Babel, 20 

IX. About the great Assyrian Empire, and Ileign of Queen Semiramis, 21 

X. Queen Semiramis sets forth to conquer the World, but is defeated by the 

King of the Indies, 22 

XI. About Ninias. Reign of Sardanapalus, and Ruin of the Assyrian Empire, 23 

XII. About the Hebrews or Jews. Origin of the Hebrews. The Removal of 

Jacob and his Children to Egypt, 25 

XIII. The Bondage in Egypt. Flight of the Hebrews, and Destruction of 

Pharaoh and his Host, 26 

XIV. About the Wanderings of the Israelites in the Wilderness, 28 

XV. Overthrow of the Midianites. Samson, Judge of Israel, 30 

XVI. Samson’s Exploits and Death, 32 

XVII. Beginning of the Reign of Saul, 34 

XVIII. Combat of David and Goliath, 35 

XIX, The reign of David. Wisdom of Solomon, ...36 

XX. The Building of the Temple. Visit of the Queen of Sheba, 37 

XXI. The Decline of the Jewish Nation, 39 

XXII. The Hebrew Prophets, 40 

XXIII. Crucifixion of the Saviour. Destruction of Jerusalem, 42 

XXIV. Cyrus conquers Babylon. His Death, 44 

XXV. Reign of Cambyses, .............45 

XXVI. Expedition of Xerxes into Greece, 46 

XXVII. Affairs of Persia till the Saracen Conquest, 48 

tXVIII. Modern History of Persia, 49 

XXIX. Early History of China, 51 

XXX. Anecdotes of the Chinese Emperors, 52 

XXXI. Cities of China. Manners of the Chinese, 54 

XXXII. Origin of the Arabs. Rise of Mahomet, 55 

XXXIII. Sequel of the History of the Saracens, 57 

XXXIV. About Syria, Phaenicia, and Asia Minor, 59 

XXXV. A Brief View of several Nations, 61 

XXXVI. Review of the History of Asia, 62 

XXXVII. Chronolgy of Asia, 

AFRICA. 

XXXVIII. About the Geography of Africa. The Inhabitants, 67 

XXXIX. Early Sovereigns of Egypt, 69 

XL. Egyptian Architecture and Sculpture, 71 

XLI. The Ptolemies and Queen Cleopatra, .....74 

l* 


SCHOOL HISTORY 


6 

CHAPTER fAO« 

XLII. Sequel of the Egyptian History, 76 

XLIII. Summary of ^Ethiopian Matters, 77 

XLIV. Origin of the Barbary States, and their Piracies on the Christians, 78 

XLY. Fables and Facts about Africa, 79 

XLVI. History of the Slave-Trade, 80 

XL VII. Chronology of Africa, 81 

* " j ' ■ ■ ’ . i 

EUROPE. 

XLVIII. Introductory Remarks on its Geography, and other Matters, 82 

XLIX. About Greece ; where it is situated. Appearance of the Country ; Cli- 
mate, 86 

L. The Extent of Greece. First Settlement of the Country, 88 

LI. The Grecian Lawgivers, 89 

LII. War with Persia, 90 

LIII. Affairs of Athens, 91 

LIV. Beginning of the Theban War, 93 

LV. Sequel of the Theban War, 94 

LVI. Grecian Religion or Mythology, 95 

LVII. The Grecian Philosophers, 99 

LVIII. The Grecian Philosophers continued, 100 

LIX. Something more about Philosophers. About the Greek Poets,.... 101 

LX. About the Mode of Life among the Ancient Greeks, 102 

LXI. Philip of Macedon conquers Greece, 104 

LXII. Conquests of Alexander the Great, 106 

LXIII. Seque. to Alexander’s Career, 108 

LXIV. Greece invaded by the Gauls, ....109 

LXV. End of Grecian Independence, 110 

LXVI. Modern History of Greece, Ill 

LX VII. About Italy as it now is, , 112 

LX VIII. Founding of Rome by Romulus. Its early State, 115 

LXIX. Battle of the Horatii and Curiatii, 118 

LXX. From the reign of Ancus Martius till the Expulsion of the Kings, 119 

LXXI. The Story of Coriolanus, 121 

LXXII. Rome invaded by the Gauls. The first Punic War, 122 

LXXIII. Second and third Punic Wars, 124 

LXXIV. Scipio’s Triumph, 125 

LXXV. Sylla and Marius, 126 

LXX VI. Cneius Pompey and Julius Caesar, 127 

LXX VII. Caesar usurps the Supreme Power, 128 

LXX VIII. Assassination of Julius Caesar, 129 

LXXIX. Consequences of Caesar’s Death, 130 

LXXX. About the great Power and Extent of the Roman Empire in the Time of 

Augustus, 132 

LXXXI. The Means by which Rome acquired its Power, 133 

LXXXII. Rome under the Emperors, 134 

LXXXIII. Fall of the Western Empire of the Romans, 136 

LXXXIV. Progress of the Decline of Rome, 137 

LXXXV. Manners and Customs of the Ancient Romans, 139 

LXXX VI. About Religion. Deities. Temples. Marriage,. 140 

LXXXVII. About Funeral Rites and Ceremonies, 143 

LXXXVIII. Roman Farms. Mode of Ploughing. Farm Houses. Grain. Cattle. 

Superstitions of the Farmers. Gardens. Vines, 144 

LXXXIX. Country Housos. Description of Pliny’s Villa. Aqueducts, 145 

XC. Military Affairs of the Romans. Division of the Army. The Imperial 
Eagle. Music. Arms. Dress. Military Rewards. Crowns. The 

Triumph, I47 

XCI. About Naval Affairs. The War Galley. Commerce. Shows of Wild 

Beasts. Exhibitions of Gladiators, 149 

XCII. Sports. Chariot Racing. The Circus. Carriages. Private Entertain- 
ments. Supper Rooms. Convivial Parties. Luxuries,.... 150 

XCIII. About Theatres. Clocks and Watches. The Fine Arts. Books and 

Writing. Costume. Conclusion, 152 

XCIV. Rome under the Popes, 153 

XCV. About several other Italian States, 15® 

XCVI. About the Ottoman Empire. Turkey in Europe. Turkey in Asia. 

About the Climate, People, and other Things, 167 


CONTENTS. 


7 


CHAPTER pagi 

XCVII About the Saracens. How the Turks overturned the Saracen Empire. 

How the Ottoman Turks founded the Ottoman Empire. About 

Bajazet, Timour, and others, 159 

XCVIII. Sequel of the Turkish History, 160 

XCIX. Early History of Spain. The Moorish Conquest, 161 

C. Wars between the Moors and the Spaniards, 163 

Cl. The Spanish Inquisition, 164 

CII. The Invincible Armada. Curious Death of a Spanish King. Recent 

Adairs of Spain, 166 

CIII. A short Story about Portugal, 167 

CIV. Description of France. Its Climate. Cities. Manufactures. Manners 

and Customs of the People, 169 

CV. About the Gauls and other Tribes of Barbarians. How the southern 
Parts of Europe were first settled, and how the northern parts we -e 

settled afterwards, 170 

CVI. Story of the Barbarians continued, 171 

CVII. The Gauls. Origin of the French Nation. Little King Pepin, 173 

CVIII. About Clovis and little King Pepin, 174 

CIX. The Reign of Charlemagne, 176 

CX. About the Crusades or Holy Wars, 177 

CXI. About the Feudal System, 160 

CXII. About Chivalry, or Knight-Errantry, 182 

CXIII. More about Chivalry, 184 

CXIV. King Philip and Pope Boniface. Wars of the French and English, 186 

CXV. The Reigns of several French Kings, ....1S9 

CXVI. The Reigns of Louis the Grand and his Successor, 190 

CXVII. The French Revolution, 192 

CXVIII. The Rise of Napoleon Bonaparte, 194 

CXIX. The Fall of Bonaparte, 196 

CXX. Recent Affairs of France, ....198 

CXXI. About Germany, 199 

CXXII. About the Ancient Tribes of Germany, Charlemagne, Ac., 200 

CXXIII. Affairs of Switzerland, 201 

CXXIV. Sequel of German History, 203 

CXXV. About Austria, Hungary, &c., 205 

CXXVI. About Hungary, Bohemia, the Tyrol, &c., 206 

CXXVII. About Prussia, 203 

CXXVIII. History of Prussia, 209 

CXXIX. Description of Russia, 210 

CXXX. Description of Russia continued, 212 

CXXXI. The Reign of Peter the Great, 214 

CXXXII. The Successors ofPeter the Great, 215 

CXXXIII. About Sweden, 217 

CXXXIV. Charles the Twelfth and his Successors, 219 

CXXXV. About Lapland, Norway, and Denmark, 220 

CXXXVI. Brief Notices of several Kingdoms and States, 222 

CXXXVII. Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland, 223 

CXXX VIII. About London and other Cities of England, Wales, Scotland, and Ireland, 224 

CXXXIX. Origin of the British Nation. The Druids, 227 

CXL. Saxon and Danish Kings of England, 229 

CXLI Norman Kings of England, 230 

CXLII, English Wa>rs and Rebellions, 232 

CXLIII. The Lancastrian Kings of England, - 233 

CXLIV. Wars of the Roses, 235 

CXLV. Reigns of the Tudor Princes, 237 

CXL VI. The Reign of Elizabeth, 233 

CXLVII. Accession of the House of Stuart, 240 

CXL VIII. Wars of the King and Parliament, 242 

CXLIX, The Protectorate and the Restoration,.... 244 

CL. The Revolution of 1688, and other Matters, ...245 

CLI. The Hanoverian Kings of Great Britain, 24* 

CLII. The Story of Wales, 249 

CLIII. The Story of Scotland 

CLIV. About Ireland, 262 

CLV. Matters and Things 253 

CLVI. Review. The Dark Ages. Important Inventions, &c., * 255 

CL VII. Chronology of Europe, 268 


8 


SCHOOL HISTORY 


AMERICA. 


CHAPTER rioi 

CL VIII. About America, 263 

CLIX. The first inhabitants of America, 265 

CLX. Discovery of America by Columbus, 267 

CLXI. A few Words about Iceland and Greenland. Settlements of the French 

in America, 26S 

CLXII. The French Colonies conquered by the English, 270 

CLXUI. Description of the United States, 272 

CLXIV. Settlement and Colonial History of New England, 274 

CLXV. Affairs of New England continued, 275 

CLXVI. Early History of Virginia, 276 

CLXVII. Braddock’s Defeat, and other Matters, 277 

CLX VIII. Causes which led to the Revolution.......... 278 

CLXIX. Account of the Battle of Lexington, 279 

CLXX. The Battle of Bunker Hill, 

CLXXI. Progress of the War. Capture of Burgoyne, 281 

CLXXII. The Story of the Traitor Arnold and Major Andre, 2S3 

CLXXIII. War in the South. Surrender of Cornwallis, ...284 

CLXXIV. Affairs of the United States since the Revolution, 285 

CLXXV. General Remarks upon the History of the United States, 286 

CLXX VI. General Remarks upon the History of the United States continued,.. .287 


CLXX VIII. History of the Mexican Territories. Guatimala, 291 

CLXXIX. Spanish Peruvian Territories, 293 

CLXXX. Account of the Brazilian Territories, 294 

CLXXXI. The West Indies, 295 

CLXXXII. The West Indies continued, 297 

CLXXXII. The West Indies continued, 298 

CLXXXI V. Chronology of America, 


OCEANIA. 

CLXXXV. About Oceania. The Malaysian Islands, . . 

CLXXXVI. The Australian Division of Oceania, 

CLXXXVII. Polynesia. The Sandwich Islands, 

CLXX XVIII. Polynesia continued. The Society Islands, 

CLXXXIX. Story of the Bounty concluded, 

CXC. Chronology of Oceania, 

CXCI. General Views.', 


• 301 
.302 
.303 
.305 

• 306 
.307 
.308 




\ 








COMMON SCHOOL HISTORY. 


CHAPTER I.— INTRODUCTION. 

Parley begins by telling about History , Geography , and 
other Matters. 

1. I suppose you have often met with the words History and Ge- 
ography. History tells the story of mankind since the world was 
created, and may be compared to an old man who has lived for 
thousands of years, and who has seen cities built and fall into decay ; 
who has seen nations rise, flourish, and disappear; and who, with a 
memory full of wonderful things, sits down to tell you of all that has 
happened during so many ages. 

2. Geography is a description of towns, rivers, mountains, and 
countries; the things which a traveller sees in going from one place 
to another. Geography, then, may be compared to some roving fel- 
low who has been all over the world in ships, stages, and steamboats, 
and who has come back to give us an account of all he has seen. 

3. You will see, then, titat History is a record of events that have 
happened, and that Geography tells you of the places where they 
happened. In order to understand the former, you must know some- 
thing of the latter. How, in this little book I propose to recount the 
history of the world ; I shall therefore sometimes seem to put on the old 
grey-beard of history, who has lived for thousands of years, and tell 
you of what has come to pass; and sometimes I shall make you fancy 
yourself in a balloon or vessel, and carry you with me to the places 
where the events I am to relate, have occurred. 

4. I shall, in the progress of my story, tell you about the creation 
of the first man and woman; of tne large family they had; and how 
these increased and spread themselves throughout different countries. 
I shall tell you of the great nations that have existed, of the great 
battles that have been fought, and of the deeds of celebrated persons. 

5. But, before I proceed, I must remind you that the world is mund, 
and that men and animals live upon the surface ; that the face of the 


Questions for examination. Chap. I. — 1. What is history ? To what may it be com- 
pared ? 2. What is geography ? To what may it be compared ? 5. What is the shape 

of the earth? Where do men and animals live ? How is the face of the land divided? 
What grow upon the land ? What live upon the land? What are built upon the land 7 


10 


INTRODUCTION. 


earth is divided into land and water ; that on the land, trees, grass, 
nerbs, and flowers grow ; that on the land men and animals dwell ; 
that on the land, towns, cities, and villages are built. 

6. A high piece of land, you know, is called a mountain or hill ; a 
low piece ofland is called a valley. You often see water running in 
a stream through a valley, which is called a river; and you some- 
times see a still piece of water surrounded by hills, which is called a 
lake 

7, About one third of the face of the earth is land, and two thirds 
are water. The land is divided into two great continents; the 
western continent consists of North and South America; the eastern 
continent consists of Europe, Africa, and Asia. 


CHAPTER II.— INTRODUCTION CONTINUED. 

Parley proceeds to tell how the World is divided into 
Land and Water. 

1. I have just told my readers, that about two thirds of the face 
of the earth are covered with water. This water is one vast salt sea, 
but to different parts of it we give different names. 

2. That part which lies between America and Europe is called the 
Atlantic Ocean, and is about three thousand miles wide; that part 
which lies between America and Asia is called the Pacific Ocean, and 
is about ten thousand miles wide. There are many other names given 
to other parts of the great salt sea. 

3. Ships, as you well know, sail from one country to another upon 
the water, and in this way a great deal of trade or commerce is car- 
ried on. But, as mankind live on the land, my stories will chiefly re- 
late to what has happened on the land. 

4. I suppose you have heard people speak of the four quarters of 
the world. By this they mean America, Europe, Africa, and Asia 
Besides these, there are a great many pieces of land encircled by 
water, called islands. 

5. In the Pacific Ocean there are many of these, the inhabitants oi 
which are very numerous. These islands are considered a fifth di- 
vision of the world, and are called Oceania. 

6. Now what I am going to tell you has happened in these differ- 
ent parts of the world. In order to understand my stories, it is ne- 
cessary you should look over the maps which are here given. These 
will show you where the different countries are, about which I am 
going to speak. 


6. What is a mountain or hill ? A valley ? A river ? Lake ? 7. What part of the face 
of the earth is land ? What portion is water ? How is the land divided ? What of the 
westeru continent ? The eastern ? Ch. II. — 1. What of the great mass of water that 
covers two thirds of the earth? 2. What of the Atlantic Ocean? The Pacific? 3. What 
of ships ? What of the land ? 4. What are the four quarters of the world ? What is a a 
Island? 5. What of Oceania? 


INTRODUCTION 


11 


Map of the Western Hemisphere, including North and South 

America. 



North 


Arc tic Sea 

w( Fu£fuisi 


TLiulsons. 


iN. AM ERICA 

% /kMiViu*. 


ITI\ JTf£D 5 TATESm« yro ^ y 

^Washington 
d£o0teans 

'A&}j-^= ==A' u bn 


^ C a lifornfa\ 

ndurich I s 

Hauraii Apg | 

PACIFIC O CEJ1J\' " 


C. Verdi* 
F J rid ios 
Orin oco It 


azonFf 

fCSf^-Ro^t/ 


Quito 


Galapagos 7f; 


ERICA 

?Brazil 4 


delaPiara 


Fa. Ik Land 


Sandwich Lurul 


So utli 


l 


Questions on the Man. —What ocean lies east of America ? What lies west ? Into what 1 wo pans 
L America nearly divided ? Tel’ the direction of the following places irom Bosiou : Cape Horn ; Oreon 
Und ; Cape Verd Islands: Itio Janeiro; Sandwich Islands: Isew Zealand; Ateores ; Mexico; Asia 
KamschaLka ; Iceland. 


12 


INTRODUCTION 


Map of the Eastern Hemisphere, including Europe, Asia 

and Africa. 

\ 



S ibe 


'arts U JLi 
^A^llps 
r-x* Vienna 


g /jgmAlye rT%^ 

f /=?^£ £or , occr > 

7 [M _J* ar .°ury IP 

jf Great D esert ^ 

/lis "—~-^-^Joml>ucloo 

f ^^ aJWge r S ^ 

^ ’^.Guinea) *Ab\ 


Vi China 
V 5 "***- <v Can ton 


__ JSSITUCT^ 

| «tS3v'35^ i > 

•#Zw n£ the A/loon. 

AFRICA ^ 


orneo 


iJV.Criti neQ , 


IJV'DIjUV' 


S pic eft. 


^ AT ?lelena=JJ° ae, 


O CEJ 1 JY 


% Jacks on 


^iGrood Hope 


South 


> 


t 

Questions on the Ma~ r— What ocean lies west of Europe ? What lies to the west of Africa ? 
What to the south of Atiica and Asia? What to the east of Asia? How is Europe bounded? 
Which way is it from Africa ? How is Africa separated from Asia? What sea lies between 
Africa and Europe ? Are Europe and Asia separated by water, or do they lie together in ono 
piece of land? How is Asia bounded ? Point your finger toward Asia. Toward Europe. To 
Ward AiWoa. 


INTRODUCTION. 


13 


CHAPTER III.— INTRODUCTION CONTINUED. 

About the Inhabitants of Asia , Africa , and other Cownr 

tries. 

1. Before I proceed farther, I must tell you that Asia is a vas 
country with a multitude of cities, occupied by a great many differen 
nations. 

2. The principal of these nations are the Tartars, who wander from 
place to place, and dwell chiefly in tents ; the Arabs, who have large 
flocks of camels and fine horses, with which they roam over the des- 
ert ; the Hindoos, or inhabitants of India, who travel about on ele- 
phants, and worship idols ; the Persians, who are very fond of poetry 
and have splendid palaces; the Chinese, from whom we get tea; and 
the Turks, who sit on cushions instead of chairs. 

3. The whole population of Asia is about four hundred millions 
which is about half the inhabitants of the whole globe. It has ten 
times as many people as the whole of North and South America put 
together. 

4. Africa, you know, is the native land of the negroes. It has a 
few large cities, but the whole number of people is but sixty millions. 

5. Europe is divided into several nations, such as the English, 
French, Italians, Spaniards, German's, Russians, and others. It has 
many fine cities, and about three hundred millions of inhabitants. 

6. America is the country where we live. It has some large cider 
and many pleasant towns and villages, but more than half the countn 
is uninhabited. The whole population is about forty millions. 

7. Oceania, as I have before said, consists of many islands in the 
Pacific Ocean. Some o f these, as Java, Sumatra, Borneo, and New 
Holland, are very large, me latter being the largest island on the globe. 
From these countries we get pepper, cloves, coffee, and other nice 
things. The whole population of Oceania is about twenty millions. 


CHAPTER IV.— INTRODUCTION CONTINUED. 

About the different Kinds of People in the World. 

1. Thus you see that the ‘whole number of the inhabitants upon the 
globe is about ten hundred millions. All these are descended from 
Adam and Eve, whom the Bible tells us lived iu the garden of Eden * 


Ch. III. — 1. What of Asia ? 2. What arc the principal nations of Asia ? 3. 1 >pula 
tion of Asia? 4. What of Africa? Population? 5. What of Europe? Population? 
6. What of America ? Population? 7. What of Oceania? In which direction are the 
Oceanic islands from New York ? What do we get from Oceania ? Population ? Where 
are the Oceanic islands ? Ch. IV.— 1. What is the whole population of the globe Where 
did Adam and Eve live ? 


O 


14 


INTRODUCTION. 


2. W hat an immense family to have proceeded from one pair ! You 
may well believe that it has taken many years for the human family 
to increase to this extent. 

3. If you were to travel in different countries, you would observe 
that the inhabitants differ very much in their color, dress, and mode 
of living. 

4. Some have dark skins, like the color of a dead leaf, as the 
American Indians; some have a yellowish or olive color, like the 
Chinese , some are of a deep, sooty brown, like the Hindoos ; some 
are black, like the negroes, and some are white, like the English, and 
the people of the United States. 

i). In some countries the people live in huts built of mud or sticks, 
and subsist by hunting with the bow and arrow. These are said to 
be in the savage state. Our American Indians, some of the negroes 
of Africa, some of the inhabitants of Asia, and most of the Oceanians, 
are savages. 

6. In some countries the people live m houses partly of stone and 
mud. They have few books, no churches or meetinghouses, and 
worship idols. Such are most of the negroes of Africa, and many 
tribes in Asia. These are said to be in the barbarous state, and are 
often called barbarians. Many of their customs are very cruel. 

7. In some countries the inhabitants live in tolerable houses, and 
the rich have fine palaces. The people have many ingenious arts, 
but the schools are poor, and but a small portion are taught to read 
and write. The Chinese, the Hindoos, the Turks, and some other 
nations of Asia, with some of the inhabitants of Africa and Europe, 
are in this condition, which may be called a civilized state. 

8. In many parts of Europe, and in the United States, the people 
live in good houses, they have good furniture, many books, good 
schools, churches meetinghouses, steamboats, and railroads. These 
are in the highest state of 'ivilization. 

9. Thus you observe that mankind may be divided into four class- 
es; — those who are in the savage state, those who are in a barbarous 
state, those who are merely civilized, and those who are in the high- 
est state of civilization. 


CHAPTER V.— ASIA. 

About the Climate , Productions , Mountains , People , and 
Animals , of Asia , and other Things. 

1. I have already said that Asia is a vast country, containing a 
great .nany cities, and a multitude of inhabitants. It lies on tne op- 


3. What would you observe in travelling through different countries ? 5. What of peo. 

f ile in the savage state ? 6. What of people in the barbarous state ? 7. What of people 
>j the c>vili*ed state ? S. What of people in the highest state of civilization ? 9. Into 
What four classes may mankind be divided ? Ch. V. — 1. What of Asia ? Where is Asia 


ASIA 


15 


r 


posite side of the earth from us, and you may go to it by crossing the 
Pacific Oc«*n on the west, or crossing the Atlantic and Europe on the 
east. 



2. In the southern portion of Asia the climate is warm, as in our 
southern states. These parts are chiefly inhabited by the Chinese, 
Hindoos, Persians, Arabians, and Turks. In many places the country 
is fertile ; and in the valleys, beautiful flowers, spicy shrubs, and fra- 
grant trees are found. 

3. Wild birds of the most brilliant colors are often seen in the for- 
ests. Peacocks, pheasants, and our domestic fowls are natives of 
these sunny regions. Oranges grow wild in some parts, and many 
of our most splendid garden flowers are to be found growing on the 
nills and in the valleys of Southern Asia. 

4. In the centre of Asia, there are some mountains whose tops are 
covered with everlasting snow. These are the loftiest peaks in the 
world, and are nearly six miles in height. To the north of these is a 
cold region, where there are vast plains with scattered tribes of Tar- 
tars roaming over them for the scanty pastures they afford for their 
camels and horses. 

5. In these gloomy tracts, there are few towns or cities. The in- 
habitants are for the most part wanderers, who build no houses, but 
dwell in tents, and live upon the milk and flesh of their flocks. They 
also hunt the wild deer, antelopes, and other animals that are found 
in tl ese regions. 

6. The native animals of Asia are many of them very remarkable. 
The elephant is found in the thickets, the rhinoceros along the banks 
of rivers, the lion in the plains, the royal tiger in the forests, monkeys 
and apes of many kinds abound in the hot parts, and serpents thirty 
feet in length are sometimes met with. 


How can you go lo it? Point your finger towards Asia. 2. Climate of Southern Asia J 
What nations live in Southern Asia ? Productions ? % . Birds ? Fruits ? Flowers ? 4. Moun- 
jains ? What of Northern Asia? 5. Inhabitants? 6. Animals of Asia * 


16 


J 

i 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


Map of Asia. 



Questions on the Map . — How is Asia bounded on the north ? East? South? West? Which 
way is Asia from Europe? In what part of Asia is Persia? In which direction from Persia i* 
Arabia? Hindostan? China? Tartary? Siberia? Red Sea? Egypt? Mediterranean Sea/ 
In what part of .»8>a is the river Euphrates ? 



ASIA. 


1? 


7. In the southern portions of Asia, hurricanes are common ; and 
these sometimes are so violent as to overturn the houses, rend the for- 
ests in pieces, and scatter ruin and desolation over the land. The 
country is often parched with drought, and destructive famine follows. 
Sometimes millions of locusts come borne upon the wind, and devour 
;very green thing, so that nothing is left for man or beast. Pestilence 
jften visits the people, and sweeps away thousands upon thousands. 

8. Such is Asia, a land of wonders both in its geography and his 
•ory. It is the largest of the four quarters of the globe ; it contain* 
the loftiest mountains, it affords the greatest variety of animal ane 
vegetable productions, and the seasons here display at once their 
most beautiful and their most fearful works. 

9. Asia, too, is the most populous quarter of the globe ; it contain- 
ed the first human inhabitants, and from this quarter, all the rest of 
the globe has been peopled. Here, too, the most remarkable events 
took place that belong to the history of man. Here the most won- 
derful personages were born that have ever trod this earth ; and here, 
too, the mighty miracles of Jehovah were wrought. 


CHAPTER VI.— ASIA CONTINUED. 

About the Creation. The Deluge. 

1. The first portion of the world inhabited by mankind, was Asia, 
the next was Africa ; the next was Europe, and the last was America. 
How long it is since this last country was first peopled by the Indians, 
we do not know ; but the hrst white people came here not quite three 
hundred and fifty years since. 

2. Let us now go back to the creation of the world. This wondei- 
ful event took place about six thousand years ago. The story of i« 
is beautifully told in the first chapter of Genesis. 

3. Adam and Eve were created in Asia, and were placed in the 
garden of Eden, not far from the river Euphrates. This river is in 
the western part of Asia, and is about six thousand miles in an east- 
erly direction from New York and Boston. 

4. Adam and Eve were for a lime the only human beings on this 
vast globe. Yet they did not feel alone, for God was with them. At 
length they had children, and in the course of years their descendants 
were very numerous. 


7. Southern parts of Asia? 8. For what is Asia very remarkable as to its geography? 
9. For what is Asia very remarkable as to its history ? Ch. VI. — 1. Which quarter of the 
globe was first inhabited ? Which quarter was nett inhabited? Which next? Which 
quarter was inhabited last? When was America fust peopled by the Indians? When by 
white people ? 2. How long is it since the world was created ? Tell the story of the cre- 
ation, as related in the first chapter of Genesis. 3. Where did Adam and Eve live . ’ Where 
is the river Euphrates ? How far is it from New York ? Which way from Boston ? What 
ocean would you cross in going to the river Euphrates ? 

B 2 * 


18 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


5. These dwelt in the neighborhood of the Euphiates, and here 
they uilt towns, cities, and villages. But they became very wicked. 
They forgot to worship God, and were unjust and cruel. 

6. The Creator therefore determined to cut off the whole human 
family, with the exception of Noah and his children, both as a pun- 
ishment to the disobedient, and as a warning to all future nations that 
evil must follow sin. 

7. Noah was told of the coming destruction, and therefore built an 
ark, into which he gathered his family, and a single pair of the vari- 
ous kinds of land animals. It then began to rain, until all the coun- 
tries of the earth were covered with a deluge of water. 

8. Thus all the nations were cut off, and the world once more had 
but a single human family upon it. This event occurred sixteen hun- 
dred and fifty-six years after the creation. 


CHAPTER VII.— ASIA CONTINUED. 

How Noah and his family came out of the Ark. How 
the People settled in the Land of Shinar. About 
Babel. 

1. The people who lived before the flood are called antediluvians. 
We know nothing about them except what is told in the Bible. It 
is probable that they extended over but a small part of Asia, and 
that no human beings dwelt either in Africa, Europe, or America, 
before the flood. 

2. The deluge is su^ posed to have commenced in November, and 
the rain is thought to have ceased in March. After a while the 
waters subsided, and Noah’s ark rested upon the top of a tall moun- 
tain in Armenia, called Ararat, which is still to be seen. 

3. The people and animals now came out of the ark, and from 
them the world was again stocked with inhabitants. The animals 
spread themselves abroad, and after many centuries they were ex- 
tended into all countries. 

4. Noah had three sons, Shem, Ham, and Japheth. These, with 
their families, proceeded to the country of Shinar, which lies to the 
south of Mount Ararat. 

5. Here they settled themselves on the borders of the river Eu- 
phrates, probably the same country that had been inhabited by the 
antediluvians. It is in this region that the first nations were formed. 


5. Where did the descendants of Adam and Eve dwell ? What did they do? 6. Whst 
did God determine to do ? Why did God determine to destroy mankind ? 7. What of 
Noah? Describe the deluge. 8. What was the effect of the deluge? When did the deluge 
take place? Ch. VII. — 1. What of those who lived before the flood? When did the 
deluge begin and end? What of Mount Ararat? 3. What of the people that came out 
of the ark? The animals? 4. What three sons had Noah? What did the descendants 
f Noan do? 6 . Where did they settle ? Where was the land of Shinar? 


ASIA. 


19 


Map of Ancient Countries. 



Questions on the Map. — How is Arabia bounded ? Asia Minor ? The Mediterranean Sea ? 
Tell the direction of the following places from Italy: Parthia, Media ; Caspian Sea ; Byzanti- 
um ; Red Sea ; Syria; Jerusalem; Persia. Where does the river Euphrates rise? Where 
does it empty ? Which way was Shinar from Mount Ararat ? Which way was Jerusalem from 
Babylon? Mneveh fr<jm Babylon? Egypt? Persia? Which way was Syria from the Medi- 
terranean Sea? Direction of the following places from Babylon* Egypt? Asia Minor ? 
Greece? Macedonia? Italy? Canaan? Persia? 


20 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


6. The people increased very rapidly, and, at the end of a hundred 
years from the deluge, they were quite numerous. Most of Noah’s 
family were at this time alive. They had told their descendants 
how the world had been overflowed with water, which destroyed 
all the land animals, and all the people, except those that were iD 
the ark. 

7. All who remembered the deluge, or had heard of it, were afraid 
that the wickedness of mankind would again be punished in a simi 
lar way. They therefore resolved to build a tower, that they might 
mount upon it, and save themselves from destruction. 

8. Accordingly they laid the foundation of the edifice on the 
eastern bank of the river Euphrates. Perhaps they expected to 
rear the tower so high, that its top would touch the blue sky, and 
enable them to climb into heaven. 

9. Their building materials were bricks that had been baked in 
the sun. Instead of mortar, they cemented the bricks together with 
a sort of slime or pitch. 

10. The workmen labored very diligently, and piled one layer of 
bricks upon another, till the earth was a considerable distance be- 
neath them. But the blue sky, and the sun, and the stars seemed 
as far off as when they first began. 


CHAPTER VIII.— ASIA CONTINUED. 

More about Babel. 

1. One day, while these foolish people were at their labor, a very 
wonderful thing took place. They were talking together as usual, 
but, all of a sudden, they found it impossible to understand what 
each other said. 

2. If any of the workmen called for bricks, their companions at 
the bottom of the tower might mistake their meaning, and bring 
them pitch. If they asked for one sort of tool, another sort was 
given them. Their words appeared to be mere sounds without any 
sense, like the babble of a little child, before it has been taught to 
speak. 

3. This event caused such confusion that they could not go on 
building the tower. They therefore gave up the idea of climbing 
iO heaven, and resolved to wander to different parts of the earth. 

4. It is likely that they formed themselves into several parties, 
consisting of all who could' talk intelligibly together. They set forth 
on their journey in various directions. 

5. As each company departed, they probably threw a sad glance 


6. What of the people ? 7. Why did they resolve to build the tower of Babel ? 

8. Describe the building of the tower. Ch. VIII. — 1. Describe the confusion of lau 
guages. 3. What was the consequence of this confusion of languages 


ASIA. 


21 


behind them at the tower of Babel. The sun was perhaps shining 
on its lofty summit, as it seemed to rise into the very midst of the 
sity; and we may believe that it was long remembered by these 
exiles from their country. 

6. The descendants of Shem are supposed, to have distributed 
themselves over the country -near to the Euphrates. The descend- 
ants of Ham took a westerly direction, and proceeded to Africa 
They settled in Egypt, and laid the foundation of a great nation there 
The descendants of Japheth proceeded to Greece, and thus laid th 
foundation of several European nations. 

7. Some travellers in modem times have discovered a large hillock 
on the shore of the Euphrates. It is composed of sun-burnt bricks, 
cemented together with pitch. They believe this hillock to be the 
ruins of the tower of Babel, which was built more than four thousand 
years ago. 


CHAPTER IX.— ASIA CONTINUED. 

About the great Assyrian Empire , and the Reign of 
Queen S emir amis. 

3. When the rest of mankind were scattered into different, parts 
rif the earth, there were a number of people who remained near the 
tower of Babel. They continued to inhabit the land of Shinar, which 
was a warm country, and very fertile. In the course of time they 
extended over a much larger tract of country, and built towns and 
cities. 

2. This region received the name of Assyria. It was the first of 
the nations of the earth. Its boundaries varied at different times, but 
its place on the map may be seen in the vicinity of the two rivers 
Tigris and Euphrates, northward of the Persian Gulf. 

3. Ashur, the grandson of Nooh, was the first ruler of Assyria. 
In the year 2229, B. C., he built the city of Nineveh, and surrounded 
it with ■walls a hundred feet high. It was likewise defended by 
fifteen hundred towers, each two hundred feet in height. The city 
was so large, that a person would have travelled a hundred miles 
merely in walking round it. 

4. But the city of Babylon, which was built a short time afterwards, 
was superior to Nineveh, both in size and beauty. T t was situated 
on the river Euphrates. The walls were so very thick that six 


6. What of the descendants of Shem ? Of Ham ? Of Japheth ? 7. What have some 
travellers discovered ? What is the hillock supposed to be? Ch. IX. — 1. Did all the 

I ieople leave the land of Shinar after the confusion of languages? Did the people of the 
and of Shinar increase' What did they do ? 2. What name did the country around 

Shinar receive ? What vas the first empire or great nation of the earth ? In which direc- 
tion was A«syria from the Persian Gulf? Winch way from the Mediterranean Sea* 
Which way from Epypt? 3. Who was the first ruler of Assyria? What city did h« 
mild? Describe the city «f Nineveh. 4. Where was the city of Babylon? 


oo 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


chariots drawn by horses could be driven abreast upon the top, with'* 
out danger of falling off on either side. In this country we do not 
surround our cities with walls ; but in ancient times walls were 
necessary to protect the people from their enemies. 

5. In this city there were magnificent gardens, belonging to the 
royal palace. They were constructed in such a manner that they 
appeared to be hanging in the air without resting on the earth. 
They contained large trees, and all kinds of fruits and flowers. 

6. There was also a splendid temple dedicated to Bel us, or Baal, 
who was the chief idol of the Assyrians. This temple was six hun- 
dred and sixty feet high, and it contained a golden image of Belus 
forty feet in height. 

7. The city of Babylon, which I have been describing, was first 
built by Nimrod , that mighty hunter, of whom the Bible tells us. 
But the Person who made the beautiful gardens and palaces, and who 
set up the golden image of Belus, was a woman, named Semiramis. 

8. She had been the wife of Ninus, king of Assyria; but, when 
king/Ninus died, queen Semiramis became sole ruler of the empire. 
She was an ambitious woman, and could not content herself to live 
quietly in Babylon, although she had taken so much pains to make 

/it a beautiful city. 

/ 9. She was tormented with a wicked desire to conquer all the 

/ nations of the earth. So she collected an immense army, and 
/ marched against the rich and powerful king of the Indies, who lived 
/ in what we now call Hindostan, a country lying to the southeast of 
/ Assyria. 

s*rt ^ /£***-* > Jo- %• 

CHAPTER X.— ASIA CONTINUED. 

Queen Semiramis sets forth to conquer the world , but is 
defeated by the King of the Indies. 

1. When the king of the Indies, who was very rich and powerful., 
heard that queen Semiramis was coming to invade his dominions, he 
mustered a vast number of men to defend them. Besides his soldiers, 
he had a great many elephants. 

2. Each of these enormous beasts was worth a whole regiment of 
soldiers. They were taught to rush into the battle, and toss the 
enemy about With their trunks, and trample them down with their 
huge feet. 


Describe this wonderful city. Why did the ancients surround their cities with walls ’ 
6 . What of the hanging gardens? 6. The temple of Belus? 7. Who built Babylon > 
Who made the hanging gardens, the image of Belus, &c. ? 8. What of Semiiamis? 

Was she contented with Babylon ? 9. What foolish and wicked desire had she ? Whal 
aid she do ? Where did the king of the Indies live? In which e rection was India from 
Assyria ? Ch. X. — 1. What did the king of the Indies do when h.* heard that Semiramis 
was going to make war upon his kingdom ? What sort of an army had he ? 2. What oi 

the elephants ? 


ASSYRIA. 


21 


3. Now }ueen Semiramis had no elephants, and therefore she was 
afraid that the king of the Indies would overcome her. She endea- 
vored to prevent this misfortune by a very curious contrivance. I| 
the first place, she ordered three thousand brown oxen to be killed. 

4. The hides of the dead oxen were stripped off, and sewed to 
gether in the shape of elephants. These were placed upon camels 
and when the camels were drawn up in battle array, they looked 
pretty much like a troop of great brown elephants. Doubtless the 
king of the Indies wondered where queen Semiramis had caught 
them. 

5. When the battle was to be fought, the king of the Indies with 
his real elephants marched forward on one side, and queen Semira 
mis, with hei camels and ox-hides, came boldly against him on thf 
other. 

6. But when the Assyrian army had marched close to the host of 
the Indians, the latter perceived that there was no such thing as an 
elephant among them. They therefore laid aside all fear, and rushed 
furiously upon queen Semiramis and her soldiers. 

7. The real elephants put the camels to flight; and then, in a 
great rage, they ran about, tossing the Assyrians into the air, and 
trampling them down by hundreds. Thus the Assyrian army was 
touted, and the king of the Indies gained a complete victory. 

8. Queen Semiramis was sorely wounded ; but she got into a 
chariot, and drove away at full speed from the battle-field. She 
finally escaped to her own kingdom, but in a very sad condition. 

9. She then took up her residence in the palace at Babylon. But 
she did not long enjoy herself in the beautiful gardens which she 
had suspended in the air. It is said that her own son, whose name 
was Ninias, put his mother to death, that he might get possession of 
die throne, and reign over the people. 

10. Such was the melancholy end of the mighty queen Semiramis. 
How foolish and wicked it was for her to spend her life in trying to 
conquer other nations, instead of making her own people happy. 
But she had not learned that golden rule, “ Do to another as you 
would have another do to you.” 


CHAPTER XI.— ASIA CONTINUED. 

About Ninias. Reign of Sardanapalus , and Ruin of 
the Assyrian Empire. 

1. After Ninias had wickedly murdered his mother, he became 
king of Assyria. His reign began about the year 2000, B. C., or 
about three hundred and fifty years after the deluge. 


3. By what contrivance did Semiramis endeavor to match the elephants of the kinjr 0 f 
India ? 5. Describe the battle. 7. What was the result of the battle? 8. What of Semi 
'amis ? 9. What was her fate ? Ch. XI. — 1. What of Ninias? When did his reign begin 


24 


SCHOOL HISTORY 


2. Ninias was not only a very wicked man, but a very slothful one 
He did not set out to conquer kingdoms like his mother, but shu» 
himself up in his palace, and thought of nothing but how to enjoj 
himself. 

3. He knew that his people hated him ; and therefore he kep 
guards in his palace; but he was afraid to trust even his guards 
Whether he was murdered at last, or whether he died quietly in his 
bed, is more than I can tell, for history does not inform us. 

4. After the reign of Ninias, there was an interval of eight hun 
dred years, during which it is impossible to say what happened in 
the kingdom of Assyria. It is probable that most of the kings were 
like Ninias, that they wasted their time in idle pleasures, and never 
did any thing worthy of remembrance. 

5. When Pul was king of Assyria, he conquered the Israelites and 
forced them to pay him tribute. He is supposed to have been the 
king of Nineveh to whom the prophet Jonah was sent to preach 
repentance, about eight hundred and sixty years before Christ. 

6. Some years afterwards, there was a king upon the throne of 
Assyria whose name was Sardanapalus. He is said to have been a 
beautiful young man; but he was slothful, and took no care of his 
kingdom, and made no attempt to promote the welfare of his people. 

7. He never went outs’de of his palace, but lived all the time 
among the women. And in order to make himself more fit for their 
company, he painted his face, and sometimes put on a woman’s 
dress. In this ridiculous guise, the great king Sardanapalus used to 
sit down with the women, and help them to spin. 

8. But while Sardanapalus was feasting, and dancing, and painting 
his face, and dressing himself lure a woman, and helping the women 
to spin, a terrible destruction was impending over his head. 

9. Arbaces, governor of the Medes, made war against this un- 
worthy monarch, and besieged him in the city of Babylon. Sarda- 
hapalus saw that he could not escape, and that, if he lived any longer, 
he should probably become a slave. 

10. So, rather than be a slave, he "esolved to die. He therefore 
collected his treasures, and heaped them into one great pile in a 
splendid hall of his palace, and then set fire to the pile. The palace 
was speedily in a blaze, and Sardanapalus, with his favorite officers, 
and a multitude of beautiful women, were burnt to death in the 
flames. 

11. Thus ended the great Assyrian monarchy, the country being 
conquered by Arbaces. It was afterwards revived, and continued 
till the time of Cyrus, 538, B. C., but this is usually considered 
another empire. 


2. What was his character? What did he do? 3. What else of Ninias? 4. What of 
Assyria tor eight hundred years after Ninias? S. What of Pul ? About what time did 
Jonah go to preach repentance to the Ninevites ? 6. What of Sardanapalus ? 7. How did 
he live? 9. What of Arbaces? 10. What did Sardanapalus do ? 11. What was the end 

oi the Assyrian empire? Do you think it was right for Sardanapalus to live only for his 
own pleasure, and not try to make his people happy ? Does not his story show that ever 
a .ung cannot be idle without bringing destruction upon his people, and misery upoa 


THE HEBREWS. 


2* 


CHAPTER XII.— ASIA CONTINUED. 


About the Hebrews or Jews. Origin of the Hebi ews 4 
The Removal of Jacob and his Children to Egypt. 


1. The founder of the Hebrew nation was Abraham, the son dt 
Terah. He was bom about two hundred years after the deluge. 
The country of his birth was Chaldea, which formed the southern 
part of the Assyrian empire. 

2. The rest of the inhabitants of Chaldea were idolaters, and wor 
shipped the sun, moon, and stars; but Abraham worshipped the true 
God whom we worship. In the early part of his life he was a 
shepherd on the Chaldean plains. When his father was dead, God 
commanded him to leave his native country, and travel westward to 
the land of Canaan. 

3. This region was afterwards called Palestine. It lies north of 
Arabia, is on the eastern border of the Mediterranean sea, and is 
nearly six thousand miles southeasterly from New York. It was a 
rich and fertile country ; and God promised Abraham, that his de- 
scendants should dwell there. 

4. Many years of Abraham’s life were spent in wandering to and 
fro. His wife Sarah went with him, and they were followed by a 
large number of male and female servants, and by numerous flocks 
and herds. They dwelt in tents, and had no settled home. 

5. Abraham and Sarah had one son, named Isaac. His father 
loved him fondly ; but, when God commanded him to sacrifice the 
child, he prepared to obey. But an angel came down from heaven, 
and told him not to slay his son. 

6. The life of Abraham was full of interesting events, but I have 
not room to relate them all here. He lived to be a hundred and 
seventy-five years old, and then died at Hebron, in Canaan. His 
burial-place was in a cave at Machpelah where Sarah had been 
buried, many years before. 

7. The Jews and the Arabians are descended from this ancient pa- 
triarch. They have always called him Father Abraham. It is said, 
that to this day, they show the place where Abraham and Sarah lie 
buried, and that they consider it a holy spot. Many travellers at the 
present day go to see it. 

8. Isaaa, the son of Abraham, left two children, Esau and Jacotx 


Ch. XII. — 1. What of Abraham ? When was he born ? How long ago ? Ans. Nearly 
four thousand years. What was the native country of Abraham? 2. What of the worship 
of the Chaldeans? Of Abraham? What of the early life of Abraham? What did God 
command Abraham to do ? Which way was Canaan from Chaldea? How far was Chal- 
dea from Canaan ? Ans. About five hundred miles. 3. Where is the land of Canaan ? 
What is it now called ? Which way is it from where you live ? How would you go to the 
land o r Canaan or Palestine ? Ans. In a ship across the Atlantic Ocean and the Mediter 
ranean Sea. 4. What of the life of Abraham ? Who went with him from Chaldea to Ca- 
naan ? 5. What of Isaac? 6. What else of Abraham ? 7. What of the Jews ? 8. What 
of Isaac ? 

a 


26 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


The younger, Jacob, persuaded his brother to sell his birthright for a 
mess of pottage. He likewise obtained a blessing, which his father 
intended to bestow on Esau. 

9. Jacob had twelve sons, whose names were Reuben, Simeon, 
Levi, Dan, Juda, Naphthali, Gad, Ashur, Issachar, Zebulon, Joseph, 
and Benjamin. The posterity of each of these twelve afterwards be- 
came a separate tribe among the Hebrews. 

10. My young reader must look into the Bible for the beautiful sto- 
ry of Joseph and his brethren. I can merely tell him that Joseph 
was sold into captivity and carried into the land of Egypt, and that 
there he was the means of preserving his aged father and all his 
brothers from death by famine. He died 1635 B. C. 

11. Jacob and his twelve children removed to Egypt, and took up 
their residence there. It was in that country, that the Hebrews first 
began to be a nation ; so that their history may be said to commence 
from this period. Jacob died 1689 B. C. 


CHAPTER XIII.— ASIA CONTINUED. 

The Bondage in Egypt. Flight of the Hebrews , and 
Destruction of Pharaoh and his Host. 



The Pyramids, and a great Stone Head, called the Sphynx. 


1 . Egypt, you know, is in Africa. It has many cities, and a famous 
river called the Nile runs through the country. But this land is less 


8 What did Esau do? What is meant by birthright ? Ans. The eldest son in ancient 
times enjoyed many privileges over his younger brothers. These Esau sold to Jacob for 
a single meal of victuals. Thus Jacob became the head of the Jewish people. 9. Who 
were the twelve sons of Jacob ? What of the descendants of these twelve sons of Jacob ? 
10. Can you tell the story of Joseph as related in Genesis, chap. 37, &c.? 11. Where did 

Jacob go with his family? Which way was Egypt from Canaan? How far? Ans. Aboui 
two hundred miles. 


THE HEBREWS. 


27 


populous now than in the time of Joseph. It was then full of people, 
and they were the most learned and civilized of all the nations of the 
earth. There are many ruins to be seen in Egypt, which show that 
the palaces and cities of ancient times were very splendid. 

2. But I must tell you of the Hebrews. Pharaoh, the good king of 
Egypt, died, and Joseph likewise. Another king then ascended the 
throne, who hated the Hebrews, and did all in his power to oppress 
them. 

3. The Egyptians treated them like slaves. All the hardest labor 
was performed by the Hebrews. It is thought by some writers, that 
the immense piles of stone, called the Pyramids, were built by them. 
These vast edifices are still standing on the banks of the Nile. 

4. The cruel king of Egypt was named Pharaoh, like his predeces- 
sor. One of the most wicked injuries that he iuliicted on the Hebrews 
was the following: — 

5. He commanded that every male child should be thrown into the 
river Nile the instant he was born. The reason of this horrible cru- 
elty was, that the Hebrews might not become more numerous than 
the Egyptians, and conquer the whole country. 

t3. One of the Hebrew women, however, could not make up her 
mind to throw her son into the Nile. If she had positively disobeyed 
the king’s order, she would have been put to death. She therefore 
very privately made a little ark or boat of bulrushes, placed the child 
in it, and laid it arpong the Hags that grew by the river’s side. 

7. In a little while the king’s daughter came down to the river tc 
bathe. Perceiving the ark of bulrushes, she went with her maids tc 
fetch it. When they looked into it, they found a little Hebrew boy 
there ! 

8. The heart of the princess was moved with compassion, and she 
resolved to save his life. She hired his own mother to nurse him. 
She gave him the name of Moses, and, when he grew old enough to 
be put to school, she caused him to be instructed in all the learning of 
the Egyptians. At that period they were the most learned people 
on earth. 

9. But, though he himself was so well treated, Moses did not for- 
get the sufferings of the other Hebrews. He remembered that they 
were his brethren, and he resolved to rescue them from their oppres- 
sors. 

10. He and his brother Aaron received power from God to perform 
many wonderful things, in order to induce Pharaoh to let the He- 
brews depart out of Egypt. Ten great plagues were inflicted on the 
Egyptians; and these were so terrible, that at last Pharaoh gave the 
Hebrews leave to go. 


Ch. XIII.- -1. What of Egypt.'’ Which way does it lie from you ? How far is it fronr 
Ncw-York to Egypt ? Ans. Nearlv six thousand miles. Which way does the Nile flow: 
In which of the four quarters of tfie globe is Egypt? In which part of Africa is Egypt f 
Whai jf Egypt in the time of Joseph ? 2. How were the Hebrews treated after the death 
of Joseph? What of the pyramids? How high is the tallest of the Egyptian pyramids ? 
Ans. About five hundred feet? 4. What cruelty did Pharaoh inflict upon the Hebrews? 
6. What did one of the Hebrew women do ? 7. What of Pharoah’s daughter ? 8. What 
of Moses ? 9. What did he resolve to do ? 10. What of Moses and Aaron ? To what 

did Pharaoh consent. 


28 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


11. But scarcely were they gone, when the King was sorry that he 
had not still kept them in Egypt, that he might oppress them, and 
compel them to labor for him as before. He therefore mustered his 
warriors, and rode swiftly after the fugitives. 

12. When he came in sight of them, they were crossing the Red 
Sea, which lies between Egypt and Arabia. The Lord had caused 
the waters to roll back, and form a wall on each side. Thus there 
was a path of glistening sand for the Hebrews through the very 
depths of the sea. 

13. Pharaoh and his army rode onward, and by the time that the 
fugitives had reached the opposite shore, the Egyptians were in the 
midst of this wonderful passage. 

14. As the Hebrews fled, they looked behind them. There was 
the proud array of the Egyptian king, with his chariots and horse- 
men, and all his innumerable army, and Pharaoh himself riding 
haughtily in the midst. 

15. The affrighted Hebrews looked behind them again, and, lo ! 
the two walls of water had rolled together. They were dashing 
against the chariots, and sweeping the soldiers off their feet. The 
waves were crested with foam, and came roaring against the proud 
and wicked king. In a little time the sea rolled calmly over Pharaoh 
and his host, and thus they all perished, leaving the Jews to proceed 
on their journey. 

16. This was a terrible event, but Pharaoh had been very cruel; 
he therefore deserved his fate. This story may teach us, that not 
only wicked rulers, but those who follow them, have reason to fear 
the judgments of Heaven. 


CHAPTER XIV.— ASIA CONTINUED. 

About the Wanderings of the Israelites in the Wilder- 
ness. 

1. It was now two hundred and fifteen years since Jacob had come 
to settle in Egypt. His descendants had multiplied so rapidly, that, 
at the time of their departure, the Hebrew nation are supposed to 
have amounted to at least two millions of people. Moses, their lea- 
der, was eighty years old, but his step was steady; and, though of 
meek and humble manners, he was a man of great wisdom and firm 
ness of character. 


11. Did he change his mind? What did he do ? Which way was the Red Sea from 
Egypt? 12. What miracle did God perform? How did the Hebrews cross the Red 
Sea? 15. What became of Pharaoh and his army? Ch. XIV. — 1. Hotv long was it 
from the time Jacob settled in Egypt to the departure of the Israelites? What was the 
number of the Israelites at this time; How old was Moses? JVhat was his cliarac 


THE HEBREWS. 


2D 

2. The Hebrews intended to go directly from Egypt to the land of 
Canaan. Thi& latter country is now called Palestine. Before reach- 
ing it the children of Israel were to pass through a part of Arabia. 



Killing Quails in the Wilderness. 

3. In order that they might not go astray, a vast pillar of mist, or 
cloud, moved before them all day long; and at night the pillar of 
cloud was changed to a pillar of fire, which threw a radiance over the 
regions through which they journeyed. 

4. The country was desolate and barren, and often destitute of wa- 
ter, but the Lord fed the people with manna and with quails ; and 
when they were thirsty, Moses smote upon a rock, and the water 
gushed out abundantly. This was a great relief, for the climate 
there was exceedingly hot. Beside all this, the Hebrews received 
divine assistance against the Amalekites, and were enabled to conquer 
them in battle. 

5. But, in spite of these various mercies, the Israelites were an un- 
grateful and rebellious people. They often turned from the worship 
of the true God, and became idolaters. 

C. At the very time when the Lord was revealing himself to Moses 
on the summit of Mount Sinai, the people compelled Aaron to make 
a golden calf. They worshipped this poor image instead of Jehovah, 
who had brought them out of Egypt. 

7. On account of their numerous sins the Lord often inflicted severe 
punishments upon them. Many were slain by pestilence, and some 


2. In which direclion is Canaan from Egypt? What country lies between Canaan ana 
Egypt? In what country did the Hebrews wander? 3. How were the Hebrews guided? 
4. What sort of country did they travel through ? How were they fed ? When they could 
find no spring or river, how were they supplied with water ? Why was this supply of wa- 
ter necessary ? What other divine assistance was rendered to the Hebrews . 5. Were 

the Hebrews grateful for ail the mercies bestowed upon them? 6. What did they do when 
Moses was on Mount Sinai ? Were not the Hebrews very foolish and wicked to worship 
the image ot a calf rather than to worship God? When children disobey their parents 
and seek their own pleasure, rather than do their duty, are they not like the Hebrews in 
this instance 7 What evil resulted from the disobedience of the Hebrews: Do you not 

3 * 


30 


SCHOOL HISTORY, 


were swallowed up in the earth. The remainder were compelled :« 
wander forty years in the deserts of Arabia, though the whole dis- 
tance in a direct line from Egypt to Canaan was but two hundred and 
fifty miles. 

8. Before they came to the land of Canaan, most of those who had 
fled out of Egypt were dead. Their children inherited the promised 
land, but they themselves were buried in the sands of the desert. 
Even Moses was permitted merely to gaze at the land of Canaan 
from the top of Mount Pisgah. Here he died, at the age of one hun- 
dred and twenty years. 

9. After the death of Moses, Joshua, the son of Nun, became lea- 
der of the Israelites. Under his guidance they entered the promised 
land, and subdued the people who inhabited it. The territory of 
Canaan was then divided among the twelve tribes of Israel. 


CHAPTER XV.— ASIA CONTINUED. 

Overthrow of the Midianites. Samson , Judge of Israel. 

1. After their settlement in Canaan the Israelites lived under the 
authority of judges. These were their rulers in time of peace, ana 
their generals in war. Some of them were very remarkable person- 
ages, and did many things worthy of remembrance. 

2. The name of one of the judges was Gideon. While he ruled 
Israel, an army of Midianites invaded the country, and oppressed the 
people for seven years. But the Lord instructed Gideon how to res- 
cue the Israelites from their power. 

3. Gideon chose three hundred men, and caused each of them to 
take an earthen pitcher, and put a lamp within it. With this small 
band he entered the camp of the Midianites by night. There was 
an immense army of them, sleeping in their tents, without apprehend- 
ing any danger from the conquered Israelites. 

4. But their destruction was at hand. Gideon gave a signal, and all 
his three hundred men broke their pitchers, at the same time blow- 
ing a loud blast upon trumpets which they had brought. This terri- 
ble clamor startled the Midianites from their sleep. 

o. Amid the clangor of the trumpets they heard the Israelites 
shouting, “ The sword of the Lord and of Gideon.” A great panic 
seized upon the Midianites. They doubtless imagined that all the 
Hebrew army had broken into their camp. 

6. Each man mistook his neighbor for an enemy ; so that more c/ 


mow that evil always follows disobedience ? How long did the Hebrews wander ? What 
is the distance in a straight line from Egypt to Canaan ? 8. Did most of the Hebrews who 
'eft Egypt reach Canaan ? What of Moses? Where is Mount Pisgah ? 9. Who became 
leader after the death of Moses? How was the land of Canaan divided? Ch. XV. — 1. 
How were the Hebrews governed after their settlement in Canaan? What of the Judges r 
l What of Gideon. 3 . Tell how Gideon contrived to overcome the Midianites ? 




THE HEBREWS 


31 


Map of Palestine. 


MHBBI 

Jtong^ JE -from Greenwich 35 




Tyre 


IH ole mails ==|1[|§*« 


JM? Carmel 




a* '1 

s£ a 

VabersD-jff •*&»* 


fj XjXerom 

/ % ^ ) T 



^ 'A ^ 

\ &^MS ca,otTibe.rl 

<-...?', \ Wtf or Ralbltt 

Cam*' " g 

*^P\ GaiaiaJ 

\ f \ A>« / ~ X ~ 

\ V \ %lpX\j 

\ Ml ' 

J$****eC 

SycHLaa* AH G :, v.nizivh 


&d(Va.'l 

.s' JiJ>f ^AJjfr-A 

f I'm 
\ ;*? « 


^Allmathaa. 


I 1 JJ? V )• 

^ I y^ J ^ B etlmh afr a 

'' /■** ! lit* M v ^G--n 


V.// 


r -vn: $ Jcrlch0 

-A f .S'*) 

a-v \ / S^eiusadetu'' ' 

4 ^? 

iff 8^ 


i *? sg 

> As _ 



V 


Y ^ 
jr 


, ^ in 

■ Oc MA< 


fp 






ZIJJOZI 


V 


3 -P 


Reference. 

I. Asher. 

II- Naphtali. 

III. Zebulon. 

IV. Isachar > fftis side 

V. Manasseh. $ Jordan. 

V I. Ephraim. 

VII. Beniamin. 

VIII. Dan. 

IX. Simeon. 

X- Judah > beyond 
XI. Manasseh S Jordan. 
‘XII. Gad. 

XIII. Reuben. 


31 


HZ Homy, IS. from WasliirngboTh 


113 


What part of the land of Canaan was given to the tribe of Ashur ? To the tribe of Napthali ? 
Of .Zebulon? Issachar? Why are the names of Ephraim and Manasseh among the tribes? 
Ans. Because these were sons of Joseph, and their descendants formed two tribes. Where was 
the tribe of Manasseh placed * Ephraim? In what part was the tribe of Gad? Dan ? Benjamin f 
Reuben? Simeon? Judah? What portion was given to the tribe of Levi? Ans. The Levites, 
being priests, had towns assigned them among the other tribes. 


aamt-y a? 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


S2 

the Midianites were slain by their own swords, than by the swords of 
the men of Israel. Thus God wrought a great deliverance for his 
people. 

7. The most famous of all the judges of Israel was named Samson. 
He was the strongest man in the world; and it was a wonderful cir- 
cumstance, that his great strength depended upon the hair of his 
heud. 

8. While he continued to weat his hair long, and curling down 
his neck, he had more strength than a hundred men put together. 
But if his hair were to be cut off, he would be no stronger than any 
single man. 

9. In the days of Samson, the Philistines had conquered the Is- 
raelites. Samson disliked them on account of the injuries which 
they inflicted upon his countrymen. He made use of his great 
ftrength to do them all the harm in his power. 


CHAPTER XVI.— ASIA CONTINUED. 


Samson's Exploits and Death. 



1. On one occasion Samson slew a thousand of the Philistines, 
although he had no better weapon than the jaw-bone of an ass. Ax 
another time, when they had shut him up in the city of Gaza, he took 
the gates o! the city upon his shoulders, and carried them to the top 
of a distant hill. 


7- What of Samson ? In what did his strength lie ? 9. What of the Philistines : Whv 
em? Oh. XYI. — 1. With what 


did Samson dislike them. — _ . .. 

Philistines ? What of the gates of Gaza ? 


i what weapon did Samson kill a thousand 


THE HEBREWS. 


33 

2 . But, though Samson hated the Philistines, and was always 
doing them mischief, there was a woman among them whom lie 
loved. Her name was Delilah. She pretended to love Samson in 
return ; but her only object was to ruin him. 

3. This woman used many persuasions to induce Samson to tell 
her what it was that made him so much stronger than ^ther men. 
At first Samson deceived her. He said, that if he were bound with 
seven green withs, his strength would depart ; or that, if he were 
tied with new ropes, he should be as weak as an ordinary man. 

4. So Delilah bound him first with seven green withs, and after- 
wards with new ropes. But Samson snapped the withs like burnt 
tow, and the ropes like thread. At length, however, Delilah pre- 
vailed upon him to tell her the real cause of his great strength. 

5. When she had found out the secret, she cut off the hair of his 
head while he was sleeping, and then delivered him to her country- 
men, the Philistines. These put out his eyes, and bound him with 
fetters of brass, and he was forced to labor like a brute beast in the 
prison. 

6. Samson was able to work very hard ; for pretty soon his hair 
began to grow, and so his wonderful vigor returned. Thus he became 
the strongest man in the world again. 

7. One day the Philistines were offering a great sacrifice to their 
idol, whose name was Dagon. They feasted, and their hearts were 
merry. When their mirth was at its height, they sent for poor blind 
Samson, that he might amuse them by showing specimens of his 
W T onderful strength. 

8. Samson was accordingly brought from prison and led into 
Dagon ’s temple. His brazen fetters clanked at every step. He was 
a woful object with his blinded eyes. But his hair had grown again, 
and was curling upon his brawny shoulders. 

9. When Samson had done many wonderful feats of strength, he 
asked leave to rest himself against the two main pillars of the tem- 
ple. The floor and galleries were all crowded with Philistines. 
They gazed upon this man of mighty strength, und they triumphed 
and rejoiced, because they imagined he could do tnem no more harm. 

10. But while they gazed, the strong man threw his arms round 
the two pillars of the temple. The edifice trembled as with an 
earthquake. Then Samson bowed himself with all his might, and 
down came the temple with a crash like thunder, overwhelming the 
whole multitude of the Philistines in its ruins. 

1 1 . Samson was likewise crushed, but in his death it appears that 
he triumphed over his enemies, and lay buried beneath the dead 
bodies of lords and mighty men. 


‘2. What of Delilah? 3. How did Samson deceive her? 5. How did Delilah deprive 
Samson of his strength ? What did the Philistines do to Samson ? 6. What happened 
rhen Samson’s hair grew again? 7. Tell how Samson destroyed the Philistine temple 


C 


34 


SCHOOL HISTORY 


CHAPTER XVII.— ASIA CONTINUED. 

Beginning of the Reign of Saul. 

1. Many other judges ruled over Israel, in the space of about foui 
hundred years from the time that Moses led the Hebrews out of 
Egypt, But at length they became dissatisfied with this mode of 
government, and demanded that a king should be placed over them. 

2. Samuel was then the judge of Israel. He was an old man, and 
a wise one; and, besides the wisdom that he had collected in the 
course of a long life, he possessed wisdom from on high. 

3. When the people demanded a king, Samuel endeavored to con- 
vince them, that they were much better off without one. He de- 
scribed the tyrannical acts which kings have always been in the habit 
of committing, whenever they have had the power to do so. 

4. But the Israelites would not hearken to this wise and good old 
man. They still wished for a king. They imagined that none but 
a king would govern them well in time of peace, or fight success- 
fully against their enemies in war. 

5. Samuel therefore consulted the Lord, and was directed to find 
out a king for the Israelites. The person who was fixed upon was 
a young man named Saul, the son of Kish. He possessed great 
beauty, and was a head taller than any other man among the Israel- 
ites. Samuel anointed his head with oil, and gave him to the 
Israelites as their king. 

6. For a considerable time king Saul behaved like a wise and 
righteous monarch. But at length he began to disobey the Lord, and 
seldom took the advice of Samuel, although that good old priest 
would have been willing to direct him in every action of his life. 

7. In the course of Saul’s reign, the Israelites were often at war 
with the neighboring nations. At one time, when the Philistines 
had invaded the country, there was a great giant in their host, whose 
name was Goliath, of Gath. 

8. He was at least ten or twelve feet high, and was clothed from 
head to foot in brazen armor. He carried an enormous spear, the 
iron head of which weighed as many as thirty pounds. 

9. Every day did this frightful giant stride forth from the camp ot 
the Philistines, and defy the Israelites to produce a champion who 
would stand against him in single combat. But, instead of doing 
this, the whole host of Israel stood aloof from him, as a flock of 
sheep from a lion. 


Ch. XVII.— 1. For how long a time were the Hebrews governed by judges ? 2. Whai 
ot Samuel ? 3. What did he do when the people demanded a king i 4. What did the 
Israelites think 6. What of Saul ? 6. What did Saul do ? 7. What of Goliath ? 


THE HEBREWS. 


35 


r\ 

CHAPTER XVIII. — ASIA CONTINUED. 

Combat of David and Goliath. 

1. At last a young shepherd, by the name of David, happened to 
come to the camp of the Israelites, and heard the terrible voice of 
Goliath as he thundered forth his challenge. 

2. Young as he was, David had already slain a lion and a hear ; 
and, with the help of the Lord, he thought himself able to slay this 
gigantic Philistine. He therefore obtained leave of king Saul to 
accept the challenge. 

3. But, instead of wearing the king’s armor, which Saul would 
willingly have lent him, David went to the battle in his shepherd’s 
garb. He did not even buckle on a sword. 

4. When the two combatants came into the field, there was the 
youthful David on the side of the Israelites, with a staff in one hand, 
and a sling in the other, carrying five smooth stones in a shepherd’s 
scrip or pouch. 

5. On the side of the Philistines, forth strode the mighty Goliath. 
He glistened in his brazen armor, and brandished his great iron- 
headed spear till it quivered liko a reed. When the giant spoke, his 
voice growled almost like thunaer rolling overhead. 

6. He looked scornfully at David, and hardly thought it worth his 
while to lift up his spear against him. “ Come hither,” quoth the 
giant, “ and I will feed the fowls with your flesh !” 

7. But little David was not at all abashed. He made a bold an- 
swer, and told Goliath that he would cut off his head, and give his 
enormous carcass to the beasts of the field. This threat so enraged 
the giant, that he put himself in motion to slay David. 

8. The young man ran forward to meet Goliath, and, as he ran, he 
took a smooth stone from his scrip, and placed it in his sling. When 
at a proper distance, he whirled the sling, and let drive the stone. It 
went whizzing through the air, and hit Goliath right in the centre of 
the forehead. 

9. The stone penetrated to the brain ; and down the giant fell at 
full length upon the field, with his brazen armor clanging around 
him. David then cut off Goliath’s head with his own sword. The 
Philistines were affrighted at their champion’s overthrow, and fled. 

1.0. The men of Israel pursued them, and made a prodigious slaugh- 
ter. David returned from the battle carrying the grim and grisly 
head of Goliath by the hair. The Hebrew women came forth to 
meet him, danced around him, and sung triumphant anthems in his 
praise. 


Ch. XVIII. — 1. Who was David ? What did he do? 2. What had David done ? What 
did he think ? 3. Tell the story of David and Goliath. 9. What effect had the death oi 
Goliath upon the Philistines ? 10. What honors were paid to David ? 


36 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


CHAPTER XIX.— ASIA CONTINUED. 

The Reign of David. Wisdom of Solomon. 


1. David had won so much renown by his victory over Goliath, 
that Saul becattie envious of him, and often endeavored to kill him. 
But Jonathan, the son of Saul, loved David better than a brother. 

2. During the lifetime of Saul, David was forced to live in exile. 
But, after a reign of about twenty-four years, king Saul was slain on 
the mountains of Gilboa, in a disastrous battle with the Philistines. 
Jonathan was likewise killed. 

3. When David heard of these sad events, he expressed his sorrow 
by weeping, and rending his garments. Yet he gained a kingdom by 
the death of Saul and Jonathan; for the men of Judah first elected 
him to reign over them, and afterwards the whole people of Israel 
chose him for their king. 

4. A great part of David’s life was spent in war. He gained many 
victories, and enjoyed hig. A lenown as a gallant leader. He conquer- 
ed many of the surrounding nations, and raised his kingdom to a 
higher pitch of power than it ever enjoyed before or afterwards. But 
he also won a peaceful kind of fame, which will last while the world 
endures, and be remembered through eternity. 

5. He won it by his heavenly poesy ; for king David was the sweet 
Psalmist of Israel ; and in all the ages since he lived, his psalms have 
been sung to the praise of the Lord. It is now about three thousand 
years since David died ; yet to this hour every pious heart loves to 
commune with God in the beautiful words of this inspired man. 

6. In the latter part of his life, David was much grieved by the re- 
bellious conduct of his son Absalom. But it grieved him more when 
Absalom was slain by Joab, who found him hanging by his long hair 
on the branches of an oak, and pierced his body with three darts. 

7. When David had reigned forty years, and was grown a very old 
man, he died in his palace at Jerusalem. The kingdom was inherited 
by his son Solomon. This prince was very young when he ascended 
the throne, but he was wiser in his youth than in his riper years. 

8. Not long after he became king, two women came into his pres- 
ence bringing a little child. Each of the women claimed the child 
as her own, and they quarrelled violently, as if they would have torn 
the poor babe asunder. It seemed impossible to find out whose the 
child really was. 

9. “ Bring hither a sword,” said king Solomon ; and immediately 


Ch. XIX. — 1. Why was Saul envious of David? What did Saul do? What of Jona 
than ? 2. How was David obliged to live ? What of Saul ? Jonathan ? 3. What ef 
feet had these events upon David ? Who .became king of Israel after the death of Saul ? 
4. How was a great part of David’s life spent ? To what condition did he bring the He 
brew nation ? What better fame did he acquire than that of a conqueror ? 5. Who was 
the author of the Psalms ? What can you say of the Psalms ? How long since David liv- 
ed? 6, What of Absalom? 7. How long did David reign? Who succeeded him ? What 
of Solomon ? 8. Tell the story of the child. 


THE HEBREWS. 


37 


one of the attendants brought a sharp sword. “ Now,” continued 
Solomon, “ that I may not wrong either of these women, the thing in 
dispute shall be equally divided between them. Cut the child in 
.wain, and let each take half.” 

10. But when the real mother saw the keen sword glittering over 
her poor babe, she gave a scream of agony. “ Do not slay the child !” 
she cried. “ Give it to this wicked woman. Only let it live, and 
she may be its mother !” 

11. But the other woman showed no pity for the child. “ I ask no 
more than my just rights,” she said. “ Cut the child in two ! I will 
be content with half.” Now Solomon had watched the conduct of the 
two women, and he knew the true mother by her tenderness for the 
poor babe. “ Give the child alive to her who would not have it 
slain,” he said. “ She is its mother.” 


CHAPTER XX.— ASIA CONTINUED. 

The Building of the Temple. Visit of the Queen of 

Sheba. 

1. ' Kino David, as I before told you, had increased the power ana 
wealth of the Hebrew nation, so that it was now a great kingdom. 
Silver and gold were very abundant in the country, and king David 
had made preparation for the building of a splendid temple, to be ded- 
icated to the worship of the true God. 

2 . The chief event of Solomon’s life was the building of this tem- 
ple. This was done by the special command of the Lord. It was now 
four hundred and eighty years since the Israelites had come out of 
Egypt ; and in all that time there had been no edifice erected to the 
worship of God. 

3. Solomon made an agreement with Hiram, King of Tyre, that he 
would give him a yearly supply of wheat and oil, in exchange for ce- 
dar and fir. Tyre was a great commercial city on the coast of the 
Mediterranean Sea, to the northward of Jerusalem. It belonged to 
Phoenicia, a country which has the credit of having first engaged in 
commerce. 

4. With the timber which he procured from Tyre, and with a 
large quantity of hewn stone, Solomon began to build the temple. 
The front of this building was one hundred and twenty feet long, 
thirty-five feet broad, and forty-five feet high, with a porch or entrance 


Ch. XX. — 1. What had David done ? What of silver and gold among the Hebrews ? 
2. What was the chief event of Solomon’s reign ? By whose command was the temple 
built? 3. What agreement did Solomon make with Hiram, king of Tyre? What of 
Phoenicia? In what part of Canaan was Jerusalem? How far from the Mediterranean 
Sea? Ans. About forty-five miles. Where was Tyre? In which direction from Jeru- 
salem? What of Tyre? In which direction is Jerusalem from Babylon ? From Egypt? 
4 . With what did Solomon begin to build the temple ? Where was the temple of Sol- 
omon built? Ans. On a hill in Jerusalem called Mount Moriah. Describe the extent 

4 


38 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


of much greater height. It extended around a large square, and, with 
ihe various buildings attached to it, covered twenty acres of ground. 

5. But no pen can describe the richness and admirable splendor of 
this sacred edifice. The interior was constructed of the most costly 
kinds of wood ; and the walls were carved with figures of cherubim, 
and other beautiful devices. The walls and floors were partly over- 
laid with gold. 

6. The temple was furnished with altars, and tables, and candle- 
sticks, and innumerable other articles, all of the purest gold. The 
whole edifice must have shone almost as if it had been built entirely 
of that precious metal. 

7. Seven years were employed in building this temple. It was 
just about three thousand years from the creation that it was finished, 
and one thousand years before the birth of Christ. When it was 
finished, Solomon assembled all the chiefs, and elders, and great men 
of Israel, in order to dedicate it. The priests brought the ark, con- 
taining the two tables of stone which God had given to Moses more 
than four centuries before. 

8. The ark was now placed in the holiest part of the temple. It 
rested beneath the broad wings of two cherubim that were overlaid 
with gold. No sooner was the ark set in its place than a cloud issued 
forth and filled the temple. This was a token that the Lord was there. 

9. After the building of the temple, Solomon became so renowned 
for his wisdom and magnificence, that the queen of Sheba came from 
her own dominions to visit him. Her country is supposed to have 
been in Africa, to the southward of Egypt. 

10. She travelled with a great multitude of attendants; and she 
had likewise a train of camels, laden with gold and precious stones, 
and abundance of spices. The sweet perfume of the spices scented 
the deserts through which she passed. 

11. When she came to Jerusalem, she beheld Solomon seated on 
a great throne of ivory overlaid with pure gold. His feet rested on a 
golden footstool. There were lions of gold about the throne. The 
king had a majestic look, and the queen of Sheba was astonished at 
his grandeur ; but, when they had talked together, she admired his 
wisdom even more than his magnificence. She acknowledged that 
the half of his greatness had not been told her. 

12. If the queen of Sheba could have seen Solomon a few years 
afterwards, she would have beheld a lamentable change. He turned 
from the true God, and became an idolator. This wise and righteous 
king, who had built the sacred temple, now grew so wicked that he 
built high places for the worship of heathen deities. 

13. For this reason God determined to take away the chief part ot 
the kingdom from his descendants. Accordingly, when Solomon was 
dead, ten of the tribes of Israel revolted against his son Rehoboam 

of the temple. 6. Describe the interior of the temple. 6. With what was the templa 
furnished ? 7. How long were they in building the temple ? How long after the crea- 
tion was the temple finished? How long before Christ? How long ago? Describe th® 
Dedication of the temple. 9. What of the Queen of Sheba ? Where is it supposed sh® 
came from ? 10. Describe her visit to Solomon. 12. What change took place in Solo- 
mon 13. What evil followed the idolatry sf Solomon ? 


THE HEBREWS. 


39 


CHAPTER XXL— ASIA CONTINUED. 

The Decline of the J eivish Nation. 

] . In consequence of the revolt of the ten tribes, Rehoboam reigned 
only over the two tribes of Judah and Benjamin, these being called 
» the kingdom of Judah. Beside the loss of so large a part of his 
kingdom, he suffered other misfortunes. Shishak, king of Egypt, > 
made war against him, and took Jerusalem. He carried away the 
treasures of the temple and of the palace. 

2. The other ten tribes of Israel, which had revolted from Reho- 
boam, were thenceforward governed by kings of their own, the coun- 
try being called the kingdom of Israel. Most of these kings were 
wicked men, and idolators. Their palace and seat of government 
was in the city of Samaria. 

3. When the kingdom of Israel had been separated from that of 
Judah about two hundred and fifty years, it was conquered by Sal- 
maneser, king of Assyria. He made slaves of the Israelites, and 
carried them to his own country, and most of them never returned to 
the land of Canaan. 

4. The people of the two tribes of Judah and Benjamin continued 
to reside in Canaan. They were now called Jews. The royal palace 
and seat of government was at Jerusalem. Some of the Jewish 
kings were pious men, but most of them offended God by their sin- 
fulness and idolatry. 

o. The whole nation of the Jews were perverse, and underwent 
many severe inflictions from the wrath of God. In the year 606 
B. C., Nebuchadnezzar, king of Babylon, took Jerusalem. He de- 
stroyed the temple, and carried the principal people captive to 
Babylon. 

6. Afterwards, when Zedekiah was king, Jerusalem was again be- 
sieged and taken by Nebuzaradan, a general under Nebuchadnezzar. 
He broke down the walls of the city, and left nothing standing that 
could be destroyed. The Jews remained captive in Babylon seventy 
years. 

7. When Babylon was taken by Cyrus, king of Persia, the Jews 
were permitted to return to their own country. They rebuilt the 
temple, and resumed their ancient manner of worship. Till the time 
of Alexander the Great, about 330 B. C., the nation was dependent 
on the kings of Persia. 


Ch. XXI. — 1. Who was Rehoboam ? Into what two kingdoms was the Hebrew nation 
divided during his reign ? What name was given to the two tribes? What of Shishak? 
2. What name was given to the ten tribes which revolted? How was the kingdom of Is- 
rael governed ? In which part of Canaan were the ten tribes ? In which part was the 
kingdom of Judah? What of the kings of Israel ? Where did these kings dwell? 
Where was Samaria? How far from Jerusalem? Ans. Forty miles. 3. What of Sal- 
maneser? 4. What were the people of Judah now called? Where was the seat of 
government? What of the kings of Judah ? 5. What of the Jewish nation ? What of 
Nebuchadnezzar? 6. What of Nebuzaradan ? How long did the Jews remain captive 
in Babylon? 7. What of Cyrus? What did the Jews do on their return from ptivity? 
How 'oog was the nation dependent upon Persia? 


40 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


8. It is said, that Alexander the Great intended to take Jerusalem* 
But, as he advanced with his army, the high priest came forth to 
meet him, in his robes of office, at the head of a long train of Levites 
and people. Alexander was so struck with their appearance, that 
ne agreed to spare the city. 

9. In the course of the two next centuries the Egyptians invaded 
the Jewish kingdom, and afterwards the Syrians reduced the inhabit- 
ants to bondage. They suffered great calamities from the tyranny 
of these conquerors. 

10. But, in the year 166 before the Christian era, Judas Macca- 
bseus, a valiant Jewish leader, drove the Syrians out of the country. 
When the king of Syria heard of it, he took an oath, that he would 
destroy the whole Jewish nation. But, as he was hastening to. Je- 
rusalem, he was killed by a fall from his chariot. 

11. The descendants of Judas Maccabaeus afterwards assumed royal 
authority, and became kings of the Jews. In less than a century, 
however, the country was subdued by Pompey, a celebrated Roman 
general. He conferred the government on Antipater, a native of 
Edom. 

12. In the year 37 before the Christian era, the Roman senate de- 
creed that Herod, the son of Antipater, should be king of the Jews. 
It was this Herod who commanded that all the young children of 
Bethlehem should be slain, in order that the infant Jesus might not 
survive. The period of that blessed infant’s birth was now at hand. 


CHAPTER XXII.— ASIA CONTINUED. 

The Hebrew Prophets. 

1. I must now glance backward, and say a few words lespecting 
a class of men who had appeared at various times among the He- 
brews. These men were called prophets. They held intercourse 
with God, and he gave them the knowledge of things that were to 
happen in future years. 

2. One of the most remarkable of the prophets was named Elijah 
Many wonderful things are told of him. While he was dwelling in 
a solitary place, the ravens brought him food. He restored the son 
of a poor widow from death to life. 

3. He denounced God’s vengeance against the wicked king Ahab, 
and foretold that the dogs should eat the painted Jezebel, his queen. 
And all this was so. He caused fire to come down from heaven, and 
consume two captains, with their soldiers. He divided the river 
Jordan by smiting it with his mantle, and passed over on dry ground. 

8. What of Alexander the Great? 9. What happened after the time of Alexander' 
10. What of Judas Maccabaeus ? What of the king of Syria? In which direction was 
Syria from Canaan ? 11. What of the descendants of Judas Maccabteus ? What of Pom 

S ey ? Whom did he appoint to govern Judah ? 12. When did the Roman senate appoint 

lerod king of the Jews? What of Herod ? Ch. XXII.— 1. What of the prophet* 
I. What is told of Elijah ? 


THE HEBREWS. 


41 


4. At last, when his mission on earth was ended, there came a 
ehariot of fire, and horses of fire, and carried Elijah by a whirlwind 
ap to heaven. 

5. Elijah’s mantle fell from the fiery chariot. It was caught up 
by a person named Elisha, and he likewise became a very celebrated 
prophet. He cursed some little children because they laughed at his 
bald head ; and soon afterwards two she-bears tore forty and two of 
them in pieces. 

6. When Elisha was dead, and had lain many months in his sepul- 
chre, another dead man happened to be let down into the same dark- 
some place. But, when the corpse touched the hallowed bones of 
the prophet Elisha it immediately revived, and became a living man 
again. 

7. Jonah was another prophet. A whale swallowed him, and kept 
him three days in the depths of ocean, and then vomited him safely 
on dry land. Isaiah was also a prophet. He foretold many terrible 
calamities that were to befall Israel and Judah, and the surrounding 
nations. Jeremiah bewailed in plaintive accents the sins and misfor- 
tunes of God’s people. 

8. The prophet Daniel foretold the downfall of Belshazzar, king of 
Babylon. He was afterwards cast into a den of lions in Babylon, at 
the command of king Darius. The next morning the king looked 
down into the den, and there was Daniel, alive and well ! 

9. King Darius then ordered Daniel to be drawn out of the den, 
and his false accusers to be thrown into it. The moment that these 
wicked persons touch’ed the bottom, the lions sprang forward and 
tore them limb from limb. 

10. Many other prophets appeared at various times, and most of 
them performed such wonderful works that there could be no doubt 
of their possessing power from on high. Now it was remarked- that 
all these prophets, or nearly all, spoke of a King, or Ruler, or other 
illustrious Personage, who was to appear among the Jews. 

11. Although they foretold the most dreadful calamities to the 
people, still there was this one thing to comfort them. A descendant 
of king David was to renew the glory of the Jewish race, and estab- 
lish his sway over the whole world. 

12. This great event was expected to happen in about fifteen hun- 
dred years after Moses led the Israelites out of Egypt. And it did 
then happen. When the appointed period had elapsed, there ap- 
peared a star in a certain quarter of the heavens. 

13. Three wise men from the east beheld the star, and were guid- 
ed by it to a stable in the little village of Bethlehem. It was about 
five miles from Jerusalem. There, in a manger, lay the infant Jesus , 


6. What of Elisha ? 7. What of Jonah ? Isaiah? Jeremiah? 8. What of Daniel ? 
10. What can you sav of the prophets? Of what did the prophets all speak? 11. What 
cheering prospect did the prophets hold out to the Jews ? 12. About how long after Mosei 

did Christ appear? What of a star in the east? 13. What of Bethlehem? Whom did 
the wise men find in a stable ? 


4 * 


42 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


CHAPTER XXIII.— ASIA CONTINUED. 

Crucifixion of the Saviour. Destruction of Jerusalem. 



1. The greatest event, not only in the history of the Jews, but in 
the history of the world, had now taken place. This was the coming 
of the Saviour. But my readers must not expect me to relate the 
whole story of this divine Personage in the little book which I am 
Dow writing. 

2. The Jews rejected him. They had been looking for an earthly 
potentate; and, when they beheld the meek and lowly Jesus, they 
despised and hated him. From the time that he proclaimed himself 
the Messiah, they sought to take his life. 

3. They brought him before the judgment-seat of Pontius Pilate, 
who was then the Roman governor of Judea. Pilate sentenced him 
to death, and the Saviour of the world was crucified between two 
thieves. He however rose from the dead, after being buried three 
days, and ascended into heaven ! 

4. Such is the brief story of Jesus Christ. After his death, his 
apostles proceeded to preach his Gospel throughout the land of Ca- 
naan and other countries. Of all the apostles, Paul was the most 
active and successful. 

5. He visited various parts of Palestine, Syria, Asia Minor, and 
Greece. At length he was sent as a prisoner to Rome, to be tried by.- 
the emperor. He went with other prisoners in a small vessel nearly 
the whole length of the Mediterranean Sea. 


Ch. XXIII. — 1. What is the greatest even! that has has occurred on the globe : How 
long since Christ was born ? How long after the creation did Christ appear ? Ans. Four 
thousand and four years. How long after the flood ? 2. How did the Jews receive 
Christ t 3. What of Pilate ? The crucifixion ? 4. What did Christ’s Apostles do after 
his death ? What of Paul ? 5. What countries did Paul visit ? Where was he at length 
•eutf 


THE HEBREWS. 


43 


6. In the course of the voyage, the vessel was wrecked upon the 
island of Malta, during a terrible gale. After this the vessel proceed- 
ed on its voyage, and Paul reached Rome, sixty-one years after Christ. 
Here he remained in prison a long time; but many persons came to 
visit him, and he preached to them all the doctrines of Christianity. 
Paul was at length released, but it is believed that he was beheaded 
by order of the emperor Nero. 

7. The apostle had now sown the seeds of the Gospel in many 
countries, and the fruits began to appear. Nearly all the civilized 
world were worshippers of the Roman gods ; but this heathen faith 
gradually gave way before the Gospel, and, in process of time, Chris- 
tianity was diffused over nearly the whole of Europe. 

8. Long before the crucifixion of Christ, the Jews had become 
completely subject to the Roman power. But, about forty years after 
his death, they rebelled against their masters. 

9. Titus, the Roman general, immediately marched to besiege Je- 
rusalem. A most dreadful war ensued. The inhabitants were shut 
up in the city, and soon were greatly iii want of food. Hunger im- 
pelled one of the Jewish women to devour her own child. When 
Titus heard of it, he was so shocked that he vowed the destruction 
of the whole Jewish race, and more than a hundred thousand per- 
sons perished during this frightful siege ! 

10. At length the city was taken in the night-time, and set on fire. 
The flames caught the temple. The hills on which Jerusalem is sit- 
uated were all blazing like so many volcanoes. The blood of the 
slaughtered inhabitants hissed upon the burning brands. 

11. Ninety-seven thousand Jews were taken prisoners. Some were 
sold as slaves. The conquerors exposed others to be torn in pieces 
by wild beasts. A few people remained in Jerusalem, and partly re- 
built the city. But it was again destroyed by a Roman emperor 
named Adrian. He levelled the walls and houses with the earth, 
and sowed the ground with salt. 

12. The Jews were scattered all over the world. This catastrophe 
had long been prophesied. There are now between three and four 
millions of them in different parts of the earth. They still keep their 
religion, and many of their old customs. Jerusalem has been par- 
tially restored, but it is now very different from what it was in the 
time of our Saviour. 


6. Where was Paul’s vessel wrecked? When did he arrive at Rome? To whom did 
be preach Christianity ? What is supposed to have been his fate ? 7. What had the apos- 
tles done? What of the worship of heathen deities? What of Christianity? S. To 
whom had the Jews been long subject? What occurred forty years after the death of 
Christ? 9. What of Titus? Describe the siege of Jerusalem. 11. What of Adrian ? 
13 . What became of the Jews ? What event had been foretold by the prophets? What 
©f Jerusalem? 


44 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


CHAPTER XXIV.— ASIA CONTINUED. 

Cyrus conquers Babylon. His death . 

1. In a former part of this book I have told the story of Assyria, 
the first great empire of ancient times. It was situated, as you re- 
member, on the borders of the rivers Tigris and Euphrates. In this 
region the climate is warm, and the soil exceedingly fruitful 
Here the human race seemed to multiply in the most wonderful 
manner. 

2. Thus many nations soon sprung up and increased, till the whole 
surrounding country was filled with multitudes of people. Assyria, 
at one time, extended its dominion over most of these nations ; but 
at length Persia became a powerful monarchy, and not only Assyria, 
but a great many other nations, became subject to it. 

3. The first inhabitants of Persia were descended from Elam, the 
eldest son of Shem. They were therefore called Elamites. Very 
little is known of their history till about eighteen centuries after the 
deluge. Cyrus, a great conqueror, then ascended the throne of Per- 
sia. Some historians have spoken of Cyrus as a wise and excellent 
monarch, but it appears probable that he was no better than most 
other conquerors. 

4. Cyrus continued to extend his empire in all directions. Media, 
Parthia, Mesopotamia, Armenia, Syria, Canaan, and parts of Arabia, 
were subdued, and made portions of his kingdom. One of his chief 
exploits was the taking of the city of Babylon, the capital of Assyria. 
The walls of this great city were so thick and high, that it would 
have been impossible for an enemy either to break them down, or to 
climb over them. It was therefore a very difficult matter to take 
this strong place. 

5. Now the channel of the river Euphrates ran directly through 
the centre of Babylon. Cyrus caused deep ditches to be dug around 
the city, so that he could draw off all the water of the river, and 
leave the channel dry. When the ditches were completed, he waited 
for a proper time to draw off the river. 

6. On a certain night, Belshazzar, king of Babylon, made a great 
festival. His guards, and nearly all the inhabitants, were eating and 
drinking, thoughtless of the enemy on the outside of their walls. 
The Persians seized this opportunity to throw open the dams of the 
ditches. 

7. The whole water of the Euphrates immediately flowed into 


Ch. XXIV. — 1. What was the first great empire ? Where was Assyria situated? Cli- 
mate of this region ? Soil ? The human race ? 2. Increase of mankind ? What of As- 
syria? Persia? Which way was Persia from Canaan ? Arabia? Caspian Sea ? What 
gulf lies south of Persia ? 3. What of the first inhabitants of Persia ? At what time did 
Cyrus ascend the throne of Persia ? What of Persia before the time of Cyrus ? Charac- 
ter of Cyrus ? 4. What were some of the countries conquered by Cyrus ? In which direc- 
tion from Persia was Media? Parthia? Mesopotamia? Armenia? Syria? Canaan * 
Arabia ? Describe the taking of Babylon. 


THE HEBREWS. 


45 


them. Cyrus put himself at the head of the Persian armv; and 
where the mighty river had so lately rushed along, there were now 
the trampling footsteps of an innumerable host. Thus the Persian 
troops entered the city. 

8. The guards of the royal palace were surprised and slain. Bel- 
shazzar heard the clash of arms, and the shrieks of dying men, as he 
sat with his pobles in the banquet-hall. But it was too late to escape. 
They were all slaughtered, and their blood was mingled with the 
wine of the festival. Thus Babylon was taken, and Assyria became 
a part of Persia. 

9. Cyrus afterwards marched against the Scythians, a brave nation 
who dwelt to the north-east of the Caspian Sea. But Tomyris, their 
queen, collected an army, and fought a bloody battle with the Per- 
sians. Cyrus was defeated, and taken prisoner. The son of the 
Scythian queen had been killed in the battle, and she resolved to 
avenge his death. She ordered her attendants to kill Cyrus, which 
was done in a horrible manner. 


CHAPTER XXV— ASIA CONTINUED. 

Reign of Cambyses. 

1. Cambyses, the son of Cyrus, seems to have been a worse man 
than his father. He was addicted to drinking wine ; and Prexaspes, 
a favorite courtier, hinted to him that he injured his health and 
faculties by this practice. When Prexaspes had done speaking, 
Cambyses called for wine, and drank off several large goblets. “ Now 
we shall see,” said he, “ whether the wine has dimmed my sight, or 
rendered my hand unsteady !” 

2. He then called for a bow and arrow, and ordered the son of 
Prexaspes to stand at the farther end of the hall. The boy did so ; 
and while his father looked on, the cruel Cambyses took aim at the 
poor child, and shot an arrow directly through his heart. 

3. I am very sorry, my dear young reader, to tell you such horrible 
stories as these. I would not tell them but that they are true, and 
they may teach us good and useful lessons. They may show us how 
wicked and miserable even kings may be. 

4. They may also make us rejoice that we live in an age when 
such things do not happen. You must recollect that I am telling 
you of what took place many ages since. The people were then 
thought to be merely the playthings of their kings, and only made 
to serve them. Since that time, Christ has come and told us that it 


S. What event terminated the Assyrian empire? 9. Where did the Scythians live 
Their Character ? What of Cyrus ? Ch. XXV. — 1. What of Cambyses ? What story 
can you tell of him ? 3 What lessons may we learn from these painful tales of ancient 
kings ? 4. What was thought of the people in these ancient times ? What has Christ since 
told us * 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


46 

is the will of God that each man should do to another as he would 
oe done by. 

5. It is true that in many countries, particularly in Asia, the divine 
laws of Christ are not known ; but in most places the kings are 
Detter than they were in the time of Cambyses. In our happy coun- 
try we have no kings, and therefore the stories I am telling you about 
the cruelties of the ancient monarchs of Asia appear very shocking. 

6. But I must go on with my story. Cambyses made war against 
the Egyptians. At the siege of one of their cities, he contrived a 
very cunning method to take the place. The Egyptians believed 
that cats and dogs were sacred, and they worshipped them as gods. 
This foolish superstition induced Cambyses to collect all the cats and 
dogs in the country, and place them in front of his army. 

7. The Egyptians were afraid to discharge their arrows, lest they 
should kill some of these divine animals. The Persians therefore 
marched onward, with the dogs barking and the cats mewing before 
them, and the city was taken without the slightest resistance. 

8. The chief deity of the Egyptians was a great bull, to whom 
they had given the name of Apis. Cambyses killed this holy bull, 
and bestowed the flesh on some of his soldiers for dinner. Soon 
afterwards, to the great joy of the Egyptians, he killed himself acci- 
dentally with his own sword. 


CHAPTER XXVI.— ASIA CONTINUED. 

Expedition of Xerxes into Greece. 

1. Another king of the Persians was named Darius. He was 
likewise a cruel tyrant. When he was going on an expedition 
against the Scythians, he compelled an old man’s three sons to join 
his army. These were all the children the old man had. He came 
into the king’s presence, and earnestly entreated that one of his sons 
might be left at home. 

2. “ I am very poor and infirm,” said the old man. “ I am unable 
to work. If you take away all my three children, I shall starve to 
death.” “Indeed,” answered king Darius in a very compassionate 
tone, “ then they shall all three remain with you !” Immediately 
he ordered the three young men to be slain, and gave their dead 
bodies to their poor old father. 

3. While Darius was preparing to make war on Greece he fell 
sick and died. His successor was his son Xerxes. This monarch 
invaded Greece with nearly two millions of men on land, and more 
than half a million on board his fleet. 

5. Where are the laws of Christ not known? What of kings now ? 6. How dia Cam- 
byses capture an Egyptian city ? 8. What of the Egyptian god Apis ? How was Cambyses 
slain ? Ch. XXVI. — 1. What of Darius ? Tell a story of his cruelty. 3. Who was the 
successor of Darius ? How large was the army of Xerxes when he invaded Greer e ? 
Where is Greece ? Ans. In Europe. How far from Persia ? Ans. About fifteen hundred 
miles. In which direction from Persia ? ins. North-west. 


PERSIA. 


47 


4. You may well believe, that a king, who could collect so large 
an army, had great wealth and power. At this time the Persian 
empire was of vast extent, but still Xerxes wished to conquer other 
nations. His capital was Persepolis, one of the most splendid cities 
that ever existed. 

5. Here Xerxes had magnificent palaces ; he had gold and silver 
in abundance, he had precious stones more than he could count ; he 
was indeed surrounded with pomp and magnificence ; but all these 
could not bring contentment. He was still desirous of conquering 
other nations; and for this purpose he collected the greatest army of 
which history gives us any account. 

6. When Xerxes arrived in Greece, it so happened that a great 
mountain, called Mount Athos, stood directly in the way that he 
wished his ships to sail. He therefore wrote a letter to the moun- 
tain, commanding it to get out of his way ; but Mount Athos would 
not stir one step. 

7. In order to bring his land-forces from Asia into Greece, Xerxes 
built a bridge of boats across a part of the sea called the Hellespont. 
But the waves broke the bridge to pieces, and Xerxes commanded 
the sea to be whipped for its disrespectful conduct. 

8. The greater part of the cities of Greece submitted to Xerxes, 
but Sparta and Athens made a stubborn resistance. Though they 
could muster but few soldiers, these were far more valiant than the 
Persians. 

9. At Thermopylae, Xerxes wished to lead his army through a 
narrow passage between a mountain and the sea. Leonidas, king 
of Sparta, opposed him with six thousand men. Seventy thousand 
Persians were slain in the attempt to break through the pass. 

10. At last, Leonidas found that the Persians would not be kept 
back any longer. He therefore sent away all but three hundred men, 
and with these he remained at the pass of Therm opylse. The im- 
mense host of the Persians came onward like a flood ; and only one 
soldier of the three hundred escaped to Sparta to tell that the rest 
were slain. 

11. But Xerxes did not long continue to triumph in Greece. His 

fleet was defeated at Salamis, and his army at Platsea. In escaping, 
he was forced to cross the Hellespont in a little fishing-vessel ; for 
the sea, in spite of its being whipped, had again broken his bridge 
of boats. • 

12. Not long after his return to Persia, the proud Xerxes was 
murdered in his bed. This event happened about the year 465 before 
Christ. His son, Artaxerxes, made peace with the Greeks. 

13. The story of Xerxes may teach us the folly of ambition. Had 
he been content with staying at home and governing his people so 


4. What of the Persian empire in the time of Xerxes ? What of Persepolis ? In which 
direction was it from Babylon? Jerusalem? 5. What of the wealth and magnificence of 
Xerxes ? What was the greatest army ever known ? 6. What of Mount Athos ? 7. M hat 
of the Hellespont ? 8. What of Greece ? 9. What of Thermopylae ? 10. What of Leoni 

das ? 11. What of Salamis ? Plataea ? How did Xerxes return ? 12. Death of Xerxes ? 

When did thi« *vent happen ? Who succeeded Xerxes ? 13. What may the story of Xerxes 
leach us ? How might he have been happy ? 


48 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


as to make them happy, he might have been happy himself. But, 
having too much, he still strove to acquire more, and thus brought 
misery upon himself and millions of his fellow-men. 

14. Let us be content in more humble situations, for we see that 
happiness is not always associated with wealth and power. Let ua 
remember, too, that pride and vanity made even Xerxes ridiculous 
with all his magnificence. 


CHAPTER XXVII.— ASIA CONTINUED. 

Affairs of Persia till the Saracen Conquest . 

1. Between one and two centuries after the death of Xerxes, that 
is, about 330 years before Christ, Persia was invaded by Alexander 
the G-reat, king of Macedon. Darius the Third was then king o t 
Persia. Being defeated by Alexander, two of his own subjects bound 
him with golden chains, and put him in a covered cart. 

2. They intended to murder Darius, and get possession of the king- 
dom. But Alexander came suddenly upon the conspirators, and 
forced them to take flight. As they rode away, they discharged 
their darts at Darius, and slew him. 

3. After this time, Persia became subject to the Parthians, whose 
country had formerly been a province of the Persian empire. It con- 
tinued under the government of the Parthian kings nearly five hun- 
dred years. About the year 230 after the Christian era, a Persian, 
named Artaxerxes, excited a rebellion and made himself king. 

4. His descendants occupied the throne for many generations. 
One of the most distinguished was Chosroes the Great, who lived 
about six hundred years after Christ. He made war against the Ro- 
mans, and ravaged their provinces in Asia. 

5. One of his successors was likewise named Chosroes. This 
hateful monster caused his own father to be beaten to death. But 
Heaven punished him by the wickedness of his eldest son, whose 
name was Siroes. He dethroned his father, and murdered all his 
brothers in his presence. 

6. Siroes then ordered his father to be thrown into a dungeon. 
Here, instead of killing the old king at once, he tormented him for a 
long time by pricking him with the points of arrows ! Chosroes died 
at last, in great agony. 


How did he bring misery upon himself and others ? 14. Why should we be content? 

What should we remember ? Ch. XXVII. — 1. When was Persia invaded by Alexander 
the Great ? Who was then king of Persia ? What happened to Darius ? 2. How was he 
silled? 3. To whom did Persia become subject after the death of Darius? How long did 
It continue under the govennment of Parthia? Which way is Parthia from Persia ? When 
did Artaxerxes make himself king ? 4. What of his descendants ? Chosroes the Great ? 
When did he live? What did he do ? S. What of the successor cf Chosroes the Great ‘ 
What wickedness did Sinoes commit ? 


PERSIA. 


49 


7. These things may seem too shocking to tell ; ' ut it is perhaps 
necessary, that my young readers should know how very cruel men 
may become when given up to the influence of pass- on. Let us be 
thankful that the religion of Christ has taught us to look upon such 
crimes as were often practised by the Persian kings with horror and 
disgust. 

8. Isdigertes, who ascended the throne in the year 130 of the Chris- 
tian era, was the last of this dynasty of Persian kings. During his 
reign, the Saracens, a warlike people of Arabia, inva led Persia, and 
conquered it. Isdigertes was killed in battle. 

9. Persia then became a part of the Saracen empire It was ruled 
by the caliphs who resided at Bagdad, a splendid t ity which they 
built on the river Tigris. 

10. This celebrated place was founded in 672, and once contained 
two millions of inhabitants. It was then filled with c tstly buildings, 
but it is now in ruins. The modern city is poorly buil , and compar- 
atively insignificant. 


I 

CHAPTER XXVIII.— ASIA CONTINUED. 

Modern History of Persia. 

1. In the year 1258 of the Christian era, the empire of the Sara- 
cens was subverted by the Tartars. Persia was governed l v them for 
a considerable time. It was afterwards ruled by monar *,hs called 
Sophis, or Shahs. The first of these was named Ismael, a man of 
Saracen descent. He took possession of the throne by violence, and 
reigned twenty-three years. 

2. The greatest of these monarchs was named Shah Abbas. He 
ascended the throne in 1589. Abbas fought against the Turks, and 
gained many splendid victories. He also deprived the Portuguese of 
their possessions in the East. 

3. But the best of all the kings of this family was Shah Hussoyn ; 
and he was also the last, and most unfortunate. He began to reign in 
the year 1694. Husseyn and his subjects met with manv disasters; 
and he was, at length, compelled to surrender his th’one to a rival. 

4. But before he took off the crown from his head, Huyssen went 
on foot through the principal streets of Ispahan, which was then the 
capital. The people thronged around him with tears and lamenta* 


7. How may men become very cruel? For what should we be thankful? 8. When 
did Isdigertes ascend the throne ? What of him ? What did the Saracens do during hio 
feign? .How was Isdigertes killed? 9. Of what empire did Persia become a part ? How 
was it ruled? Where did the caliphs live? 10. What of Bagdad? Ch. XXVIII. — 1. 
What of the empire of the Saracens in the year 1258 ? How was Persia governed? What 
of Ismael ? 2. Who was Shah Abbas ? When did he ascend the throne ? What did hn 
do ? 3. What of Shah Husseyn? 4. Describe the manner in which he surrendered hla 
crown. „ 

D 5 


50 SCHOOLHISTORY. 

lions. The excellent and kind-hearted monarch endeavored to com- 
fort them. 

5 . He told them that the new king, whose name was Mahmoud, 
would not love them better than he himself had, but that he would 
know better how to govern them, and how to conquer their enemies. 
So the good Husseyn took off his crown, which had been only a 
a trouble to him, and bade his people farewell. 

6. In 1730, Kouli Khan took possession of the thrdne of Persia. He 
called himself Nadir Shah. He was a famous conqueror and tyrant, 
and was assassinated in his tent after a reign of about seventeen 
years. 

7. Since his death, there has been much bloodshed in Persia 
Ambitious men have often aspired to the throne, and involved the 
country in civil war. The late sovereign was better than most of his 
predecessors; the present king is named Mohammed, and he bears 
the title of Shah. 

8. The king generally resides in the city of Teheran. Cut he has 
a beautiful palace at Ispahan, called the Palace of Forty Pillars. 
Each of the forty pillars is supported by four lions, of white marble. 
The whole edifice looks as if it were built of pearl, and silver, and 
gold, and precious stones. 

9. I have now done with the story of Persia. Like that of most 
other eastern countries, it abounds in tales of cruelly, battle, and 
bloodshed. In ancient times, the people worshipped the sun, and 
bowed down to idols. But, for more than a thousand years, they 
have been believers in a false prophet, called Mahomet. 

10. They have never become acquainted with the religion of Jesus 
Christ, which teaches us to be gentle and forgiving one to another 
and thus cruelty has ever been common among them. 

11. The climate of Persia is mild, and the country abounds in beau- 
tiful and fragrant trees, shrubs, and flowers. The people are less 
warlike than in former times. The rich live in splendid palaces, and 
the poor in mud huts. The kingdom is small, compared with the 
vast empire of Xerxes. Persepolis, the ancient capital, is now a heap 
of ruins. Teheran and Ispahan, the two principal cities, are of com- 
paratively modern date. 

12. From what I have told you, you will not like the Persian char- 
acter; yet it is not altogether bad. The people are very fond of read- 
ing, and telling instructive stories; many of these were written ages 
since, and are exceedingly beautiful. The people also have a taste 
for poetry, and they appear to be fond of the beauties of nature, and 
to have a love of virtue. 


6. When did Kouli Khan come to the throne? What other name had he? WTiat of 
him? 7. What of Persia since the death of Kouli Khan? What is said of the present 
ruler? 8. Where does he reside ? Describe the palace of the emperor. 9. What of the 
story of Persia? What was the worship of the ancient Persians? What is now the re- 
ligion of the people ? 10. What has always been common among them? 11, What of 

the climate of Persia? The soil ? People? How does the extent of the country com- 
pare with what it was in the time of Xerxes ? What of Persepolis ? Teheran ? Ispahan 
12. What of the Persian character? 


PERSIA. 


51 


CHAPTER XXIX.— ASIA CONTINUED. 

Early History of China . 



1. The territory of the Chinese empire is nearly the same at the 
present day that it has been from the earliest records. It is bounded 
on he north by Asiatic Russia, on the east by the Pacific Ocean, and 
on the south by the Chinese Sea and Farther India. On the west, 
there are mountains and sandy deserts, which divide it from Thibet 
and Tartary. 

2. This empire is very ancient, and has continued longer than any 
other that has ever existed. Its history goes back four thousand 
years from the present time. The name of its founder was Fohi, 
whom some writers suppose to have been the same as Noah. 

3. There have been twenty-two dynasties, or separate familes of 
emperors, who have successively ruled over China. If their history 
were to be particularly related, it would fill at least twenty- two great 
books. Yet few of the emperors did any thing that was worthy of 
remembrance. 

4. Before the time of Fohi, the Chinese believe that men lived 
pretty much like brutes ; that they had no settled homes, but wan- 
dered up and down in the forests, seeking for food ; and when they 
caught any animals or birds, that they drank the blood, and devoured 
even the hair and feathers. 


Ch. XXIX. — 1. What of the Chinese empire? Boundaries? What divides it from 
Thibet and Tartary? Which way is China from Persia? Hirdostan? Siberia? The 
Birman Empire? 2 . What of the antiquity and duration of the Chinese empire? How 
far back does its history extend ? Who was its founder? What do some writers suppose 
S. What of the dyna«ties or families that have ruled over China ? 4. What do the Chines* 

suppose was the state of China before the time of Fohi ? 


52 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


5. We find nothing very remarkable about the Chinese emperors 
till the reign of Chaus, who lived about a thousand years before the 
Christian era. He was extremely fond of hunting, and used to gal- 
lop into the midst of the rice-fields in pursuit of game. In this man- 
ner he did so much mischief, that his subjects resolved to destroy him. 

6. There was a large river, which the emperor was often in the 
habit of crossing. On the shore of this river the people placed a 
boat, as if for the accommodation of Chaus. The next time that the 
emperor returned from hunting, he and his attendants got on board 
the boat, and set sail for the opposite shore. 

7. But the boat had been contrived On purpose for his destruction. 
In the middle of the river it fell to pieces, and all on board were 
drowned. Thus to the great joy of his subjects, the emperor Chaus 
went down among the fishes, and never again came a-hunting in the 
rice-fields. 

8. The emperor Ching, who reigned about two thousand years ago, 
built a great wall, in order to protect his dominions against the Tar- 
tars. It was forty-five feet high, and eighteen feet ^hick, and it ex- 
tended over mountains and valleys, a distance of fifteen hundred 
miles. This wall still remains. 

9. When Ching had completed the wall, he thought himself so 
very great an emperor, that none of his predecessors were worth 
remembering. He therefore ordered all the historical writings and 
public records to be burnt. He al o caused four hundred learned 
men, who were addicted to writing histories, to be buried alive. 

10. If the emperor Ching could have caught poor old Peter Parley, 
he certainly would have buried him likewise, with his four hundred 
learned brethren; and so the world would have lost this Universal 
History ! 


CHAPTER XXX. — ASIA CONTINUED. 

Anecdotes of the Chinese Emperors. 

1. The emperor Yati lived about the time of the Christian era. 
This emperor was desirous of reigning till the world should come to 
an end, and perhaps longer. He therefore spent his time in endeav- 
oring to brew a liquor tha^ would make him immortal. But, unfor- 
tunately, before the liquor was fit to drink, the emperor died. 

2. Another emperor instead of attending to the affairs of the nation, 
applied himself wholly to study. His prime minister took advantage 
of his negligence, and raised a rebellion against him. When the 


5. When did Chaus live? What of him ? 6. Relate the manner in which the people 
destroyed him. 8. When did the emperor Ching live? Describe the great wall. Does 
it still remain ? 9. What orders did he give respecting historical books, records, and 

learned men? Ch. XXX. — 1. What of the emperor Vati? How did he spend hia 
time? 2. Tell the storvof a very learned emparor 


CHINA. 


53 


emperor heard the shouts of the rebels, he shut his book, and put on 
his armor. But, on ascending 1 the ramparts of the city, he saw that 
it was too late to resist. He then returned to his library, which con- 
tained one hundred and forty thousand volumes. 

3. The emperor knew that these books had been the means of his 
losing the vast empire of China, by withdrawing his attention from 
the government. He therefore set fire to them with his own hands, 
and the whole library was consumed. The rebels afterwards put 
him to death. 

4. The emperor Si-given began to feign in the year 617 after the 
Christian era. He dwelt in a magnificent palace. After the empe- 
ror’s death, his son came to the palace, and was astonished at its 
splendor and beauty. “ Such a residence is good for nothing but to 
corrupt a monarch, and render him proud,” exclaimed he. Accord- 
ingly he commanded this great aud cosily edifice to be burnt to the 
ground. 

5. Chwang-tsong who had been a brave soldier, was made emperor 
about eight hundred years ago. He was a person of very frugal 
habits. It was one of his singularities, that he nev?r slept in a bed, 
but always on the bare ground, with a bell fastened to his neck. If 
he turned over in his sleep, the ringing of the bell would awaken 
him ; and he then considered it time to get up. 

6. In the year 1209, Genhis Khan invaded China with an immense 
army of Tartars. He and his descendants conquered the whole em- 
pire, and governed it during many years. 

7. The emperor Ching-tsa ascended the throne three or four cen- 
turies ago. A mine was discovered during his reign, and precious 
stones of great value were dug out of it. Some of them were 
brought to the emperor, but he looked scornfully at them. 

8. “ Do you call these precious stones?” cried he. “What are 
they good for ? They can neither clothe the people, nor satisfy theii 
hunger.” So saying, he ordered the mine to be closed up, and the 
miners to be employed in some more useful kind of labor. 

9. About a hundred years ago, in the reign of Yong-tching, there 
was the most terrible earthquake that had ever been known. It 
shook down nearly all the houses in the city of Pekin, and buried one 
hundred thousand people. A still greater number perished in the 
surrounding country. 

10. Nothing very remarkable has lately happened in the history of 
China, except that in 1840 the English government sent an expedition 
against them, which took Canton, and several other places. The 
war continued till 1842, when peace was made. The name of the 
present emperor is Taou-kwang. He succeeded to the throne in 
the year 1820. 


4. When did Si-given begin to reign? Where did he dwell? What did his son do? 
6. What of Chwang-tsong ? What curious fact is related of him ? 6. When did Genghis 

Khan invade China ? What of him and his descendants ? 7. What of the emperor Chiug- 
tsaf Relate the story of the mine. What happened in the reign of long-tching ? 
iO What of the English government ? What is the name of the present emperor ? When 
did he come to the throne ? 

5 * 


54 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


CHAPTER XXXI.— ASIA CONTINUED. 

Cities of China. Manners of the Chinese . 

1. I must now give you a short account of the cities and people of 
China as they are at this day. Nankin was formerly the capital of 
China. Pekin, which contains two millions of inhabitants, is now 
the capital. The emperor’s palace stands in a part of Pekin called 
the Tartar city. 

2 . The walls of Pekin are built of brick, and aie nearly one hun- 
dred feet high, so that they hide the whole city. They are so thick 
that sentinels on horseback ride round the city on the top of the wall. 
There are nine gates, which have marble arches, and are prodigiously 
high. 

3. The people of China have an olive complexion, with black hair, 
and small black eyes. The chief part of their dress is a long loose 
robe, which is fastened round the body with a silken girdle. In this 
girdle they carry a knife, and two sticks for eating instead of a knife 
and fork. 

4. The Chinese are great fibbers, and are very much addicted to 
cheating. There are some horrible customs among them. For 
instance, if parents have a greater number of children than they can 
conveniently support, they are permitted to throw them into a river ! 

5. The people are not nice about what they eat. Dead puppy-dogs 
are publicly sold in the streets for food. Rats and mice are frequently 
eaten. There is a sort of bird’s nest which is made into a jelly, and 
is considered a great delicacy. 

6. The Chinese ladies are chiefly remarkable for their little feet. 
A grown woman in China is able to wear smaller shoes than a young 
child in America. But their feet are kept merely for show, and are 
almost good for nothing to walk with. 

7. Religion among the Chinese is in a very sad condition. The 
people are given up to idolatry. Almost all religions are tolerated, 
although but little reverence is paid to any. There are more temples 
than can be easily numbered. 

8. When a Chinese wishes to be married, he buys a wife of her 
parents, but he is not permitted to see her till she is sent home. The 
young lady is brought to her husband’s door in a palankeen. He puts 
aside the curtains of the palankeen, and peeps in at his new wife. 
If he does not like her looks, he sends her back again. 

9. In China there are some very singular punishments. Sometime* 
a wooden frame, weighing two hundred pounds, is put round a man’s 
neck. He is compelled to carry it about with him wherever he 


Ch. XXXI. — 1. What was formerly the capital of Ci. iia ? What is now ? How many 
Inhabitants does Pekin contain? W r here is the emperor’s palace ? 2. What of the walls 

of Pekin? The gates? 3. What of the people of China? Their dress ? 4. What of 
the character of the Chinese ? Their customs 5. What of food ? 6. What of the 

Chinese ladies? 7. W’hat of religion in China? Temples? 8. What is done when a 
man wishes to be married ? 9. What of punishments in China ? 


* 


CHINA. 


55 


goes ; and, so long as he wears it, he can neither feed himself, nor 
lie down. 

10*. One of the most curious customs of China was that of excluding 
foreigners from the country. A few American and European 
merchants were permitted to reside at Canton, but they were obliged 
to leave their wives at Macao. No other strangers were permitted 
in the kingdom. The people think that their manners and customs 
are the best in the world, and they do not wish foreigners to come 
and introduce new notions. By the treaty of peace with Great 
Britain in 1842, five ports are now open to strangers. 

11. China has a great many large cities, and these are filled with 
countless numbers of inhabitants. They have many ingeuious arts 
and manufactures, they till the earth with great skill, and their gar- 
dens are managed with special care. 

12. 'lea is brought to us from this country, with a great variety of 
other articles. You will not be surprised that we get so many things 
from China, when you know that the country contains three hundrea 
and sixty millions of people, that is, five times as many as there are 
in ail America. 


CHAPTER XXXII.— ASIA CONTINUED. 

Origin of the Arabs. Rise of Mahomet. 

1. The Arabs are descended from Ishmael, a son of Abraham. I* 
was foretold of him, that “ his hand should be against every man, 
and every man’s hand against him.” In all ages this prophecy has 
been fulfilled among his posterity ; for they appear to have been 
enemies to the rest of mankind, and mankind enemies to them. 

2. Arabia consists of several separate states or nations. The whole 
country is bounded on the north by Palestine, Mesopotamia, &c. ; on 
the east by the Persian Gulf and the Gulf of Ormuz, on the south by 
the Indian Ocean, and west by the Red Sea. 

3. The Arabs have always been wandering tribes, and have dwelt 
in tents, amid the trackless deserts which cover a large portion of 
their country. Their early history is very imperfectly known. The 
first event that is worth recording, was the birth of Mahomet. This 
took place at Mecca, a city on the borders of the Red Sea, in the 
rear 570 of the Christian era. 

4. Till the age of twenty-five, Mahomet was a camel-driver in the 
lesert. He afterwards spent much of his time in solitude. His 

10. What custom is there respecting foreigners? Where do the wives of merchants 
. eside ? Why do not the Chinese wish foreigners to come amongst them ? How many 
t.< rts are open to strangers ? 11. What of the cities of China ? Manufactures? Do the 
people understand agriculture ? 12. Where do we get our tea? What is the population 

»*f China ? Ch. XXXII. — 1. From whom are the Arabs descended ? What was prophe- 
»ied of Ishmael ? Has the prophecy been fulfilled ? 2. Of what does Arabia consist ? How 
Is it bounded? 3. How have the Arabs always lived ? What of their early history ? When 
»nd where was Mahomet oorr. ? 4. Of what profession was Mahomet ’ 


56 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


dwelling was a lonesome cave, where he pretended to be employed 
in prayer and meditation. When he was forty years old, he set up 
for a prophet. 



Pilgrims of Jlrubia-, going to the tomb of Mahomet. 


5. He publicly proclaimed, that God had sent him to convert the 
world to a new religion. The people of IVlecca would not at first 
believe Mahomet. He was born among them, and they knew that 
he had been a camel-driver, and was no holier than themselves. 
Beside, he pretended that he had ridden up to heaven on an ass, in 
company with the angel Gabriel ; and many of his stories were as 
ridiculous as this. 

6. So the men of Mecca threatened to slay Mahomet, and he was 
therefore forced to flee to Medina, another city of Arabia. There, in 
the course of two or three years, he made a great number of con- 
verts. He told his disciples that they must compel others to adopt 
his religion by force, if they refused to do so by fair means. 

7. This conduct brought on a war between the disciples of Ma- 
homet and all the other Arabians. Mahomet won many victories, 
and soon made himself master of the whole country, and of Sjria 
besides. 

8. Mahomet was now not only a pretended prophet, but a real 
king. He was a very terrible man, even to his own followers ; for 
whenever he was angry, a vein between his eyebrows used to swell 
and turn black. This gave him a grim and frightful aspect. 

9. His power continued to increase; but he died suddenly, at the 


How did he live before he was forty years old ? 5. What did he then do ? What of the 
people of Mecca ? What did Mahomet pretend ? 6. Why did Mahomet flee to Medina/ 
What was the flight of Mahomet called by the Arabs ? What means did he take to make 
converts in Medina ? 7. What was the effect of this conduct ? What victories did Maho 
met win ? 8. Describe Mahomet. 9. When did he die ? 


SARACENS. 


57 

age of sixty-three. He was buried at Medina. It is said, that his 
coffin may be seen there in a mosque to this day, and that it is sus- 
pended in the air by a loadstone. Many pilgrims go every vear to 
visit the place. 



The Flight of Mahomet, called the Hegira. 


10. The religion of Mahomet was diffused over nearly all Asia and 
Africa, and is still believed by many millions of people. Its precepts 
are contained in a book called the Koran. Mahomet affirmed that 
the angel Gabriel brought him the doctrines contained in this book 
from heaven. 


CHAPTER XXXIII. — ASIA CONTINUED. 

Sequel of the History of the Saracens. 

1. Those of the Arabians who followed Mahomet were called Sar 
acens. After their leader’s death, they conquered the whole of Tur- 
key in Asia, and many other countries. The capital of their empire 
was the city of Bagdad, on the river Tigris, which I have already 
mentioned. 

2 . One of the successors of Mahomet was Ali, his son-in-law. He 
was opposed by Ayesha, Mahomet’s widow. This woman was sus- 
pected of having murdered her husband. 

3. She raised an army, and led them to battle against Ali. During 
the contiict, Ayesha sat in a sort of a cage or litter, on the back of a 
camel. The camel’s rein was held by one of her soldiers ; and it is 
said that seventy soldiers were killed, one after another, while hold- 


Where was he buried ? What is said of his coffin ? 10. Where is the the religion of 

Mahomet followed ? "What is the Koran ? What did Mahomet affirm ? Where is Mec- 
ca? Medina? Ch. XXXIII. — 1 . Who were the Saracens ? What of them ? What was 
the capital of their empire ? Who was Ali ? Who opposed him ? Who was Ayesha ? 
2. Describe the conflict between Ali and Ayesha ? Who was victorious ? 


58 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


ing the rem. Finally, Ali was victorious, and confirmed his sway 
over all the disciples of Mahomet, and over the countries which they 
had won. 

4. The Saracen empire was thus established. The kings were 
called Caliphs. They reigned at Bagdad for the space of six hundred 
and twenty years. One of the most distinguished of them was Mah- 
mud Gazui. He was a great conqueror, and added a part of India 
to his dominions. 

5. A poor man once complained to Mahmud Gazui that a soldier 
had turned him and his family out of doors, and had kept possession 
of his house all night. When the caliph, Mahmud Gazui, heard this, 
he suspected that the soldier was his own son. “ If he ill-treats you 
again, let me know,” said he. 

(i. Accordingly, a few nights afterwards, the poor man told the ca- 
liph that the same soldier had turned him out of his house again. 
The caliph took his cimeter and went to the house; but before enter- 
ing, he caused all the lights to be extinguished, so that his heart 
might not be softened by the sight of the offender. 

7. When all was darkfiess, he entered the house, and struck the 
soldier dead with his cimeter. “ Now bring a light,” cried the caliph. 
His attendants did so. Mahmud Gazui held a torch over the bloody 
corpse of the soldier, and found that his suspicions were correct. He 
had killed his own son ! 

8. The last of the caliphs was named Mostasem. He was so proud 
and vainglorious that he considered his subjects unworthy to behold 
his face. He therefore never appeared in public without wearing a 
veil of golden tissue. Whenever he rode through the streets, thou- 
sands would flock to get a glimpse of his golden veil. 

9. But at length Hulaki, chief of the Tartars, took the city of Bag- 
dad. He stripped off the golden veil of the caliph Mostasem, and 
put him alive into a leathern bag. The bag, with the poor caliph in 
it, was dragged by horses through the same streets where he had for- 
merly ridden in triumph. 

10. Thus perished the caliph Mostasem, being bruised to death on 
the pavements. With him ended the empire of the Saracens, in the 
year 1258 of the Christian era. 

11. But the termination of this empire did not put an end to the 
religion of Mahomet. This continued to flourish, and finally extend- 
ed over nearly all the countries of Asia and Africa. 


4. Who were the caliphs ? Where did they reign ? What of Mahmud Gazui ? a. Re 
late the story of the poor man and Mahmud Gazui. 8. Who was Mostasem ? What can 
you say of him ? 9. How did he die ? 10. When did the empire of the Saracens end i 

11. What of the religion of Mahomet? 


✓ 


THE SARACENS. 59 

CHAPTER XXXIV.— ASIA CONTINUED 

About Syria , Phoenicia , and Asia Minor. 



Ruins of Balbec. 


1 i will now give you a short account of Syria, which lay to the 
north uf Palestine. It was bounded north by Asia Minor, on the east 
by the river Euphrates and Arabia, on the south by Palestine and a 
part of Arabia, and west by the Mediterranean Sea. 

2. Syria is frequently mentioned in the Bible. The people were 
engaged in almost constant wars with the Jews, from the time of 
David, nearly to the time of Christ, when it became a Roman prov- 
ince. 

3. At this period its capital was Antioch, which was one of the 
most splendid cities in the world. This was the native place of St. 
Luke, and here both St. Peter and St. Paul lived for some time. 
Here, too, the followers of Christ were first called Christians. 

4. Damascus, another city of Syria, one hundred and thirty-six 
miles northward of Jerusalem, appears to have been known ever 
since the time of Abraham. It is frequently mentioned in the Bible, 
and here St. Paul was miraculously converted to the Christian faitn. 

5. This city was famous in later times for making the best swords, 
sabres, and other cutlery ; hut the art which the people once possess- 
ed is now lost. The inhabitants of this city were also celebrated for 
manufacturing beautiful silks, to which the name of damask was giv- 
en, from thfc place where they were made. 


Ch. XXXIV. — I. Where was Syria situated? How was it bounded? 2. What of the 
people of Spa in ? 3. Capital of Syria? What great. events took place at Antioch ? 4. What 
of Damascus ? What took place there ? 5. What was Damascus celebrated for in ancient 

.imes ? 


60 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


6. Anothei place in Syria mentioned in the Bible, was Tadmol 
sometimes called “Tadmor in the desert;” this was built by Solo 
mon foi the convenience of his traders ; it was ten miles in extent 
but it is now in ruins. The splendid remains of this place, consisting 
of columns and other things beautifully sculptured in stone, show 
that it mast have been a rich and powerful city. In modern times ii 
is called Palmyra. 

7. At the distance of thirty-seven miles north-west of Damascus 
are the remains of Balbec, a very splendid city in the time of the apos 
ties, and then called Heliopolis. It is now in ruins, and contains 
scarcely more than a thousand inhabitants. 

8. I must not forget to mention Phoenice, or Phoenicia, which lay 
along the border of the Mediterranean Sea; it contained the cities of 
Tyre, Sidon, Ptolemais, and other celebrated places. In very early 
times, the Phoenicians were famous for taking the lead in commerce 
navigation, and other arts. They were then an independent nation, 
but in after times their country became a province of Syria. 

9. Syria is at the present day governed by the Turks, and, like ev- 
ery other country under their sway, is stamped with an aspect of des- 
olation and decay. The term Syria is now applied, not only to what 
anciently bore that name, but to Palestine also. 

10. Asia Minor, or Natolia, as it is now called, lies at the north- 
eastern corner of the Mediterranean Sea; it is a kind of peninsula, 
bounded on the north by the Euxine or Black Sea ; on the west by 
the iEgean Sea ; and on the east by Syria, Mesopotamia, and Arme- 
nia. 

11. It is about six hundred miles in length, from east to west, and 
four hundred in breadth. It is at present under the government of 
Turkey, and its inhabitants are mostly believers in Mahomet. The 
chief city now is Smyrna, to which many vessels go from this country, 
and bring back figs, dates, and other things. 

12. Asia Minor appears to have been settled in very early times. 
Several kingdoms have arisen and flourished here at different periods, 
but it has never been the seat of any great empire. The kingdom of 
Lydia, in Asia Minor, existed as early as eight hundred years before 
Christ. Ardysus, who reigned seven hundred and ninety-seven years 
B. C., appears to have been one of its earliest kings. 

13. The last king of Lydia was Croesus, who was so famous for his 
great riches, that to this day we say, “As rich as Croesus.” But, in 
spite of his wealth, he was conquered by Cyrus, king of Persia, 54S 
B. C. 

14. From this period, Lydia, with a great part of Asia Minor, con- 
tinued subject to the Persian empire till the time of Alexander, about 
330 B. C., when it was conquered by that famous leader. 


6. What of Tadmor ? 7. What of the ruins of Balbec ? 8. What of Phoenicia ? What 
did it contain ? What of the Phoenicians ? 9. What of Syria ? To what is this name 
now applied? 10. Situation and boundaries of Asia Minor? 11. Its extent? Govern- 
ment? Inhabitants? What of Smyrna ? 12. What of Asia Minor? What of Lydia * 

Ardysus ? 13. What can you tell of Croesus ? 14. What of Lydia ? By whom was it 

conquered ? 


THE SCYTHIANS. 


6i 

] 5. Three hundred years before Christ, Pontus, which had once 
been a part of Lydia, became an independent country. It continued 
-o flourish for many years, and Mithridates VII. successfully main- 
tained a war with the Romans for a long time. 

( 16. By his skill and courage, he baffled the best generals of the em- 
pire. But at length, in the year 64 B. C., he was conquered, and his 
kingdom, with the rest of Asia Minor, was subjected to the Roman 
dominion. 

17. Notwithstanding the wars in Asia Minor, the country became 
filled with people, and superb cities rose up in various parts of it. 
Ephesus, situated in Lydia, was a splendid place, and it had a temple 
so magnificent, that it was called one of the seven wonders of the 
world. 

18. This temple was one hundred and twenty years in building; 
but a man named Erostratus, wishing to make himself remembered, 
set it on fire, and it was burnt to the ground. 

19. There were also many other fine cities in Asia Minor, several 

of which are mentioned in the New Testament. Among these was 
Tarsus, the birth-place pf Paul; also, Pergamos, Thyatira, Sardis, 
Philadelphia, and Laodicea, which are spoken of in the book of Rev- 
elation. / 

20. Through the labors of Paul, Barnabas, Silas, Timothy, Luke, 
and perhaps others, Christianity was early planted in nearly all the 
divisions of Asia Minor. 


CHAPTER XXXV. — ASIA CONTINUED. 

A Brief View of Several Nations. 

1. I have now related the history of the most celebrated countries 
of Asia. But there are several other territories, and some of them 
very extensive, of which I can say only a few words in this little book. 

2. In ancient times, the Scythians inhabited the northern parts of 
Asia. They were a warlike and savage people, and very expert with 
the bow and arrow. Many of the Asiatic and European kings en- 
deavored to subdue them, but were generally defeated. 

3. At different times, vast numbers of the Scythians used to over- 
run the more civilizeu countries that lay south of them. A tribe of 
Scythians founded the powerful empire of Parthia, which afterwards 
extended its sway over Persia and other countries. This empire be- 
gan in the year 250 B. C., and continued five hundred years. 

4. In more modern times, the regions inhabited by the Scythians 


15. What of Pontus ? Mithridates VII. ? 16. By whom was Mithridates conquered? 

17. What of Ephesus ? 18. Temple of Diana ? How was it destroyed ? 19. What other 
cities were there in Asia Minor? 20. Who planted Christianity in Asia Minor? Ch. 
£XXV. -2. What o^ the Scythians? Where did they live ? 3. What of Parthia? 

6 


62 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


nave been called Tartary, and the people Tartars. The people are 
not much more civilized than they formerly were. More than on** 
celebrated conqueror has arisen among the Tartars. 

5. India, which we call the East Indies, was very little known to 
the people who lived westward of it in ancient times. Semirami?' 
invaded it, and likewise Alexander the Great, and several other con- 
querors. The Hindoos of the present day are an interesting people, 
but addicted to idolatry. 

6. India consists of Hindostan, and of an extensive region to the 
eastward of it. Within the last hundred years, the English have 
gained great power in this part of the world. They made war 
against the native rulers, and reduced them to subjection. 

7. The Turks, or Ottomans, are a people who had their origin in 
Asia. But, as they have been settled in Europe during several cen- 
turies, it will be more proper and convenient to speak of them in the 
history of that quarter of the globe. 

8. Japan is an extensive empire containing twenty-six millions of 
inhabitants. These live to the east of China, upon several islands, 
of which Niphon is the largest. The people live crowded together 
in large cities, and resemble the Chinese in their religion, manners, 
and customs. 

9. It is uncertain whether the ancient nations knew any thing of 
this empire, and its early history is quite unknown. It is probable it 
has remained with little change for thousands of years. Its exis- 
tence was first ascertained by the Europeans about the year 1400 ; but 
as strangers are not permitted to travel in the country, very little is 
found out concerning it. The people are idolaters. 

10. There are several other kingdoms of Asia, of which the histo- 
ry is little known, or quite uninteresting. Among these are Siam, 
Cochin China, the Birman empire, Cabul, Beloochistan, and some 
others. Besides these, the northern portions of Asia are occupied by 
various tribes of Tartars, who appear to have wandered over these 
regions for ages, leaving no story behind them. The emperor of Rus- 
sia rules over these vast dominions. 


CHAPTER XXXVI.— ASIA CONTINUED. 

Review of the History of Asia . 

1. Let us now go back and review the history of Asia. In this 
^quarter of the globe, the most wonderful events in the history of 
mankind have happened. Here Adam and Eve were created ; and 


4 . What is the name given to the countries formerly inhabited by the Scythians, Par- 
thians, &c. ? Do the Tartars remain nearly the same as the ancient Scythians, Parthians, 
8lc. ? 6. What of India or Hindostan ? How is it bounded ? Which way is it from Chi 
*a? From Persia? From Palestine ? What of the English in Hisdostan ? 7. What of 
the Turks or Ottomans? 8. What of Japan? Direction of the Japanese isles from Hin- 
dostan? Persia? Palestine? 10. What other nations of Asia are there, of which the 
history is little known? What of the northern portions of Asia? 


ASIA. 63 

on the banks of the Euphrates all the people dwelt who lived before 
the flood. 

2 . It was in Asia, that the ark of Noah rested ; and here again 
the people began to build cities, and establish nations. Here the first 
great empire arose. Here the Jewish nation had its origin; and 
nearly all the events related in the Old Testament took place here. 

3. It was in Asia, that the religion which teaches us that there is 
one only living and true God, had its origin; and here Jesus Christ 
appeared, to establish this religion, and seal the truth of revelation 
with his blood. 

4. It was in Asia, that Mahomet commenced and established his 
religion, which is now believed by more than half the human race. 
Several other religions kid their origin in Asia. 

5. In Asia, some of the greatest empires have existed, of which 
history gives us any account. The Assyrian empire, as I have before 
said, is the first on record. This was followed by the Persian em- 
pire, which seemed to swallow up all the surrounding nations. Chi- 
na, the most populous empire on the globe, has endured longer than 
any other. 

6. The Saracens, who extended their dominion over many coun- 
tries, had their origin in Asia. The Turks, who have reigned over 
Palestine, Mesopotamia, Syria, Asia Minor, a part of Europe, and a 
part of Africa, for nearly eight hundred years, had their origin in 
Asia. 

7. There is one portion of Asia which is, perhaps, more full of his- 
torical interest than any other on the face of the globe. It is that 
which lies between the Mediterranean on the west, Armenia on the 
north, Persia on the east, and Arabia on the south. Here is the spot 
on which the first inhabitants dwelt; here was the place where the 
first nations were formed ; here the miracles recorded in the Bible 
took place; here the prophets dwelt; here Jesus Christ lived, preach- 
ed, and died. 

8. But, although Asia was peopled before any other part of the 
world, and though the inhabitants have been favored by miracles, 
and the presence of a divine teacher, they are far behind the nations 
of Europe and America in the knowledge of religion, and the various 
arts which make life comfortable and happy. 

9. In all parts of Asia, there are many people who are full of su- 
perstition, and there are very few who worship God in sincerity and 
truth. Jesus Christ is hardly known among the many millions of peo- 
ple in Asia ; and though some of the rich men, kings, and princes 
live in gorgeous palaces, and are decked with gold and jewels, yet the 
mass of the people live as they have done for ages, ignorant, poor, 
and degraded. 


Ch. XXXVI. — 1 . 2. 3. 4. What remarkable events have occurred in Asia? 5. What is 
the first empire recorded in history ? What of the Persian empire ? What of China ? 6. 
What of the Saracens ? What of the Turks ? 7. What portion of Asia is the most inter- 
esting on the globe ? Why is this portion of country thus interesting ? 8. How has Asia 
been particularly favored? In what respects are the inhabitants of Asia behind those of 
Europe and America ? 9. What is the state of the people in Asia ? 


64 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


10. The most remarkable feature in the history of Asia is. that, 
while the country has seen many revolutions and changes, the con- 
dition of the people.remains nearly the same. In our country and in 
Europe, there is a constant improvement. Every year brings some 
new art, invention, or institution for the benefit of society. 

11. But in Asia it is not so. Whoever is king, the people are but 
slaves. Education makes no progress, liberty is unknown, truth is 
ittle valued, virtue is not prized, and that thing which we call com- 
fort, and which makes our homes so dear to us, is not to be found in 
this vast country, so favored by Providence, and so richly endowed 
by nature. 

12. It would seem that the real difficulty in Asia is, that, while 
they are destitute of the knowledge of the Gospel, they have many 
false religions. Mahometanism prevails over a great part of this 
portion of the globe ; and it is remarkable that no country, the people 
of which believed in this false religion, has ever been happy or well- 
governed. 

13. The Hindoos believe in Brahmanism, which teaches them that 
there is one principal deity, called Brahma, and several other in- 
ferior deities, called Vishnu, Siva, &c. They make strange images 
of these, and worship them. The priests are called Brahmins, and 
instruct the people in many idle ceremonies and cruel superstitions. 



Brahma. Vishnu . 


14. Beside these religions, there is the worship of the Grand Lama 
to whom a temple is erected in Tartary. The Chinese believe ii 
Boodh, and other nations believe in other deities. 

10. What is remarkable in the history of Asia ? What is said of this country and of 
Europe? 11. How does Asia differ from Europe and America? 12. What is the condi 
(ion of Asia ? What of Mahometanism ? What is a remarkable fact ? 13. In what re 

ligion do the Hindoos believe ? What does Brahmanism teach ? What of the Brahmins «' 
14 . Where is the t ample of the Grand Lama? In what deity do the Chinese believe 1 


ASIA. 


m 


15. Thus nearly the whole of Asia is involved in darkness as to 
the character of God, and the destiny of man ; and thus we see, that 
the conduct of mankind is such as might be expected, where such 
ignorance and such error prevail. 


CHAPTER XXXVII.— ASIA CONTINUED. 

Chronology of Asia. 

1. Chronology is a record of the dates when historical events hap- 
pened. By studying chronology, you therefore learn the time at 
which the creation took place, when Abraham went from Chaldea to 
Canaan, when Christ was born, and other things. 

2. Now in order to have a clear view of the progress of history, 
it is very important to place before us a table of chronology ; and if 
we wish to remember history for a long time, it is well to fix this 
table in the memory. 

3. I will now give you a brief view of the chronology of Asia. By 
this you will notice some curious things. You will see that Solomon 
and Chaus of China lived at the same time; that Solomon began the 
temple exactly three thousand years after the creation, &c. 


Before Christ. 

Creation of the world 4004 

Deluge 2348 

Confusion of tongues 2247 

Ashur founds the empire of Assyria 2229 

Ninias, king of Assyria began to reign 2000 

Abraham born 1996 

Abraham sets out from Chaldea to go to Canaan 1921 

Jacob removes with his family to Egypt 1705 

Death of Jacob 1 689 

Death of Joseph . . . . 1635 

Moses born 1570 

Departure of the Israelites from Egypt 1491 

Death of Moses 1447 

Death of Joshua 1426 

Saul proclaimed king of Israel 1100 

King David born 1085 

Solomon began to reign 1015 


15. In what error is nearly the whole of Asia involved ? What do we see as respect* 
jhe conduct of mankind ? 

It might be well for the teacher now to require the pupil to go over the history 
of Asia a second time, or at least to go back and see that he is able to answer the most 
material questions of the preceding chapters . 

Ch. XXXVII. — 1 . What is chronology? Its use ? 2. What benefit can we gain by 
placing before us a chronological table ? What is the advantage of fixing a chronological 
table in the memory ? 4. What curious things do we learn from a chronological view of 
Asia ? 


£ 


6 * 


150 SCHOOL HISTORY. 

Tempi? of Solomon built 1004 

Chaus, emperor of China, began to reign 100C 

Death of Sardanapalus 820 

Jonah the prophet sent to preach to the Ninwi es .... 806 

Ardysus, first king of Lydia, in Asia Minor 79“' 

Shalmaneser conquered the kingdom of Israel, an J Cc^ried tbs 

chief inhabitants into captivity 72' 

Isdigertes made king of Persia 63P 

Jews carried captive to Babylon 00/' 

Lydia conquered by Cyrus, king of Persia 548 

Assyrian empire overthrown 538 

Jews return from Babylon 53b 

Persian empire established by Cy*us tht Grmat 53( 

Death of Cyrus 522 

Cambyses succeeds his father Cyruc 522 

Darius began to reign 522 

Xerxes defeats Leonidas at Thermopy 1 *® 48C 

Death of Xerxes 465 

Alexander invades Persia 330 

Kingdom of Syria founded by Seleucus 3 i 2 

Pontus becomes independent under Mithrida f es II. . ... . 300 

Empire of Parthia founded 250 

Artaxares made king of Persia 230 

Judas Maccabseus drives the Syrians out of the Jewish s* 160 

Chang, emperor of China C7 

Pontus, with other parts of Asia Minor, conquered by the Ro- 
mans 64 

Syria and Canaan conquered by the Romans 61 

Herod, king of the Jews 37 

Vati, emperor of China 33 


called the Christian era. It is the custom in all Christian countries 
to date from the birth of Christ. B. C. means before Christ; A. C. 
means after Christ ; A. D. stands for Anno Domini, that is, in the 
year of our Lord. Thus we say A. D. 1837, by which we mean in 
the year of our Lord, or from the birth of Christ, 1837 years. 

A. D. 

Jesus Christ born 0 

Qhrist crucified 33 

Paul arrives at Rome . 61 

Destruction of Jerusalem by Titus 70 

Birth of Mahomet 570 

Mahomet obliged to fly from his enemies ........ 622 

This is called the Hegira, and is the era from which the Turks 
date, as we do from the birth of Christ.. 


Death of Mahomet . . 

Saracen empire established 


632 

638 


AFRICA. 


67 


Bagdad, the seat of the caliphs, founded ... .... 672 


Chosroes the Great, king of Persia, began to reign .... 660 

Si-gwen, emperor of China, began to reign 617 

Chwang-tsong “ “ “ “ 1037 

Genghis Khan invaded China 1209 

Saracen empire overturned by the Turks 1258 

Japan discovered by Europeans 1400 

Shah Abbas ascended the throne of Persia ....... 1589 

Shah Hussey n ‘‘ “ “ 1694 

Kouli Khan made king of Persia 1730 

Yong-tching came to the throne of China 1737 

Taou-kwang ascended the throne of China 1820 

British Expedition against China 1840 

Canton taken 1841 


2V. B. — The teacher may now proceed to ask such questions as he deems proper , in re- 
gard to the several events noticed in the table ; it may be well to turn to the pages where 
the details are given respecting the events, and interrogate the pupil upon them. 

Questions like the following may be useful : How long from the birth of Abraham to 
that of Moses ? From that of Moses to that of David 1 From the beginning to the end 
of the Saracen empire ? tyc. 


CHAPTER XXXVIII.— AFRICA. 

About the Geography of Africa. The Inhabitants . 



1. Africa is one of the four quarters of the globe. It is an im- 
mense extent of country, and includes nearly one fourth of all the 
Jand on the earth. It is separated from America by the Atlantic 


Ch XXXVIII. — 1. What of Africa? How is it separated from America ? 


68 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


Ocean ; the nearest part is about three thousand miles from New 
York or Boston. 

2. It is separated from Europe by the Mediterranean Sea, and from 
Asia by the Red Sea. It is, however, attached to Asia by a narrow 
neck of land, called the Isthmus of Suez. 

3. Africa is less known than any other portion of the globe. Many 
parts of the interior have never been visited by Europeans. The 
greater part of the inhabitants are negroes, of which there are many 
tribes. Some of these are intelligent, and live tolerably well, but the 
greater part are either in a savage or a barbarous state. 

4. The climate being warm, they need little shelter or clothing 
Their houses are therefore poor mud huts, or slight tenements, made 
of leaves or branches of trees. Their dress is often but a single piece 
of cloth tied around the waist. They are however a cheerful race, 
and spend much of their time in various amusements. 

5. Beside the negroes, there are several other races of Africans. 
The inhabitants from Egypt to Abyssinia appear to consist of the 
original Egyptian people, mixed with Turks, Arabs, and others. The 
people of the Barbary States are tne descendants of the ancient Car- 
thaginians, mingled with the Saracens who conquered the country, 
together with Turks and Arabs. 

6. The immense desert of Sahara, with all the adjacent regions, 
appears to be occupied by wandering tribes of Arabs, who move from 
place to place with their horses and camels, like the people ol 
Arabia, for pasturage or plunder. 

7. Africa may be considered as, on the whole, the least civilized 

{ )ortion of the earth. The people are mostly Mahometans, and one 
lalf of them are nearly in a savage state. The rest are in a bar- 
barous condition. 

8. The central parts of Africa abound in wild animals, such as 
lions, panthers, leopards, elephants, rhinoceroses, zebras, and quaggas. 
The woods are filled with chattering monkeys, the thickets are in- 
fested with monstrous serpents, ostriches roam over the deserts, va- 
rious kinds of antelopes and deer, in vast herds, graze upon the plains, 
hippopotami are seen in the lakes and rivers, and crocodiles abound 
in the stagnant waters. Wild birds of every hue meet the eye of tho 
traveller in nearly ax. parts of the ^untry. 


How far is the nearest point from New-York or Boston? 2. How is it separated from 
Europe? Asia? What neck of land joins it to Asia ? 3. Is Africa well known? What 
of the inhabitants ? 4. What of the climate ? Houses? Dress? What of the negroes: 
6. What of other races ? Describe them. 7. How may Africa be considered ? State of 
tiia people ? 8. What of animals in Central Africa ? 


EGYPT. 


09 


CHAPTER XXXIX.— AFRICA CONTINUED. 

Early Sovereigns of Egypt. 



An Egyptian Temple, dedicated to the god Isis. 


1. The natives of Africa are supposed to be descended from Noah’f 
«on Ham, who went thither and settled in Egypt after the building 
of the tower of Babel, this country being near the land of Shinar. 
The kingdom of Egypt is very ancient, and was founded by Menes 
one of the children of Ham, 2188 B. C. In the Bible he is called 
Misraim. 

2. Egypt is bounded north by the Mediterranean Sea, east by the 
Red Sea, south by Nubia, and west by the desert. The Nile runs 
through the midst of Egypt, from the south to the north. This rivet 
overflows once a year, and thus fertilizes the country, for it very 
seldom rains in Egypt. 

3. Menes, or Misraim, the first king of Egypt, turned aside the 
Nile from its original channel, and built the city of Memphis where 
the river had formerly flowed. He was so great a monarch that the 
people worshipped him as a god after his death. 

4. The history of Egypt is very obscure during a considerable time 
after the reign of Menes. From the year 2084 to the year 1825 be- 
fore the Christian era, it was governed by rulers who led the lives of 
shepherds, and were therefore called shepherd kings. These kings 
were afterwards driven from Egypt. An Ethiopian woman, named 
Nitocris, became queen of this country, in the year 1678 before the 


Ch. XXXIX — 1. From whom are the natives of Africa descended? By whom and 
when wa. Egypt founded? What of Menes? 2. How is Egypt bounded? What of the 
Nile ? Does it often rain in Egypt ? 3. Where and by whom was Memphis built ? What 
was thought of Menes ? 4. What of the history of Egypt ? What of the shepherd kings ? 
What of Nitocris? 


SCHOOL HISTORY 


70 

Christian era. Her brother had been murdered by the Egyptian^ 
and she resolved to avenge him. 

5. For this purpose queen Nitocris built a palace under ground, and 
invited the murderers of her brother to a banquet. The subter- 
ranean hall, where the banquet was prepared, was brilliantly illumi- 
nated with torches. The guests were the principal men in the 
kingdom. 

6. The scene was magnificent, as they sat feasting along the table 
J!ut suddenly a rushing and roaring sound was heard overhead, and 
a deluge of water burst into the hall. Queen Nitocris had caused a 
river to flow through a secret passage, and it extinguished the torches, 
and drowned all the company at the banquet. 



r 


7. The most renowned monarch that ever reigned over Egypt was 
Sesostris. The date of his reign is not precisely known, but there is 
a carving in stone, lately found in Egypt among the ruins of an ancient 
oity, which is more than three thousand years old, and supposed to 
be a portrait of him. It is doubtless the oldest portrait in existence. 
This king formed the design of conquering the world, and set out 
from Egypt with more than half a million of foot soldiers, twenty- 
four thousand horsemen, and twenty-seven thousand armed chariots. 

8. His ambitious projects were partially successful. He made great 
conquests, and wherever he went he caused marble pillars to be erect- 
ed, and inscriptions to be engraved on them, so that future ages might 
not forget his renown. 

9. The following was the inscription on most of the pillars: — Se- 
sostris, KING OF KINGS, HAS CONQUERED THIS TERRITORY BY HIS ARMS* 

But the marble pillars have long ago crumbled into dust, or been bu- 
ried under the earth ; and the history of Sesostris is 'so obscure, that 
some writers have even doubted whether he ever made any conquests 
at all. 

10. Bu* nther writers assure us that he returned to Egypt after his 


5. How did she revenge her brother’s death? 7. What can you tel! of Sesostris? Wha» 
•»f his army? 9. What inscription was engraved on the marble pillars raised by Sesostris 
Are the pillars still standing ? What do some writers doubt? 



EGYPT. 


71 


wars, bringing with him a multitude of captives, and long trains of 
camels, laden with treasure, and that he then built magnificent tem- 
ples, and constructed canals and causeways. 

11. When Sesostris went to worship in the temple, he rode in a 
chariot which was drawn by captive kings. They were harnessed 
like horses, four abreast; and their royal robes trailed in the dust as 
they tugged the heavy chariot along. But at length the proud Sesos- 
tris grew old and blind. He could no longer look around him, and 
tee captive kings drawing his chariot, or kneeling at his footstool 
He then became utterly miserable, and committed suicide. 


CHAPTER XL. — AFRICA CONTINUED. 

Egyptian Architecture and Sculpture. 

1. The ancient history of Egypt is so obscure, and yet so full of 
wonderful tales, that we might doubt it altogether, and believe it but 
the marvellous invention of fanciful story-tellers, were it not for the 
vast ruins and stupendous monuments still to be found in different 
parts of the country. These show that many ages since, between 
three and four thousand years ago, this country was filled with mil- 
lions of people, and that there were cities here of the most wonder- 
ful magnificence. 



Ruins of Thebes. 


2 . Thebes appears to have been more magnificent than any other 
► *y, either in ancient or modem times. It was called the city of a 
fi.tndred gates; and such was the immense population, that through 
c&<h of these gates, in time of war, marched two hundred armed 
chariots, and two thousand soldiers. 

. 1 - u 

1 ). What do others say ? 11. How was the chariot of Sesostris drawn ? What was the 

fate of this despotic king? Ch. XL. — 1. What of the ancient history of Egypt ? Wlial 
of ruins and monuments? What do they prove? 2. What of Thebes? 


72 


8CH00L HISTORY. 


3. Thebes was ruined in the time of Cambyses, king of Persia, 
who lived about twenty-four hundred years ago. Yet the remains of 
tne city are still visible, scattered over a space of twenty-seven miles 
on each side of the Nile. Some of the pillars of the temples are 
eleven feet in diameter. 

4. One of the Egyptian kings caused his subjects to dig a grea: 
lake, forty-five miles in circumference, and almost as deep as the 
ocean. Another king constructed a labyrinth of marble, containing 
three thousand chambers, fifteen hundred of which were underground. 

5. In the upper chambers of this labyrinth were kept the sacred 
crocodiles, and all the other animals which the Egyptians worship- 
ped. Jn the subterranean chambers lay the dead kings of Egypt. 

6. The catacombs are likewise very wonderful. They are galleries 
hewn out of the rock, and extend a great way beneath the ground. 
The dead bodies of persons who died thousands of years ago are 
found in these catacombs, and they are nearly as well preserved now 
as when they were first buried. These are called mummies ; and 
some, supposed to be three thousand years old, have been brought to 
this country. 

7. Every body has heard of the pyramids of Egypt. These immense 
edifices are still standing on the banks of the Nile. The largest is 
five hundred feet high, and covers eleven acres of ground. 



8. The pyramids are so old that it is impossible to tell when they 
were erected, or by whom. It is generally supposed that the ancieir 
kings of Egypt intended them as their sepulchres, thinking that thus 
they should be famous for ever. But though the pyramids have not 
decayed, the names of those kings are forgotten. 

9. On a plain near Thebes are two enormous stone statues, some- 


what about the population of Thebes? 3. Who destroyed Thebes? Remains? Pil 
lars? 4. Describe the works of some of the kings. What of the labyrinth? 5. What 
w«*re kept, in the labvrinth ? 6. Describe the catacombs. What are mummies ? 8. Wha> 
el the pyamids ? What was the probable cause of their erection f 


# 


EGYPT. 


73 


what like a man and woman. These are fifty feet high. No one 
can look upon them but with wonder. 

10. The sphynx is one of the most curious among the Egyptian 
antiquities. It was originally the gigantic head of a woman, on the 
body of a lion ; but the lower part is now buried in the sand. The part 
which remains above ground is the head and neck. These are twen- 
ty-seven feet high, and are made of solid rock. At a distance, it 
looks as if a great flat-nosed woman were rising out of the sand. 



11. The ruins of the temple of Luxor, and forming a part of an- 
cient Thebes, are so grand as to strike the beholder with awe. The 
remains of one of the temples are perhaps the most remarkable relics 
of antiquity. 



Luxoi 


4 


74 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


12. At the time when they constructed these marvellous works, 
the ancient Egyptians possessed more learning and science than any 
other people. Their superior knowledge caused them to be looked 
upon as magicians by the people of other countries. 

13. Still the Egyptians had many absurd superstitions. Their 
chief god was Isis, and another deity was Osiris. Of these they 
made strange images, and worshipped them. Isis was greatly rever- 
enced, and the people dedicated many splendid temples to its wor- 
ship. A picture of one of these temples may be seen at page 6'9. 


CHAPTER XLI.— AFRICA CONTINUED. 

The Ptolemies and Queen Cleopatra. 

1. In the history of the Jews I have told of their bondage in Egypt, 
and of their miraculous escape. A long while afterwards, an Egyp- 
tian king, named Shishak, took Jerusalem, and robbed Solomon’s 
temple of its treasures. 

2 A very famous king of Egypt was named Amenophis. He is 
supposed to be the same with Memnon, in honor of whom a temple 
with a gigantic statue was erected, of which some remains are still 
to be seen at Thebes. This statue was said to utter a joyful sound 
at sunrise, and a mournful sound when the sun set. Some modern 
travellers imagine that they have heard it. This, however, is absurd. 

3. In the year 525 before the Christian era, Egypt was conquered 
by Cambyses, king of Persia. He compelled Psammenitus, who was 
then king of Egypt, to drink bulls’ blood. It operated as a poison, 
and caused his death. 

4. Three hundred and thirty-two years before the Christian era, 
Egypt was conquered by Alexander the Great, king of Macedon. 
Here he built a famous city, called Alexandria, which was for many 
centuries one of the most splendid places in the world. But the 
ancient city is in ruins, and modern Alexandria is far inferior to it. 

5. Alexander was buried at Alexandria, in a tomb cut out of one 
vast stone ; this has been carried to London within a few years, and 
may now be seen there. 

6. He appointed Ptolemy, one of his generals, to be ruler of the 
country. From Ptolemy were descended a race of kings, all of whom 
were likewise called Ptolemy. They reigned over Egypt two hundred 
and ninety-four years. The last of these kings was Ptolemy Dion- 
ysius, whose own wife made war against him. A battle was fought, 


12. What of the Egyptians at the time we are speaking of? How were they looked upon 
oy people of other countries ? 13. What of the superstitions of the Egyptians ? Isis and 

Osiris r Ch. XLI.— 1. Who was Shiskak ? What did he do ? 2. Who was Amenophis ? 
What of the statue of Memnon ? 3. When and by whom was Egypt conquered ? Fate of 
Psammenitus? 4. When did Alexander conquer Egypt ? What of Alexandria? 6. What 
of Ptolemy and his descendants? How long did they reign in Egypt? Who was Ptolemy 
Dionysius ? His wife ? 


EGYPT. 


75 

in which Ptolemy Dionysius was defeated. He attempted to escape, 
but was drowned in the Nile. His wife, whose name was Cleopatra, 
then became sole ruler of Egypt. 

7. She was one of the most beautiful women that ever lived, and 
her talents and accomplishments were equal to her personal beauty. 
But she was very wicked. Among other horrid crimes, Cleopatra 
poisoned her brother, who was only eleven years old. Yet, though 
all the world knew what an abandoned wretch she was, the greatest 
heroes could not or would not resist the enticements of her beauty, 

8. When Mark Antony, a Roman general, had defeated Brutus and 
Cassius, at Philippi, in Greece, he summoned Cleopatra to come to 
Cilicia, on the northeastern coast of the Mediterranean. He intended 
to punish her for having assisted Brutus. 

9. As soon as Cleopatra received the summons, she hastened to 
obey. She went on board a splendid vessel, which was richly adorned 
with gold. The sails were made of the costliest silk. Instead of 
rough, sunburnt sailors, the crew consisted of lovely girls, who rowed 
with silver oars ; and their strokes kept time to melodious music. 

10. Queen Cleopatra reclined on the deck, beneath a silken awn- 
ing. In this manner she went sailing along the river Cydnus. Her 
vessel was so magnificent, and she herself so lovely, that the whole 
spectacle appeared like a yision. 

11. Mark Antony was first warned of her approach by the smell 
of delicious perfumes, which the wind wafted from the silken sails 
of the vessel. He next heard the distant strains of music, and saw 
the gleaming of the silver oars. 

12. But when he beheld the beauty of the Egyptian queen, he 
thought of nothing else. Till Mark Antony met Cleopatra, he had 
been an ambitious man and a valiant warrior. But from that day 
forward, he was nothing but her slave. 

13. Owing to Cleopatra’s misconduct and his own, Antony was 
defeated by Octavius, another Roman general, at Actium, in Greece. 
He then killed himself, by falling on his sword. Cleopatra knew 
that if Octavius took her alive, he would carry her to Rome, and 
expose her to the derision of the populace. 

14. She resolved not to endure this ignominy. Now in Egypt there 
is a venomous reptile, called an asp, the bite of which is mortal, but 
not painful. Cleopatra applied one of these reptiles to her bosom. 
In a little while her body grew benumbed, and her heart ceased to 
beat ; and thus died the beautiful and wicked queen of Egypt. This 
event occurred thirty years before Christ. 

15. The story of queen Cleopatra is very instructive. It shows 
that a person on whom Heaven has bestowed the richest gifts may 
use them to cause mischief and misery to all around, and to bring 
ruin on himself. 


7. What of Cleopatra ? What cruelty did she commit ? What made Cleopatra irresisti 
bit? 8 . Who was Mark Antony? Why did he wish to punish Cleopatra ? Give an account 
of (he arrival of Cleopatra at Cilicia. 12. What was the character of Antony till he met 
Cleopatra? 13. Where was Antony defeated ? Who was Octavius ? Fate of Antony ? Why 
did Cleopatra determine to kill herself? 14. What caused her death i How long was thi* 
before Christ ? 


76 


8CH00L HISTORY. 


CHAPTER XLII.— AFRICA CONTINUED. 

Sequel of the Egyptian History. 

1. After the death of Cleopatra, Egypt became a province of the 
Roman empire ; and it continued to belong to that, and the portion ol 
t called the Eastern empire, till the year 640 after the Christian era. 
t was then conquered by the Saracens. It remained under theii 
overnment upwards of six centuries. 

2. The Saracen sovereigns were dethroned by the Mamelukes 
whom they had trained up to be their guards. The Mamelukes ruled 
Egypt till the year 1517, when they were conquered by the Turks. 
They kept possession of Egypt till the year 1798. It was then invaded 
by Napoleon Bonaparte, with an army of forty thousand Frenchmen. 

3. The Turks, ever since their conquest of Egypt had kept a body 
of Mamelukes in their service ; these made a desperate resistance. 
A battle was fought near the pyramids, in which many of them were 
slain, and others were drowned in the Nile. Not long after this vic- 
tory, Bonaparte went back to France, and left general Kleber in com- 
mand of the French army. 

4. General Kleber was a brave man, but a severe one, and his se- 
verity cost him his life. He had ordered an old Mussulman, named 
the Sheik Sada, to be bastinadoed on the soles of his feet. Shortly 
afterwards, when the general was in a mosque, a fierce Arab rushed 
upon him, and killed him with a dagger. 

5. In 1801, the English sent Sir Ralph Abercrombie with an army 
to drive the French out of Egypt. General Menou was then the 
French commander. Sir Ralph Abercrombie beat him at the battle 
of Aboukir, but was himself mortally wounded. 

6. In the course of the same year the French army sailed from 
Egypt back to France. The inhabitants lamented their departure 
for the French generals had ruled them with more justice and mod 
eration than their old masters, the Turks. Egypt is now governed by 
a Chief named Mehemet Ali, who bears the title of pacha, but the 
country is no longer a part of the Turkish empire. 

7. The present capital of Egypt is Grand Cairo. It is much infe- 
rior to what it was in former times, but still contains about three 
hundred thousand inhabitants. Alexandria, built by Alexander the 
Great, as I have before said, is now much reduced, but the ruins 
around it show that it was once a splendid city. There is no part of the 
world that seems more gloomy to a traveller than Egypt. The present 
aspect of the towns and cities is that of poverty in the midst of ruins, 
which speak of wealth and splendor that have long since departed. 

Ch. XLII. — 1. What was the state of Egypt from Cleopatra’s death to its subjugation by 
the Mamelukes ? 2. How long did the Mamelukes govern Egypt? When and how long 
did the Turks govern Egypt? What happened in 1798 ? 3. What battle was fought ? What 
of Bonaparte after the victory ? 4. What of General Kleber ? 5. What took place iu 1801 ? 
6. What happened in the same year ? Why were the Egyptians sorry to have the French 
leave them? How is Esm>t now governed ? How is the country considered? 7. What 
is the capital of Egypt ? What of Grand Cairo ? Population? What of Alexandria? How 
does Egypt appear to a traveller ? 


ETHIOPIA. 


77 


CHAPTER XLIIL— AFRICA CONTINUED. 

Summary of ^Ethiopian Matters. 

1. All the interior parts of Africa were anciently called ^Ethiopia., 
But, properly speaking, ^Ethiopia comprised only the countries now 
cailcd Nubia and Abyssinia. This region lies south of Egypt, and 
extends along the shore of the Red Sea. The first inhabitants oi 
./Ethiopia are supposed to have emigrated from Arabia the Happy, a 
part of Arabia. Their early history is almost unknown. 

2. ^Ethiopia, or at least a portion of it, was formerly called Sheba, 
and from thence it is supposed that the queen of Sheba went to visit 
Solomon. About thirty years ago, it is said that one of her descend- 
ants was king of Abyssinia. 

3. It used to be the custom to confine the ^Ethiopian princes on a 
high mountain, which was named Geshen. It was very high and 
steep, and looked like an enormous castle of stone. No person could 
ascend this mountain, or come down from it, unless he were raised or 
lowered by means of ropes. 

4. The princes lived on the summit of the mountain, in miserable 
huts. The greater part of them never came down till their dying 
day. But whenever the king died, one of the princes was summoned 
to the throne. Perhaps, however, he found himself no happier in the 
royal palace, than in his hut on the summit of Mount Geshen. 

5. The ^Ethiopians were believers in the Jewish religion till the 
midd]^ of the fourth century after the Christian era. Candace, the 
queen of the country, was then converted to Christianity, and her sub- 
jects followed her example. 

6. The inhabitants of ^Ethiopia, or Abyssinia, are still called Chris- 
tians, but their mode of worship is mixed up with many Jewish prac- 
tices. They also worship the Virgin Mary and the saints, like the 
Roman Catholics. 

7. The people of this part of Africa are not generally negroes. 
They are of an olive complexion, and have long hair and agreeable 
features. But in the northeastern part of Abyssinia, there is a race 
of negroes called Shangallas. 

8. These negroes have been described as having faces resembling 
apes, and as being little more intelligent than the monkey tribe. 
They have no houses, but sleep under the trees, and sometimes bur- 
row in caves. The Abyssinians hunt them as they would wild 
beasts. 


Ch. XLIII. — 1. What was anciently called Ethiopia ? In which direction is it from 
Egypt? Where was Ethiopia properly speaking situated ? Who were the first inhabit- 
ants of Ethiopia ? 2. What was .Ethiopia formerly called ? What of the queen of 
Sheba 5 3. What was once the custom? 4. How did the princes live? What happened 
when the king died ? 5. Till what time did the Ethiopians believe in the Jewish reli- 

gion ? What of Candace ? 6. What of the worship of the people of Ethiopia at the pre 
•ent time ? 7 What of their personal appearance / What of the Shangellas ? 8. Describe 
them. 


7 * 


78 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


CHAPTER XLIV.— AFRICA CONTINUED. 

Origin of the Barbary States and their Piracies on the 
Christians. 

1. The Barbary states are Morocco, Algiers, Tunis, and Tripoli. 
They are bounded north by the Mediterranean Sea, east and south by 
the desert, and west by the Atlantic Ocean. These countries were 
inhabited in the time of the Romans. Morocco was called Maurita- 
nia ; and Algiers Numidia. These regions were first settled by colo- 
nies from Phoenicia, Greece, and other countries. 

2. In this region stood the celebrated city of Carthage in ancient 
times. Its site was about ten miles northeast of the city of Tunis. 
It was founded by some Phoenicians, eight hundred and sixty-nine 
years before the Christian era. The Phoenicians, as I have told you, 
were the first people who engaged in commerce, and founded colo- 
nies for the purpose of carrying on trade. 

3. In the history of Rome I shall tell you how Carthage was de- 
stroyed. The Romans erected a new city where it had formerly 
stood. This was conquered and destroyed by the Saracens, who 
then built the city of Tunis. In the year 1574, Tunis was seized by 
the Turks. 

4. The city of Algiers was built by the Saracens, in the year 944- 

The government, called the regency of Algiers, was founded in 1518^ 
by two Turks, named Horuc and Hagradin. They were brothers, 
and both bore the name of Barbarossa, or Red-Beard. # 

5. The country now called Morocco was conquered by the Sara- 
cens about the same time with the other Barbary states. So also 
was Tripoli. All these states, except Morocco, afterwards fell into 
the hands of the Turks. 

6. During a long period, the Barbary states were in the habit of 
fitting out vessels to cruise against the ships of every nation. Their 
prisoners were sold as slaves, and never returned to their own coun- 
try, unless a high ransom were paid for them. 

7. The Americans were the first who made any considerable resis- 
tance to these outrages. In the; year 1803, commodore Preble sailed 
to the Mediterranean Sea with a small American fleet. He intended 
to attack Tripoli ; but one of his frigates, the Philadelphia, got aground 
in the harbor. 

8. The Turks took possession of the Philadelphia. But one night, 
lieutenant Decatur entered the harbor of Tripoli, and rowed toward 
the captured vessel, with only twenty men. He leaped on board, 


Ch. XLIV. — 1. What are the Barbary states ? How are they bounded ? 2. Where did 
ancient Carthage stand ? Who founded it ? 3. Who erected a new city ? What did the Sa- 
racens do ? When was Tunis seized by the Turks? 4. When and by whom was Algiers 
built? What was done in 1518? Who were called Barbarossa ? 5. What of M .rocco and 
Tripoli ? Which of the Barbary states fell afterwards into the hands of the Turks ? 6 
What were these states in the habit of doing ? 7. What was done in 1803 ? What of com 
modore Preble? 8. What of the Philadelphia ? What did Decatur do ? 


BARBARY STATES. 


79 


followed by his crew, and killed all the Turks, or drove them over- 
board. The Philadelphia was then set on fire. 

9. After this exploit, commodore Preble obtained some gun-boats 
from the king of Naples, and with these and the American vessels, he 
made an attack on the fortifications of Tripoli. The bashaw of Tri- 
poli was forced to give up his prisoners. 

10. In the year 1815, commodore Decatur (the same who had 
burnt the Philadelphia) was sent with a fleet against Algiers. He 
captured their largest vessels, and compelled the Algerines, and the 
Tripolitans also, to agree never more to make slaves of Americans. 

11. In 1816, Algiers was battered by an English fleet under the 
command of lord Exmouth. This was the severest chastisement that 
the Algerines had ever received at that period. But in 1830, the 
French sent a large naval and military force against Algiers, com- 
manded by Marshal Beaumont. The war continued for seventeen 
years. At length the country was conquered, and Algiers, under the 
name of Algeria, is now a province of France. 


CHAPTER XLV.— AFRICA CONTINUED. 

Fables and Facts about Africa. 

1. Most of the other regions of Africa can hardly be said to have 
any history. The inhabitants possess no written records, and cannot 
tell what events have happened to their forefathers. 

2. The ancients had very curious notions about Africa ; for they 
had visited only the northern parts, and contented themselves with 
telling incredible stories about the remainder. They supposed that 
towards the eastern shore of the continent, there were people without 
noses, and others who had three or four eyes apiece. 

3. In other parts of Africa there were said to be men without 
heads, but who had eyes in their breasts. Old writers speak also of 
a nation whose king had a head like a dog. There was likewise said 
to be a race of giants, twice as tall as common men and women. 

4. But the prettiest of all these fables is the story of the Pigmies. 
These little people were said to be about a foot high, and were be- 
lieved to dwell near the source of the river Nile. Their houses were 
built something like birds’ nests, and their building materials were 
clay, feathers, and egg-shells. 

5. These Pigmies used to wage terrible wars with the cranes. An 
immense army of them would set out on an expedition, some mounted 
on rams and goats, and others on foot. 

6. When an army of the Pigmies encountred an army of the cranes, 


9. What attack was made upon Tripoli ? What of the bashaw ? 10. What was done in 

the year 1815? What agreement did the Tripolitans and Algerines make ? 11. When 

was Algiers battered ? What took place in 1830 ? What of Algiers now ? Ch. XLV.— 
1. What of the inhabitants of most parts of Africa ? 2. What were the ideas of the an- 
cient* concerning Africa ? 4. What is the prettiest of all these fabulous stories ? Give 
some account of the Pigmies. 


80 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


great valor was displayed on both sides. The cranes would rush for- 
ward to the charge flapping their wings, and sometimes one of them 
would snatch up a Pigmy in his beak, and carry him away captive. 

7. But the Pigmies brandished their little swords and spears, and 
generally succeeded in putting the enemy to flight. Whenever they 
had a chance, they would break the eggs of the cranes, and kill the 
unfledged young ones without mercy. 

8. Until within a few years, the moderns have not known much 
more about the interior of Africa than the ancients did. They have 
now acquired considerable knowledge respecting it ; but the subject 
belongs rather to geography than history. Nearly the whole of the 
central part of Africa, through which the river Niger flows, is called 
Nigritia, or Negro-land. It is inhabited by several different nations. 

9. The principal city of Nigritia is called Timbuctoo. No white 
people have ever visited it, except one American, one Englishman, 
and one Frenchman. The name of the latter was M. Caillie. He 
was there in 1827, and describes the city as built in the shape of a 
triangle, and situated eight miles from the Niger. 

10. The houses are only one story high, and are built of round 
bricks baked in the sun. The poor people and slaves dwell in huts 
of straw, shaped something like bee-hives. All around the city, there 
is an immense plain of yellowish white sand. 

11. There are English and French settlements on the western coast 
of Africa. There was formerly a Dutch settlement at the southern 
extremity of the continent, but the English have had possession of it 
since the year 1 806. This is called Cape Town, and is situated at 
the cape of Good Hope. 


CHAPTER XL VI.— AFRICA CONTINUED. 

History of the Slave-Trade. 

1. The most painful part of the history of Africa is that which be- 
longs to the slave-trade. From the earliest ages, when human soci- 
ety was yet in a rude state, it was the custom to make slaves of those 
who were taken in war. This practice was continued in after times, 
and thus, for thousands of years, slavery was established in nearly all 
the nations of the earth. 

2. But in those countries where the Christian religion prevailed, 
slavery came into general disuse. In 1482, however, the Portuguese 
began the horrid traffic of the slave-trade, and the English followed 


8. What knowledge have the moderns of the interior of Africa? Where is Nigritia*' 
What of the inhabitants ? 9. What of Timbuctoo ? Who have visited it ? What doei 
M. Caillie say of it? Describe it. 11. Wiiat of settlements ? What of Cape Town? 
How long have the English had possession of it. Ch. XLVI. — 1. What is painful in the 
history of Africh ? What was the custom in the earliest ages ? How was slavery estab- 
lished? ‘2. What effect had the Christian religion upon slavery ? When did the Portuguese 
engage in the slave trade ? The English ? What has happened till the present time r 


A F R I CA . 


81 


m 1563. From that time, it has continued to the present day, 
though most nations have made laws against it, and it has now nearly 
ceased. 

3. For at least two hundred years, this traffic was carried on to a 
great extent. The custom was for vessels to go to the western coast 
of Africa, and purchase of the African princes such prisoners as they 
had for sale. Sometimes, however, the captains of the vessels would 
rob the people of their children, or they would go on shore with a 
body of armed men, and carry away the inhabitants of a whole 
village. 

4. The poor negroes thus taken from their homes, and separated 
forever from all they held dear, were crowded into the vessels, where 
they were often half-starved, and where they sometimes suffered from 
disease, or unkind treatment. Such was frequently their distress, 
that they would jump into the sea, or beat out their own brains in 
despair. 

5. Millions of these poor negroes have been taken from their homes 
and probably more than half of those who entered the ships, from the 
beginning of the trade to this day, have perished before they reached 
the countries to which they were bound. It is by this cruel trade 
that slavery has been introduced into various parts of America, and 
the West Indies. 


CHAPTER XLVII.— AFRICA CONTINUED. 

Chronology of Africa. 

1. The following table exhibits the dates of the most remarkable 
events in the history of Africa. It may be well to compare this with 
the chronology of Asia, by which you may see what was doing in 
that quarter, while these events were happening in Africa. 


Egypt settled by Misraim 2188 

Nitocris reigned queen of Egypt 1678 

Departure of the Israelites from Egypt 1491 

Cambyses conquers Egypt 525 

“ destroys Thebes . 520 

Alexander conquers Egypt 332 

Death of Cleopatra . 30 

A. D. 

Egypt conquered by the Saracens .«•••••••. 670 

Algiers built 944 

Mamelukes came into power 1250 

The Portuguese begin to traffic in slaves 1482 

EgvDt conquered by the Turks 1517 


3. How long was the traffic carried on ? What was the custom ? What war done by 
captains of vessels? 4. Describe the state of the poor negroes. 5, How has slavery been 
introduced into America and the West Indies? 

I 


82 


SCHOOL HISTORY, 


A government founded at Algiers, called the regency of Algiers 1518 

The English begin to traffic in slaves 1563 

Tunis seized by the Turks 1574 

Napoleon invades Egypt 1798 

Sir Ralph Abercrombie drives the French out of Egypt . . . 1801 

Tripoli attacked by commodore Preble 1803 

The English take Cape Town from the Dutch 1806 

Commodore Decatur batters Algiers 1815 

Lord Exmouth attacks Algiers 1816 

Caillie, a Frenchman, goes to Timbuctoo 1827 

Algiers taken by marshal Beaumont 1830 


CHAPTER XLVIIL— EUROPE. 

Introductory Remarks on its Geography and other 
Matters . 



1. Europe is considered the third quarter of the globe. It is the 
smallest in extent, being about one quarter as large as Asia, one 
third as large as Africa, and about one third larger than the whole 
United States. It is a part of the eastern continent, and is only sepa- 
rated from Asia by the Ural Mountains. It is separated from Africa 
by the Mediterranean Sea. At the straits of Gibraltar, the distance 
from Europe to Africa is but twenty-one miles. 

2. But although Europe is the smallest of the four quarters of the 
globe, it has nearly three hundred millions of inhabitants, and is much 
superior to Asia, Africa, and most parts of America, in civilization. 
It abounds in fine cities, fine roads, good houses, useful manufactures, 


C'h. XL VII. — The teacher will here put such questions on the Chronology as he deem* 
proper. Ch. XLVUI. — 1. Which is the third quarter of the globe? The smaller 


107 ll7hon.E.127£roml37'Waah.l47 


EUROPE 


88 


Map of Europe. 



Questions on the Map . — Tell the direction of the following places from London — France ; 
Austria ; Asia Minor Moscow ; Finland ; Turkey ; Italy ; Norway ; Warsaw ; Caspian Seta • 
Asia ; Paris ; Ireland. 


10 London 


84 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


and most other things that are necessary to the comfort and Lappi* * 
ness of mankind. 

3. In all parts of Europe except Turkey, the religion of Jesus 
Christ prevails. If you were to travel in Asia or Africa, you would 
meet with no churches, or only now and then one, where the true 
God is worshipped. But you would see a great many mosques dedi- 
cated to the false religion of Mahomet, and a great many temples 
where the people bow down to idols of wood, stone, or metal. 

4. But in Europe, the traveller everywhere meets with churches 
and these show that the people are Christians. In Europe, also, 
there are many colleges, academies, and schools, which prove that 
the people set a high value upon education. It is a fact which I 
wish you to remember, that in all parts of the world where you find 
churches, you find that the people are more or less advanced in civi- 
lization and the arts which render mankind happy. 

5. This may show to us that the Christian religion tends to make 
people wiser and happier ; and this is rendered still more clear by 
the fact that in all those countries where the Christian religion is un- 
known, the greater part of the people are ignorant, degraded, and 
miserable. All false religions tend to injure mankind ; the true reli- 
gion tends to the improvement of mankind. How important is it, 
then, that every individual should be a real Christian. 

6. As Europe is the smallest of the four quarters of the earth, so 
it was behind Asia and Africa in being settled and civilized. Long 
after the Assyrian empire had risen to great power and splendor, long 
after Babylon and Nineveh had flourished on the banks of the Eu- 
phrates, long after Egypt had become a mighty kingdom, long after 
Thebes, Memphis, and other magnificent cities had risen upon the 
borders of the Nile, Europe continued to be inhabited only by wan- 
dering tribes of savages. 

7. Greece was the first portion of Europe that was settled. About 
the time that Moses led the Israelites out of Egypt, the Greeks began 
to build houses, found cities, and emerge from the savage into a more 
civilized state. By degrees they advanced in knowledge and refine- 
ment, and at length became the most polished people in the world. 

8. Afterwards Rome, situated in Italy, became a mighty city, and 
the Roman people extended their empire over the greater part of 
Europe, and the most civilized portions of Asia and Africa. Carthage, 
Egypt, Greece, Asia Minor, Palestine, Syria, and other Asiatic coun- 
tries, bowed to the Roman yoke. 


How large is Europe compared with Asia ? Africa ? The United States ? How is it sepa 

* rated from Asia? From Africa? How far is the nearest point of Europe from Africa? 
2. What of Europe ? In what does it abound? 3. What of religion in Europe ? What 
of Asia and Africa? What of churches ? Mosques? Temples? 4. What does the tra- 
veller meet in Europe ? What do churches show ? What do colleges, schools, &c. show ? 
What do you find where there are churches? 5. What effect has the Christian religion? 
What of countries where the Christian religion is unknown? What effect have false reli* 
cions? What of the true religion ? Why should every person be areal Christian > 6. 
What of Europe ? What was the condition of Europe until after the empires of Asia and 
Egypt had long flourished ? 7. What part of Europe was first inhabited ? About what 
time did the Greeks begin to emerge from the savage to civilized state ? Progress of the 
Greeks? 8, What of Rowe ? What countries became subject to Rome ? 


EUROPE. 


85 


9. Rome was the most splendid empire that the world has ever 
seen. But as it crushed other kingdoms beneath its foot, so, in turn, 
imperial Rome was itself trampled down by the northern nations ol 
Europe. Great ignorance followed this event, and the different 
nations and tribes of Europe seemed like broken and crushed limbs 
and members of the great empire, almost without life. 

10. But these separate fragments of the human family grew up in 
due time to be separate nations, and these advanced in knowledge 
.rntil they reached the condition in which we now find them. 

11. Europe may be divided into two parts, the northern and south- 
ern. In the former, the climate is about as cold as it is in our 
middle and eastern States, in the latter, it is about as warm as in 
the southern States. The principal kingdoms in the northern sec- 
tion of Europe are Russia, Norway, Sweden, Prussia, several German 
states, Denmark, Holland, Belgium, Switzerland, France, and Great 
Britain. 

12. Among the southern kingdoms of Europe are Portugal, Spain, 
Italy, Greece, and Turkey. In these latter countries the soil is gene- 
rally fertile, and here grapes, olives, oranges, lemons, melons, and 
other delicious fruits, are abundant. 

13. Here, too, all the wants of man for food are easily supplied, 
and so warm and gentle is the climate, that the people do not find it 
necessary to build tight houses, and put on thick clothing, and pro- 
vide stores against the winter ; yet it is remarkable, that where nature 
has done so much, the people think it hardly necessary to do anything, 
and consequently they are less industrious, less comfortable, and less 
happy, than in more cold and severe climates. 

14. In the northern parts of Europe, the people find it necessary to 
cultivate the soil with care, and lay up in summer a store of provi- 
sions against the long, cold winter. They build themselves good 
houses, they furnish them with many convenient articles, and thus, by 
their industry and care, they live more happily than those who inha- 
bit the gentler climes of the south. 

15. The wild animals of Europe resemble those of this country, 
though they are in some respects different. The trees, plants, shrubs, 
and flowers, are similar to those we find here, though not exactly the 
same. 

16. If you were to go to Europe, you would everywhere feel that 
you were in a strange land, but still many things would remind you 
of your own dear home in America. But if you were to go to Asia 
or Africa, the houses, the fields, the dress of the people, and all their 
manners and customs, would impress you with the idea that you 
were in a strange land, far, very far, from your native country. 


9. What was Rome? What happened to the empire ? What followed the destruction 
©f the Roman empire? 10. What of the several nations of Europe? 11. How may Eu- 
rope be divided ? Climate in northern Europe ? Southern Europe ? Principal nation* 
of northern Europe ? Direction of each of these from England ? 12. The southern king- 
doms of Europe ? Direction of each of these from England ? 13. Climate in southern 

Europe ? Effect of the climate upon the people ? 14. What of the northern parts of Eu- 
rope? Condition of the people ? 15. Wild animals of Europe? Vegetation? 16. 

What if you were to go to Europe ? Asia ? Africa ? 

8 


86 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


CHAPTER XLIX.— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

About Greece ; where it is situated ; Appearance of the 
Country ; Climate. 

1. Greece is a small strip of land extending into the Mediterra- 
nean Sea. It lies almost exactly east of New York, at the distance 
of about five thousand miles. It is nearly at an equal distance from 
Asia Minor on the east, and Italy on the west. 

2. Greece is bounded on the north by Macedonia, which is now a 
part of Turkey ; on every other side it is bounded by the sea. To 
the south and east of it are a great number of islands, some of which 
are extremely beautiful. 

3. Several of them have towns and cities upon them, and one, 
called Antiparos, is remarkable for a grotto beneath the earth, which 
appears like a beautiful palace. When lighted up with lamps, it 
seems a vast hall, with a thousand pillars and ornaments of silver. 

4. Some of the islands of Greece have been thrown up from the 
sea, and others which formerly existed have disappeared. These 
strange things have been caused by volcanic fires under the sea. 
Nothing can be more wonderful than the scenes which have some- 
times been exhibited by these convulsions of nature. _ 

5. In the southern part of Greece, and among the islands, the cli- 
mate is as mild as in Virginia, and here the country abounds in all 
sorts of delicious fruits. In the northern part, the climate is some- 
what colder. 

6. If you were to travel through Greece, you would discover that it 
is naturally very beautiful. Along the shores, you would meet with 
many little bays and harbors, and you would easily believe that the 
people living there would be tempted by the placid water to become 
seamen. You would accordingly find a large portion of the inhabit- 
ants to be seafaring people. 

7. In the interior of the country you would meet with lofty moun- 
tains. whose tops in winter are covered with snow. You would meet 
with smiling valleys, bright, rapid streams, and steep hill-sides cov- 
ered with olive-groves, vineyards, and fig-trees. 

8. You would discover that the people of the present day live in 
miserable villages or towns, all wearing an aspect of poverty and 
decay. But you would often meet with the ruins of temples and other 
edifices, built by the ancient Greeks two or three thousand years ago. 

9. These would show you, that, though the modern Greeks appear 
to be a degraded people, yet the former inhabitants of this country 
were among the most remarkable people that ever lived. It is of 
these I am now going to tell you. 

Ch. XLIX. — 1. What is Greece? Direction and distance from New York? In what 
direction is it from Asia Minor? From Laly ? 2. How is Greece bounded on the northr 
East? South? West? What of the islands ? 3 What of Antiparos ? 4. Whatofvolca 
nic islands ? 5. Climate in the southern part of Greece? Northern? 6. What of the 
shores of Greece ? To what pursuits are many of the present Greeks devoted? 7. What 
of the interior of Greece ? 8. What of the present inhabitants of Greece ? What of ruin* 
of temples, &c. ? 9. What would these ruins prove ? 


GREECE. 


87 


Map of Ancient Greece and Asia Minor. 



Questions on the Map . — How was ancient Greece bounded? Tell the direction of the 
following places from Athens; Byzantium; Crete; Argos; Macedonia; Sparta; Thebes; 
Olympia* Rhodes; Naxos; Marathon; TroasorTroy. 



88 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


CHAPTER L.-EUROPE CONTINUED. 

The Extent of Greece. First Settlement of the Country . 

1. Though Greece is one of the most famous countries on the face 
of the globe, it is not very extensive; its boundaries varied at differ- 
ent times, but it never exceeded four hundred miles in length, and 
about one hundred and fifty in width. That portion to which the 
name of Greece is properly applied, was not much larger than the 
State of New York. 

2. I must now carry you back to the first settlement of this coun- 
try, which took place more than four thousand years ago. When 
the human race was scattered from the tower of Babel, it is supposed 
that the family of Japheth, Noah’s youngest son, travelled from Asia 
into Europe. As Greece lay nearer to the land of Shinar than the 
other parts of Europe, it was probably settled first. 

3. The Greeks themselves believed that their ancestors had sprung 
up out of the earth. The first inhabitants were mere savages. They 
dwelt in wretched huts, and fed on acorns. Their garments were the 
skins of wild beasts. 

4. There are so many fables about the early history of Greece, that 
I shall pass very briefly over the first three or four centuries. Ce- 
crops, an Egyptian, seems to have been the first who introduced 
civilization among the Greeks. He came with a number of his coun- 
trymen, and founded the city of Athens. This event took place about 
fifteen hundred and fifty-six years before the Christian era. 

5. Thirty or forty years afterwards, Cadmus came from Phoenicia 
and built the city of Thebes. He was one of the greatest benefac- 
tors of the Greeks, for he taught them the cultivation of the vine, the 
manufacture of metals, and the use of the alphabet. 

6. Other parts of Greece were also settled by colonies from foreign 
nations. The country then consisted of a number of small kingdoms, 
which had little or no connection with one anothor. These were fre- 
quently at war among themselves. 

7. Twelve of these little kingdoms, or states, soon united them- 
selves into a confederacy. Their deputies held a meeting twice a 
year, in order to consult respecting the welfare of the country. They 
were called the council of the Amphyctions. By means of this coun- 
cil, the different states were kept at peace with each other, and were 
united against foreign enemies. 

Ch. L. — 1. What of the extent of Greece? Its greatest length? Width? 2. How 
long since Greece was first settled ? Who are supposed to have been the first inhabitants 
of Greece ? In which direction was Greece from the land of Shinar ? From Egypt ? 
8. What did the Greeks believe of their ancestors? What of the first inhabitants of 
Greece? 4. Who first introduced civilization among the Greeks ? What city was founded 
by Cecrops ? When did this take place ? In what part of Greece was Athens ? Does 
Athens still exist ? Ans. Yes ; but the modern town is very mean, compared with ancient 
Athens. The ruins around it are very splendid. 5. What of Cadmus? In which direction 
was Thebes from Athens? N. B. You must remember that there was a famous city in 
Egypt named Thebes. 6. How were other parts of Greece settled ? What of Greece at 
this time ? 7. What did twelve of the Grecian states do ? Wliat of the Amphyctionic coun 
cil i ; What effect had this council? 


GREECE. 


89 

8. One of the famous events of Grecian history was the Argonautic 
expedition. It is said that a prince named Jason, with a company of 
his friends, sailed to Colchis, which lay eastward of the Black Sea. 
Their object was to find a wonderful ram with a fleece of gold; but 
the Avhole story is supposed by some to be a fable. 

9. The Trojan war was still more famous than the expedition in 
search of the golden fleece. Troy was a large city on the Asiatic 
side of the Hellespont, which is now called the Dardanelles. Paris, 
the son of the Trojan king, had stolen away the wife of Menelaus, a 
Greek prince. 

10. All the Grecian kings combined together to punish this offence. 
They sailed to Troy in twelve hundred vessels, and took the city after 
a seige of ten years. This event is supposed to have occurred eleven 
hundred and ninety-three years before the Christian era. 

11. But most historians are of opinion that the Trojan war was a 
much less important affair than Homer has represented it to be. 
Poets do not always tell the truth ; and Homer was the father and 
chief of poets. He was a blind old man and used to wander about 
the country, reciting his verses. 


CHAPTER LI. — EUROPE CONTINUED. 

The Grecian Lawgivers. 

1. One of the principal states of Greece was called Sparta or Lace- 
daemon. It was founded by Lelex, 1516, B. C. It received a code of 
laws from Lycurgus, who lived nearly nine centuries before Christ. 
He was strict and severe, but wise and upright. 

2. Lycurgus ordered that all the Spartans should eat together at 
public tables. The reason of this law was, that the rich citizens 
might not feast luxuriously at home, but that rich and poor should 
fare alike. As for the children, they were not allowed any thing to 
eat, unless they could steal it. This wicked custom was adopted 
with the idea that it would train up the young Spartans to be cun- 
ning in war. 

3. In order that the people might not be avaricious, Lycurgus for- 
bade any gold or silver to be coined into money. All the money was 
made of iron. It could not very easily be carried in the pocket, for a 
Spartan dollar weighed as much as fifty pounds. 

4. The children were all brought up at the public expense. They 
Were allowed to stand near the dinner-tables and listen to the wise 
conversation of their parents. The Spartans were very anxious that 
their children should abhor drunkenness. 


8. What of the Argonautic expedition? 9. What of the Trojan war ? 11. What of Ho- 

mer? Ch. LI. — 1. What of Sparta? Laws? When did Lycurgus live ? What was his charac- 
ter ? 2. Why did Lycurgus wish the Spartans to eat in public? What of the children ? 
Why were they encouraged tc steal ? 3. What laws were made respecting money ? What 

of a Spartan dollar ? 4. Hew were children brought up ? 


90 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


5. They showed them the disgusting effects of tr.is pernicious vice, 
by causing their slaves to drink intoxicating liquors. When the chil- 
dren had witnessed the ridiculous conduct of the drunken slaves, they 
were careful never to reduce themselves to so degraded a condition. 

6. When Lycurgus had completed his code of laws, he left Sparta. 
Previous to his departure, he made the people swear that they would 
violate none of the laws till he should return. But he was resolved 
never to return. 

7. He committed suicide by starving himself to death ; and his 
ashes were thrown into the sea by his command, so that the Spar- 
tans might not bring back his dead body. Thus, as Lycurgus never 
could return, the Spartans were bound by their oath to keep his laws 
for ever. 

8. They did keep them during five hundred years ; and, all that 
time, the Spartans were a brave, patriotic, and powerful people. 
Many of their customs, however, belonged rather to a savage than a 
civilized nation. 

9. Athens, had two celebrated lawgivers, Draco and Solon. The 
laws of Draco were so extremely severe that they were said to be 
written with blood, instead of ink. He punished even the smallest 
offences with death. His code was soon abolished. 

10. Solon’s laws were much milder. Almost all of them were wise 
and good laws, and would have been advantageous to the people. 
But the Athenians had so much fickleness and levity, tfiat they were 
continually proposing alterations in them. 

11. Athens was at this time a republic; which is, you know, a 
government carried on by persons chosen by the people ; but soon 
after Solon had made his laws, the supreme power was usurped by 
Pisistratus, an ambitious citizen. He and his sons ruled Athens fifty 
years. 


CHAPTER LII. — EUROPE CONTINUED. 

War with Persia. 

1. About five centuries before the Christian era, Darius, king of 
Persia, made war against Greece. His generals invaded the country 
with a fleet of six hundred vessels, and half a million of men. There 
were scarcely any troops to oppose them, except ten thousand Athe- 
nians. 

2. Darius felt so certain of conquering Greece, that he had sent 
great quantities of marble with his army. He intended that it should 

5. How were they taught to abhor drunkenness ? 6. What did Lycurgus make the Spar 
tans swear before he went away ? 7. What was the fate of the Spartan lawgiver 9 
8. How long did the Spartans keep his laws ? 9. What of Draco and Solon ? The laws ol' 
Draco ? 10. What of Solon’s laws ? The Athenians ? 11. What was the government of 

Athens ? Who usurped the supreme power ? What of the government of Athens for fifty 
years? Ch. LII. — 1. When did Darius make war against Greece ? What of the Persian 
force? The Athenian? 2. What of marble ? What did Darius command? 


EUROPE. 


91 

be carved into pillars and triumphal arches, and other trophies of vic- 
tory. He had also commanded his generals to send all the Athenians 
to Persia in chains. 

3. The Athenian general was named Miltiades. He led his little 
army against the immense host of the Persians, and encountered them 
at Marathon. This was a small town on the seashore, about fifteen 
miles northeast of Athens. 

‘4. While their countrymen were fighting, the aged people, the 
women, and children remained at Athens in the utmost anxiety. If 
Miltiades were to lose the battle, they knew that the Persians would 
chase his routed army into the city, and bum it to ashes. 

5. Suddenly a soldier, covered with blood, ran into the market- 
place of the city. He was sorely wounded ; but he had come all the 
way from the army to bring the news. He was ghastly pale, and 
the people feared that the Persians had won the day, and that the 
soldier was a fugitive. 

6. They gathered round him, eagerly asking about Miltiades and 
the army. The soldier leaned heavily upon his spear. He seemed 
too much exhausted to give utterance to the news he had brought. 

7. But, exerting all his strength, he cried out, “ Rejoice my°coun- 
trymen ! The victory is ours !” And, with that exulting shout, he fell 
down dead. 

8. The Athenians showed themselves ungrateful to the brave Mil- 
iades. All that he demanded as a reward for rescuing his native 
and from slavery, was a crown of olive leaves, which was esteemed 
a mark of honor among the Greeks. But they refused to give him 
«ne ; and he was afterwards condemned, on some frivolous pretence, 
10 pay a fine of fifty talents. As Miltiades had not so much money in 
the world, he perished in prison. 

9. After the battle of Marathon, the Persians were driven out of 
Greece, and Darius died while he was preparing to invade the coun- 
try again. His son Xerxes renewed the war. In the history of Per- 
sia, I have already told of the invasion of Greece by Xerxes with two 
millions of men, and of the misfortunes which befell him there 


CHAPTER LIII.— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

Affairs of Athens. 

1. After the Persian war, Cimon, Aristides, and Pericles were the 
three principal men of Athens. Pericles at length became the chief 
person in the republic. Athens was never more flourishing than 
while he was at the head of the government. 

3. Who was the Athenian general ? Where was Marathon ? 4. What of those who re- 
mained at Athens ? 5. What messenger was sent from Marathon ? Which way is Mara- 
thon from Athens ? From Sparta ? 7. What news did the messenger bring ? 8. How did 

the Athenians treat Miltiades ? His fate ? 9. What of the Persians after the battle of’ 

Marathon? What of Darius? Xerxes? What may you read in the history of Persia? 
Ch. LIII. — L Who were the three principal men of Athens ? What of Pericles ? 


92 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


2. He adorned the city with magnificent edifices, and rendered it 
famous for learning, poetry, and beautiful works of art, such as tem- 
ples, statues, and paintings. But the Athenians were fickle, and gen- 
erally ungrateful to their public benefactors; and they sometimes ill 
treated Pericles. 

3. In the latter part of his administration, a terrible plague broke 
out in Athens. Many of the citizens fell down and died, while pass- 
ing through the streets. Dead bodies lay in heaps, one upon another. 

4. The illustrious Pericles was one of the victims of this pestilence. 
When he lay at the point of death, his friends praised him for the 
glorious deeds which he had achieved. “ It is my greatest glory,” 
replied Pericles, “ that none of my acts have caused a citizen of 
Athens to put on mourning.” 

5. Three years before the death of Pericles, a war had commenced 
between Athens and Sparta. These were now the two principal 
states of Greece, and they had become jealous of each other’s great- 
ness. A fierce war followed, in which all the states of that part of 
Greece called Peloponnesus were engaged. This bloody strife lasted 
twenty-eight years. 

6. In the course of this war, Alcibiades made a conspicuous figure 
among the Athenians. He was the handsomest and most agreeable 
man in Athens. At one period he was greatly beloved by the people, 
and possessed almost unlimited power. But he was ambitious and 
destitute of principle. 

7. He was the cause of much trouble, not only in his native city, 
but all over Greece. At last, when he had lost the good-will of 
every-body, he retired to a small village in Phrygia, in Asia Minor, 
and dwelt there with a woman named Timandra. 

8. His enemies sent a party of assassins to murder him. These set 
fire to the house in which he lived. Alcibiades was a brave man, 
and he rushed out, sword in hand, to fight the assassins. But they 
stood at a distance, and pierced him through with javelins. They 
then went away, leaving Timandra to bury him. 

9. The Peloponnesian war brought great misfortunes upon the 
Athenians. The Spartans conquered them, and burnt the city; and 
while this work of destruction was going forward, the victors caused 
gay tunes of music to be played. 

10. The Athenians were now placed under the government of 
thirty Spartan captains. These were called the Thirty Tyrants of 
Athens ; but they held their power only three years. Thrasybulus, 
a patriotic Athenian, then incited his countrymen to regain their 
freedom. 

11. The thirty tyrants were expelled; and Thrasybulus was re- 

2. What did he do for Athens ? What was the general character of the Athenians * 
3 . What of the plague ? 4. What did Pericles say on his death-bed? 5. What was beguo 
three years before the death of Pericles ? What of Athens and Sparta ? How long did the 
Peloponnesian war last ? What part of Greece was called Peloponnesus? What states 
were included in the Peloponnesian ? Ans. Arcadia, Laconia, Messenia, Elis, Argolis, 
Achaia, Sicyon, and Corinth. 6. What of Alcibiades ? 7. What happened to hint ? 
8. How did he die ? 9. What of the Peloponnesian war ? Sparta ? 10. What of the thirtj 
tyrants? Thrasybulus? 11. How was he rewarded for expelling the thirty tyrants? 
What took place 403 B. C. r 


GREECE 


93 


warded with a wreath made of two twigs of an olive tree, which, as 
I have before said, was esteemed a great mark of honor. Athens again 
Decame prosperous, and its former government was restored in the 
year 403 before the Christian era. 


CHAPTER LIV.— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

Beginning of the Theban War. 



Greek warriors , with spears . javelins, shields, slinks, and bows and arrows. 


1. Not long after this period, Thebes became the most distinguish- 
ed city of Greece. It was the capital of the kingdom of Bceotia. A 
war between Thebes and Sparta originated in the following manner, 
riiaebidas, a Spartan general, had wrongfully taken possession of 
Cadmaea, a fortress belonging to Thebes. The Thebans demanded 
that it should be given up ; but the Spartans garrisoned it strongly, 
and resolved to hold it as their own. 

2. A brave and patriotic young man of Thebes, named Pelopidas, 
contrived a scheme to get back the fortress. He and eleven compan- 
ions put on their breastplates, and girded their swords around them, 
but clothed themselves in women’s garments over their armor. In 
this garb, they went to the gate of Cadmaea, and were admitted. 

Ch. LIV. — 1. What of Thebes? In what part of Greece was Baootla ? How did the 
war between Thebw and Sparta originate * 2. What of Pelopidas ? 


94 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


3. The magistrates and Spartan officers were assembled at a splen- 
did festival. Archias, the Spartan commander, sat at the head of the 
table. He and his friends were wholly occupied with the enjoyment 
of the banquet. They took scarcely any notice when the twelve 
figures in female attire entered the hall. 

4. At the moment when the mirth and festivity of the Spartans 
was at its height, the strangers tore off their female garb. Instead 
of twelve women, there stood twelve young warriors. The light of 
the festal torches flashed back from their bright breastplates. Then 
naked swords were in their hands. 

5. Pelopidas and his eleven companions immediately attacked the 
Spartan banqueters. Their surprise hindered the Spartans from ma- 

„ king any effectual resistance. Archias and many others were struck 
dead, almost before they could rise from the table. 

6. Thus the Thebans gained possession of the fortress. But Sparta 
immediately began a war against Thebes. * Many of the other states 
of Greece lent their assistance to the Spartans. It appeared probable 
that the Thebans would be conquered and entirely ruined. 

7. But they had a brave and skilful general, named Epaminondas. 
With only six thousand Thebans, he encountered twenty-five thou- 
sand Spartans, commanded by Cleombrotus, their king. The battle 
was fought at Leuctra. The Thebans gained a complete victory, and 
killed Cleombrotus and fourteen hundred of his men. 


CHAPTER LV.-EUROPE CONTINUED. 

Sequel of the Theban War. 

1. Epaminondas, the Theban general, was one of the best men 
that lived in ancient times. His private virtues were equal to his 

•S- patriotism and valor. It is said of him, that a falsehood was never 
known to come from his lips ; one of the highest praises that can be 
bestowed on any man. 

2. It might be supposed that the Thebans would have felt the ut- 
most gratitude towards Epaminondas, whose valor had saved his 
country ; and it is true that the most virtuous part of the people hon- 
ored him according to his merits ; but I am sorry to tell you that a 
great and good man is very apt to have enemies. 

3. His virtues and his greatness are a reproach to the vicious and 
the mean, and therefore they hate him, and seek to destroy him. So 
it happened with Epaminondas, and so it has happened in all ages. 

4. Epaminondas had many enemies among the Thebans. They 
at first attempted to have him sentenced to death because he had 

Describe the scheme of Pelopidas and his companions. 5. Did this bold undertaking sue 
ceed? 6. What state made war upon Thebes ? Other states ? 7. What of Epaminondas? 
His army? The Spartan force? Who was the Spartan leader? Did the Thebans gain the 
victory? Ch. LV. — 1. Character of Epaminondas ? 2. Were the Thebans grateful to 
him ? 3. Why do the wicked hate a great and good man ? 4. What did the Theoan* at- 
tempt ? 


GREECE. 


95 

kept the command of the army longer than the law permitted. But 
as his only motive had been to preserve Thebes from ruin, his judges 
concluded to let him live. 

5. Nevertheless, in order to disgrace him as much as possible, hf 
was appointed to clean the streets of Thebes. Epaminondas was 
not mortified; for he knew that the Thebans might disgrace them 
selves by such ingratitude, but could not disgrace him. He therefore 
set about discharging the duties of his new office, and this great and 
victorious general was accordingly seen cleaning away the filth from 
the streets. 

6. But the war was not yet at an end ; and the Thebans soon 
found that they could not do without Epaminondas. They made 
him throw away his broom, and take the sword again. He was 
placed at the head of the army, with greater power than he had pos- 
sessed before. 

7. So long as Epaminondas was their general, the Thebans were 
the most powerful people of Greece. The last victory that he gained 
was at Mantinea. But it cost the Thebans dear ; for while Epami- 
nondas was fighting in the thickest of the battle, a Spartan soldier 
thrust a javelin into his breast. 

8. The Tiiebans and Spartans fought around the wounded Epami- 
nondas, the latter wishing to put an end to his life, and the former to 
bear him from the field. The Spartans were driven back, and some 
of his soldiers carried Epaminondas in their arms to his tent. 

9. The javelin remained sticking in the wound, for the surgeons 
declared that he would die the moment that it should be drawn out. 
Epaminondas lay in great pain ; but he thought little of his own 
agony, and was anxious only for the success of his countrymen. 

10. At last a messenger came from the tattle-field, and told him 
that the Spartans were flying, and that Thebes had won a glorious 
victory. “ Then all is well !” said Epaminondas. As he spoke, he 
drew the javelin out of his wound, and instantly expired. 

11. This event took place in the year 363 before the Christian era. 
After the death of Epaminondas, the Thebans were no longer form- 
idable to the rest of the Greeks. 


CHAPTER LVI. -EUROPE CONTINUED. 

Grecian Religion or Mythology. 

1. My history has now reached the period when the glory of 
Greece was at its height ; and I shall soon have to speak of its de- 
cline. Before doing so, I think it proper to give a slight account of 
the religion of the Greeks, and some other interesting particulars. 

5. How did they attempt to disgrace Epaminondas ? Was he mortified ? What did 
he do ? 6. What did the Thebans find ? What did they do ? 7. What of Thebes while 
Epaminondas was general? What was his last victory ? How was he wounded? 8. By 
whom was he carried from the field ? What of the javelin ? 9. Describe the death of Epa- 
minondas. 10. When did this happen ? What of the Thebans after the death of Epami 
oimdas? LYI. — 1. At what period was the glory of Greece at its height? 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


06 


2. The Greeks betieved that there were three classes of deities, the 
Celestial, the Marine, and the Infernal. The first, as they fancied, 
dwelt in the sky, the second in the sea, and the third in the dreary re- 
gions under the earth. Besides these, there were inferior kinds of 
deities, who haunted the woods, or lived in fountains and streams. 



3. The deities whose home was in the sky, were Jupiter, Apollo 
Mars, Mercury, Bacchus, Vulcan, Juno, Minerva, Venus, Diana, 
Ceres, and Vesta. The greatest of all the gods was Jupiter. When 
it thundered and lightened, the Greeks supposed that Jupiter was 
angry, and was flinging his thunderbolts about. 

4. The Olympic games were instituted by the Greeks, in honor of 
Jupiter. These games were celebrated every four years. They con 
sisted of races on foot and on horseback, and in chariots, and of leap- 
ing, wrestling, and boxing. It was considered a very great honor for 
a person to gain a prize at the Olympic games. 

5. Apollo was the son of Jupiter. He was supposed to be the 
driver of the sun, which had four horses harnessed to it, and went 
round the world every day. It was pretty much like a modem 
stagecoach, except that it carried no passengers. 

6. Besides being the coachman of the sun, Apollo was likewise the 
god of music and poetry, and of medicine, and all the fine arts. He 
also presided over the famous oracle at Delphos, whither people used 
to come from all parts of the world to find out the events of futurity 

7. Mars was the god of war, and Mercury the god of thieves, and 
Bacchus the god of drunkards, and Vulcan the god of blacksmiths. 
Vulcan seems to have been one of the best and most useful of the 


2. In what deities did the Greeks believe? What were the three classes? Where did 
each of them dwell ? What of inferior deities? 3 Who were the celestial deities? What 
of Jupiter? 4. What of the Olympic games ? What of Apollo ? His chariot? 6. What 
more cau you tell of Apollo ? 7. What of Mars? Mercury? Bacchus? Vulcan. 


GREECE Q7 

heathen deities, for he was an excellent blacksmith, and worked hard 
at his anvil. 

8. Venus was the goddess of beauty. Her statues were made in 
the form of a beautiful woman. She had a son named Cupid, who 
was a mischievious little deity, and used to shoot at people with a 
bow and arrow. 

9. Neptune was the chief of the marine deities. It was supposed 
that he had a huge scallop-shell for a chariot, and that his horses had 



Mars. Mercury. 


the tails of fishes. Whenever he rode over the waves, a tribe of sea 
monsters surrounded his chariot. 



8. What of Venus ? Cupid ? 9. What of Neptune ? Where did he How U h* 

represented ? 

<* 9 



98 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


10. Pluto was the deity who presided in the infernal regions. He 
used to sit on a throne of brimstone, looking very stern and awful. 
In one hand he held a sceptre, and in the other two keys. Besides 
these gods, the Greeks believed in heroes, who were half gods and 
half men. Of these, Hercules was very famous for his wonderful 
feats of strength. 

11. Unless I were to write a large book on this one subject, it 
would be impossible for me to tell you all about the fanciful gods ..f 



* Hercules . Neptune. 


ancient Greece, and the strange, foolish things they are said to have 
done by the Greek poets. The only use of such a book would be, to 
show how necessary it was that the true God should reveal himself 
to men, since they could contrive no better religion than these absurd, 
though sometimes amusing fables. 

12. Ridiculous as their deities were, the Greeks honored them with 
magnificeat temples. No other edifices ever built by mortal hands 
have been so beautiful. Some of the churches in our own country 
are now built on the plan of the old Grecian temples. 

13. The Grecian sculptors carved marble statues of their deities. 
These images were so grand, and beautiful, and dignified, that it 
seems as if the artists must have seen such heavenly creatures some- 
where, or else they never could have carved their likenesses. 


10. Who was Pluto? Where did he dwell ? What of him? 12. How did the Greeks 
houor their false gods? What of Temples? 13. What can you say of the Grecian 
statues ? 


EUROPE. 


99 


CHAPTER LVII— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

The Grecian Philosophers. 

1 The Greek philosophers were men who pretended to be wiser 
than mankind in general. There were a great many of them, who 
lived in various ages. I shall speak of some of the most remarkable, 
in this and the following chapters. 

2. The philosopher Thales was born between six and seven hun- 
dred years before the Christian era. In his time there were seven 
philosophers, who were called the Seven Wise men of Greece; and 
Thales was considered the wisest of them all. 

3. One night, while this great philosopher was taking a walk, he 
looked upward to contemplate the stars. Being much interested in 
this occupation, he strayed out of his path, and tumbled into a ditch. 
An old woman who lived in his family ran and helped him out, all 
covered with mudi “ For the future, Thales,” said she, “I advise 
you not to have your head among the stars, while your feet are on 
the earth !” Some people think that the old woman was the wiser 
philosopher of the two. 

4. Another philosopher was named Pittacus. He was the first 
temperance man on record ; for, though there were many sorts of de- 
licious wines in his country, he never drank any thing but water. 

5. The philosopher Bias lived in the year 517 B. C. Some fisher- 
men once found a golden vase in the belly of a large fish. On the 
vase were engraved these words, — “To the wisest.” It was there- 
fore sent to Bias, who was thought to be at least as wise as anybody. 

6. But Bias did not care for gold or riches. When his native city 
was taken by the enemy, all the other inhabitants endeavored to hide 
their most valuable property. Bias alone gave himself no trouble. 
“Riches are but playthings,” said he. “My only real treasures are 
my own thoughts.” 

7. Epimenides was a very wonderful philosopher. My readers 
must not put too much faith in the story which I am going to tell 
them. It is as follows : — One day, when Epimenides was young, his 
father sent him in search of a sheep that was lost. After finding the 
sheep, Epimenides entered a cave by the wayside, and sat down, for 
he was tired, and the sun was very hot. In this cave he fell asleep, 
and slept a good deal longer than he intended. 

8. It was no less than fifty-seven years before he awoke. When 
fie closed his eyes he was a young man, but he was old and gray 
When he opened them again. He left the cave and went back to the 
town where he had formerly lived. 

9. But his father was long ago dead ; his brother, who had been a 

Ch. LVII. — 1. Who were the Greek philosophers? 2. Who was Thales 5 Where 
Was he boru 1 What of the seven wise men ? How was Thales considered : 3. Relate 

an anecdote of him. 4. What of Pittacus ? 5. When did Bias live ? Tel.' the story of th8 
»a»e. 6. What did Bias think of riches ? 7. Tell the story of Epim.etud«a> 


100 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


child when he went away, was an old man now; and the town was 
full of houses and people that he had never seen before. These 
were certainly very wonderful changes, considering that they had all 
happened while Epimenides was taking a nap. 


CHAPTER LVIII. -EUROPE CONTINUED. 

The Grecian Philosophers continued. 

1. The philosopher Pythagoras believed that when people died, 
their souls migrated into the bodies of animals or birds. He affirmed 
that his own soul had once lived in the body of a peacock. 

2. Heraclitus of Ephesus was called the dark philosopher, because 
all his sayings were like riddles. He thought that nothing was wis- 
dom which could be understood by common people. 

3. This wise man considered the world as such a wretched place, 
that he never could look at anybody without shedding tears. And at 
last he retired to a cave among the mountains, where he lived on 
herbs and roots, and was as miserable as his heart could wish. 

4. Democritus, who lived not long after Hereclitus, was quite a 
different sort of philosopher. Instead of shedding tears, he laughed 
so continually that his townsmen thought him mad. And, to say the 
truth, I think so too. 

5. The philosopher Anaxagoras believed that the sky was made of 
stones, and that the sun was a great mass of red-hot iron. This may 
seem very strange ; but in these ancient times the people did not 
know the shape of the earth. 

6. The philosopher Empedocles went and lived near Mount iEtna, 
in Sicily. He was a man of very grave and majestic appearance, and 
everybody knew him, because he used to wear a crown of laurel on 
his head. People generally acknowledged him to be a very wise 
man ; but, not content with this, he wanted to be thought a god. 

7. One day, after he had prepared a great festival, Empedocles dis- 
appeared, and was never seen again. The people took it for granted 
that he had ascended to heaven. But shortly afterwards, there was 
an eruption of Mount iEtna, and an old shoe was thrown out of the 
crater. On examination, it was found out that this shoe had belong- 
ed to Empedocles. It was now easy to guess at the fate of the foolish 
old man. He had thrown himself into the crater of the blazing vol- 

/cano, in order that people might think him a god and that ne had 
gone to heaven. 

8. Socrates was one of the wisest and best philosophers of Greece. 
Indeed he was so wise and good, that the profligate Athenians could 
not suffer him to live. They therefore compelled him to drink poison. 

Ch. LVIII. — 1. What did Pythagoras believe ? 2. What of Heraclitus ? 4. What of De- 
mocritus? How did he differ from Heraclitus? 5. What did Anaxagoras believe'* 
6. Where did Empedocles live ? What did he wish to be thought ? 7 What means did he 
tnke tp make the people think him a god ? 8. What of Socrates ? Hi, death ? 



>i ) 




EUROPE. 


101 


9. Diogenes was the queerest philosopher of all. He was called 
Diogenes the dog, — either because he lived like a dog, or because he 
had a currish habit of snarling at everybody. 

10. His doctrine was, that the fewer enjoyments a man had, the 
happier he was likely to be. This Philosopher went about barefoot, 
dressed in very shabby clothes, and carrying a bag, a jug, and a stalf. 
He afterwards got a great tub, which he used to lug about with him 
all day long, and sleep in it at night. 

11. One day, Alexander the Great came to see Diogenes, and fcund 

him mending his tub. It happened that Alexander stood in such a. 
manner as to shade Diogenes from the sun, and he felt cold. “ Dio- 
genes,” said Alexander, “ you must have a very hard time of it, living 
in a tub. Can I do anything to better your condition? ” “ Nothing, 

except to get out of my sunshine,” replied Diogenes, who disdained 
to accept any other favor from the greatest monarch in the world. 


CHAPTER LIX.— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

Something more about Philosophers. About the Greek 

Poets. 

1. I could tell you much more about the Grecian philosophers, 
but I have not room. I must not forget, however, to mention Plato, 
who was born 429 years B. C., and was for eight years the pupil of 
Socrates. 

2. This great man, like many other Grecian philosophers, was a 
sort of schoolmaster, and many young men came to be taught by 
him. He delivered his lectures in a grove near Athens, called Acade- 
mus, from which circumstance the word academy has since been ap- 
plied to schools. 

3. So great was his reputation, that the first young men from vari- 
ous parts of the world came to be his pupils. He had very sublime 
ideas of religion, virtue, and truth; and he delivered these with so 
much sweetuess and eloquence, that his listeners were enchanted. 
The Greeks spoke of him as Plato the Divine. 

4. There were other celebrated philosophers in Greece, but I must 
leave them now, and tell you of the poets. Homer, the best poet of 
ancient times, perhaps the best that ever lived, I have already men- 
tioned. When this great man was born, how he lived, or where he 
died, are matters of uncertainty. 

5. The general opinion is, that he lived about the year 900 B. C., 
and was a wandering minstrel, who went about from place to place 
reciting and singing his verses. The Iliad and Odyssey, his two great 

9. What of Diogenes ? His doctrines ? How did he live? J 1. Tell an anecdote of 
Diogenes. Ch. LlX. — 1. When was Plato born ? W'hose pupil was he ? 2. What else cf 
Plato ? 3. W T ha* of his ideas, and his mode of expressing them ? 4. What of Homer? 
6. When is it supposed Homer lived ? How did he live ? What of his poems? 


102 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


poems, were composed in separate parts, and, but for the care of Ly- 
curgus, who had them collected, would doubtless have bgen lost. 
They celebrate the actions of heroes and imaginary gods, and are full 
of the deepest interest. 

6. There were a multitude of other poets in Greece, some of whom 
acquired great celebrity. Among these was Anacreon, who wrote 
about love ; Pindar, who composed sublime odes ; and Theocritus, 
who sang about shepherds and shepherdesses, who lived in the coun- 
try. There were also many poets who wrote pieces for the stage. 

7. You already know that the Greeks were in many respects very 
ignorant, and entertained many absurd notions. They did not know 
that the earth is a great globe or ball, that it turns round every day, 
and that the sun, moon, and stars are also great worlds moving about 
in the sky. 

8. You would not therefore expect in their poetry to find any useful 
information about geography or astronomy. Yet they lived in a beau- 
tiful country, and their mountains, streams, and valleys were often 
the subject of their songs. 

9. Their religion, too, though full of absurdity, furnished materals 
for the poets. They described the gods and goddesses as dwelling 
upon the mountains, or skipping along the valleys, or gliding amidst 
the waters. Thus every object of nature derived a new interest 
from the vivid fancy of the poets. 

10. To this day the verses of these poets are remembered, and the 
places mentioned by them are often visited by travellers, who look 
upon them with emotion, on account of the beautiful fictions they 
inspired more than two thousand years ago. 


CHAPTER LX.— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

About the Mode of Life among the Ancient Greeks. 

1. But we must now leave poets and philosophers, and take a view 
of the private life of the ancient Greeks. The men wore an inner 
garment called a tunic, over which they threw a mantle; their shoes 
or sandals were bound under their feet with thongs or ropes. In an- 
cient times the Greeks went with their heads uncovered, but after- 
wards they used hats which were tied under the chin. 

2. The women always covered their heads with a veil, which came 
down upon the shoulders. They wore in their hair golden grasshop- 
pers, and ear-rings were suspended from their ears. The rest of their 

6. What of Anacreon? Pindar? Theocritus? Other poets? 7. What did the Greeks 
not know ? 8. What of the poetry of the ancient Greeks r 9. What use did the Grecian 
poets make of their mythology ? What effect had the poems of the ancient Greeks ? Are 
the poems of the ancient Greeks still remembered ? 10. Are ihe places mentioned in 

these poems rendered more interesting to travellers of the present time who visit them 
Ch. LX. — 1. What did the men wear amons; the ancient Greeks ? Their shes ? Head- 
dress? 2. Headdress of the women? What ornaments did they wear? The rest of 
their dress ? 


GREECE. 103 

dress consisted of a white tunic fastened with a broad sash, and de- 
scending in folds down to their heels. 

3. The Greeks usually made four meals a day ; the morning meal, 
which was taken at the rising of the sun ; the next at mid-day ; the 
afternoon repast, and the supper, which was the principal meal, as it 
was taken after the business of the day. Below I give you pictures 
of some of their vessels for water, which will show you that some 
articles of their furniture were very beautiful. 



Vases used by the Greeks for water. 


4. In the early ages, the food of the Greeks was f he fruits of the 
earth, and their drink water ; the flesh of animals wa. introduced at 
a later period. This brought on the luxuries of the table, and some 
of the cities of Greece became renowned for producing excellent 
cooks. The Spartans, as we have before mentioned, ate at public 
tables. Their chief food consisted of black broth. 

5. The poor sometimes fed on grasshoppers, and the extremities of 
leaves. In general, the Greeks were very fond of flesh. Their usual 
drink was water, either hot or cold, but most commonly the latter, 
which was sometimes cooled with ice. Wines were very generally 
used, and even perfumed wines were introduced at the tables of the 
rich. 

6. Before the Greeks went to an entertainment, they washed and 
anointed themselves; when they arrived, the entertainer took them 
by the hand, or kissed their lips, hands, knees, or feet, as they de- 
served more or less respect. It must be observed concerning the 
guests, that men and women were never invited together. 

7. They sat at meat either quite upright, or leaning a little back- 

3. The meals of the Greeks? 4. What was the f<»>d of the Greeks in early ages? 
What of flesh? Luxuries of the table ? What of tht Spartans? 5. What of the poor* 
Were the Greeks fond of meat for food ? What of theii 'rink ? Wine ? 6. What of en- 
tertainments ? Men and women ? 7. How did they sit a table? How do the people of 
Asia sit at table ? Did the Greeks adopt this Asiatic custo . ■< ? What was done before be 
finning to eat 


104 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


ward ; but m more degenerate ages, they adopted the eastern custom 
of reclining on beds or couches. As soon as the provisions were set 
on the table, and before the guests began to eat, a part was offered 
as a sort of first-fruits to the gods. 

8. They had a custom, similar to ours, of drinking healths, not 
only to those present, but to their absent friends ; and at every name 
they poured a little wine on the ground, which was called a libation. 

9. The entertainment being ended, a hymn was sung to the gods. 
After this, the company was amused with music, dancing, and mim- 
icry, or whatever could tend to excite mirth or cheerfulness. 

10. The houses of the rich were built of stone, and many of them 
were highly ornamented. A large part of the people, however lived 
in huts made of rough stone laid in clay. 

11. In war, the Greeks fought with various weapons. Some of 
the soldiers had bows and arrows; some had javelins or spears, 
which they hurled with great force and precision of aim, and some 
had slings, with which they threw stones. They usually carried 
shields for warding off the weapons of their enemies. 

12. You must recollect that in these ancient times, gun-powder 
was not known, and muskets and cannon were therefore not in use. 
In battle, the warriors often engaged in close conflict, foot to foot, and 
breast to breast. The strife was therefore very exciting, and the men 
usually fought with furious courage. 

13. As mankind were very much given to making war upon one 
another, it was the custom in all countries to surround the cities with 
high walls for defence. This practice, indeed, continued for many 
ages, and if you ever go to Europe, you will see that the principal 
cities of France, Germany, and many other countries, are still secured 
in this way. 

14. In modern times, when an army attacks a city it batters down 
the walls with cannon shot, or by undermining them, placing gun- 
powder beneath, and then setting it on fire. But in the olden times 
of Greece, the warriors used battering rams, consisting of heavy 
beams with ponderous stones at one end. These were driven by main 
strength against the walls, and thus, after many efforts, they were 
demolished. 


CHAPTER LXL— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

Philip of Macedon conquers Greece. 

1. 1 shall now resume the history of Greece, at the point wherr i 
left off. The reader will recollect that I had just finished speaking 
of the Theban war. 


8. Drinking healths ? Libation ? 9. What followed the eating ? 10. What of the 

habitations of the rich ? Of the poor? 11. What weapons were used by the Greeks in 
war ? 1-2. What of gunpowder ? How did the warriors engage one another in conflict ? 

13. What was the custom regarding cities ? What are to be seen in Europe ? 14. How 

do the moderns attack a walled city? How did the ancients destroy the walls of a city* 


GREECE. 


105 


2. Not long after the close of that war, the states of Greece became 
involved in another, which was generally called the Sacred War. 
The people of Phocis had been sentenced, by the Amphyctionic coun- 
cil, to pay a heavy fine for ploughing a field which belonged to the 
temple of Apollo, at Delphos. 

3. Rather than pay the fine, the Phocians resolved to go to war. 
The people of Athens, Sparta, and Achaia assisted the Phocians- 
The Thebans, Locrians, and Thessalians took the part of the Am- 
phyctionic council, and Philip, king of Macedon, was solicited to fight 
on the same side. 

4. The kingdom of Macedon is numbered by some historians 
among the states of Greece ; but others consider it a separate coun- 
try. Although it was founded about five hundred years before this 
period, it had never been very powerful till Philip mounted the 
throne. 

5. Philip was ambitious and warlike. No sooner had he marched 
his army into Greece, than he determined to make himself ruler of 
the whole country. The Greeks were not now so valiant as they 
had been ; and there were no such men as Leonidas, Miltiades, or 
Epaminondas, to lead them to victory. 

6. The man that gave Philip more trouble than any other, was 
Demosthenes, an Athenian. He was one of the most eloquent ora- 
tors that ever lived; and he uttered such terrible orations against 
Philip, that the Athenians were incited to resist him in battle. It is 
from these orations against the Macedonian king that severe speeches 
have since been called philippics. 

7. But the Athenians were beaten at Cheronea, in the year 338 
before the Christian era. Thenceforward, Philip controlled the af- 
fairs of Greece, till his death. Pe r haps, after all, he was a better 
ruler than the Greeks could have found among themselves. 

8. But he had many vices, and among the rest, that of drinking to 
excess. One day, just after he had risen from a banquet, he decided 
a certain law-case unjustly. The losing person cried out, “ I appeal 
from Philip drunk, to Philip sober !” And, sure enough, when Philip 
got sober, he decided the other way. 

9. A poor woman, who had some business with Philip, tried in 
vain to obtain an audience. He put her off from one day to another, 
saying that he had no leisure to attend to her. “ If you have no leisure 
to do justice, you have no right to be king !” said the woman. Philip 
was struck with the truth of what the woman said, and he became 
more attentive to the duties of a king. 

10. He lived only about two years after he had conquered the 
Greeks. There was a young nobleman rfemed Pausanias, a captain 

Ch. LXI.—2, What of the Sacred war ? Cause of it ? 3. What states fought on the 
side of the Phocians ? What on the side of the Amphyctionic council ? On which 
side did Philip, king of Macedon, fight ? 4. What of Macedon ? Where was it situated * 
When was it founded ? Which way did Philip’s army march from Macedon to Greece ? 
5. What of Philip? On what did he determine ? What of the Greeks at this time? 6. 
What of Demosthenes ? What effect had his oratory on the Athenians ? What is the ori- 
gin of the word philippic! 7. Where were they beaten? When did the battle take 
piacc ? Where is Cheronea ? Direction from Thebes? Athens? Sparta? How long 
did Philip rule Greece ? 8. What of Philip ? Relate some anecdotes of him ? 


106 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


of the guard, who had been injured by one of Philip’s relations. Af 
Philip would not punish the offender, Pausanias resolved that he him- 
self should die. 

11. On the day of the marriage of Philip’s daughter, the king was 
entering the public theatre, where the nuptial festivities were to be 
celebrated. At this moment Pausanias rushed forth, with his sword 
drawn, and stabbed him to the heart. 

12. The Athenians greatly rejoiced at the news of Philip’s death. 
They publicly voted that a golden crown should be given to Pausa- 
nias, as a reward for having murdered him. All the other states ol 
ureece likewise revolted against the power of Macedon. 


CHAPTER LXII. — EUROPE CONTINUED. 


Co?iquests of Alexander the Great. 



1. But the new king of Macedon, though only twenty years old 
was well worthy to sit on his father’s throne, fie was Alexander, 
afterwards surnamed the Great. Young as he was, he had already 
given proofs of the valor which so soon made him conqueror of the 
world. 

2. Alexander subdued the Grecian states in the course of one cam- 
paign. He was then declared generalissimo of the Greeks, and un- 


n *°- ^ at ? ?«££ lbe the ? eath of Philip ? 12. What did the Athenians do ' 

? o A 'f> CH ' w IL 7 1; f Who A y as th ® n ® w kin s of Macedon ? Of what had he given 
Droofc . 2. After what exploit was Alexander declared generalissimo of the Greeks ? What 
army which he led against Persia ? Which way is Persia from Macedon ? 


proofs ? 

of the 


GREECE 107 

dertook a war against Persia. The army which he led against that 
country consisted of thirty-five thousand men. 

3. He crossed the Hellespont, and marched through Asia Minor, 
towards Persia. Before reaching its borders, he was met by the Per- 
sian king, Darius, who had collected an immense army. Alexander 
defeated him, and killed a hundred and ten thousand of his soldiers. 

4. Darius soon assembled a mightier army than before. He had 
now half a million of men. He advanced to battle in the midst of his 
troops, seated on a lofty chariot, which resembled a moving throne. 
Around him were his life-guards, all in splendid armor. 

5. But when the Persians saw how boldly the Macedonian horse- 
men advanced, they took to flight. Poor king Darius was left almost 
alone on his lofty chariot. He had but just time to get on horseback, 
and gallop away from the battle. Shortly afterwards, he was siain by 
two of his own subjects, as I have told you in the history of Persia. 

6. After the victory, Alexander marched to Persepolis, which was 
then the capital of Persia. It was a rich and magnificent city. In 
the royal palace, there was a gigantic statue of Xerxes, but the Ma- 
cedonian soldiers overthrew it, and tumbled it upon the ground. 

7. While he remained at Persepolis, Alexander gave himself up to 
drunkenness and licentious pleasures. One night, at a splendid ban- 
quet, an Athenian lady persuaded the conqueror to set fire to the city. 
It was accordingly burnt to the ground. 

8. When Persia was completely subdued, Alexander invaded In- 
dia, now Hindostan. One of the kings of that country was named 
Porus. He is said to have been seven feet and a half in height. This 
gigantic king led a great army against Alexander. 

9. Porus was well provided with elephants, which had been 
trained to rush upon the enemy, and trample them down. Alexan- 
der had no elephants, but his usual good fortune did not desert him. 
The army of Porus was routed, and he himself was taken prisoner, 
and loaded with chains. 

10. In this degraded condition, the Indian king was brought into 
the victor’s tent. Alexander gazed with wonder at the enormous 
stature of Porus. Although so great a conqueror, he was himself 
only of middle size. “ How shall I treat you ?” asked Alexander 
of his prisoner. “ Like a king !” said Porus. This answer led Alex- 
ander to reflect how he himseH should like to be treated, had he been 
in a similar situation ; and he was induced to behave generously to 
Porus. 


3. What sea and country did the army cross to reach Persia ? Who opposed Alexander t 
How many of Darius’s army were killed ? 4. Describe the march of Darius and his half 
million of troops. 5. What became of Darius? 6. Where did Alexander go after his vic- 
tory ? Where was Persepolis ? Direction from Athens ? What of the statue of Xerxes ? 
7. What happened at Persepolis ? 8. What country did Alexander next invade ? Direc- 
tion of India from Greece ? Persia? What of Porus ? 9. What animals had Porus in 
his army ? Who conquered ? What became of Porus ? 10. Describe the meeting be- 

tween Alexander and Porus. 


108 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


CHAPTER LXIII. — EUROPE CONTINUED. 

Sequel of Alexander’s career. 

1. In the early part of his career, Alexander had shown many ex- 
cellent and noble traits of character. But he met with such great 
and continual success in all his undertakings, that his disposition was 
ruined by it. He began to consider himself the equal of the gods. 

2. Yet so far was Alexander from being a god, that some of his 
actions were unworthy of a man. One of his worst deeds was the 
murder of Clitus, an old officer who had fought under king Philip. 
He had once saved Alexander’s life in battle ; and on this account he 
was allowed to speak very freely to him. 

3. One night, after drinking too much wine, Alexander began to 
speak of his own exploits ; and he spoke more highly of them than 
old Clitus thought they deserved. Accordingly, he told Alexander 
that his father Philip had done much greater things than ever he had 
done. 

4. The monarch was so enraged, that he snatched a spear from one 
of his attendants, and gave Clitus a mortal wound. But when he 
saw the old man’s bloody corpse extended on the floor, he was seized 
with horror. He had murdered the preserver of his own life ! 

5. Alexander’s remorse, however, did not last long. He still in- 
sisted on being a god, the son of Jupiter Ammon ; and he was mor- 
tally offended with a philosopher named Callisthenes, because he re- 
fused to worship him. For no other crime, Callisthenes was put into 
an iron cage, and tormented, till he killed himself in despair. 

6 After Alexander’s return from India to Persia, he met with a 
great misfortune. It was the loss of his dearest friend, Hephestion, 
who died of a disease which he had contracted by excessive drink- 
ing. For three days afterwards, Alexander lay prostrate on the 
ground, and would take no food. 

7. He erected a funeral pile of spices and other precious materials, 
so that it was as costly as a palace would have been. The lifeless 
body of Hephestion was placed on the summit. Alexander then set 
fire to the pile, and stood mournfully looking on while the corpse of 
his friend was consumed to ashes. 

8. It would have been well if he had taken warning by the fate of 
Hephestion. But Alexander the Great was destined to owe his de- 
struction to the wine-cup. While drinking at a banquet in Babylon, 
he was suddenly taken sick; and death soon conquered the con- 
queror. 

9. As to the merits of Alexander, I pretty much agree with a cer- 

Ch. LXIII. — 1. What of Alexander ? What ruined his disposition ? How did he con- 
sider himself ? 2. What of the actions of Alexander? Who was Clitus? 3. 4. Give an 
account of the murder of Clitus. 5. What did Alexander insist upon being called 5 What 
of Calisthenes ? 6. What of Hephestion ? What was the cause of his death ? 7. What 
did Alexander do with the body of Hephestion? 8. What caused Alexander’s death? 
Where did he die ? Where is Babylon ? Direction from Macedon ? India ? 9. Tell 
the story of the pirate. 


GREECE. 


109 


vain pirate, whom the Macedonian soldiers once took prisoner. Al- 
exander demanded of this man by what right he committed his 
robberies. “ I am a robber by the same right that you are a con- 
queror,” was the reply. “ The only difference between us is, that I 
have but a few men, and can do but little mischief; while yai have a 
large army, and can do a great deal !” 

10. It must be confessed that this is the chief difference between 
conquerors and robbers. Yet, when Alexander died, his body was 
deposited in a splendid coffin, at Alexandria, in Egypt, and the Egyp- 
tians paid him divine honors, as if he had been the greatest possible 
benefactor to the world. 


CHAPTER LXIV.— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

V\ % -i 

Greece invaded by the Gauls. 

1. When Alexander lay on his death-bed, his attendants asked to 
whom he would bequeath the empire, which now extended from 
Greece to India, including a great many nations. His answer was, 
“ To the most worthy.” 

2. But there appears to have been no very worthy man among 
those whom he left behind him ; and even if there had been, the 
unworthy ones would not have consented to yield him the whole 
power. Alexander’s empire was therefore divided among thirty- 
three of his chief officers. 

3. But the most powerful of these officers were determined to have 
more than their share ; and in the year 312, before Christ, four of 
them had got possession of the whole. Alexander had then been 
dead eleven years. All his children and relatives had been destroyed 
by his ambitious officers. 

4. The Greeks, when they neard of Alexander’s death, had at- 
tempted to regain their liberty. But their struggles we r « unsuccess- 
ful ; and the country was reduced to subjection by Cassander, who 
had been general of Alexander’s cavalry. Cassander died in a few 
years. Thenceforwaru, the history of Greece tells of nothing but 
crimes and revolutions, and misfortunes. 

5. In the year ^efore the Christian era, the Gauls invaded 
Greece. They were a barbarous people, who inhabited the country 
now called France. Their general’s nanit wasBrennus; and their 
numbers are said to have been a hundred and sixty-five thousand men. 

, 6. Brennus met with hardly any opposition. He marched to Del- 

phos, intending to steal the treasures that were contained in the fa- 

10. What was done when Alexander died ? Ch. LXIV. — 1. What was asked Alexander 
oa his death-bed? His reply? 2. How was the empire divided? 3. What took place in 
the year 312 B. C.? What of Alexander’s children and relatives? 4. Who put Greece 
under subjection ? Who was Cassander ? What of the history of Greece after his death ? 

5. When did the Gauls invade Greece ? Who was their general ? What of their army ? 

6, V here was Delphos ? Direction from Athens ? Sparta ? Thebes ? What famous tem 
pie was at Delphos ? 


110 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


mous temple of Apollo. “ A deity, like Apollo, does not want these 
treasures,” said Brennus. “ I am only a man, and have great need 
of them.” 

7. Accordingly, he led his barbarians towards the temple. The 
stately marble front of the edifice was seen at a short distance before 
them. It was considered the holiest spot in Greece. Here was the 
mysterious oracle, from which so many wonderful prophecies had 
issued. 

8. A wild shout burst from the army of the Gauls, and they were 
on the point of rushing forward to the temple. But suddenly a vio- 
lent storm arose. The thunder roared, and the wind blew furiously. 
At the same moment a terrible earthquake shook the ground beneath 
the affrighted Gauls. 

9. A band of Greeks had assembled, to fight in defence of the tem- 
ple. When they saw the disorder of the barbarians, they attacked 
them, sword in hand. It had grown so dark that the Gauls could 
not distinguish friends from foes. They killed one another, and the 
whole army was destroyed. 

10. Such is the story which the old historians tell about this bat- 
tle ; it is doubtless much exaggerated, for some of the particulars ap- 
pear hardly credible. But, at any rate, this was the last great victory 
that the ancient Greeks ever achieved over their enemies. 


CHAPTER LXV.— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

End of Grecian Independence. 

1. The Greeks had now almost entirely lost their love of liberty, 
as well as the other virtues which had formerly distinguished them. 
In proof of this, I will relate the story of Agis, the young king of 
Sparta. 

2. King Agis was anxious for the welfare of Sparta, and he greatly 
desired to restore the ancient laws which Lycurgus had enacted. But 
the Spartans were now vicious and cowardly. They hated the very 
name of Lycurgus, and resolved not to be governed by his severe 
laws. 

3. They therefore seized the virtuous young king, and dragged him 
to prison. He was condemned to death. The executioner shed tears 
at the moment when he was going to kill him. “ Do not weep for 
me,” said Agis; “ I am happier than my murderers.” 

4. A little while after Agis was killed, his mother and grandmother 
came to the prison to see him, for they had not heard of his death. 
They were led into his dungeon ; and the murderers of Agis immedi- 
ately strangled them both, and threw their dead bodies upon his. 

7. Describe the march towards the temple. 8. What affrighted the Gauls? 9. What 
of the Greeks? How were the Gauls destroyed? 10. What may be said of this victory 
over the Gauls ? Ch. LXV. — 1. What of the Greeks ? 2. Who was Agis ? What did hi 
desire? What of the Spartans? 3. What did they do to Agis? Describe his death, 
4 . What of the mother aud grandmother of Agis ? 


GREECE. 


Ill 


5 . Some time after this horrible event, the Spartans had a king 
called Nabis. He was such a cruel monster, that Heaven seemed to 
have made him a king only for the punishment ol the people’s wick- 
edness. Nabis had an image in his palace. It resembled his own 
wife, and was very beautiful; it was likewise clothed with magnifi- 
cent garments, such as were proper for the queen to wear. But the 
breast and arms of the image were stuck full of sharp iron spikes. 

6. These, however, were hidden by the rich clothes. When king 
Nabis wished to extort money from any person, he invited him to his 
palace, and led him up to the image. No sooner was the stranger 
within reach, than the image put out its arms and squeezed him 
close to its breast. 

7. This was done by means of machinery. The poor man might 
struggle as hard as he pleased ; but he could not possibly get away 
from the cruel embrace of the statue. There he remained, with the 
iron spikes sticking into his flesh, until his agony compelled him to 
give Nabis as much money as he asked for. 

8. When such enormities were committed by the kings of Greece, 
it was time that the country should be governed by other masters. 
My readers will not be sorry to hear that this soon happened. One 
hundred and forty-six years before the Christian era, Greece submit- 
ted to the authority of Rome. 

9. Thus I have given you a very brief account of ancient Greece. 
Its history is full of interest, and full of instruction. I hope you will 
hereafter read the whole story, in some larger work than mine. 


CHAPTER LXVI.— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

Modern History of Greece. 

1. From this time forward, the history of Greece is connected with 
that of other nations. The Greeks had no longer any power, even 
in their own native country. But they were still respected, on ac- 
count of the poets, and historians, and sculptors, who appeared 
among them. 

2. But, in course of time, the genius of the Greeks seemed to have 
deserted them, as well as their ancient valor. They were then 
wholly despised. I have not space to relate any of the events that 
occurred to them while they were governed by the Romans. 

3. Between three and four hundred years after the Christian era, 
the Roman dominions were divided into the Eastern and Western 
empires. The capital of the Eastern empire was Constantinople. 
The territory of ancient Greece was included under this government, 
and it was sometimes called the Greek empire. 

5. What of Nabis ? Describe the imaere. 6. What did Nabis do when he wanted to ex- 
tort money out of any one ? 8. When was Greece conquered by the Romans ? Ch. LXVL 
1. What of the Greeks? Why were they respected ? 2. What happened in course of 
time? 3. When were the Roman dominions divided? 


112 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


4. Above a thousand years elapsed, and nothing happened of such 
importance that it need be told in this brief history. But, about the 
year 1450, the Turks invaded the Eastern empire of the Romans. 
Greece then fell beneath their power. During almost four centuries, 
the Greeks were treated by the Turks like slaves. 

5. At last, in the year 1821, thev rebelled against the tyranny of 
the Turks. A war immediately broke out. It continued a long time, 
and was carried on with the most shocking cruelty on both sides. 

6. Many people from other countries went to assist the Greeks. 
The ancient renown of Greece made friends of all who were ac- 
quainted with her history. Lord Byron, the illustrious English poet, 
lost his life in Greece, for the sake of this famous land. 

7. The Turks are a fierce people, and they resolved not to give up 
the country. The Greeks, on the other hand, determined either to 
drive away their oppressors, or to die. But they would not have suc- 
ceeded, if England, France, and Russia had not taken their part. 

8. The fleets of these three nations formed a junction off the coast 
of Greece. They were all under the command of the English admi- 
ral Sir Edward Codrington. In October, 1827, they attacked a Tur- 
kish fleet of more than two hundred vessels, in the bay of Navarino. 

9. The Turks were entirely beaten, and their vessels were sunk or 
burned. In consequence of their losses in this battle, they were una- 
ble to continue the war. Greece was therefore evacuated by the 
Turks. 

10. But as the Greeks were not considered entirely fit to govern 
themselves, a king was selected for them, by England, France, and 
Russia. The new king was a young man of eighteen, named Otho. 
He was placed on the throne in the year 1829. This is the latest re- 
markable event in the history of Greece. 


CHAPTER LXVIL— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

About Italy as it now is. 

1. Italy is a strip of land on the south of Europe, extending into 
the Mediterranean Sea. It is fancied to have the shape of a boot, 
the island of Sicily lying at the toe. It has a beautiful climate, the 
seasons of spring and summer seeming always to prevail. 

2. If you were to go to this country, you would be charmed with 
the beauty of the sky, and the balmy softness of the air. You would 


4. What happened about 1450 ? Into whose power did the Greeks then fall ? How were 
they treated? 5. What took place in 1821? 6. Who assisted the Greeks? Why did 
Greece find so many friends ? What of Byron ? 7. What of the Turks ? The Greeks ? 
Who took part with Greece ? 8. Who commanded the combined fleet of England, France 
and Russia? When did they attdck the Turks? 9. What of the Turks] Were they 
obliged to leave Greece ? 10. Who chose a king for the Greeks? What is his name' 
When did he come to the throne ? Ch. LXV1I.—1. What is Italy? Itssnape? Where 
is Sicily ? ' Climate of Italy? 2. What of the air and sky in Italy? What of Graues- 
Wine ? * 


ROME. 


m 


Map of the Roman Empire . 



Questions on the Map . — Tell the situation of the following places from Rome— Lybia ; Arabia 
Numidia • Mauretania* Acaia : Macedonia ; Hungary; England; Be lgue ; Spam; Syria ; By- 
xaufiuw Euxine Sea 

H 


20 honpJZ-firomJFe'rrff 30 


114 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


find grapes so abundant that you could buy a delicious bunch, as large 
as you could eat, for a cent; and if you wished for wine, you could get 
a bottle for two cents. 



Inhabitants of modem Italy. 


3. You would find, in short, that Italy abounds in pleasant frui«.s, 
and in every species of production required for the comfort of man. 
You would find the people, men, women, and children, living a great 
part of the time in the open air, often singing, and sometimes dancing 
m groups beneath the trees. 

4. But, in the midst of these signs of cheerfulness, you would ob- 
serve a great deal of poverty, and you would soon discover that many 
of the people are indolent, vicious, and degraded. 

5. In the cities, many of which are large, and filled with thousand? 
of people, you may notice costly churches and splendid palaces, many 
of them built of marble. But still every thing around you would 
bear an aspect of decay, and impress you with the idea that Italy, 
with all its splendor, is an unhappy country. 

6. At Florence, Rome, Naples, and other large cities, you would 
find collections of pictures and statues, which surpass in beauty every 
thing of the kind in the world. These pictures are the works of fa- 
mous artists, who have lived in Italy within the last five hundred 
years. 

7. The statues are the productions of sculptors, who have lived at 
various periods within the last two thousand years. Some of them, 
indeed, are supposed to have been executed by Grecian artists, who 
lived in the time of Pericles. 

8. But in all Italy there is nothing that will excite so much inte- 
rest as the ruins of ancient Rome, many of which are still to be seen 
in the modern city. These, like the ancient remains of Egypt and 


3 Fruits? Other productions ? The people ? 4. What would you discover after e* 
■mining the people of Italy carefully ? 5. What of the cities? 6. 7. What of picture* 
end statues ? 8. What of the ruins of Rome ? 


ITALY. li5 

Greece, would delight you with their beauty, and astonish you by 
their grandeur and magnificence. 

9. The most remarkable edifice of modem times to be found in 
Italy, is the church of St. Peter’s at Rome, the height of which is 
nearly five hundred feet. Near this is the Vatican, a famous palace 
inhabited by the pope, who reigns over Rome and the country around, 
like a king. 

10. If you were to go to Naples, you would see at the distance of a 
few miles a famous mountain called Vesuvius, from which smoke, 
flame, and torrents of melted lava have periodically issued for ages. 
Sometimes whole towns and cities in the neighborhood have been bu- 
ried beneath the burning masses. 

.1 1. If you were to go to Sicily, you would find another volcanic 
mountain called Etna, which also pours out, from time to time, im- 
mense volumes of smoke, fire, and lava. Yet on the very sides of 
these mountains the people dwell in thickly settled villages, and here 
you will find rich vineyards, beautiful gardens, and groves of figs, 
oranges, and olives. 

12. Having visited Italy, you will return to America with many 
wonderful tales to tell of this famous peninsula that lies in the shape 
of a boot in the Mediterranean Sea ; but you will still be contented 
and happy to settle down in your native country, where beggars are 
seldom seen, where poverty and wretchedness are rare, and where 
every thing speaks of prosperity. 

13. You may remember with admiration the desolate ruins of 
Rome, the marble palaces of Florence and Naples, but you would 
not wish to live where even these splendid edifices oppress the heart 
with gloom. You would much rather live among the more cheerful 
and thriving villages and towns of our own country. The truth is 
that Italy has been badly governed for ages, and the people have be- 
come indolent and vicious. Let us hope that they will yet become 
more worthy of the beautiful country they inhabit. 


CHAPTER LXVIIL— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

Founding of Rome by Romulus. Its early State. 

1. I shall now proceed to tell you the history of Rome, the most 
celebrated empire of antiquity. Like the history of all ancient coun* 
tries, it abounds in tales of battle, bloodshed, injustice, and crime. 
Over such horrid scenes I should be glad to draw a veil ; but these 
things have really happened, and it is the duty of the faithful story- 
teller to hide nothing which is necessary to give a true picture of 
what he undertakes to exhibit. 


9. What of St. Peter’s? The Vatican? The pope? 10. What of Vesuvius? 11, 
What of Etna ? Where is the island of Sicily ? 12. With what feelings would you re- 

turn to America after visiting Italy ? Ch. LXVIII.— 1. What of the empire of Rome . 
What of its history? 



jfje i Jv* Gr 

Mancixa 


.oiuce: 


Turin IQ £* o 




•■Florence 


-OfBoiti {aoio- 


Syracuse 


Carthag 

Tunls< 


' iileita 
laltth 


116 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 

V- 

Map of Italy . 


Questions on the Map . — Boundaries of Italy? Tell the direction of the followi 
Rome — Africa; Sicily; Sardinia; Savoy; Naples; Tuscany; Switzerland; Malta 
th&ge; Turin; Austria. 


places from 
unis ; Car- 


ROME. 


117 


2. The famous city of Rome stands on the river Tiber, in Italy. 
Its distance from the sea is about sixteen miles. It is supposed to 
have been founded by Romulus, in the year 752 B. C. Romulus was 
the captain of about three thousand banditti, of outlaws. These men 
built some huts on a hill called the Palatine, and enclosed them with 
a wall. This was the origin of the most famous city the world ever 
saw. 

3. It is said that this wall was so low, that Remus, the brother of 
Romulus, leaped over it. “ Do you call this the wall of a city ?’’ 
cried he, contemptuously. Romulus was so enraged, that he struck 
his brother dead; and this was the first blood that bedewed the walls 
of Rome. 

4. When Romulus and his fellow robbers were comfortably settled 
in their new houses, they found themselves in want of wives. At 
this time, Italy was inhabited by many rude tribes. Among these 
were the Sabines, who lived in the neighborhood of Rome. These 
would not allow their young women to marry the Romans ; but Ro- 
mulus contrived a scheme to get wives by force. 

5. He invited the whole Sabine people to witness some games and 
sports. Accordingly, the Sabines came; and, as they suspected no 
mischief, they brought almost all the marriageable young women 
in the country. 

6. At first, the Sabines were highly delighted with the feats of 
strength and agility, which were performed by the Romans to enter- 
tain them. But, in a little while, Romulus gave a signal* and all 
his men drew their swords, and rushed among the j eaceable 
spectators. 

7. The Sabines were of course taken by surprise, and could make 
no resistance. Each of the Romans caught up the prettiest young 
woman he could find, and carried her away. There was no longer 
any scarcity of wives in Rome. 

8. This outrageous act of violence caused a war between the Ro- 
mans and Sabines. The latter mustered a large army, and would 
probably have exterminated Romulus and his banditti. But when 
they were about to engage in battle, the yoUng wives of the Romans 
rushed into the field. 

9. They besought the two hostile parties to make peace. They 
said that Avhichever side might gain the victory, it would bring 
nothing but sorrow to them ; for, if the Sabines should conquer, their 
husbands must lose their lives ; or if the Romans should win the day, 
their kindred would perish. 

10. Both parties were much moved by these entreaties. The Sa- 
bines saw that the young women had become attached to their hus- 
bands ; and therefore it would be a pity to separate them, even if it 
could be done without bloodshed. In short, the matter ended peace- 

2. On what rivet- is Rome ? How far is it from the sea ? When and by whom was it 
found*- ' vV ho was Romulus? What did the outlaws do ? What is the origin of Rome? 
b. , . uac happened between Romulus and Remus? 4. Of what did Romulus and his men 
feel the want? What of the Sabines? 5. Give an account of the carrying off of the 
Sabine women. 8. What did this act cause ? How was the war prevented? 9. What did 
the young wives of the Romans say ? 10. What effect had their entreaties? 


1|8 SCHOOL HISTORY. 

ably, and an alliance, which you know is a friendly treaty, was 
formed. 

1 1. The first government of Rome consisted of a king and senate- 
Romulus was chosen king, and reigned thirty-seven years. There 
are different accounts of the way in which his reign terminated. 

12. Some historians pretend that, while Romulus sat in the senate, 
house giving wise instructions in regard to matters of state, the hall 
was suddenly darkened by an eclipse of the sun. When the sun 
shone out again, the chair of Romulus was perceived to be empty ; 
and it was said he had been taken up into heaven. 

13. Others say, that Romulus attempted to make himself a tyrant, 
and that therefore the senators pulled him down from his chair of 
state and tore him in pieces. This story appears more probable than 
the former. At all events, king Romulus suddenly disappeared, and 
was never seen again in the city which he had founded. 


CHAPTER LXIX.— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

Battle of Horatii and Curiatii. 

1. Tiie second king of Rome was Numa Pompilius. He was t 
wise and good king, and a great lover of peace. He spent forty-three 
years in making excellent laws, and instructing the people in agricul- 
ture and other useful arts. 

2. The peaceful Numa was succeeded by Tullus Hostilius. He 
was a warlike monarch. During his reign the Romans engaged in 
hostilities with the Albans, who inhabited a neighboring city. 

3. It was agreed that the war should be decided by a battle be- 
tween three champions on each side. In the army of the Albans 
there were three brothers, each named Curiatius; and in the Roman 
army there were likewise three by the name of Horatius. 

4. These Horatii and Curiatii were fixed upon as the champions. 
They fought in an open plain ; and on each side stood the ranks of 
armed warriors, with their swords sheathed, anxiously watching the 
combat. 

5. At first it seemed as if the Curiatii were going to win the vic- 
tory. It is true they were all three wounded ; but two of the Horatii 
lay dead upon the field. The other Horatius was still unhurt. He 
appeared determined not to perish like his two brothers; for he was 
seen to turn and flee. At the flight of their champion, the Romans 
groaned with shame and despair; for if he should lose the battle, 
they were all to be made slaves. 

6. The three Curiatii pursued the fugitive. But their wounds had 

1 1 . What of the first government of Rome ? Who was chosen king, and how long 
did he reign ? 12. What do some historians pretend ? 13. What do others say ? Chap. 

LXIX. — 1. Who was the second king of Rome ? What of him? 2. What of Tullus Hos- 
tiiius ? 3. How was the war between the Romans and Albans to be decided ? Who were 
the Horatii and Curiatii ? 4. 5. Describe the war between these combatants. Who fled 
lirom the battle ? 6. What did the three Curiatii do ? What of Horatius ? 


ROME. 


119 


rendered them feeble. They staggered along, one behind the other, 
so that they were separated by considerable distances. This was 
what Horatius desired. Though he could not have beaten all three 
together, he was more than a match for them singly. 

7. He now turned fiercely upon the foremost, and slew him. Then 
he encountered the second, and smote him dead in a moment. The 
third met with the same fate. The Alban army now turned pale, 
and dropped their weapons on the field ; for they had lost their free- 
dom. 

The exulting Romans greeted Horatius with shouts of triumph. 
He returned towards Rome amid a throng of his countrymen, all of 
whom hailed him as their benefactor. But as he entered the city, he 
met a young woman wringing her hands in an agony of grief. This 
was his sister. She was in love with one of the Curiatii, and when 
she saw Horatius, she shrieked aloud, and reproached him bitterly for 
having slain her lover. 

9. The victor still held the bloody sword with which he had killed 
the three Alban champions. His heart was still fierce with the 
frenzy of the combat. He could not bear that his sister should be- 
wail one of the dead enemies, instead of her two dead brothers ; nor 
that she should darken his triumph with her reproaches. Accordingly, 
in the frenzy of the moment, he stabbed her to the heart. 

10. Horatius was condemned to die for this dreadful crime; but he 
was afterwards pardoned, because his valor had won for Rome such 
a great deliverance. But the disgrace of his guilt was far more than 
the honor of his victory. 


CHAPTER LXX. — EUROPE CONTINUED. 

From the Reign of Ancus Martins , till the Expulsion of 
the Kings. 

1. After the death of Tullus Hostilius, the Romans elected Ancus 
Martius to be king. He was succeeded by Tarquin the Elder, whose 
father had been a rich merchant. The next king was Servius Tul- 
lius. When Servius had reigned forty-four years, he was murdered 
by Tarquin, his son-in-law, who was ambitious of being king. 

2. Tullia, the wife of Tarquin and daughter of Servius, rejoiced at 
her father’s death, for she wished to be queen. She rode out in her 
chariot in order to congratulate her wicked husband. In one of the 
streets through which the chariot was to pass, lay the dead body of 
the poor old king. The coachman saw it, and was desirous of turn- 
ing back. “ Drive on !” cried the wicked Tullia. 

7. What was the fate of the Curiatii ? 8. Flow was Horatius greeted ? What of hia 
aister ? 9. Why did Horatius kill her ? 10. What of Horatius ? Why was he pardoned? 

Ch. LXX. — 1. Who was king after Tullus Hostilius ? Who next? Who killed Sar- 
vius Tullus? 2. 3. What of Tullia ? Describe her wicked act. 


120 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


3. The coachman did so; and as the street was too narrow to per 
mit him to turn out, the chariot passed directly over the murdered 
king. But Tullia rode on without remorse, although the wheels 
were stained with her father’s blood. 

4. Her husband now ascended the throne, and was called Tarquin 
the Proud. The Romans abhorred him, for he was a hateful tyrant. 
Several almost incredible stories are told respecting his reign. 

5. One day, it is said, that a woman of singular aspect entered the 
king’s presence, bringingnine large books in her arms. No one kaew 
whence she came, nor what was contained in her books. She re- 
quested the king to buy them. But the price was so high, that Tar- 
quin refused ; especially as he did not know what the books were 
about. 

6. The unknown woman went away and burnt three of her books. 
She then came back, and again offered the remaining ones to Tar- 
quin. But, she demanded as much money for the six as she had be- 
fore asked for the whole nine ; and Tarquin of course refused to buy 
them. 

7. The woman went away a second time. But shortly afterwards 
she was again seen entering the palace. She had now only three 
volumes left; and these she offered to the king at the same price 
which she had before asked for the whole nine. 

8. There was something so strange and mysterious in all this, that 
Tarquin concluded to give the woman her price. She put the three 
volumes into his hands, and immediately disappeared. 

9. The books were found to be the oracles of a sibyl, or prophetess. 
They were therefore looked upon with superstitious reverence, and 
were preserved in Rome during many ages ; and in all difficult and 
perplexing cases, the rulers looked into these old volumes, and read, 
as they supposed, the secrets of their country’s fate. 

10. The above story is probably a fable. So also is that of the dis- 
covery of a man’s head, while the workmen were digging the foun- 
dation of the temple of Jupiter. Yet the Romans firmly believed 
that a human head was found there under the earth, and that it 
looked as fresh as if just cut off. 

11. When Tarquin the Proud had reigned more than twenty years, 
he and his family Were driven out of Rome by the people. This 
event was brought about by the wickedness of his son Sextus, whose 
conduct had caused a noble Roman lady to commit suicide. Her 
name was Lucretia. 

12. The expulsion of the Tarquins took place in the year 509 be- 
fore the Christian era. The Romans never had another king. Be- 
sides the senate, the government now consisted of two magistrates 
called consuls, who were chosen every year. Brutus and Collatinus 
were the first. 

13. Brutus gave a terrible example of his justice and patriotism. 

4. What was Tarquin called? What of him? 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. What strange story can 
you tell of him ? 10. What of a man’s head ? 11. How long did Tarquin reign ? What 

of him and his family? What of Sextus? 12. What took place 509 B. C.? How long 
from the founding of Rome to the death of her last king? What of the government of 
Rome after the Tarquius i Who were the first consuls ? 13. What act did Brutus perform.. 


ROME. 


121 


His two sons had engaged in a conspiracy to 7 make Tarquin king 
again. Brutus, who was a judge when they were brought to trial, 
condemned them both to death, and had them executed in his 
presence. 


CHAPTER LXXL— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

The Story of Coriolanus. 

1 . Acts of heroism were common among the Romans, in those 
days. A young man, named Mutius Scaevola, gained great credit for 
his fortitude. He had been taken prisoner by the troops of the king 
of Etruria, or Tuscany, who was at war with Rome. Porsenna 
threatened to torture him, unless he would betray the plans of the 
Roman general. 

2. A fire was burning close beside the prisoner. He immediately 
put his hand into the midst of the flames, and held it there till it was 
burnt off. By this act, he showed Porsenna that no tortures could 
induce him to turn traitor. 

3. Almost from the first foundation of Rome, the inhabitants had 
been divided into two classes; one called patricians, and the other 
plebeians. The senate and most of the rich men were included 
among the patricians. The consuls were also chosen from this class. 

4. Thus the patricians had nearly all the power in their hands. 
This caused frequent quarrels between them and the common people, 
or plebeians. But at length it was ordained that five magistrates, 
called tribunes, should be annually chosen by the plebeians. 

5 . These tribunes took away a great deal of power from the patri- 
cians, and were therefore hated by them. Coriolanus, a valiant, but 
proud patrician, endeavored to have the office of the tribunes abolish- 
ed. But they were more powerful than he, and succeeded in procur- 
ing his banishment. 

6. Coriolanus left the city, and went to the territories of the Volsci, 
who were bitter enemies of the Romans. There he gathered a large 
army, and advanced to besiege Rome. His countrymen were greatly 
alarmed when they heard that the banished Coriolanus was return- 
ing so soon, and in so terrible a mariner. 

7. They therefore sent an embassy to meet him, consisting of the 
oldest senators. But these venerable men could make no impression 
on Coriolanus. Next came an embassy of priests ; but they met with 
no better success. 

8. Coriolanus still marched onward, and pitched his tent within a 
short distance of the Roman walls. He was gazing towards the city 

Ch. LXXI. — 1. 2. Relate the anecdote of Mutius Scaevola. 3. Whal two classes were 
there iu Rome ? What of the class of the patricians? Who were the plebeians? 4. 
What caused quarrels between the patricians and plebeians ? From which class were the 
tribunes chosen ? 5. What of the tribunes ? 

11 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


♦ 12*2 

snd planning an attack for the next day, when a third embassy ap- 
peared. It was a mournful procession of Roman ladies. 

9. At their head walked Yeturia, who was the mother of Coriola- 
nus; and Yergilia, his wife, was also there, leading his children by 
the hand. When they drew near, his mother knelt down at his feet, 
and besought him not to be the ruin of his native city. 

10. Coriolanus strove to resist her entreaties, as he had resisted 
those of the senators and priests. But though his heart had been 
pTOud and stubborn against them, it was not so against his mother. 

11. “Mother,” cried he, “I yield! You have saved Rome, but 
* ou have destroyed your son!” And so it proved; for the Volsci 
were enraged at his retreat from Rome, and they murdered him at 
Antium. 


CHAPTER LXXII.— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

Rome invaded by the Gauls. The first Punic War . 

1. In process of time, the Roman government underwent various 
changes. The will of the plebeians had far greater influence than the 
will of the patricians. The consequence was, that the prosperity of 
Rome increased at home and abroad. 

2. But in the year 385 before Christ, a great calamity befell the 
city. It was taken by an army of Gauls, inhabitants of the country 
now called France. When Brennus, their general, had entered Rome, 
he marched with his soldiers to the senate-house. 

3. There he beheld an assemblage of gray-bearded senators, seated 
in a noble hall, in chairs of ivory. Each held an ivory staff in his 
hand. These brave old men, though they could make no resistance, 
considered it beneath their dignity to run away from the invaders. 

4. The Gauls were awe-struck by their venerable aspect. But 
finally, one of the soldiers, being ruder than his companions, took 
nold of the long gray beard of an aged senator, and pulled it. The 
old gentleman, whose name was Papyrius, was so offended at this 
insult, that he uplifted his ivory staff, and hit the soldier a blow on 
the head. 

5. But that blow cost Rome dear. The Gauls immediately mas- 
sacred Papyrius and the other senators, and set fire to the city; and 
almost the whole of it was reduced to ashes. You must bear in mind 
that, at this time, Rome had become an immense city. It contained 
many magnificent edifices; the most splendid of these was called the 
capitol ; this was not taken by the Gauls. 

6. All the bravest of the Romans assembled there, and resolved to 
defend it to the last. Yet the enemy had nearly got possession of it 

6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Tell the story of Coriolanus. 11. What was his fate ? Ch. LXXII.— 
1. Ofwhatwasthe prosperity of Rome the consequence? 2. What befell the city 385 
B. C. ? What of Brennus ? 3. 4. What happened in the senate-house ? 5. What of tho 
size of Rome at this time ? What of the capitol ? 6. How was the capitol saved ? 


ROME. 


123 


m the night. But as they were creeping towards the gate, they 
awoke a large flock of geese; and their cackling alarmed the 
sentinels. 

7. In consequence of this fortunate event, a goose was thenceforth 
considered a very praiseworthy and honorable fowl by the Romans. 
I am not sure but what they thought it a sin to have roast goose for 
dinner. 

8. The Gauls were driven out of Rome, and were soon vanquished 
bv Camillus, a brave and patriotic Roman. It is said that not a sin- 
gle man of them got back to their own country, to tell the fate of his 
companions. 

9. The Romans were almost continually at war. Their valor and 
discipline generally rendered them successful ; but sometimes they 
met with misfortunes. In a war with the Samnites, a Roman army 
was captured, and forced to pass under the yoke, which was a sign 
of subjection. This was the highest possible ignominy. 

10. But at length all the other states and kingdoms of Italy were 
reduced under the Roman power. Afterwards, the most formidable 
enemy of Rome was Carthage. This was a powerful city on the 
African coast, near where Tunis now stands. It was situated nearly 
south of Rome, across the Mediterranean Sea, at the distance of 
about four hundred miles. 

1 1. The wars between Rome and Carthage were called Punic wars. 
The first began in the year 264 before Christ, and lasted twenty-three 
years. Many battles were fought on land, and some by sea. 

12. The Carthaginians were a cruel people. Whenever their gene- 
rals lost a battle, they were crucified. Regulus, a Roman general 
was taken by them, and underwent horrible torments. They cut off 
his eyelids, and then exposed his naked eyes to the burning sun. He 
was afterwards put into a barrel, the inner sides of which were set 
with iron spikes. 

13. A peace was at last concluded between Rome and Carthage. 
The doors of the temple of Janus, at Rome, had not been shut for 
five hundred years ; for they always stood open while the Romans 
were at war. But now they were closed and barred ; for Rome was 
at peace with all the world. 

8. Who conquered the Gauls? 9. What of the Romans? What of the war with tho 
Samnites ? 10. What of the kingdoms of Italy ? Where was Carthage ? How far was it 

from Rome ? 11. When did the first Punic war begin ? How long did it last ? 1-2. What 

of the Carthaginians ? What of Regulus ? 13. What of the temple of Janus ? How long 

had the doors been open? Why were they now closed ? When was the temple of Janus 
open ? When shut ? 


124 


SCHOOL HISTORY 


CHAPTER LXXIII.— EUROPE CONTINUED. 


Second and third Punic Wars. 



Hannibal and his army crossing the Alps . 


1. The doors of the temple of Janus were soon flung wide open 
again ; for a war broke out between the Romans and a tribe of Gauls. 
It ended in the conquest of the latter. 

2. In the year 218 before the Christian era, another war with Car- 
thage began. This was called the second Punic war. The Cartha- 
ginians were commanded by Hannibal, who proved himself one of 
the greatest generals that ever lived. 

3. Hannibal transported his army across the Mediterranean Sea to 
Spain, and thence marched toward Italy. In his progress it was ne- 
cessary that he should cross the Alps. The summits of these moun- 
tains are many thousand feet in height, and were covered with ice and 
snow; in some places Hannibal had to cut a passage through the 
solid rock. 

4. After crossing these mountains, several battles were won by the 
Carthaginians. At length the two Roman consuls, with a large army, 
encountered Hannibal and his soldiers at Cannae. Here the Romans 
were defeated with dreadful slaughter. One of the consuls fled ; the 
ether was slain, and forty thousand rr en were left dead on the field. 

5. Rome had now no army to protect it. If Hannibal had marched 
thither immediately, it is probable that he might have taken the city 
But he delayed too long, and the Romans made preparation to defend 
themselves. 


Ch. LXXIII. — 1. What war now broke out? Which side was victorious? 2. When 
did the second Punic war begin ? Who led the Carthaginians ? 3 What did Hannibal do ? 
How did his army cross the Alps? 4. Describe the battle of Cannae. 6. What of Rome a| 
this time ? 


ROME. 


125 


6. Hannibal never won such another victory as that at Cannae, for 
the Romans soon enlisted new armies, and fought more successfully 
than before. Scipio, their best general, sailed over to Africa, in order 
to attack Carthage. Hannibal immediately followed him. 

7. A battle was fought between him and Scipio at Zama. The 
Carthaginians had a multitude of elephants. These animals were 
wounded by the Roman darts, and the pain made them rush through 
the field, trampling down whole ranks of Hannibal’s army. 

8. The Carthaginians were entirely defeated, and Hannibal himself 
barely escaped amid the rout and confusion. This battle put an end 
to the second Punic war. 

9. Rut a third war between Rome and Carthage broke out in about 
fifty years. The Romans were commanded by another Scipio, who 
was as valiant as his namesake, but the Carthaginians had no longer 
a Hannibal. 

10. This third Punic war ended in the destruction of Carthage. 
The city was set on fire, and continued to burn during seventeen days. 
Many of the citizens threw themselves into the flames, and perished. 
This happened in the year 137 before the Christain era. 

11. Scipio returned to Rome, and was rewarded with a triumph. 
As this was the highest honor that a Roman general could attain, and 
as such triumphs were often given to successful commanders, I will 
tell my readers, in the next chapter, what Scipio’s triumph was. 


CHAPTER LXXIV.-EUROPE CONTINUED. 


Scipio’s Triumph. 


1. Scipio, on his return from Carthage, stopped at the Campus 
Martius, which was a plain on the outside of Rome. From thence 
he was escorted into the city by a grand procession. 

2. First came a band of musicians, playing their loudest strains cn 
all sorts of instruments. Then followed a drove of oxen, which were 
to be sacrificed in the temples of the gods. Their horns were gilded, 
and garlands were wreathed around their heads. 

3. Next came a tram of cars, heavily laden with the rich spoils that 
had been taken at Carthage. There was gold and silver in abun- 
dance, and statues, pictures, and magnificent garments. The brilliant 
armor of the vanquished army was likewise piled upon the cars. 

4. Then were seen some elephants, treading along like moving 
hills. These huge animals were trained to war, and were able to 
carry a whole company of soldiers on their backs. 


6. What of Scipio ? Who followed him ? 7. Where was a battle fought? What of ele- 
phants? S. Which side were defeated ? What of Hannibal ? 9. Who led the Romans in 
the third Punic war ? W T hat of the Carthaginians? 10. When was Carthage burnt? 11. 
How Scipio rewarded ? Ch. LXXIV. — 1. Where was the Campus Martius ? What of 
the procession ? '2. What came first ? What was done with the oxen ? 3. With what 
were tne cars laden? 4. What of elephants ? 

11 * 


126 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


5. Next appeared a melancholy troop of the vanquished Cartha- 
ginians. Their chains clanked as they walked heavily onward* 
Among them were all the principal men of Carthage, and they droop 
ed their heads in shame and sorrow, regretting that they had not 
perished in the flames of their city. 

6. Behind the sad troop came another loud band of music, drown 
ing the groans of the captives with the uproar of a hundred insiru 
ments. There were likewise dancers, whose garb made them appeal 
like monsters, neither beasts nor men. These wore crowns of gold. 

7. Then came a splendid chariot, adorned with ivory, and drawn 
by four white horses all abreast. In this chariot stood the triumphant 
Scipio, dressed in a purple robe, which was covered with gold em- 
broidery. His face was painted with vermilion, and he had a crown 
of laurel on his head. 

8. A golden ball hung at his breast ; and in his right hand he held 
an ivory sceptre, with a golden eagle at the top. But in the same 
chariot stood a slave, who kept whispering to Scipio, “ Remember 
that thou art but a man ! ” And these words seemed to sadden Sci- 
pio’s triumph. 

9. Around the chariot was a great throng of Scipio’s relatives, and 
other citizens, all clothed in white. Next came the consuls and all 
the members of the Roman senate, in their robes of ceremony. 

10. Last in the procession marched the victorious army. Their 
helmets were wreathed with laurel. The standard-bearers carried 
eagles of gold and silver, instead of banners. As they moved onward, 
they sang hymns in praise of Scipio’s valor, and all the Roman citi- 
zens joined their voices in the chorus. In this manner, the procession 
passed through the streets of Rome and entered the doors of the 
capitol. 


CHAPTER LXXV.— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

Sylla and Marius. 

1. The Romans still continued to make conquests. Not long after 
the ruin of Carthage, the whole of Spain became a province of Rome. 
There was likewise a war with Numidia, a country of Africa, now 
called Algiers. Jugurtha, the Numidian king, was brought prisoner 
to Rome, and starved to death in a dungeon. 

2. There was afterwards a Social war, beginning in the year 
91 before Christ. This war was called Social, because it was 
between the Romans and the neighboring states of Italy, who 

5 . Describe the appearance of the captive Carthaginians. In what battle were they 
taken prisoners ? 6. What of Musicians and dancers? 7. How did Scipio appear ? What 
did the slave whisper in his ear ? What was the effect of what he said ? 9. Wliat fol- 
lowed the chariot ? 10. Describe the victorious army. Where did the procession stop * 

Ch. LXXV . — 1. What of the Romans ? What of Spain ? WRere was Numidia ? Direc 
ticn from Rome ? Carthage ? What of it ? Its king ? 2. When did the social war begin > 
How many men were killed in this war ? Who was Mithridates ? Where was Poutus ? 


ROME. 


m 


nad been their friends and allies. Three hundred thousand men 
were killed on both sides. Then there was a war with Mithridates, 
the powerful king of Pontus, in Asia Minor. He was not entirely 
vanquished till forty years afterwards. 

3. In the course of all this fighting, two Roman commanders ac- 
quired great renown. One was named Marius, and the other Sylla. 
Marius was a rude and daring soldier, knowing nothing but how to 
fight. Sylla was likewise a good soldier, but also a person of great 
elegance and polished manners, 

4. These two generals became so great and powerful, that each 
was envious of the other. They therefore began a civil war, in 
which Romans fought against Romans. I will relate an incident in 
order to show the horrors of this war. 

5. One of Sylla’s soldiers had killed another that fought for Ma- 
rius. He began to strip him of his armor ; but on taking off the 
helmet which had concealed the dead man’s face, he saw that it was 
his own brother. The wretched survivor placed the body on a fu- 
neral pile, and then killed himself. 

6. In the outset of the struggle with Sylla, Marius was beaten; 
but he afterwards gained possession of Rome. He now resolved to 
put to death every person that was not friendly to his cause. Sena- 
tors and other distinguished men were publicly murdered. Dead bo- 
dies were seen everywhere about the streets. 

7. But Marius could not escape the misery which his wickedness 
deserved. He was so tortured by remorse, that he contracted a habit 
of drinking immoderately. This brought on a fever, of which he died. 

8. After the death of this wicked man, Sylla returned to Rome at 
the head of a large army. He declared himself dictator; and his 
word then became the sole law of Rome. Like Marius, he deter- 
mined to massacre all his enemies. As fast as they were killed, their 
bloody heads were brought to them. 

9. When Sylla had shed as much blood as he desired, he suddenly 
resigned his power. Everybody was surprised at this, but nobody 
lamented it; nor’were there any mourners when this cruel and wick- 
ed man died, which happened soon after. 


CHAPTER LXXVL— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

Cneius Pompey and Julius Ccesar. 

1. If the Roman people had loved liberty as well as they once did, 
they never would have borne the tyranny of Sylla and Marius. But 
they had become addicted to luxury, by the riches which they had 
acquired from their conquests in all parts of the world. 

3. What of the Roman commanders? Marius? Sylla? 4. What war broke out in 
Rome ? 5. Relate a horrid incident in this war. 6. What did Marius do ? 7. What was 
nis fate ? 8. What did Sylla do? Give an account of his proceedings. 9. What act of 
Sylla'* surprised everybody ? Ch. LXXVI — 1. What of the Roman people ? 


128 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


2. Owing to their continual wars, they had also accustomed them 
Selves to consider successful warriors as the greatest men on earth 
Soldiers must obey their leaders, without asking why or wherefore 
and all the Roman people felt like soldiers. Thus the very same 
causes which rendered the Romans so invincible to their enemies 
made them liable to be enslaved by any great general who shoul- be 
ambitious of enslaving them. And such a general soon appeared. 

3. After the death of Sylla and Marius, the two most valiant 
distinguished warriors were Pompey and Caesar. Pompey was th 
eldest. He had grown famous by vanquishing Mithridates, and by 
many other victories. He had conquered fifteen kingdoms, and taken 
eight hundred cities. 

4. The name of this illustrious leader’s rival was Julius Caesar. He 
was the most beautiful person in Rome. He had fought in Gaul, 
Germany, and Britain, and had overcome three millions of men, and 
killed one million. His soldiers idolized him. 

5. At last, like Sylla and Marius, these two generals became so 
great and powerful, that the world was no longer wide enough for 
them both. They each collected great armies, in which all the Ro- 
man soldiers were enlisted, on one side or the other. 

6. They encountered each other at Pharsalia, in Macedon. The 
best part of Pompey’s army consisted of a multitude of the young 
Roman nobility. These youths had very handsome faces ; and it 
was chiefly owing to this circumstance that Pompey lost the victory. 

7. Caesar ordered his rough and weather-beaten soldiers to aim 
their blows right at the faces of their enemies. The latter were so 
afraid that their beauty would be spoiled, that they immediately 
turned and fled. A complete victory was gained by Caesar. 

8. Pompey made his escape into Egypt, but was there murdered. 
His head was cut off and brought to Caesar, who turned aside his 
eyes, from the bloody spectacle, and wept to think that so mighty a 
warrior had met with so sad a fate. 


CHAPTER LXXVII.— EUROPE CONTINUED. 


Ccesar usurps the Supreme Poiver. 

1. When the Roman senate heard of Caesar’s victory, they pro- 
claimed a solemn thanksgiving to the gods. Supreme power was 
granted him for life, with the title of dictator. His person was de- 
clared sacred and inviolable. 

2. Plis statue was placed among those of gods and heroes, in the 

2. What was the consequenceof continual war ? 3. What generals appeared after Ma- 
rius and Sylla? What had Pompey done ? 4. What of Pompey’s rival, Julius Caesar? 
6 . What did these great generals do ? 6. Where was a battle fought ? What of Pom- 
pey’s army? 7. By what means did Caesar vanquish the followers of Pompey? 8. What 
become of Pompey? Why did Caesar weep at his death. Ch. LXXVII. — 1. What did 

Romans do alter Caesar's victory ? 2. What of Caesar’s statue ? 


ROME. 


129 


capital. It stood nei.t to that of Jupiter, and bore this impious in- 
scription, — “ The statue of Cjesar the dem -god.” This proves that 
the Romans were already slaves, when they t; us deified a mortal man. 

3. Caesar had now but one other wish to gratify. He desired to bear 
the name of king. He endeavored to gain the good-will of the sol- 
diers and people, in order that they might gratify his ambition. For 
this purpose he spent immense sums in entertainments and magnifi- 
cent spectacles. 

4. On one occasion, he made a feast for the whole Roman people.' 
Twenty-two thousand tables were set out in the streets of Rome. 
All sorts of delicious food and drink were heaped upon them. The 
meanest beggar was at liberty to sit down and eat his fill. 

5. Most of the Romans had now lost the noble spirit which had 
animated their forefathers. They were willing to be governed by any 
man who would feed them with delicacies, and amuse them with 
splendid shows, as Caesar did. It must be owned, also, that Caesar 
had many noble and amiable qualities. 

6. The people therefore had a fondness for their tyrant. They 
loved to behold him, at the public spectacles and entertainments, sit- 
ting in a gilded chair of state, with a golden crown upon his head. 
Had he asked it, they were even ready to fall down and worship him. 

7. But there were a few Romans of the old stamp who loved lib- 
erty for its own sake. There were others also, who hated Caesar 
because he had wronged them, or because he was more powerful 
than they. These two sorts of persons formed a conspiracy to kill him. 

8. The two chief conspirators were Brutus and Cassius. Brutus 
was a dear lover of liberty, and a true friend of Rome. He also loved 
Caesar, and was beloved by him. But he resoivea to assist in slay- 
ing him in order that his country might be free. 

9. Cassius formed the same resolution; but it was chiefly because 
ne hated Caesar. Sixty other senators were engaged in the plot. 
Most conspirators endeavor to do their work in secrecy and at mid- 
night. But the blood of Caesar was to be shed in broad daylight, and 
in the great hall of the senate-house. 


CHAPTER LXXVIII.— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

Assassination of Julius Ccesar. 

1. On the fatal morning, Caesar set forth from his mansion. There 
was a great throng of flatterers and false friends around him. As he 
came down the steps of the portal, a gray-bearded philosopher pressed 
through the crowd and put a paper into his hand. It contained an 

3. What did this great conqueror now desire? What did he do to obtain his wish? 
4. Describe the feast? 5. State of the Romans ? 6. What did they like to see ? 7. Who 
formed a conspiracy to kill Csesar ? 8. Who were Brutus and Cassiu? ? Whr did they 

each determine to kill Csesar? 9. How was the conspiracy carried pn / C «. I XXVIII. 
— 1. Describe Caesar’s departure from his bouse? What happened ts is (Muc> down th« 
steps ' 


130 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


account of the whole plot. If Csesar had read it, it would have cost 
all the conspirators their lives, and have saved his own life. But he 
gave it to one of his secretaries, and walked onward. 

2. As Caesar passed through the streets of Rome, he looked round 
at the crowd of obsequious senators, and listened to the shouts of the 
multitude. He felt that he was the most exalted man in all the 
world. But his heart was not at ease ; for he also felt that he had 
enslaved his country. 

3. The proud procession ascended the steps of the senate house 
and passed into the hall. Along the sides of this hall were ranged 
statues of many famous Romans, and among them stood the marble 
image of Pompey, whose bloody head had been brought to Csesar. 
Just as Csesar was passing in front of Pompey’s statue, Metellus 
Cimber, one of the conspirators, knelt down and took hold of his robe. 
This was the signal for the attack. 

4. Casca, who was behind Csesar, drew a dagger and stabbed him 
in the shoulder. “Wretch! what doest thou?” cried Csesar, 
snatching the weapon. The other conspirators now rushed upon 
him. But he defended himself with the valor he had shown in a 
hundred battles. 

5. At length Brutus pressed forward and struck him with his 
dagger. When Csesar saw that the hand of his dear friend was 
raised against his life, he made no more resistance. “ And thou too 
Brutus !” he said, with one reproachful look. 

6. Then covering his head with his mantle, that his enemies 
might not behold the death-pang in his face, he fell down at the 
pedestal of Pompey’s statue. The marble countenance of the statue 
seemed to look down upon him, and Pompey was avenged. 

7. The conspirators dipped their weapons in the blood that flowed 
upon the pavement. Brutus raised his dagger aloft, and called to 
Cicero, the illustrious orator and patriot, Rejoice, father of our 
country !” he exclaimed, pointing to the prostrate form of Caesar, “ for 
Rome is free !” 

8. But alas! when the souls of a whole people are enslaved, it is 
not the death of any single man that can set them free. And thus, as 
my readers will perceive, the mighty victim died in vain. 


CHAPTER LXXIX.— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

Consequences of Ccesafs Death . 

1. The death of Caesar took place forty-three years before the 
Christian era. The affairs of Rome were thrown into great, confusion 

2. What did he see on looking around him? How did he feel ? 3. Where did the pro- 
cession march? What were ranged around the hall? What happened as Caesar was 
passing the statue of Pompey ? 4. Who first stabbed him? How did he defend himself? 

6. Who gave Caesar the second blow? How did he receive it? 6. Describe his death ? 

7. What did Brutus and the conspirators now do ? 8. Why did Caesar die in vain? Ch 
LXXIX. — 1. When did Caesar’s death take place ? What of Rome ? The friends ol 
Csesar ? 


ROME. 13 | 

by it. Caesar’s friends found no great difficulty in persuading the 
people that he had been unjustly murdered. 

2. Brutus, Cassius, and the other conspirators were compelled to 
flee from the city. Three men then usurped the government, and 
were called triumvirs, or a triumvirate. Their names were Mark 
Antony, Lepidus, and Octavius. The latter was Caesar’s nephew, 

and had been his adopted son. ; ’ 

3. The triumvirate resolved to secure themselves in power by"^ 
murdering all who were opposed to them. They made a list of three 
hundred senators and more than two thousand knights, and offered 
rewards for killing them. They exulted when the heads of theii 
victims were laid at their feet. 

4. One of these wicked triumvirs presented the head of his own 
brother to his colleagues. Another brought his uncle’s head. No 
friend, nor relative, nor patriot was spared if he was suspected ol 
being opposed to the triumvirate. 

5. In the mean time, Brutus and Cassius were in Greece. They 
had collected an army of a hundred thousand men ; Mark Antony and 
Octavius marched against them; and a battle was fought at Phillippi, 

Brutus and Cassius being defeated, they both committed suicide. 

6. The triumvirate had now got all the power into their own i 
hands. But they soon quarrelled among themselves. Lepidus was 
turned out of office, and banished. Mark Antony and Octavius then 
made war upon one another, like Marius and Sylla, and like Pompey 
and Caesar. 

7. The good fortune of Octavius gave him the victory, and Antony 
killed himself with his own sword, as I have related in the history of 
Egypt. Octavius had no- longer any rivals, and was now sole master 
of Rome and its dominions. He was afraid to assume the title of 
king, but called himself emperor, and Augustus Caesar. 

8. In addition to several other titles, the senate gave him that of 
Pater Patriae, or Father of his Country. This was merely a piece of 
flattery. Yet there w^re now so few good men in Rome, that perhaps 
Octavius made a better use of his power than any other would have 
done. 

9. His reign from this time was peaceful and quiet, and offers few 
events that need to De recorded in this brief history. Nearly the 
whole world was under his sway, and therefore he had no occasion 
to increase his dominions by going to war. The greatest glory of his 
times consists in the works of poets and other men of genius. 

10. Octavius, or, as he is always called, Augustus Csesar, reigned 
forty-one years, and died at the age of seventy-six, in the year 14 
after the birth of Christ. You will observe that it was during his 
reign that Christ appeared in Palestine. 


2. Who were ob’-'ged to fly from the city? Who now governed Rome? Who wae 
Octavius ? 3. What, did the triumvirate do ? 4. What acts of cruelty did they perform f 
6. Where now were Brutus and Cassius ? Who opposed them? Where was the battle 
fought? Fate of Brutus and Cassius? 6. What oi the triumvirate? 7. Which of the 
triumvirs triumphed? What became of Antony? What did Octavius call himself ? 8 
What other name did the senate give him ? 9. Describe the reign of Augustus. 10. How 
long did he reign ? When did he die ? 


132 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


CHAPTER LXXX.— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

About the great Power and Extent of the Roman Empii e 
in the Time of Augustus. 

1. As Rome was now at its greatest height of wealth and splendor, 

1 shall try to give you some idea of the extent and power of this vast 
empire, and then, having told you a little more of its history, I shall 
.<ay something about the manners and customs of the ancient Roman 
people. 

2. In the time of Augustus, the Roman empire embraced all the 
nations of Europe, except a few northern tribes, who maintained 
their independence. It included England, France, Spain, Germany, 
all the States of Italy, Greece, the country now occupied by Turkey 
m Europe, beside many other nations. 

3. In Asia, it embraced all the kingdoms from Asia Minor on the 
west, to India on the east. Of course, it included Asia Minor, Syria, 
Palestine, Arabia, Persia, Parthia, and many other countries. 

4. It included the whole northern portion of Africa, from Mauri- 
tania, now Morocco, on the west, to Ethiopia on the east. This was 
the whole of Africa then known ; the interior being only inhabited 
by scattered bands of negroes. 

5. It seems wonderful that one country could govern so many 
rations. This was done, however, by placing Roman governors over 
these various kingdoms ; the governors being sustained by a multi- 
tide of Roman soldiers. 

6. During this period, the people of Rome had great skill in archi- 
tecture, sculpture, painting, and many other arts. These arts were 
extended to all parts of the empire. 

7- Thus a multitude of cities in various parts of Europe, Africa, 
and Asia, were tilled with costly temples and palaces of marble, with 
beautiful statues and valuable paintings. The splendor and magnifi- 
cence of many of these cities, at this period, was indeed wonderful. 

8. Nor was this all ; the Romans built many public works of great 
utility; they constructed roads paved with stone; they built durable 
bridges, and made aqueducts lor supplying the cities with water. 
So numerous and so permanent were these vast works, that the 
remains of them are still to be found in most of those countries over 
which the Roman dominion was then established, though they were 
executed nearly two thousand years ago. 

9. But of all the cities in the world, Rome was itself the most 
wonderful. In the time of Augustus, it was fifty miles in circuit, 
and contained four millions of inhabitants. 


Ch. LXXX. — 2. What of Rome during the reign of Augustus ? What did it include in 
Europe i 3. In Asia ? 4. In Africa ? What parts of Africa were then known ? Tell the 
direction of each of the countries named from Rome. 5. How did Rome govern all these 
nations? 6. What of the people of Rome ? *1. With what were many cities filled? S. 
What of Public Works ? What of aqueducts ? 


ROME. 


133 


10. Like all ancient cities, it was surrounded by high, strong walls 
j»f stone ; for in those warlike times, as I have before said, walls 
were a necessary protection against the attacks of an enemy. The 
walls of Rome were entered by thirty-seven gates. 

11. The interior of this wonderful city surpassed all description. 
The various generals who had conquered other countries, had robbed 
them of their choicest treasures, and these had been brought to Rome 
to decorate and enrich the capital. 

12. There were beautiful statues from Greece, obelisks and col- 
umns from Egypt, and a great variety of curious and costly manufac- 
tures from Asia. Gold, silver, and precious stones had been gathered 
from every part of the earth. 

13. The city was embellished with temples, many of them of 
marble, and beautifully sculptured ; there were also theatres, amphi- 
theatres, porticos, public baths, triumphal arches, and aqueducts. 

14. In short, the city of Rome was enriched with the spoils of the 
whole world, and had that air of pomp and magnificence which suited 
the capital of the greatest empire that the world ever saw. 


CHAPTER LXXXL— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

The Means hy which Rome acquired its Power . 

1. I trust you have now some faint idea of the extent, wealth, 
and power of the Roman empire. We cannot look back upon it but 
with feelings of admiration ; yet when we look at the means which 
had been employed to establish this dominion ; when we look at the 
condition of mankind during that age, and consider that this vast do- 
minion soon crumbled into atoms ; we cannot but feel the strongest 
emotions of pain. 

2. In the first place, the means used to aggrandize Rome were 
those of conquest. The Roman generals went abroad to subdue other 
countries, for no other purpose than to acquire fame and spoils for 
themselves, and power for Rome. 

3. They slaughtered the inhabitants without mercy ; they robbed 
them without scruple, and they subjected them to the Roman yoke 
without the slightest regard to the rights of mankind. 

4. Such were the means by which the fabric of Roman power was 
erected. And what must have been the condition of mankind during 
the seven hundred years that Rome was carrying on its wars for no 
other purpose than to enslave the world ? 

5. It is true that a few men, generals, senators, consuls, and govern 
ors, might have lived in splendor, and enjoyed wealth and fame. 

9. Describe the city of Rome. H. How was the capital decorated? 13. What of 
temples ? Other buildings ? 14. What of the city ? Ch. LXXXI. — 1. What must we feel 
upon reading the history of Rome ? 2. By what means did Rome rise to such a high pitch 
of renown ? What of the Roman generals ? 4. How many years was Rome at war with 
other nations? 5. What classes may have been benefitted by these wars ? Who suffered 
from them ? 

12 


134 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


Some of the Roman soldiers, too, might have led lives of adventure 
gratifying to bold and restless spirits. 

6. But how much suffering, sorrow, and despair must there have 
neen among the millions of wounded men ; among the millions who 
were bereaved of their friends ; among the millions who were strip- 
ped of their fortunes ; among the millions who were reduced to 
slavery. 

7. The simple truth is, that the policy of Rome was wholly seln:h. 
The Roman people, like the Greeks, Persians, Egyptians, and other 
ancient nations, had some notions of virtue, and occasionally displayed 
noble and generous qualities. 

8. Yet, Tike all these nations, they were destitute of true morality ; 
that morality which Christ has taught in a single sentence; Do to 
another as you would have another do to you. Like most other an- 
cient nations, Rome was destitute of that true religion which teaches 
mankind, that all power founded in injustice must perish. 

9. Splendid as the Roman empire was, it was destitute of real 
glory. Its splendor was acquired by robbery, and its fame, though it 
might dazzle a heathen, will be regarded as a false renown by the 
Christian. 

10. In closing this chapter, it is proper to state a remarkable fact, 
that no heathen nation or country has ever existed, where the people 
were generally lovers of justice, truth, and charity. Public opinion 
in all heathen countries, ancient and modern, has been found to be 
an unsafe guide ; it is only in Christian countries, where the laws of 
truth and morality are established on the basis of the Bible, that the 
national faith can be trusted. 

11. Such as it was, the power of Rome was destined to speedy de- 
cay. For a time after Augustus, the empire maintained its sway, and 
the magnificence of Rome continued. The luxury of the wealthy 
citizens even increased, and refinement in many respects was carried 
to a higher pitch than ever. 

12. But the whole fabric was based upon a false foundation; and 
m a few centuries imperial Rome was divided among a host pf ruth- 
less invaders. 


CHAPTER LXXXIL— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

Rome under the Emperors, 

1. The Roman empire had now reached the height of its power, 
pomp and splendor ; but its decline had already commenced, because 
the people and their rulers were alike corrupt. It was like a great 
tree with wide-spreading branches, but rotten at its trunk. 


7. What of Rome and her citizens ? 8. Were the people either truly moral or reli- 
gious ? 9. What of the splendor of Rome ? 10. What may be said of heathen nations ? 

Christian nations ? 11. State of Rome after the death of Augustus? 12. What was the 
fina.’ fate of Rome ? Ch. LXXXII. — 1. To what can you compare the Roman empire ? 


ROME. 


135 

2. In the course of about three hundred and fifty years after the 
death of Augustus Caesar, there were thirty-six emperors of Rome ; 
but I can mention only a few of them. They lived in great luxury 
and splendor, but they were generally such wicked persons that it 
would have been better for the world if they had never lived. 

3. The next emperor to Augustus Caesar was Tiberius. He was a 
frightful looking object, being bald and covered with sores, and his 
disposition was far more hideous than his aspect. This gloomy tyrant 
suspected everybody of plotting against his life. 

4. He put so many people tq death, that their dead bodies were 
piled in heaps in the public places. He once sentenced a poor woman 
to die, merely for lamenting the death of her son. At last, he fell 
into a swoon, and his guards smothered him with his. bed-clothes. 

5 . His successor was Caligula, who wished that the whole Roman 
people had but one head, that he might chop it off at a single blow. 
He also was murdered by his guards, and was succeeded by Claudius, 
an idiot. Claudius was poisoned by his own wife. 

6. Nero was the next emperor. His whole , reign was a scene of 
bloodshed. He murdered his mother and his wife. He set Rome on 
fire, merely for the pleasure of seeing it blaze. While the city was 
in flames, he sat on the top of a lofty tower, playing on a harp. Fi- 
nally, he was dethroned, and condemned to be beaten to death with 
rods. To escape this torture, he killed himself. 

7. The two next emperors were Galba and *©tho. The first was 
killed by his soldiers, and the second committed suicide. The next 
was Vitellius. This monster delighted in visiting fields of battle, and 
snuffing up the smell of the dead bodies. 

8. When the Romans grew weary of Vitellius, they put. a rope 
round his neck and dragged him into the most public part of the city. 
There they bespattered him with mud, and then killed him in a most 
cruel manner. His head was put on a lance, and his body thrown 
into the Tiber. 

9. Rut I am weary, my dear young readers ! My old heart grows sick 
and sad, while I speak to you of these evil and miserable men. For- 
get what I have told you. Forget that such monsters have ever 
existed in the world. 

10. Or, if you must remember them, remember too that their fright 
ful crimes resulted from the possession of more power than mortal 
man ought to possess. And, above all, remember, that if these 
tyrants were the scourges of their people, it was because the people 
had not virtue enough to be free. 


2. How many emperors reigned after Augustus ? What of them ? 3. Give an account 
of Tiberius. 5. Describe Caligula. 6. What of Nero ? 7. What of Galba and Otho ? Vi 
tell ius ? 10. What may you remember of the reigns of these monsters ? 


136 


SCHOOL HISTORY 


CHAPTER LXXXIII. — EUROPE CONTINUER 

Fall of the Western Empire of the Romans. 

1. Yet there were some good men among the Roman emperors. 
Such were Vespasian, Titus, Antoninus, Marcus Aurelius, Alexander 
Severus, Aurelian, and Diocletian. But these good men would doubt- 
less have been better, if their evil fortunes had not made them 
emperors. 

2. The first emperor who became a convert to Christianity was 
Constantine the Great. He began to reign in the year 306 after the 
Christian era. By him the seat of government was transferred from 
Rome to Constantinople. 

3. The religion of Christ was planted in various parts of the 
Roman empire by the apostles, but the first Christians were much 
persecuted. Some were whipped, many were imprisoned, and 
thousands were murdered. 

4. Still their numbers increased. At length the emperor Constan- 
tine ordered that the persecutions should cease, and he himself be- 
came a convert to Christianity. This took place in 311. 

5. It is said that Constantine was one day riding at the head of his 
army, v» hen he saw a splendid cross in the heavens, upon which was 
written, “ Conquer by this sign.” It is supposed that this vision per- 
suaded the emperor of the truth of the Christian religion, and induced 
him to adopt it as the religion of the state. 

6. From this period, Christianity flourished for a considerable time. 
The mythology of Greece and Rome, which had been extended 
throughout the Roman empire, gave way before it. Many of the 
temples were converted into churches, and the people who had been 
accustomed to bow down before the statues of Jupiter and- other 
imaginary gods, knelt in humiliation at the foot of the cross. 

7. In the year 364 after the birth of Christ, the Roman dominions 
were divided into the Eastern and Western empires. The capital of 
the Eastern empire was Constantinople, formerly Byzantium. The 
fate of this will be briefly related in the history of the Turks. 

8. The capital of the Western empire was Rome. But this impe- 
rial city was no longer powerful enough to defend itself against the 
nations which it had formerly conquered. It was ravaged by hordes 
of barbarians from the north of Europe, consisting of Huns, Goths, 
Vandals, &c. 


Ch. LXXXIII. — 1. What good emperors were there ? 2. What of Constantine ? When 
did he begin to reign ? Where was the seat of government placed by Constantine ? What 
was the former name of Constantinople ? 3. What of the religion of Christ ? First Chris- 
tians ? Persecutions? 4. What did Constantine do ? 5. What is said to have happened 
V> Constantine ? 6. What of Christianity from this period ? Mythology of Greece and 
Rome? Temples? People? 7. What took place 364 A. C. ? What was the capital of 
the Eastern Empire of Rome ? 8. The Western empire ? How was it ravaged and laid 
waste ? 


ROME. 


137 


9. Of these rude tribes I shall speak more particularly hereafter, 
ft is sufficient for the present to say that they were bold warriors, and 
chose rather to obtain wealth by plundering the rich inhabitants of 
Italy, than by the cultivation of their own more sterile soil. 

10. One of the first and fiercest of these northern invaders was 
Alaric, king of the Goths, who led a large army against Rome, and 
threatened the destruction of the city. The inhabitants were very 
different from the ancient Romans, and being overawed by the daring 
freebooter, promised him large sums of money. But this promise not 
being fulfilled, Alaric took the city and gave it up to plunder. 

11. For six days, imperial Rome was a scene of pillage and mur- 
der. Thousands of the citizens were slain, and a large portion of the 
place was reduced to ashes. This occurred in the year 410. 

12. After a while, Alaric retired ; but about the year 445, Attila, 
leader of the Huns, threatened to follow the example which Alaric 
had set. But in the midst of his projects he died ; and Rome, for a 
time, was saved. 

13. In the year 476, the whole Western empire, with Rome itself, 
was entirely subjugated by Odoacer, the leader of another northern 
tribe, called the Heruli ; and it remained under this dominion for 
many years. 

14. In the year 537, these barbarians were driven from Rome. 
This triumph was effected by Belisarius, an illustrious commander in 
the service of the emperor of the East. The Eastern and W estern 
empires were then re-united, but only for a short period. Italy, as 
Well as Rome, from this time frequently changed hands, being some- 
times under the sway of northern kings, and sometimes under the 
Greek emperors. 


CHAPTER LXXXIV.— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

Progress of the Decline of Rome. 

1. In the tenth century, the emperor of Germany claimed Italy as 
part of his dominions. Several cities resisted his authority. When 
the emperor, whose name was Otho, heard of it, he invaded Italy 
and went to Rome. 

2. He took possession of the palace, and prepared a magnificen 
feast. All the great men of Rome were invited. The emperor sa 
at the head of the table, on a splendid throne. The guests seatei 
themselves, expecting to be feasted with luxuries. . 

3 But before they had eaten a mouthful, Otho made a sign. Im 
mediately the hall was filled with armed men. The emperor ordere* 

9. What of the northern barbarians.'' 10. What of Alaric? What occurred in 410 
12. What happened about the year 445 ? 13. What of Odoacer ? 14. What happened Jm 

637? Who was Belisarius? What did he do? What of the Eastern and Western Er 
pires What of Italy ? Rome ? Ch. LXXXIV.— 1. What of the emperor of Germany f 


338 


SCHOOL HISTORY 


tne guests neither to move nor speak, on pain of death, whatever 
might take place. They trembled, and wished themselves away 
from the banquet. 

4. One of the emperor’s officers ct ood up and read aloud the names 
of all who had opposed his authority. These unfortunate men had 
been invited to the feast, and were now sitting at the table. The 
emperor commanded them to be dragged into the middle of the hall 
and put to death. The executioner was in readiness, with a broad 
and heavy sword. One after another, the heads of the condemned 
persons rolled upon the floor of the hall. No mercy was shown to 
any of them. 

5. When this dreadful scene was over, the emperor turned his at- 
tention to the banquet. His stem and wrathful aspect became mild 
and pleasing. He endeavored to make the other guests enjoy them- 
selves ; but probably their appetites were not increased by the sight 
of dead bodies on the bloody floor. This is a horrible story, and I 
only tell it to show you the barbarous and cruel character of the men 
of those times. 

6. In the course of years, Italy was divided into several separate 
states, or sovereignties. The principal of these were Naples, Tus- 
cany, Parma, Lombardy, Genoa, and Venice. Rome, with other ter- 
ritories, was given to the pope. Of these I shall give you a brief 
account ; but before I proceed farther with the history of Rome, I 
will tell you something of the manners and customs of the ancient 
Romans. 

7. Let me remark, however, that Rome was now totally changed 
from what it was in the days of Augustus. Not only was the em- 
pire broken in pieces, but the proud city of Rome itself had lost its 
former glory. ^ 

8. The number of its inhabitants had greatly diminished ; many 
of its most splendid edifices were falling into ruins, and the people, 
having been long mixed with barbarians, had lost their former polish, 
and become partially barbarous themselves. 

9. Even the language of Rome and of all Italy gradually became 
changed. The people had formerly spoken the Latin language ; but 
this became mingled with the languages of the northern invaders, 
and thus the modem Italian was gradually formed. Suoh were the 
wonderful changes in Rome and Italy ! 


2, 3. 4. 5. What did he do ? Describe the banquet? 6. How did Italy heron*' divided f 
7. What of the changes in Rome ? 8. What of the inhabitants, edifices, fLr . ' 9. The 
jmguage of Rome ? 


L 


/ 




ROME. 


139 


CHAPTER LXXXV.— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

Manners and Customs of the Ancient Romans. 

1. I am now going to give you an account of the manners and 
customs of the great people whose history you have just read. I shall 
tell you about their domestic habits, and about their public observ- 
ances • about their state of society, agriculture, shows, dresses, reli- 
gion, marriage ceremonies, funeral rites, military institutions, and 
public edifices. 



Senator. Emperor. 


2 . The people of Rome, as you know, were at first divided into 
two classes, the patricians and plebeians. It was to the struggles for 
power between these ranks that most of the difficulties in the state 
were owing. To these ranks a third was afterwards added, called 
equites, or knights; the custom of making slaves of the subjects of 
conquered nations, introduced a fourth division. 

3. You have seen that the government of Rome was subject to 
very numerous changes. At one time it was under a king, at others 
under consuls, dictators, emperors, &c. The other officers of the state 
were numerous, and invested with very different degrees of power. 

4. The ministers of religion among the Romans did not form a 
distinct order of citizens, but were chosen from the most virtuous 
and honorable men of the state. These attended to the sacrifices of 
beasts to the gods, and other religious rites. The superstitions of the 
time gave rise to the establishment of a college of augurs, whose 


Ch. LXXXV. — 2. Into what four ranks or classes were the Roman citizens divided ? 
8 . What of the government ? Officers of state ? 4. Ministers of religion ? Superstitions ? 
How did the augurs proceed ? * 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


140 

business it was to explain dreams, oracles, and prodigies, and to fore- 
tell future events. 



Leading a bull to be sacrificed at one of the templet. 


5 . They drew their auguries or presages concerning futurity, from 
the appearance of the heavens, and inspection of the entrails of birds 
and beasts. Of course they could no more divine the future, than 
the old women you may sometimes meet with in our villages, who 
pretend to “ tell you your fortune,” by examining the grounds of 
coffee cups. 

6. The weakest and most ignorant are now too well informed to 
give credit to these pretences. From this fact you can form some 
opinion as to the general intelligence of the Romans compared with 
that of our own countrymen. 

7. The augurs at Rome interpreted the will of the gods in the 
affairs of making war and peace, and none dared to dispute their 
authority. No business of importance could be proceeded in, without 
first consulting them ; and their advice, whatever it might be, was, by 
a decree of the senate, to be strictly observed. 

8. The office of an augur was important and honorable, and was 
sought after by many of the principal families in the Roman senate. 
Cato, the censor, was a member of their college, and Cicero also * 
though they both appear to have been fully sensible of the extrava- 
gance and folly of -the art they practised. A remark is attributed to 
Cato, that he wondered how one augur could look in the face of 
another without laughing. 


CHAPTER LXXXVI.— EUROPE CONTINUED. 


About Religion. Deities. Temples. Marriage . 


1. The religion of the Romans was borrowed from the Greeks, and 
included the worship of Jupiter, and a multitude of other deities. 
Every virtue and vice of the human heart, every faculty of the mind 


6. What is said of these superstitions ? 
Cato and Cicero ? Remark of Cato ? Ch. 


7. The augurs? 8. The office of 
LXXXVI. — 1. What of religion? 


an augur f 


ROME. 


141 

and body, every property of the real and imaginary world, was pre- 
sided over by its peculiar god. Every grove and mountain and 
stream had its nymph or naiad, and every hero and sage of the 
country was elevated to the rank of a divinity. 

2 Every religious sect was tolerated at Rome except the Jews and 
the Christians. These were persecuted with unrelenting cruelty, 
until the mild precepts of the true religion triumphed over super- 
stition and ignorance. Christianity at length prevailed over con- 
flicting opinions, and was adopted as the religion of the state, 
A. D. 311. 

3. The number of deities whom the Romans worshipped occasioned 
the erection of a great multitude of temples. Many of these were 
very splendid edifices, adorned with all the arts of sculpture, and 
filled with offerings and sacrifices. The priests attended, at the 
temples, and sacrificed sheep, bulls, oxen, and other animals. 

4. Those temples erected to the inferior deities were of less magni- 
ficence and grandeur, and were merely styled sacred houses. In the 
dwelling of every wealthy family there was a private chapel, in 
which they worshipped their household gods. Ancient Rome is said 
to have contained four hundred and twenty temples, dedicated to 
different deities. 

5. Marriage was very much favored by the laws of Rome, and 
severe penalties were inflicted on those who remained single. At 
one period, the censors obliged all the young bachelors to make oath 
that they would marry within a certain time. Augustus increased 
the penalties on bachelors, and bestowed rewards on those who were 
parents of a numerous offspring. 

6. The parties were betrothed some time before the actual cele- 
bration of the marriage. This was attended with many ceremonies, 
at which the priests and augurs assisted. The contract of marriage 
was drawn up in the presence of witnesses, and confirmed by the 
breaking of a straw between the engaged pair. 

7. The bridegroom then presented his bride with the wedding 
ring, and the father of the bride gave a great entertainment. The 
wedding ring was worn on the third finger of the left hand, from a 
notion that a nerve of that finger communicated directly with the 
heart. 

8. In dressing the bride, they never failed to divide her locks with 
the point of a spear, to signify that she was about to become the wife 
of a warrior. They then crowned her with a chaplet of flowers, and 
put on her a veil proper for the occasion. 

9. Her toilet being completed, she was led in the evening towards 
the bridegroom’s house, by three boys, whose parents were still alive. 
Five torches were carried before her, and also a distaff and spindle. 
Having come to the door, she herself bound the posts with wreaths 
of wool, washed over with melted tallow, to keep out witchcraft. 

10. In going into the house, she was by no means to touch the 
threshold, but was to be lifted over by main strength. When she 


2. Toleration ? Christianity ? 8. What is said of the Roman deities ? Their temples ? 
Household gods ? 5. Marriage ? Penalties ? 6. Describe the marriage ceremonies ? 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


142 

had entered, the bridegroom presented her with the keys, and with 
two vessels containing fire and water. 

11. The bridegroom then gave a grand supper to all the company. 
The festival was accompanied with music and dancing, and the 
guests sang verses in praise of the new-married couple. 


CHAPTER LXXXVII.— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

About Funeral Rites and Ceremonies . 

1. The funeral rites of the Romans present a very interesting 
subject. Burning the dead, though practised by the Greeks from very 
early times, was not adopted in Rome till the later ages of the re- 
public. It afterwards became universal, and was continued without 
interruption till the introduction of Christianity. It then gradually 
fell into disuse. 

2. Among the Romans, the bed of the sick was never abandoned 
to hired nurses and servants. It was attended by the relatives and 
intimates, who waited till the last hour, and bade a last farewell to 
their dying friend. 

3. The body of the dead was bathed in perfumes, dressed in rich 
garments, and laid out on a couch strewed with flowers. The 
outer door of the house was shaded with branches of cypress. Ac- 
cording to the heathen mythology, Charon would not convey the de- 
parted spirit across the Styx, without payment of a fixed toll. A 
small coin was therefore placed in the mouth of the deceased to 
meet this demand. 

4. The funeral took place by torchlight. The body was borne by 
near friends and relatives, on an open bier covered with the richest 
cloth. Lictors dressed in black regulated the procession. If the 
deceased had been a soldier, the badges of his rank were displayed, 
and the corps to which he belonged marched with their arms re- 
versed. 

5. Before the corpse were carried images of the deceased and his 
ancestors. Then followed musicians, and mourning women, who 
were hired to sing his praises, and dancers and buffoons, one of whom 
attempted to represent the character of the dead man, and imitate 
his manner when alive. 

6. The family of the deceased followed the bier in deep mourning; 
the sons with their heads covered, and the daughters unveiled and 
with their hair dishevelled. Magistrates and patricians attended 
without their badges or ornaments, and the procession was closed by 
the freed men of the deceased, with the cap of liberty ^n their 
heads. 

7. The funeral ceremonies of a man of rank were distinguished by 

Ch. LXXXVII. — 1. What is said of burning the dead? 2. The bed of the dying ? 3, 
Body of the dead ? Notion in regard to Charon ? 4. 5. 6. Describe the funeral ? 7 
Oration ? 


ROME. 


143 


an oration in his honor, pronounced over the body by a friend. The 
scene of this display was the capitol, and in the later ages of the re- 
public it became very common. While the practice of burial pre- 
vailed, the body was either interred without a coffin, or placed m a 
kind of deep chest called a sarcophagus. 

8. On the termination of the rites, the sepulchre was strewed with 
flowers, and the mourners took a farewell of the remains of their 
friend. The attendants were then sprinkled with water by the 
priests, and all were dismissed. 

9. When the custom of burning the body was introduced, a funeral 
pile was raised in the form of an altar, and the bier was placed upon it. 
The procession then moved slowly about, to the sound of solemn mu- 
sic, when the nearest relative advanced from the train with a lighted 
torch, and set fire to the pile. 

10. Perfumes and spices were then thrown into the blaze, and the 
embers were quenched with wine. The ashes were collected and 
placed in a costly urn, which was deposited in the family sepulchre.' 

In the funeral solemnities of a soldier, his arms, and the spoils he had 
won from the enemy, were sometimes added to the funeral pile. 

11. It was a horrid belief of the heathen nations, that the spirits of 
the dead were pleased with blood. It was their custom to sacrifice 
on the tomb of the deceased those animals to which he was most at- 
tached during his life. In the more remote and barbarous ages, men 
were often the victims ; so also were domestic slaves and captives 
taken in war ; and sometimes friends gave themselves to be sacrificed 
from feelings of affection. 

12. No burial was allowed within the walls of the city, except to 
the vestal virgins, and some families of high distinction. The tombs 
of military men were usually raised in the field of Mars, and those of 
private citizens in the gardens of their villas, or by the side of the 
public roads, 

13. Many of these monuments are still standing. The sepulchres 
of the great and wealthy are engraven with long and pompous lists 
of their titles, honors, and achievements. The tombs of the humble 
bear but a simple lesson to the reader, and some beautiful and touch- 
ing expressions of sorrow or hope for the departed. 

14. How much more affecting and impressive are the simple rights 
of Christian burial, than the pomp and splendor of the Roman ! There 
is nothing that speaks more strongly to the heart than a funeral cere- 
mony in a New England village. 

15. Every thing is so still, and simple, and unaffected, that the 
mind rests only on the solemnity of death, without being distracted 
by display and splendor. Prayers are said at the house of the deceas- 
ed, the friends and relatives follow the body in silent procession, and 
enter with it into the unadorned grave-yard where the generations of 
ihe family are sleeping. 

16. The body is consigned to the earth whence it came, dust to * 
dust. Prayers are again said, and the mourners are dismissed to their 


8. Conclusion of the ceremonies ? 9. Ceremony of burning the body ? 12. What is 

•aid of the burial places? 13. Monuments ? 14. Christian rites ? 


144 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


sad homes, cheered, however, with the blessed consolations which 
their religion promises. 


CHAPTER LXXXVIII.— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

Roman Farms. Mode of Ploughing. Farm-houses . 

Grain. Cattle. Superstitions of the Farmers. Gar- 
dens. Vines. 

1. I am now going to tell you about the farms and gardens of the 
Romans. In the early and more virtuous ages of the state, the culti- 
vation of the fields, and a few rude trades connected with it, were the 
only occupations. 

2. He who was the best husbandman was the most honored ; and 
many of the most ancient families received their names from their 
success in the cultivation of plants or the rearing of cattle. 

3. It is probable that at this period the ground was broken up only 
by the spade. Afterwards, when the farms were enlarged, more ex- 
peditious means were discovered. Some of the Roman modes of 
ploughing are still in use. They always ploughed with oxen, a sin- 
gle pair, or sometimes three abreast, yoked, by the neck and horns. 

4. The farm-houses were at first little huts, but they were soon en- 
larged to suit the increasing possessions of the owners. We read, at 
a later period, of large store-houses and granaries, cellars for wine and 
oil* barns, together with separate buildings for the care and -rearing of 
every species of domestic animal. 

5 . The kinds of grain in common cultivation were the same as 
those known in Europe, with the exception of maize, or Indian com, 
which was first found in this country. The ancient mode of convert- 
ing grain into meal was by pounding it, with an instrument something 
like the pestle and mortar. Mills moved by cattle, and by water, are 
later inventions. 

6. Much care was paid by the Romans to the rearing of cattle. 
Sheep were secured under cover during the winter, notwithstanding 
the mildness of the Italian climate. Shearing time was a season of 
general festivity. 

7. Goats were made as profitable to the farmer as sheep. Their 
hair was clipped every year and woven into a kind of coarse stuff, and 
their milk was the chief supply of the dairy. 

8. The Roman farmers were very superstitious. They refrained 
from all labor on the fifth day of the new moon ; on the seventh and 
tenth they planted vines, and harnessed young oxen to the yoke; on 
the ninth they commenced a journey. 

9. The skeleton of an ass’s head was hung up at the boundary of 

Ch. LXXXVIII. — 1. What were the early occupations of the Romans ? 3. What is said 
of theii mode of ploughing ? 4. Their farm-houses? Other buildings? 5. What kimlj 
of grain were cultivated? 6. What is said of cattle ? 8. Superstitions of the farmers? 


ROME. 


145 

the farm, to enrich the soil and drive away the effects of blight. The 
same figure carved in brass, and crowned with vines, was affixed as 
an ornament to their couches. 

j.0. In the remote ages, the gardens of the Romans contained only 
a few of the most common pot-herbs and orchard trees. The more 
delicious fruits, and more beautiful flowers, were introduced at a much 
later period from Persia and other parts of Asia. 

11. The style of ornamental gardening was heavy and formal, pro- 
ducing a gloomy shade, rather than displaying beautiful scenery. I: 
was the fashion to fill the gardens with dark walks shaded with ever- 
greens, loaded with statues, and bounded by high clipped hedges. 

12. It is supposed that the Romans obtained a knowledge of the 
cultivation of the grape, and of the art of making wine, from Greece. 
They took great care of their vineyards, and labored in cultivating 
the plants, with much art and industry. 

13. The mode of gathering and pressing the grape was the same 
that is now practised. The vintage was a time of festival, and the 
rustics made merry with the performance of a rude kind of comedy, 
and pouring out libations of new wine to Jupiter and Yenus. 

14. The wine appears to have differed from that of modern times ; 
it was kept in jars formed like urns, some of which are said to have 
been so large as to have made, when filled, a load for a yoke of oxen. 
They were commonly ranged in cellars, but were sometimes buried 
in the earth, or even bedded in solid masonry. The wine was usu- 
ally kept to a great age. It was held in less favor than the wine of 
Greece, and was much cheaper. 


CHAPTER LXXXIX.— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

Country Houses. Description of Pliny's Villa. Aque- 
ducts. 

1. I am now going to describe the Roman villas, or country seats. 
Originally, they were nothing more than very humble farm-houses ; 
but, with the progress of wealth and luxury, they were made by de- 
grees more extensive and costly. 

2. Some of them were surrounded with large parks, in which deer 
and various foreign wild animals were kept. Large fish-ponds were 
also not unfrequently attached to them, and were stocked at great 
expense. Generally, however, the villas were merely surrounded by 
gardens, and in size and appearance resembled those of modern Italy. 

3. The philosopher, Pliny the younger, was a nob’eman and man 
of fortune, and the owner of four magnificent villas, v >f two of these 


10. Produce of the gardens ? From what countries did the Romans introduce the finer 
fruits and flowers ? 1 1. Ornamental gardening ? 12. What is said of the grape ? Wine ? 

The vintage? 14. Wine jars? Ch. LXXXIX. — 1. What of the Roman villas } 3. 
Pliny the younger ? 

K 


13 


146 


8CH00L HISTORY. 


he has left minute descriptions. One of them I will now tell you 
about. It was seated on a rising ground, facing the south, with the 
Apennine mountains raising their tall cliffs in the distant background. 

4. A portico fronted the house, with a terrace before it, adorned 
with various figures, and bounded by a hedge of box. Hence you 
passed by an easy descent into a lawn surrounded by walks, and 
adorned with box cut into the shapes of various animals. 

5. Beyond this lawn you entered a ground for exercise, laid out in 
the form of a circus, ornamented with well trimmed box and other 
shrubs, and fenced with a wall covered by box. On the outside of 
the wall was a meadow, and beyond were other meadows, fields, and 
thickets. 

6. Opposite the portico stood a square edifice which encompassed 
a small area or space, shaded by four plane trees, with a fountain in 
the midst, refreshing the surrounding verdure. This apartment con- 
sisted of a bed-chamber and a dining-room. A second portico looked 
out upon this little area. 

7. Another room situated by the nearest plane tree, enjoyed con- 
stant greenness and shade. In the same building were dressing-rooms, 
porticos, baths, and rooms for playing different games. The sides of 
one room were encrusted half way with carved marble; thence, to 
the ceiling, branches of trees were painted, with birds intermixed 
with the foliage. 

8. In front of these buildings and porticos was a spacious circus, 
surrounded by plane trees covered with ivy. Between these were 

f danted box and bay trees, mingling their shade. The inward circu- 
ar walks were perfumed with roses. 

9. A thousand different and fantastic shapes were given to the box 
that bordered the straight and winding alleys that crossed the grounds. 
At the end of one of these walks was an alcove of white marble, 
shaded with vines and supported by four pillars. 

10. A fountain here emptied itself into a marble basin contrived 
with so much art as to be always full without overflowing. Some- 
times Pliny supped here with his friends, and then the basin served 
for a table, the larger vessels being placed about the margin, and the 
smaller ones swimming about in the form of little boats and water- 
fowl. 

11. In front of the alcove stood a summer-house, of exquisite mar- 
ble, with projecting doors which opened into a green inclosure. Next 
to this was a private recess, furnished with a couch, and shaded by a 
spreading vine which reached to the top. Here, also, a fountain al- 
ternately rose and disapperred. In different parts of the walks were 
several marble seats, and throughout the whole circus were small 
rills refreshing the grass and other plants. 

12. Such is the description which Pliny the younger has given us 
of one of his villas. You will see that it was very magnificent ; and 
there were many others throughout Italy of equal splendor. You 


4. Describe his villa. 5. Ground for exercise ? 6. Edifice opposite the portico ? Rooms 
of this building ? 8. Circus? 10. Fountain ? Basin? 11. Summer-house ? Other orna 
menu ? 


ROME. |47 

will perceive by this, that the wealthy Romans lived in a style of 
great luxury in the time of the emperors. 

13. It was not till the year 441 after its foundation that Rome ob- 
tained its supplies of water by means of aqueducts. They afterwards 
became so numerous that it has been calculated they furnished the 
city about five hundred thousand hogsheads every day. They were 
built of brick, and were sometimes thirty, forty, or even sixty miles 
in length. 

14. The water was conveyed to reservoirs, and thence distributed 
through metal pipes over the town in great abundance. Only three 
aqueducts now remain for modern Rome ; yet so pure are the sources 
from which they draw their supplies, that few cities can boast of such 
clear and healthful water. 

15. Great attention was paid to ornament in the erection of the 
aqueducts. One built by Agrippa, when aedile under Augustus, con- 
tained one hundred and thirty reservoirs, and five hundred fountains, 
adorned with statues and columns. Remains of many of these great 
works at this day bear witness to their beauty and convenience. 


CHAPTER XC.— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

Military Affairs of the Romans. Division of the Army . 
The Imperial Eagle. Music. Arms . Dress. Mili- 
tary Rewards. Crowns. The Triumph. 

1. You know that the Romans were almost continually engaged in 
wars. Their military affairs, therefore, occupied the attention of the 
most distinguished citizens. According to the Roman laws, every 
freeborn citizen was a soldier, and bound to serve in the army at any 
period from the age of seventeen to that of forty-six. 

2. The Roman forces were divided into legions, each of which con- 
sisted of three thousand foot soldiers, and three hundred horsemen. 
The standard of the legion was the imperial eagle. 

3. This was made of gilt metal, was borne on a spear by an officer 
of rank, and was regarded by the soldiers with a reverence which ap- 
proached to devotion. The cavalry carried pennons, on which the 
initials of the emperor or of the legion were embroidered in letters 
of gold. 

4. The only instrument of martial music among the Romans was 
the brazen trumpet. Some of the soldiers were armed with light 
javelins, and others with a heavier weapon of a similar description. 
All however carried shields and short swords, which they wore on 
the right side. 


13. Aqueducts? Quantity of water carried daily to the city? Describe them. 15. A(^u«- 
luct built by Agrippa ? Ch. XC. — 1. What is said of the military affairs ? 2. Division* 
®f the army' 3. Standard? Pennons ? 4. Instruments of martial music ? Weapons? 


148 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


5. They were dressed in a metal cuirass, with an under covering 
of cloth, which was generally red, and hung loose to the knee. On 
the head they wore brazen helmets ornamented with flowing tufts of 
horsehair. The uniform of the generals was an open scarlet mantle 

6. The cavalry wore a coat of mail, of brazen or steel scales, or of 
chain-work, sometimes plated with gold. Under this they wore a 
close garment which reached to their buskins. They rode without 
stirrups, and their saddles were merely cloths folded to suit the con- 
venience of the rider. The discipline of the army was maintained 
with great strictness and severity. 

7. Rewards of various kinds were held out to those who -dis- 
tinguished themselves by an extraordinary exploit. A particular 
kind of crown was presented to him who, in the assault, first scaled 
the ramparts of a town. 

8. A soldier who saved his comrade’s life in battle was entitled to 
the civic crown, which was thought a distinction of the highest honor. 
The general who conquered in a battle was decorated with the laurel 
leaf. 

9. But me highest ambition of every Roman commander was to 
obtain a triumph. This was the gift of the senate, and was only 
granted on occasions of splendid victory. When decreed, the general 
returned to Rome, and was appointed to the supreme command of 
the city on the day of his entry. 

10. A sculptured arch was erected, under which the procession was 
to pass, and scaffoldings were raised for spectators in all the public 
squares and streets. The procession moved at daylight from beyond 
the walls of the city. 

11. A band of cavalry, with military music, took the lead. They 
were followed by a train of priests in their sacred robes, with attend- 
ants leading to sacrifice a hecatomb or hundred of the whitest oxen. 
Next came chariots laden with spoils, the arms and standard of the 
conquered, followed by long trains of the captives conducted by lictors. 

12. Loud notes on the trumpet then announced the approach of the 
victor, dressed in a robe of purple, crowned with laurels, and bearing 
a sceptre of ivory. He rode in a splendid car drawn by four horses, 
preceded by the Roman eagle, guarded by a troop of cavalry. 

13. The most distinguished officers of the army, in their richest 
dress and trappings, surrounded him ; a band of children clothed in 
white followed, flinging clouds of perfumes and flowers on the air, 
and singing hymns of praise to the conqueror. 

1 4. Last of all came the victorious army, their weapons wreathed 
with laurel, and their burnished armor gleaming in the sunshine. 
Countless multitudes of the citizens lined the streets, and every win- 
dow and every scaffolding shone with beauty. The procession was 
greeted on all sides by loud acclamations ; joy and revelry reigned in 
the city, and a scene was displayed of a magnificence and gorgeous- 
ness not to be paralleled in modern times. 


5. Dress of tne soldiers ? Generals? 6. Dress of the cavalry ? 7. Rewards of the army 
Drowns ? 9. Descrioe the triumph of a victorious general. 


ROME. 


149 

CHAPTER XCI.— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

About Naval Affairs. The War Galley. Commerce 
Shores of Wild Beasts. Exhibitions of Gladiators. 

1. The first vessel of the Roman navy is said to have been built 
after the model of a Carthaginian galley, taken in war. Their ships 
were roughly and slightly constructed, and, though very large, unfit to 
contend with boisterous and tempestuous weather. 

2. They were clumsy and ill-fashioned, with a high stern and 
sides, and rowed with two or three tiers of oars on different decks. 
The prows of the ship were armed with iron, usually carved into the 
shape of some animal’s head ;«the upper deck was surmounted with a 
movable turret, from which the soldiers could throw their weapons 
with advantage. 

3. The merchant ships of the Romans were of a size corresponding 
with the purposes for which they were intended. Before the dis- 
covery of the magnet, by which the mariner can now direct his 
course in safety over the pathless waves, navigation was necessarily 
confined to the coast. These coasting vessels were considered large 
i' they reached the burden of fifty tons. 



4. Rome was long supplied with the products of the East by the- 
merchants of the maritime states of the Mediterranean. It was not 
till the conquest of Egypt by Augustus, that the trade became 
exclusively her own. Of this commerce Alexandria was the centre. 

5. The principal exports into Italy from India consisted of drugs 
and spices ; of cotton cloths and muslins, from the coasts of Coroman- 
del and Malabar ; of silk from China, and of large quantities of 
diamonds and pearls from Bengal, and the pearl fisheries near Cape 


Ch. XCI. — 1. First vessel of the Roman navy ? 2. Describe the war galley. 3. What 
fs said of the Roman merchant ships? Navigation? Coasting vessels? 4. How was 
Rome supplied wi<b *he products of the East i 5. What were the principal imports into 
Italy ? 

13 * 


150 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


Comorin. From Persia and Arabia they procured the richest carpets, 
silks, and embroidered stuffs, together with rice and sugar. 

6. The first amphitheatre erected in Rome, for the shows of wild 
beasts and gladiators, was a mere temporary building of wood, pro- 
bably erected by Julius Caesar. The Flavian amphitheatre, better 
known by the name of Colisoeum, was commenced in the reign ot 
Vespasian, and is supposed to have been large enough to contain 
upwards of eighty thousand persons. 

7. The wild beasts were secured in dens round the arena in 
the centre, which was strongly fenced, and surrounded by a canal, to 
guard the spectators against their attacks. A vast number of wild 
beasts were made to destroy each other in these very cruel exhibi- 
tions. 

8. Eleven thousand are said to have been slain during four months 
of triumph in honor of a conquest over tlje Dacians ; and five hundred 
lions were killed in a few days on another similar occasion. 

9. The first public combats of gladiators took place at Rome in the 
close of the fifth century from the foundation of the city. They 
were exhibited at a funeral. From that period they became frequent 
on such occasions, and afterwards on days of public festival were 
considered a material part of the ceremonies. 

10. Five hundred pairs of these wretched beings have frequently 
been led to the public games to sacrifice each other for the amuse- 
ment of barbarous spectators. They were at first taken from captives 
in war, or malefactors ; afterwards from slaves trained to the pro- 
fession. 

11. They fought with various weapons, some in complete armor, 
others with only a trident and a net, in which they endeavored to 
entangle their adversary and thus slay him. 

12. It is needless to give a minute account of these inhuman cus- 
toms. They were conducted with the most bloody and savage 
spirit, and are sufficient proofs of the degraded and brutalized condi- 
tion of the period in which they were tolerated. 


CHAPTER XCII.-- EUROPE CONTINUED. 

Sports. Chariot Racing . The Circus. Carriages . 

Private Entertainments. Supper Rooms. Convivial 
Parties. Luxuries. 

1. I will now change the picture, and give you an account of 
some of the less barbarous amusements of the Romans. Among 
these were several games of ball, played as among us, both with the 
hand and foot. The young men chiefly engaged in sports in the open 

C. What is said of the first amphitheatre ? 7. Destruction of wild beasts ? 9. GladitoriaJ 
combats? 11. Weapons of the Gladiators? What is said of these exhibitions? Oh 
XCII. — 1. Games of the Roman youths ? 


ROME. 


151 

air that would make them more active and vigorous. Boxing, 
wrestling, and throwing the quoit formed a prominent part of these 
amusements; but chariot driving took the lead of all others. 

2. For the better enjoyment of horse and chariot races, there was 
an enclosed course immediately adjoining the city, called the circus. 
It was rather more than a mile in circumference, and was surrounded 
with seats and three tiers of galleries. 

3. In the centre, was a barrier of twelve feet in breadth, and four 
feet high, around which the race was performed ; and at one end was 
a triumphal arch, through which the successful charioteer drove, 
followed by the shouts and applause of the assembly. 

4. Four chariots usually started together, the drivers of which 
were distinguished by dresses of different colors. Each color had its 
particular partizans, who betted largely on the success of their 
favorite. These sports were exceedingly popular, and repeated in 
endless succession. 

5. Of the form of carriages in use among the Romans, we have no 
precise description. They were of various kinds, open and covered, 
chairs and couches, borne on poles by slaves in livery. The couch 
was furnished with pillows and a mattress, and with feet of silver or 
gold to support it when set down. There were also close litters, 
drawn by mules, and carriages on two and four wheels, painted of 
various colors, and highly ornamented. 

6. The horses were yoked to the carriage by means of a curved 
cross-bar passing over their necks, and were directed by bridles and 
reins, which were sometimes of embroidered silk with gold bits. 

7. Besides mules and horses, many other animals were occasionally 
used in carriages, such as dogs, goats, and deer, and even bears, 
leopards, lions, and tigers. But this of course was merely for a 
whimsical amusement, and not for real service. 

8. When the Romans were poor and simple, they lived chiefly on 
milk and vegetables, with a coarse kind of pudding made of flour and 
water. But as they began to grow powerful, and to conquer the 
neighboring nations, they became acquainted with the luxuries of 
the people they subdued, and introduced them into their own state. 

9. As they found in Greece models of the fine arts, so Asia fur- 
nished them with new and numerous sources of pleasure in the 
gratification of their senses. In the later days of the republic, great 
attention was paid to the arts of the cook, and various apartments 
were constructed in the houses of the rich for the entertainment oi 
company. 

10. The supper rooms of some of the emperors were hung with 
cloths of gold and silver, enriched with jewels. Tables were made 
for them of fine gold, and couches with frames of massive silver. 
The Romans always reclined on couches to take their meals. 

1 1. At great entertainments the supper room was hung with 
flowers, and the guests were crowned with garlands. The floor was 

*1. The circus? 4. The chariots? Their drivers ? 5. What is said of the form of the 
carriages 5 6. How were the horses harnessed and managed ? 7. What other animals 
Were sometimes used? 8. Early living of the Romans? Introduction of luxuries f 9. 
Arts of cookery ? 10. Supper rooms ? 


J52 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


generally bare, though richly ornamented, and the ceiling was mlaid 
with a fret-work of gold and ivory. Scented oil was used for lighting 
the apartments, and massive carved lamps of figured bronze reflected 
their brilliancy on the gay and beautiful scene. 

12. Some of the more voluptuous and degraded of the Roman 
emperors, in the decay of the republic, were most extravagant and 
ridiculous in providing rare dishes for their table. The livers and 
brains of small birds, the heads of parrots and pheasants, and the 
tongues of peacocks and nightingales, formed a part of their daily 
food. 

13. But the most luxurious dish that graced the table of the Ro- 
mans was an entire boar, roasted and stuffed with game and poultry. 
How miserable must have been the condition of the people whose 
masters could lavish their wealth in such wanton and disgraceful in- 
dulgence of the commonest appetite ! 

14. On one occasion, the senate was assembled to consult on the 
best mode of dressing an immense turbot which had been presented 
to the emperor. In our time, a council of cooks might have been 
called on an affair of so much importance, but it would hardly have 
been a subject to bring before the rulers of the people. 

15. The Romans, however, would have been less rapidly enslaved 
and degraded, if their emperor and senate had always been employed 
as innocently as in discussing the most desirable manner of dressing 
a fish. 


CHAPTER XCIIL -EUROPE CONTINUED. 

About Theatres. Clocks and Watches. The Fine Arts . 
Books and Writing. Costume. Conclusion. 

1. Theatrical entertainments were first introduced into Rome in 
the year of the city 391. They were originally little more than dan- 
ces to the sound of the flute. It was more than a hundred years be- 
fore the drama attained to much dignity or excellence. 

2. Actors were always held in contempt, but were enabled from 
the patronage they received to accumulate large fortunes. Theatres 
were at first built in the villages in the vicinity; the first permanent 
edifice of this kind in the city was built of stone, and calculated to 
contain forty thousand spectators. 

3. The use of such clocks and watches as we have at present was 
unknown to the Romans. The sundial was introduced 440 years af 
ter the building of the city. About a century afterwards, a kind of 
water-clock was introduced, which was contrived with much inge- 
nuity, and answered all purposes for the measurement of time. 

11. Ornaments of the supper room? 12. Costly dishes of the Roman emperors? 14. 
Describe consultations held upon dishes. 15. What of the Romans ? Ch. XCIII. — 1. When 
were theatrical exhibitions introduced at Rome ? What is said of them ? 2. Actors? The. 
alres t 3. Clocks and watches ? Sundials? Water-clock? 


ROME. 


153 


4. The fine aits were unknown in Rome till after the sixth centu- 
ry of her existence, when they were introduced by the successful cap- 
tains of her armies, from the nations they had conquered. After a 
taste for the fine arts had been thus formed, large enclosed galleries 
were built around the mansions of the rich, and were adorned with 
the finest specimens of painting and sculpture. 

5. In the dwellings of the most affluent patricians, these galleries 
also contained splendid libraries, which were open to the inspection 
of the learned and the curious. Collections of books were then of 
course very rare, on account of the great expense and difficulty of 
transcribing them. 

6. They were sometimes written on parchment, but more frequent- 
ly on a paper made from the leaves of a plant called papyrus. The 
leaves were pasted together at the ends, and then made up into a 
roll, which was enclosed in a covering of skin or silk, fastened with 
strings or clasps. 

7. Writing was performed with a reed, split and pointed like our 
pen, and dipped in ink. Matters not intended for preservation were 
usually written with a pointed instrument on tables spread with wax. 
When letters were sent forward for delivery, they were perfumed, 
and tied with a silken thread, the ends of which were sealed with 
common wax. 

8. The usual garments of the Romans were the toga and the tu- 
nic ; the former was a loose woollen robe, of a semicircular form, and 
without sleeves; the latter, a close white garment, worn when 
abroad under the toga, but alone in the house. The men usually 
went bareheaded. 

9. For the feet, the usual coverings were the buskin and the san- 
dal. The buskin reached about half way up to the leg; the sandal 
was a mere sole, fastened to the foot by straps and buckles. 


CHAPTER XCIV.— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

Rome under the Popes . 

1. I will* now proceed to finish the history of Rome. I have al- 
ready had occasion to speak of the pope. This title was given to the 
bishops, at a very early period of the Christian church. At first, the 
pope c5f Rome was only one of the superior dignitaries of the church ; 
but in the course of years he became the head of it, and both claimed 
and exercised an authority superior to that of any king or emperor. 

2. For a long time, the popes of Rome had authority only in mat- 
ters of religion; but Gregory the Third, about the year 731, resisted 
the Greek emperor, who ruled over Italy, and established the title of 

4. What b of the fine arts ? 5. Libraries ? Books? Paper? 7. Writing? Let- 
ters? 8. Usual garments of the Romans ? Ch. XCIV.— 1. What of the popes in early 
vimes ? 2. What of Gregorv III ? When was the pope’s title to rule over Rome estab- 
lished ? What of popes iu the year 760 ? Their pride and power ? 


8CH00L HISTORY. 


154 

the pope to reign over Rome in matters of state. From this tims 
forward, the popes rapidly acquired power, and in the year 760, they 
had extensive possessions and immense wealth. 



View of modem Rome. 


3. The popes claimed the authority of God’s agents or viceroys on 
earth. They called themselves the successors of St. Peter, and claim 
ed that the keys of heaven and hell were given into their custody. 
No other dominion had ever been like theirs, for they ruled over the 
souls of men. 

4. Other potentates have been content with wearing a single 
crown ; but the popes crowned themselves with three, rising one 
above the other. They assumed the title of Holiness; but some of 
them were unholy men, being, as we have reason to believe, full of 
earthly ambition, and stained with many sins. 

5. When their power was at its height, they showed themselves 
to be very haughty. Few persons were allowed to enter their pres- 
ence without kneeling down to kiss their toes. When they mounted 
on horseback, they caused kings and emperors to hold their stirrups. 

6. They took away kingdoms from the rightful sovereigns, and 
gave them to others. A pope by the name of Clement declared that 
God had given him all the kingdoms of heaven and earth. If a per- 
son denied the pope’s authority, he was sometimes burnt alive ! 

7. In 1077, pope Gregory obliged Henry the Fourth, emperor of 
Germany, to stand three days, in the depth of winter, barefooted, at 
his castle gate, to implore his pardon. In 1191, another pope kicked 
another emperor’s crown off his head, while he was kneeling before 
him, to show that the pope could make and unmake kings at his 
pleasure. 


3. What did the popes claim ? What did they call themselves ? What of their tyranny ? 
4. What of the crowns of the popes? What title did they assume ? 5. How did their 
pride manifest itself? 6. What of pope Clemen*. ? What was done to those who resisted 
the pope? 7. Wh«t did pope Gregory do in 107 7 * What of another pope in 1191? 


ROME. 


155 


8. It was near the year 1100, that one of the popes of Rome or- 
dained that the title of pope should be given only to the bishop of 
Rome. It was about this period that the power of the pope was at 
its highest pitch. For nearly four hundred years, this potentate con- 
tinued to exercise an almost undisputed sway over the people, and 
even the kings and princes of the Christian world. 

9. During this age, great darkness prevailed throughout Europe, 
A.sia, and Africa ; and though Rome was the seat of the popes, now 
nore powerful than any sovereign, the people were generally in a 
late of ignorance and degradation. 

10. But in the year 1517, the Reformation was commenced by a 
V .an called Martin Luther. He preached against the power of the 
p* ^es, and all Europe was shaken with the convulsion which follow- 
ed The result was, that the authority of the popes was generally 
thrown off by the governments throughout Christendom, though it is 
supposed that fifty millions of people were killed in the wars that 
took place during this period of agitation. 

11. The pope still governs Rome and other adjacent territories in 
the centre of Italy. His dominions are bounded north by Lombardy, 
and in other directions by the Mediterranean Sea, and the Adriatic, 
and by the kingdom of Naples, Modena, and Tuscany. He is the 
spiritual head of the Catholic church throughout the world. 

12. The present pope (1848) is Pius IX, who came to the papacy 
in 1847. He has shown a desire to improve the political conddition 
of his people, and hence has acquired great credit, not only in Italy, 
but other countries. 

13. His efforts, however, have probably had a different effect from 
what he intended. They have awaked a spirit of liberty, which, 
being aided by the great movements in the rest of Europe, has 
caused the pope much disturbance, and threatens finally to frustrate 
the papal government, so far as it relates to temporal affairs. • 

14. The city of Rome at present is thirteen miles in circumference. 
The greater part of it has a dark, gloomy, and desolate appearance. 
It is full of old ruins of palaces and temples, and other magnificent 
edifices of the ancient Romans. Innumerable statues are supposed to 
be buried under ground. 

15. Travellers are wonder-struck by these tokens of the antique 
Roman greatness. But instead of the mighty warriors of old Rome, 
they find only a degraded people. Their spirit has been crushed by 
ages of servitude and superstition. 

16. But these ruins and relics are not the only remains of ancient 
Rome. There are many works still existing, written by the old Ro- 
man authors. These are in the Latin language, which, as I have 
before said, was spoken by the Romans. Many of them are very in- 
teresting, and from these, modern nations have derived a large part of 
their most valuable laws and institutions. 

8. What of the power of the pope about the year 1100? When was it at its highest pitch? 
How loug did its sway continue? 9. What was the state of the world at this time? Of 
Rome? °10. What took place in 1517 ? What of Martin Luther ? What was the result 
of the Reformation ? 11. What of the pope at the present day? Where are his domin 

ions? Of what church is he the head? 12. What of the present city of Rome ? 13. How 

are travellers affected in Rome ? What of the people ? How has their spirit been crush* 
ed ? 14. What of old Roman works ? In what language are they written ? What have 
♦he moderns derived from these works ? 


156 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


CHAPTER XCV.— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

About several other Italian States. 



1. You know that Italy is now divided into several distinct king* 
doms or states. Each of these has its history, and at some future day 
it will be well for you to read the story of these celebrated countries. 
In this little book I can only give you a very brief account of two or 
three of them. 

2. The kingdom of Naples, or the kingdom of the two Sicilies, in- 
cludes the island of Sicily and the southern extremity of the penin- 
sula of Italy. It embraces the foot of the figure of the boot, which I 
have before mentioned. This kingdom has a population of seven 
millions. 

3. The history of Naples, after it was separated from the Roman 
empire, possesses very little interest. It passed first into the hands 
of one tribe of northern invaders, then into the hands of another, and 
then into the hands of another. After this it was subject to Spain 
and other countries, until at length it became an independent country, 
under the government of its present race of kings. 

4. The history of Venice is more interesting-. When the northern 
barbarians invaded Italy in 452, the inhabitants living in the vicinity 
of the present city of Venice settled in the marshes along the border 
of the sea, and supported themselves by fishing, making salt, and by 
commerce. 

5. In the year 809, they commenced building the city of Venice on 

Ch. XCV.— 1. How is Italy now divided? 2. What does the kingdom of Naples in 
elude? Population? Direction from Rome ? 3 . Its history ? 4. What of the history of 
Venice ? o. When and where was Venice built? What did it become? 



TURKEY. 


157 


a little island called Rialto. To this place they transported their 
riches, and soon the new city became the capital of the Republic of 
Venice. The city and state increased, until at length Venice was one 
of the most powerful states in the world. 

6. The inhabitants paid great attention to commerce, and such was 
the number of their ships, that in the eleventh century, Venice sent a 
fleet of two hundred sail to assist in the first crusade. It was on ac- 
count of the interest which this state had in maritime matters that 
the Doge, who was the chief officer, used to be wedded to the sea 
with pompous ceremonies. 

7. The power of Venice continued to increase, and in process of 
time, the proud city of Constantinople was captured by its armies, 
aided by the crusaders. The spoils of the captured city, consisting of 
gems and jewelry, books, marbles, pictures, statues, obelisks, and 
other costly treasures, were chiefly carried to Venice. 

8. The republic prospered for many years, and its wealth and power 
increased, though the people were often governed in the most cruel 
and oppressive manner. But I have only room to add, that toward 
the close of the last century, it fell a victim to the pdwer of France, 
and since the year 1798, it has been attached to the empire of Austria. 

9. I could fill a book with tales about Genoa; it was at one time 
the rival of Venice; about Tuscany, which is considered the most 
beautiful portion of Italy, and about the kingdom of Sardinia, which 
lies in the northern part of Italy. But as it is impossible to get a long 
fctory into a little book, I must let these things pass. 


CHAPTER XCVL— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

About the Ottoman Empire. Turkey in Europe. Tur- 
key in Asia. About the Climate , People , and other 
Things. 

1. The Turkish or Ottoman empire is divided into two parts, called 
Turkey in Europe, and Turkey in Asia. It was formerly much more 
extensive than at present. It now embraces a large region of terri- 
tory in Europe, lying between Greece on the south, and Russia and 
Germany on the north; this portion is called Turkey in Europe. 

2. Turkey in Asia includes Asia Minor and Armenia, and till lately 
ncluded Syria and Palestine. Egypt and the Barbary states in Africa 
were also subject to Turkey, till within a few years. 


6. What of the commerce of Venice? Fleet? The Doge? 7 Power of Venice 5 
What city was taken by Venice and the crusaders? What of the spoils, of Constantinople ' 
8. What of the republic of Venice for many years ? What of France ? What of Venice 
since 1798? 9. What of Genoa? Tuscany? Sardinia? Ch. XCVI. — 1. What other 
name has the Turkish empire ? How is the Ottoman empire divided ? Where is Turkey 
in Europe? 2. What does Turkey in Asia now include r What other countries formely 
belonged to the Turkish empire ? How is Asia Minor separated from Turkey in Europe ? 

14 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


158 

3. But all these countries are become wholly independent of the 
Turkish dominion, except Turkey in Europe, Asia Minor, and Arme- 
nia. The capital of this empire is Constantinople, which 1 have often 
mentioned before, and which at this day is one of the greatest cities 
iD the world. 



4. The chief ruler or king of the Turks is called the Sultan. He 
lives at Constantinople, in a splendid palace. Like most eastern 
princes, he has two or three hundred wives, which he keeps snut up 
in a place called the harem. 

5. The Turks have long beards, wear turbans on their heads, and 
a loose flowing robe over their under dress. They sit on cushions 
instead of chairs, and take their food with their fingers, instead oi 
forks. They are fond of smoking very long pipes. 

6. The Sultan rules over his country, not according to certain 
established laws, but according to his own will. The people gen- 
erally do exactly what he requires ; if they refuse to obey him, they 
are sure to lose their property and their heads. 

7. If you were to go to Turkey, you would discover that (he 
climate is warm, and the country naturally fertile ; you would also 
see that the people are indolent and cruel. You would see that they 
have not many manufactures, and but little commerce. You would 
see that the lands are poorly cultivated, and that many tracts natu- 
rally fruitful are barren and desolate for want of tillage. 

8. You would discover that the people dislike the Christians, and 
worship according to the faith of Mahomet. You would discover 
that they have mosques instead of churches. At Constantinople 
there is a very splendid edifice, called St. Sophia. This was formerly 
a Greek church, but it is now converted into a Mahometan mosque. 

3. What of the countries that formerly belonged to the Ottoman empire ? Capital of 
Turkey ? What of Constantinople ? 4. What of the sultan ? 5. Describe the Turks, 
6. How does the sultan rule thj Turks ? What of the people ? 7. Soil and climate of 
Turkey ? The people ? Manufactures ? Commerce ? Lands ? 8. Religon of the 

Turks ? What are their places of worship called ? St. Sophia ? 


TURKEY. 


159 


CHAPTER XCVIL— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

About the Saracens. How the Turks overturned the 
Saracen Empire. How the Ottoman Turks founded 
the Ottoman Empire. About Bajazet , Timour , and 
others. 

1. In the history of Asia, I have given you some account of the 
Saracens. These you will remember were Arabs, among whom 
Mahomet and his successors established an empire at the commence- 
ment of the seventh century. 

2. The kings or rulers of the Saracen empire were called caliphs, 
and resided at Bagdad, a splendid city which they built near the 
river Tigris in Mesopotamia. I have told you how these caliphs ex- 
tended their empire over a considerable part of Asia and Africa, and 
some portions of Europe. 

3. To the north of Mesopotamia, there were several tribes of 
Tartars, among which were some called Turks. These were daring 
warriors, and such was their fame, that the caliphs induced many of 
them to come to Bagdad and serve as soldiers. 

4. In process of time, the Turks acquired great influence at Bag- 
dad, and finally overturned the Saracen empire, made themselves 
masters of nearly all the Saracen possessions, and adopted the Maho- 
medan religion. Thus the Turkish empire became the successor of 
the Saracen empire, and included in its dominion Asia Minor, Syria, 
Palestine, and other Asiatic countries, which the Saracens had con- 
quered from the Greek empire. 

5. After a while, the Turkish empire, which had been thus estab- 
lished, was overturned by another tribe of Turks, who called them- 
selves Ottomans. These came from the country east of the Caspian 
Sea, and laid the foundation of the present Ottoman empire. This 
took place in the year 1299 ; the founder of the empire being Othman 
the First. 

6. The Greek empire had formerly included Asia Minor, but this 
had been taken by the Saracens, and afterwards by the Turks. At 
the time of the Ottoman invasion, it included little more than what 
is at present called Turkey in Europe, with Greece. 

7. Constantinople, the present capital of Turkey, was called Byzan- 
tium, from Byzas, who founded it in 715, B. C. it was a flourishing 
city in the time of the early Greeks. The neighboring country was 
settled by colonies from Greece, and by other tribes. It was con- 


Ch. XCVII.— 1. What of the Saracens ? When and by whom was the Saracen empire 
established? 2. What of the caliphs? Dominion of the caliphs? 2. Where were the 
Turks? Where did they live ? Why were they employed by the caliphs of Bagdad ? 4. 
What did the Turks do? What of the Turkish empire? 5. By whom was the first 
Turkish dynasty overturned ? When was the Ottoman empire founded ? By whom ? 6. 
What did the Greek empire formerly include ? What did it include in 1299 } 


160 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


quered by the Romans, and the name of Byzantium was changed to 
Constantinople, by the emperor Constantine, in 329. 

8. It had before this period fallen into decay, but it was now re- 
vived, and Constantine removed thither with his whole court. It 
thus became the capital of the Roman empire. When that was 
divided into the Eastern and Western empires in 395, it was the 
capital of the former, which, as you know, was often called the 
Greek empire. 

9. This continued with various changes, to subsist as a distinct 
sovereignty, till the period of which I am now treating. It was, as I 
have said, on the brink of ruin, when the Ottomans, who had already 
established themselves in Asia Minor, and swallowed up the countries 
formerly belonging to the Saracen dominions, began to cast longing 
eyes upon the Greek empire in Europe. 

10. The sultan, at this time, was Bajazet. He began to reign in 
1389, and was so famous for his conquests, that the Turks called him 
the Thunderbolt. 

11. He was preparing to attack Constantinople, when a greater 
warrior than he came from Tartary, and subdued him. This was 
Tamerlane, otherwise called Timour the Tartar, and sometimes 
Timour the lame man. He defeated Bajazet in a great battle, in 
which three hundred thousand men were slain. 

12. It is said that when Timour the lame man had got Bajazet the 
Thunderbolt into his power, he put him into an iron cage, and carried 
him about for a show, like a wild beast. Most conquerors have a 
resemblance to wild beasts, and it would be well if they could always 
be kept in iron cages. 

13. The misfortunes of Bajazet prevented the Turks from conquer- 
ing the Eastern empire of the Romans, for a considerable time. But 
in 1453, when Mahomet the Great was sultan, they took Constantino- 
ple. The emperor, whose name was Constantine, was killed. From 
this time forward, the Turks were securely established in Europe, 
and the country which they inhabited was called Turkey. 


CHAPTER XCVIII.— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

Sequel of the Turkish History . 

1. The reigns of most of the Turkish sultans have been full of 
crime and bloodshed. Sultan Selim, who began to reign in 1512, in- 

7. What of Constantinople ? Who founded it, and when ? What of it in the time of the 
early Greeks ? When was its name changed ? When and by whom was Byzantium called 
Constantinople ? 8. What became ofthe capital of the Roman empire ? What took place 
in 396 ? W hat was called the Greek empire ’ What countries did the Eastern empire of 
the Romans include ? Ans. Greece, Macedon, what is now called Turkey in Europe, Asia 
Minor, and other adjacent countries. 9. What of the Ottomans ? 10. Who was Bajazet ? 

When did he begin to reign ? What did the Turks call him ? What of Tamerlane ? 12 

How did Timour treat Bajazet ? What of conquerors ? 13. What happened in 1453. Ch. 

XCVm.— i. What of the reigns of some of the Turkish sultans ? What of Sultan Selim 
What of the Mamelukes ? 


8PAIN. 


101 


vaded Egypt, and conquered it. The Egyptian soldiers were called 
Mamelukes, of whom I have told you in the history of Egypt. 
Thousands of them were taken prisoners. 

2. After the victory, the sultan ordered a splendid throne to be 
erected on the banks of the river Nile, near the gates of Cairo. 
Sitting on this throne, he caused all the Mamelukes to be massacred 
in his sight, and their bodies to be thrown into the river. 

3. Mohammed the Third, who ascended the throne in 1596, had 
nineteen brothers. All these he caused to be strangled, so that they 
might not attempt to rob him of his power. 

4. Amurath the Fourth became sultan in 1621. This monster 
caused fourteen thousand men to be murdered. The sport that 
pleased him best, was to run about the streets at night, with a drawn 
sword, cutting and slashing at everybody whom he met. 

5. These facts will show the reader what kind of government the 
Turks have lived under. The late sultan, whose name was Mahmoud 
the Second, ascended the throne in 1808. He was more enlightened 
than his predecessors. 

6. But he was compelled to act with great severity. This was par- 
ticularly the case in regard to the janizaries. These were a large body 
of troops, established by Mahomet the Second in 1300, and who con- 
tinued to be a very powerful body of soldiers for several centuries. 
Though called the sultan’s guards, they became more dangerous than 
all the other subjects of the empire. 

7. Sultan Mahmoud therefore determined to free himself from 
their power. Accordingly, in the year 1826, he ordered the rest of 
his troops to surround the janizaries. This was done, and they were 
shot down and massacred without mercy. The sultan afterwards 
endeavored to reform the manners of the Turks, and to make them 
adopt the customs of other European nations. In this he had some 
success, but his progress was very slow. The present sultan, son of 
the preceeding, is very young. 


CHAPTER XCIX.— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

Early History of Spain. The Moorish Conquest . 

1. The kingdom of Spain is separated from France by the range of 
mountains called the Pyrenees. It has Portugal on the west; its 
other boundaries are the Atlantic Ocean, the Bay of Biscay, and the 
Mediterranean Sea. The whole country forms a large peninsula. 

2. Spain is a very remarkable country ; it is full of wild, rocky 
mountains, with beautiful valleys between. The climate is warm 

2. What did the sultan order? 3. When did Mohammed III. ascend the throne ? What 
crime did he commit ? 4. Who became sultan in 1621 ? What of Amurath ? 5. What of 
Mahmoud the Second ? When did he ascend the throne ? 6. What of him? Who were 
the janizaries ? When were they established? 7. What was done in 1826 ? What has 
the sultan since done ? Who is the present sultan ? Ch. XCIX.— How is Spain separated 
(rom France ? Boundaries of Spain ? 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


162 

and delightful. The country produces abundance of grapes, olives, 
lemons, almonds, figs, citrons, and pomegranates. 

3. Spain is celebrated for a very fine breed of horses. It is also the 
country from which the merino sheep were first brought. There are 
many of these now in this country, and you know they produce the 
finest wool in the world. 

4. Spain has about as many inhabitants as the United States. 1 he 
people are generally ignorant and superstitious, but they seem to be 
very honest, ceremonious, and polite. They are fond of gay dances 
in the open air. Madrid, the capital of Spain, is a very splendid city. 

5. Spain abounds in castles, churches, and palaces, built by the 
Moors, of whom I shall soon tell you the story. These edifices are 
3 ome of the most wonderful buildings in the world. They are totally 
unlike those of ancient Greece and Rome. They bear some resem- 
blance to what is called the Gothic architecture, specimens of which 
are to be found in some of our cities. 

6. If I had time and room, I should like very much to tell you a 
long story about Spain ; but I shall be obliged to say very little of it, 
and leave you afterwards to pursue the subject in some larger book. 

7. Little is known about the history of Spain till the Phoenicians 
made voyages thither. They came from Phoenicia, which you know 
was close to the land of Canaan, a distance of two thousand miles, 
and built two columns at the Straits of Gibraltar. These columns 
were called the pillars of Hercules. The ancients did not dare to sail 
beyond them, into the broad Atlantic Ocean. 

8. The Greeks founded several cities in Spain. Afterwards, the 
Carthaginians acquired possession of the country ; but it was taken 
by the Romans in 134 B. C., who kept it till the year 406 after the 
Christian era. Spain was then invaded by barbarians from the north, 
called the Suevi, the Alans, and the Vandals. 

9. Some of these people continued in the country more than a hun- 
dred years. They were then driven out by another set of barbarians, 
called Goths, or Visigoths, who overran the whole of Spain. These 
became established in the country, and finally founded a kingdom there. 

10. After the Goths had been in Spain about two hundred years, a 
king mounted the throne whose name was Roderick. This king 
grievously injured count Julian, who was one of the most powerful 
of the Spanish or Gothic nobles. In order to avenge himself, Julian 
took steps which resulted in the ruin of his country. 

11. In Mauritania, which I have already mentioned, on the north- 
ern coast of Africa, and not far from Spain, there was a nation of Sa- 


2. What sort of a country is Spain ? Climate ? Productions ? Should you not like to go 
to Spain and eat some of the fine fruits ? 3. What of the horses of Spain ? Merino sheep ? 
4. Population ? What of the people ? Capital ? What of Madrid? Which way is Ma- 
drid from you ? From London ? Paris ? Rome ? Algiers ? 5. What of the Moorish 
buildings in Spain ? 7. What of the early history of Spain ? Where was Phoenicia ? How 
far from Snain ? What did the Phoenicians do in Spain ? Where were the pillars of Hercules 
built ? How far did the ancients venture to go in their vessels ? 8. What of the Greeks? 
The Carthaginians ? The Romans ? What barbarians conquered Spain ? About what 
time did they conquer Spain ? 9. How long did the Suevi and other barbarians remain in 
Spain? Who drove out the Suevi and other barbarians ? What of the Goths ? 10. What 
of Roderick? Count Julian? What did he do? 


SPAIN. 


163 


racens. They were called Mauri, or Moors, from the country which 
they inhabited. Count Julian invited them to cross the sea, and in- 
vade Spain. 

12. Accordingly, a great number of these infidels landed on the 
Spanish shores, under the command of a general named Tariff. King 
Roderick the Goth gathered an army, and encountered them at 
Xerxes, in the south of Spain. Here a great battle was fought. 

13. The Moors were completely victorious. The fate of Roderick 
was never known. His horse, and his sword, helmet, shield, and 
breastplate, were found by the side of a river, near the field of battle; 
but his body was nowhere to be seen. These events occurred about 
712 A. D. 

14. The Spaniards long believed that king Roderick was alive, and 
that, at some future day, he would again lead an army to battle 
against the Moors. But his war-shout was heard no more ; and as 
the Gothic monarchy was ruined by his fall, he is called Roderick the 
last of the Goths. 

15. Pelagio, a prince of the blood-royal, took command of all the 
Gothic Spaniards who had not been slain by the Moors. He led them 
into the mountainous region of Asturias and Burgos, and there found- 
ed a little kingdom. This was the only part of Spain which the 
Moors never conquered. 

16. The successors of Pelagio enlarged the boundaries of his king- 
4om. But, for a long time, the Moors possessed three-fourths of Spain. 


CHAPTER C.— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

Wars between the Moors and the Spaniards . 

1. The Moors were a wild people when they first conquered Spain ; 
but they soon became civilized and polished. There was more learn- 
ing amongst them than in any other part of Europe. 

2. In the city of Cordova, there was a library of six hundred thou- 
sand volumes. There were likewise seventy public libraries in other 
parts of the Moorish territories in Spain. The Moors were great 
lovers of poetry and music. 

3. They built many noble edifices in Spain. The Alhambra, in the 
city of Granada, was the palace of the Moorish sovereigns. It was 
of marbh and ornamented with beautiful sculpture. The sultry at- 
mosphere was cooled by fountains, which spouted continually in the 
chambers and halls. Beneath the Alhambra were vaults, which the 
Moorish kings had caused to be dug, that they might be buried there; 

11. Wha; of Mauritania ? Its direction from Spain ? What of the Moors ? Count Ju- 
lian ? 12. What ‘I’d the Moors do ? What followed ? 13. Fate of king Roderick ? How 

ong ago did this happen ? 14. What did the Spaniards believe ? Why was Roderick 

called the last of the Goths? 15. What of Pelagio? What was the only part of Spain not 
conquered by the Moors ? 16. What of the successors of Pelagio ? What portion of Spain 

did the Moors long possess? Ch. C. — 1. What can you say of the Moors? 3. What of 
libraries in Cordova ? In other cities ? What did the Moors love ? 


164 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


for they loved the Alhambra so well, that they used it both as their 

palace and sepulchre. 

4. But the Spaniards hated the Moors, and seldom were at peace 
with them. In their continual wars, the victory sometimes fell to 
one party, and sometimes to the other. Eighty thousand Moors were 
once slain in a single battle. 

5. On the other hand, a Moorish hero, by the name of Almanzor, 
is said to have vanquished the Spaniards in more than fifty battles. 
He took the city of Compostella, and compelled his captives to carry 
the gates of a large edifice from thence to Cordova, on their shoulders. 

6. The most famous warrior that appeared on either side, was Don 
Rodrigo de Bivaz, surnamed the Cid Campeador, or the Incomparable 
Lord. He gained so many battles against the Moors, that at last the 
Spaniards considered the victory certain whenever the Cid Campea- 
dor was at their head. 

7. When the Incomparable Lord was dead, the courage of the 
Moors revived. They boldly attacked the Spaniards, and besieged the 
city where the Cid Campeador lay buried. The Spaniards went forth 
to meet them, and at their head rode an armed warrior, with a coun- 
tenance like death. 

8. The Moors recognized his features, and fled ; for it was the Cid 
Campeador! The Spaniards had taken him from the tomb, and seated 
him on the war-horse which he had rode in his lifetime. And thus 
the dead warrior won another victory. 

9. Many other wonderful stories are told about the Moorish and 
Spanish wars. Sometimes, it is said, a saint came down from hea- 
ven, to lead the Spaniards to battle. Sometimes the sun stood still, 
that they might have time to kill their enemies. Sometimes they 
were encouraged by the appearance of a blazing cross in the sky. 

HI. But these are fables. It is certain, however, that the Moors 
gradually lost their Spanish territories, till nothing remained to them 
except Granada. And in the reign of Ferdinand and Isabella, they 
were wholly driven out of Spain. This event took place in 1492, 
nearly eight centuries after the overthrow of king Roderick the Goth. 


CHAPTER CL— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

The Spanish Inquisition . 

1. The reign of Ferdinand and Isabella was disgraced by the estab- 
lishment of the Inquisition in Spain. The design of this horrible 
institution was to prevent the people from adopting any but the 

3. What did they build in Spain ? Describe the Alhambra. What were beneath the Al- 
hambra? 4. How did the Spaniards feel toward the Moors? What of their wars 
6. What of Almanzor ? What city did he take ? 6. What famous warrior can you men 
tiou ? What of him ? 7. What of the Moors after his death ? Who rode at the head of 
the Spaniards ? 8. How were the Moors affected by seeihg the dead body of the Cid Cam 
peador ? 9. What stories are told of the Moorish and Spanish wan ? 10. What at last 

remained to the Moors ? When were the Moors driven out of Spain ? 


SPAIN, 105 

Catholic religion; it being believed, in those dark days, that it was 
right to do so. 

2. Persons who were suspected of being heretics were thrown into 
damp and dismal dungeons. They were then brought before the in- 
quisitors, who sat completely covered with long robes and hoods of 
sackcloth. Their faces were invisible ; but they looked at the pris- 
oners through two holes in their sackcloth hoods. 

3. If the accused persons would not plead guilty, they were tor- 
tured in various ways. Sometimes they were drawn up to the roof 
of the chamber by a rope, and after hanging a considerable time, the 
rope was loosened, so that they fell almost to the floor. 

4. The rope was then suddenly tightened again, and the prisoner’s 
limbs were put out of joint by the shock. If he still refused to con- 
fess, the inquisitors rubbed his feet with lard, and roasted them before 
a fire. In short, their cruelties were too dreadful to be told. 

5. When the inquisitors had satisfied themselves with torturing 
their prisoners, they prepared to burn them. The condemned persons 
walked in a procession, dressed in garments which were painted with 
flames. On their breasts they wore their own likenesses, in the act 
of being devoured by serpents and wild beasts. 

6. When they reached the place of execution, the victims were 
fastened to a stake with iron chains, and roasted to death by a slow 
fire. They sometimes suffered the agony of this torment for two or 
three hours, before death relieved them. 

7. Such were the horrors of the Inquisition ; yet it had been intro- 
duced into Italy before it was adopted in Spain, and in after times it 
spread into other Catholic countries, and continued in operation for 
nearly three hundred years. Between thirty and forty thousand were 
burnt alive, before the Inquisition was abolished. 

8. The remembrance of the Inquisition will ever cause a stain to 
rest upon the reign of Ferdinand and Isabella, for in Spain it was a 
more horrid institution than in any other country. It was the great- 
est glory of this king and queen, that they gave Christopher Colum- 
bus the means of discovering America. But Columbus was thrown 
into a dungeon, as the reward of his discovery ! 

9. The Spaniards made great conquests in America. The riches 
of the country were in this way much increased ; and there was 
more silver and gold in Spain than in all the rest of Europe. But it 
is doubtful whether Spain ever derived any real benefit from her 
American colonies ; for instead of staying at home to cultivate the 
soil, the inhabitants crossed the ocean in search of gold and silver. 


Ch. Cl. — 1. When was the Inquisition established ? What was its design ? 2. How 
were suspected persons treated ? Describe the inquisitors. 3. How were the accused 
persons tortured: 5. Describe the burning of the prisoners? 6. How long did the Inqui- 
sition continue in operation ? 7. What of the reign of Ferdinand and Isabella? What 

was the glory of their reign? What was the fate of Columbus ? 8. What of the Spaniards ? 
What of the riches of Spain ? 9. Were the American colonies any benefit to Spain ? 


166 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


CHAPTER CII.— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

The Invincible Armada. Curious Death of a Spanish 
King. Recent Affairs of Spam. 

1. One of the most powerful monarchs of Spain was Philip the 
Second. He was not only king of Spain, but he obtained the crown 
of Portugal also, in 1580 ; but Portugal afterwards became a separate 
kingdom again. It had first been declared independent of Spain at the 
beginning of the twelfth century. 

2. Philip intended to conquer England, and prepared a fleet of eighty 
ships for that purpose. This fleet was called the Invincible Armada. 
Put it was conquered even without a battle, for a storm scattered it, 
and drove many of the ships on the British coast. 

3. The son of Philip was a weak minded man. The manner of 
his death was very singular. He was sitting, one day, in the coun- 
cil chamber, which was warmed by a large stove. The heat and 
vapor of the stove affected his head. 

4. He ordered the attendants to quench the fire. But the person 
whose duty it was to do this happened not to be in the chamber, and 
the rules of the Spanish court were so strict, that it would have been 
unlawful for any other person to touch the fire. 

5. Moreover, it would have been beneath the king’s dignity to 
leave the chamber, or even to move his chair back from the stove. 
So the fire continued to grow hotter, and the poor king grew sicker 
and sicker, till at last it was impossible to cure him. And thus he 
died, by a kind of death that could have befallen nobody but a Span- 
ish king. 

6. In the year 1700, Charles the Second of Spain died without 
children. He was succeeded by a young French prince, named Phil- 
ip, duke of Anjou, the grandson of Louis the Fourteenth. The kings 
of this family are called the Spanish Bourbons. 

7. This event caused a long war in Europe. Charles, archduke of 
Austria, claimed the crown of Spain, and he and Philip of Anjou al- 
ternately drove each other out of Madrid. But Philip finally kept his 
seat on the throne. 

8. Spain has often been at war with England. She united with 
France against that country during .the American Revolution ; but 
peace was concluded in 1783. Another war, however, began between 
England and France in about ten years afterwards. 

9. In 1808, when the emperor Napoleon was at the height of his 
power, he compelled the Spanish king to abdicate his throne. The 
name of this king was Ferdinand the Seventh. Napoleon then placed 


Ch. CII. — What of Philip II. ? What of Portugal ? 2. What of the Invincible Arma 
da? 3 Describe the death of Philip’s son. 6. What happened in the year 1700 ? Who 
succeeded Charles II. ? Who were the Spanish Bourbons ? 7. Why did Charles and 
Philip go to war? Who triumphed ? 9. What of Spain? When was peace concluded 
between France and England ? 9. What did Napoleon compel the Spanish king to do ia 
1808 ? Who was Ferdinand VII. ? 


SPAIN. 167 

the crown of Spain upon the head of his own brother, Joseph Bona- 
parte. 

10. But most of the Spaniards refused to acknowledge king Joseph 
as their sovereign. A bloody war ensued. The English government 
sent armies into Spain and Portugal; and it was there that Lord 
Wellington gained his first victories over the French'. 

11. Ferdinand, the old Spanish king, was replaced upon the throne 
in 1814. He was, however, a tyrant and a bigot, and his reign was 
mischievous to the country. His death took place in 1833. 

12. Since that event, Spain has been ravaged by a civil war be- 
tween Don Carlos and the young queen Maria Isabella. Three or 
four hundred thousand persons where supposed to have been killed in 
this war which is now terminated, by the establishment of the claims 
of Maria Isabella. 


CHAPTER CIII. -EUROPE CONTINUED. 

A short Story about Portugal. 

1. Portugal lies to the west of Spain, and is bounded on the west 
by the Atlantic Ocean. The population of the country is nearly four 
millions. The capital is Lisbon.. This is a large city, and many of 
our vessels visit it for the purpose of getting wines, grapes, oranges, 
and lemons. 

2. The climate of Portugal is similar to that of Spain. The people 
also resemble the Spaniards, but speak a language somewhat differ- 
ent. The Portuguese are very ignorant, and as they seldom read, 
they have plenty of time for dancing. 

3. Portugal was originally considered a part of Spain, and shared 
in the events of that country. In the twelfth century, it became in- 
dependent. Since that time it has been considered a separate king- 
dom, though it has been subject to Spain for a portion of this period. 

4. The history of Portugal is of little interest, till about the year 
1400, when the Portuguese took the lead in navigating the Atlantic 
Ocean. At this time, this great sea was little known, and nobody 
had gone across it to America, nor had any one dared to sail around 
Africa. 

5 . But the little Portuguese vessels ventured out farther and far- 
ther, and finally one of them reached the Cape of Good Hope. Af- 
ter this, a Portuguese fleet passed entirely around Africa, crossed the 
Indian Ocean, and reached India. 

Whom did Napoleon make king of Spain? 10. What of the Spaniards? What of the 
English government? What of Lord Wellington? 11. When was Ferdinand replaced up- 
on the throne ? What of him ? When did he die ? 12. What of a civil war in Spain ? 

Ch. CIII. — Boundaries of Portugal ? Population? Capital? What of Lisbon ? 2. Cli- 
mate of Portugal ? The people ? Language? 3. What of Portugal? When did it be- 
come independent ? What of Portugal since the twelfth century ? 4. What of the Por- 
tuguese after about 1400 ? What of the Atlantic at this time? 6. What of the Portuguese 
vessels ? Their discoveries ' 


SCHOOL HISTOR F.* 


1«8 

6. These wonderful adventures and discoveries excited other na« 
tions, and in a few years Christopher Columbus discovered America. 
Thus the Portuguese may be considered as having led the way to the 
discovery of this vast continent on which we live, and which was un- 
known to the people of Europe, Asia, and Africa till the year 1492. 

7. I need not tell you of what happened in Portugal from this time 
till the year 1755. At that date, an earthquake took place, which 
shook down nearly the whole city of Lisbon. Houses, churches, and 
palaces were suddenly tumbled into heaps of ruins. Large chasms 
were opened in the earth, and hundreds of houses were plunged into 
them. The sea at first rolled back from the land, and then returned, 
sweeping every thing before it. In this awful calamity, ten thousand 
persons lost their lives. 

8. The Portuguese founded a good many colonies in different parts 
of the world. One of these was in Brazil, in South America. To 
this place the king of Portugal retired with his family in 1807, and 
established his court at Rio Janeiro, the capital of the country. This 
was done because Portugal had been invaded by the French. 

9. The French being driven out in 1808, the king returned in a few 
years. After his death there was a struggle for the crown, but it 
was finally settled upon Donna Maria, the present queen. 


CHAPTER CIV. -EUROPE CONTINUED. 


Description of France. Its Climate. Cities. Manu- 
factures. Manners and Customs of the People. 


1. France lies in the western part of Europe, and contains about 
thirty-two millions of inhabitants. Paris, the capital, is a very large 
city, surrounded with a wall of stone. It is full of fine houses, beau- 
tiful public gardens, pleasant walks, handsome streets, and interesting 
places of amusement. To a stranger, it is the most agreeable city 
in the world. 

2. Besides Paris, there are a great many other large and handsome 
cities in France. Among these are Rouen, where the people manu- 
facture a great deal of handsome jewelry ; Lyons, where they make 
beautiful silks; Marseilles, where the people deal in wines; and 
Bordeaux, in the midst of a country which produces fine grapes, and 
other delicious fruits. 

3. The climate of France is about the same as that of Pennsylvania, 
Maryland, and Virginia. The soil is fruitful, and yields abundance o. 
food for the numerous inhabitants. The country produces many 


i.n\^ at T, C r onsequeDCes followed the Portuguese discoveries? What of America till 
is tit What happened in 1755? Describe the earthquake? 8. Colonies of Portu 
gal ? W hat of the king of Portugal ? When and why did he remove to Brasil ? 9. What 
followed? Ch. CIV.— 1. Population of France? Describe Paris? 2. What of Rouen 
What of Lyons ? What of Marseilles ? What of Bordeaux ? 


FRANCE. 


169 


rinds of fruits in great perfection, such as cherries, pears, plums, 
peaches, and fi^s. It also yields immense quantities of grapes, from 
which many kinds of choice wines are produced. 

4 The people of France are very gay and cheerful. They live a 
great deal in the open air, and it is common in all parts of the 
country to see both men and women at work in the fields. They do 
not labor very hard, and during the holidays, of which they have a 
great many, they walk about the streets, and dance in the public 
gardens, or squares. 



One of the entrances of Paris. 


5 . The French seem to enjoy themselves better than most other 
nations. They are fond of music, and delight to get together, and 
talk about all sorts of things. They are very polite, and always treat 
strangers with particular civility. The gentlemen are courteous to 
the ladies, and the ladies in return take every means in their power 
to make their society agreeable to the gentlemen. 

6. The manufactures of France are numerous and valuable. The 
people have an excellent fancy in making jewelry, silks, clocks, 
watches, and many other ornamental things. These are sent to all 
parts of the world, and though they may not be considered very 
necessary, yet they give a great deal of pleasure, and thus have their 
use. 

7. The French people are fond of dress, and the dressmakers of 
Paris set the fashions for the rest of the world. The milliners and 
mantua-makers of this city have more followers than any king that 

3. Climate of France ? Soil? Productions? 4. Character and manners of the French 
people? 5. What of the gentlemen ? The ladies? 6. Manufactures of France ? What 
is the use of the fancy articles manufactured in France ? 

15 



170 


SCHOOL HISTOR1 


ever lived ; for the gowns and bonnets of the ladies of Europe and 
America are made according to their direction. 

8. The French nation, on the whole, are a very interesting and 
wonderful people. Though they might seem to be frivolous and 
thoughtless, yet France has produced many great men, and the 
history of the country displays many great and glorious actions. 

9. They have been represented as a nation of fiddlers, dress-makers, 
and dancing masters ; but if you look into their character, and read 
their story with attention, you will see that this is not just ; they are 
in truth the most warlike nation in Europe ; they take the lead in 
many arts and sciences; and if the people at large spend much of 
their time in amusement, it is not because they are deficient in genius 
for the highest pursuits of the mind. 


CHAPTER CV.— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

About the Gauls and other Tribes of Barbarians. How 
the Southern Parts of Europe were first settled , and 
how the Northern Parts were settled afterwards. 

1. In the course of this history, I have had frequent occasion to 
mention various northern tribes of Europe, called barbarians, and 
perhaps I shall not find a better opportunity than the present to give 
you some account of them. You remember that Greece was settled 
before any other part of Europe. The first inhabitants were the 
descendents of Japheth. The descendents of these spread themselves 
over Greece, and probably other parts of Europe. 

2. As the people increased along the shores of Asia and Africa, 
they sent colonies to different places along the shores of the Mediter- 
ranean. Some settled in Greece, some in Italy, some in Spain. 
These countries being warm, pleasant, and fruitful, were soon filled 
with inhabitants. Living upon , the coast, they had a great many 
ships, and carried on commerce with different countries. 

3. In this way, after many years, they grew rich, and built large 
cities, with fine houses, temples, and palaces. Such was the course 
of events in regard to all southern Europe, of which I have been 
telling you the story. But, while these things were going on, various 
tribes were emigrating into the more northern portions of Europe. 

4. Here the climate was colder, and the soil less fruitful. Still the 
woods were full of elks, rein-deer, fallow-deer, and the roe-buck, wild 
bulls, wild boars, and many other animals. These supplied food for 
the inhabitants, and the chase furnished excellent sport to the ad- 
venturous men of those days. 

7. What of the French, as to dress? Milliners and mantua-makers ? 8. What might 
seem to he the character of the French ? What does their history display ? 9. What of 
their talent for war ? Their genius for other things ? Ch. CV. — 1. What of Greece ? 2. 
How were the shores of the Meditarranean settled ? What of the people in these coun- 
tries ? 3. How were the northern portions of Europe settled? 4. Climate and soil of 
northern Europe ? What furnished subsistence to the inhabitants ? 


PRANCE. 


171 


5. Beside all this, in these regions unoccupied by man the land was 
very cheap, and whoever would come and take it might have it. 
These circumstances invited the people to leave the soft, sunny re- 
gions of Greece, Italy, Spain, and also of Asia, for the colder and 
wilder realms of northern Europe. 

6. Thus tribe followed tribe, and nation followed nation, until the 
whole country was occupied, from the Mediterranean on the south, to 
the Arctic Sea on the north. It was, in fact, very much such a course 
of events as you may have seen going on in our country. 

7. Those portions of America first settled by the Europeans were 
along the Atlantic seaboard. Here they first built houses, and founded 
cities. After a while, they went into the farther interior, in search of 
wild game and new lands. Thus they continued to push farther and 
farther into the country, and even now they are still advancing to- 
ward the far west. 


CHAPTER CVL— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

Story of the Barbarians continued. 

1. 1 have now show you how the north of Europe was gradually 
settled by tribes that emigrated from the south of Europe, and from 
Asia. These might be compared to a vast stream that continued to 
flow on, growing wider and advancing farther, until at length the 
whole country was peopled. 

2. But you must remark one thing, that these emigrants were sav- 
ages, and of a warlike character; they therefore did not mingle into 
one great nation, but each tribe remained distinct. As they increased 
in numbers, they increased in power. 

3. After a while, something would happen to bring two tribes liv- 
ing near each other into a state of war. Fierce battles would follow, 
and a great many would be killed. Sometimes one tribe would be 
vanquished, and they would all be slaughtered, reduced to a state of 
slavery, or driven out of their country. 

4. It was, in short, a state of things very much like that of our 
American Indians, when this country was first settled by the white 
people. There was this difference, however, that the northern bar- 
barians of Europe carried with them the knowledge of many arts. 
Their weapons of war, therefore, were not merely the bow and ar- 
row, but they had swords, spears, and shields. 

5. They also built better houses than the wigwams of cur Indians. 
Still they were a fierce people, and in many respects were as savage 
as the wild boars and wild bears which they pursued in the chase. 

5. What of the land ? What induced the people to settle in northern Europe ? 6. How 
does the settlement of America compare with that of Europe? Ch. CVI. — 1. How was 
the north of Europe settled? To what may the emigration of the tribes be compared? 
2. What of these emigrants ? 3. What of their wars ? 4. What did the state of these bar 
b&rians resemble ? f». What of them ? 


f72 SCHOOL HISTORY. 

6. Among the most remarkable of these northern tribes were the 
Gauls, who were the first known inhabitants of France, and who 
came from Asia several hundred years before Christ ; the Franks and 
iSuevi, who inhabited Germany ; the Goths and the Vandals, who in- 
habited Norway, Sweden, and Lapland, and afterwards established 
themselves in Germany ; and the Huns, who lived in Hungary. 
There were still many other tribes, but it is not necessary to mention 
them here. 

7. Well, you must now imagine all the north of Europe inhabited 
by these wild tribes. Spending their time chiefly in the chase, or in 
war, or other hardy pursuits, they became bold, daring, and adventu- 
rous. Their numbers. also increased, and some of them became pow- 
erful nations. 

8. They were, however, generally restless, and, like beasts of prey, 
were constantly looking out for some object upon which they might 
fall and devour 'it. So things went on, till at length these barbarians 
fixed their attention upon the rich cities, the fertile plains, and vine- 
clad hills of the south of Europe. 

9. The Roman empire was now tottering to decay, and the Roman 
armies were no longer the dread of these tribes. About the year 400, 
they began to pour down their armies upon the plains of Italy. Ala- 
ric king of the Goths, laid Rome under contribution, and less than 
fifty years after, Attila, king of the Huns, threatened the same city 
with destruction. 

10. After this period, these restless invaders continued from time to 
time to attack the southern regions of Europe, till they made them- 
selves masters of its finest portions. 

11. As the northern barbarians of whom I have been. speaking had 
no books, and wrote no histories, their early story is little known. 
After getting possession of Rome, Spain, and other southern portions 
of Europe, they settled in these countries. 

12. For a time, literature and learning, the arts of poetry, painting, 
sculpture, apd music, which had been cultivated by the Romans, 
were unknown in the countries where they once flourished. But by 
degrees, the new inhabitants became civilized and polished, and the 
modem nations which now occupy these regions may be considered 
as in part their descendants. It is now time to proceed with the his 
tory of France. 

6. Which were the most remarkable of the northern tribes ? 7. Describe their mods 
of life. 8. What at length attracted their attention ? 9. What of the Roman empire ? 
When did the barbarians attack Italy ? What of Alaric and Attila ? 10. What did the 

barbarians continue to do? 11. Where did the northern barbarians settle ? 12. What of 

them for a time ? What happened at length ? What of the modern nations of the south of 
Europe ? 


FRANCE. 


173 


CHAPTER CVIL— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

The Gauls . Origin of the French Nation . Little King 

Pepin . 



Pharamond . Meroveus. Clodion. 


1. The ancient name of France was Gaul, and the inhabitants were 
called Gauls. These were one of those warlike tribes of which I have 
just been speaking. At a very early date, they appear to have been 
numerous and powerful. In the year 390, B. C., they invaded Rome 
under Brennus, and took that city, but were expelled by Camillus. 

2. Under another Brennus, they invaded Greece, as I have told you. 
In the time of Julius Caesar, the Gauls had made some little progress 
towards civilization ; but they were still a barbarous people, and re- 
tained many practices that belong only to savages. They had, how-! 
ever, a good many cities, and these were defended with strong walls. 

3. When Caesar entered the country, he found the Gauls sorely 
pressed by some of the German tribes. At first, he affected to be the 
deliverer of the Gauls from these troublesome enemies. 

4. But the people soon discovered that Caesar’s real design was to 
conquer them. They then began to resist, and for nine long years 


Oh. CVII. — 1. What was the ancient name of France ? Of the people ? What did they 
do under Br mnus ? 2. When did they invade Greece ? What of them in the time of Ju- 
lius Caesar What of their cities ? 3, What did Caesar find on entering the country? 

15 * 



SCHOOL HISTORY. 


174 

they fought Caesar and his armies with admirable skill and spirit. 
But the Romans were better versed in the art of war than the Gauls. 
Their soldiers were better trained, and their implements of war were 
superior to those of the Gauls. 

5. Notwithstanding all this, so brave and obstinate were the Gauls 
in the defence of their country, that it required all the genius of Julius 
Caesar, one of the greatest leaders that ever lived, aided by the im- 
mense power of Rome, to subdue them. 

6. Caesar was occupied no less than nine years in conquering the 
Gauls, and it is supposed a million of men were slain in the bloody 
struggle. From the time of Caesar’s conquest, about 50 years B. C., 
Gaul was a Roman province, and the people gradually adopted the 
manners and customs of the Romans. Even their language became 
changed, and assumed a resemblance to the Latin. But between the 
third and fourth century, the Franks, a German tribe whom I have 
mentioned, got possession of the greater part of Gaul. 

7. It is said, that the Franks who first established themselves in 
Gaul were led by Pharamond. He died in 428, and was succeeded 
by his son Clodion, who was celebrated for the beauty of his hair. 
Clodion died in 448, and was succeeded by Meroveus ; Meroveus died 
in 458, and was succeeded by Childeric. Very little is known of these 
kings, except the last. 


CHAPTER CVIIL— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

About Clovis and little King Pepin. 

1. Childeric is considered the founder of the French monarchy. 
He was succeeded by his son Clovis. When Clovis was only nine- 
teen years old, he drove the Romans out of France. He afterwards 
gained a great victory over the Germans. 

2. As Clovis had married a Christian princess, he attributed his sue 
cess to the God whom she worshipped. He therefore determined to 
become a Christian himself, and he was baptized, with three thousand 
of his subjects, on Christmas day, in the year 496. After the death 
of Clovis, France was divided among several petty kings. They 
quarrelled among themselves, and caused great trouble to the Lation. 
The wife of one of them was accused of murdering ten kings, or child- 
ren of kings. 

3. Little king Pepin, otherwise called Pepin the short, thrust all 
the other kings from their thrones, and made himself sole ruler of 


4. What did the people soon discover ? What did they do ? What of the Romans ? 6. 
What of the Gauls ? What was required to subdue them ? 6. What was the consequence 
of this struggle between the Gauls and Romans ? What of Gaul from this time ? What 
of the Franks:' 7. Pharamond? Clodion? Meroveus? What of these kings? Ch. CVIII. — 
1. Who was Childeric ? What of Clovis ? 2. Why did Clovis determine to be a Christian / 
When was he baptized ? What of France after his death ? What of the kings ? 


FRANCE. 175 

France. He was a very small man, being only four feet and a half 
high ; but he had a mighty spirit in that little body. 



Childeric. Clovis I. Clotilda, wife of Clovis. 


4. Moreover, he had an enormous aeal of strength. Knowing that 
some of his courtiers made fun of his little size, he resolved to show 
them, that there was as much manhood in him as there could possibly 
be in a giant. He therefore invited them to see a fight between a lion 
and a bull. 

5. The lion gave a tremendous roar, and leaped upon the bull’s 
back, sticking his claws deep into the flesh. The bull also roared 
with pain and terror, as well he might. Then little king Pepin stood 
on tiptoe on his throne, to make himself as tall as he could ; and he 
roared out to his courtiers, full as loud as either the bull or the lion : — 

6. “Which of you all,” cried he, “will make that lion let go his 
hold ?” The courtiers all stood silent and abashed ; for they had no 
notion of venturing within reach of the lion’s claws. “Then I ’ll do 
it myself!” said king Pepin the Short. So the valiant little king 
leaped down from his throne, and drew a sword almost as long as 
himself. Brandishing it in the air, he ran up to the lion, who was 
still clinging to the mad bull’s back. 

7. When the lion beheld this terrible small champion, he opened 
his enormous jaws, as if he meant to snap him up at a single mouth- 
ful. But little king Pepin aimed a blow at him with his sword, and 
hit him fair upon the neck. 

8. Down fell the lion’s head on one side of the bull, and down fell 
his body on the other ! And from that time forward, the courtiers 

3. 4. Describe little king Pepin. What did he invite his people to see ? 5. 6. 7. Relate 
king Pepin’s encounter with the lion. 8. How did his bravery affect his courtiers? 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


176 

would sooner have taken a roaring lion by the mane, than have laugh- 
ed at little king Pepin. 


CHAPTER CIX.— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

The Reign of Charlemagne. 



Pepin. Bertha, wife of Pepin. Charlemagne. 


1. King Pepin the Little had a son who was called Charlemagne, 
or Charles the Great. The epithet was given him because he was a 
mighty king and conqueror, but he also deserved it on account of his 
height, which was not an inch less than seven feet. 

2. Charlemagne used to wear a sheepskin cloak. Whenever he 
saw his courtiers richly dressed, he invited them to go a-hunting with 
him. Charlemagne took care to lead the way through all the thorns 
and bushes he could find, on purpose that his courtiers might tear 
their fine clothes in following him. 

3. This king was continually at war. He subjugated the Saxons, 
and other tribes who lived in Germany. He likewise made conquests 
in Spain and Italy. At length, ruling over France, Germany, and 
other countries, he wished for the title of Emperor of the West. 

4. Accordingly, he went to Rome, and knelt down at the high 


Ch. CIX. — 1. Who was Charlemagne? 2. What ofhis dress? That ofhis courtiers? 3 
What of Charlemagne ? Over what countries did he reign ? What did he wish ? 


FRANCE. 


177 


altar of the church as if to say his prayers. There was a large con- 
gi egation in the church, and they were much edified by the devout 
behavior of Charlemange. But while he was kneeling, the pope 
stole softly behind him, and placed the imperial crown upon his 
head. 

5. This was the crown which all the old emperors of Rome had 
worn, and when the people beheld it on the head of Charlemagne, 
they shouted “ Long live the emperor !” Charlemagne pretended to 
be surprised and angry ; but he took care to keep the imperial crown 
upon his head. 

6. Charlemagne died in the year 814, when he was quite an old 
man. While he was alive, as I have mentioned, he wore a sheep- 
skin cloak. But after he was dead, his attendants dressed him in 
robes of imperial purple. 

7. They placed a throne of gold in his sepulchre, and set the dead 
body of the gray-bearded old emperor upon it. A sword was girded 
about his waist. He had a golden crown upon his head, a golden 
sceptre and shield at his feet, a golden chalice in his hand, and a 
Bible upon his knees. 

8. Over the sepulchre, there was a magnificent triumphal arch, 
with an inscription to the memory of the mighty Charlemagne. 
And having wasted all this splendor upon the senseless corpse, the 
attendants shut up the tomb, and went to pay their court to Charle- 
magne’s successor. 

9. This was his son, entitled Louis the Mild. I know not where- 
fore he was called the Mild, for one of the acts of his reign was to 
put out the eyes of another king, whom he had taken prisoner. 
When Louis died, he left his dominions to his three sons. They im- 
mediately went to war with each other. It is said that a hundred 
thousand men were slain in one of their battles. 

10. Some of the succeeding kings of France were Charles the 
Bald, Louis the Stammerer, Charles the Fat, Charles the simple, 
Louis the Foreigner, and Hugh Capet. These sovereigns performed 
no actions that need be recorded in my book. 


CHAPTER CX. -EUROPE CONTINUED. 

About the Crusades or Holy Wars. 

1. 1 must now give you some account of the Crusades or Holy 
Wars, jndertaken by the European nations for the recovery of Jeru- 
•alem, which was in the hands of the Turks. The Christians had a 
jreat reverence for this city for here Christ preached, here he per 


4. 5. What did he do? Describe his coronation. 6. When did Charlemagne die? 
How was his body dressed for his burial ? 8. What was put over the sepulchre ? 9. Who 

was Louis the Mile What of him ? What of his three sous ? 10. Who were some of th* 

succeeding kiugs of France ' 


SCHOOL HISTOR1 . 


178 

formed many miracles, here he was crucified, and here he rose from 

the dead. . 

2. On account of the pious reverence entertained for what they 
called the Holy City, many Christian pilgrims went on foot to visit 
it. It was very common for the Roman Catholic priests to impose 
this pilgrimage on persons who had committed some sin, and they 
were made to believe, that in ‘his way alone they could receive pardon 
of God. 



3. Now the pilgrims to Jerusalem were often treated with cruelty 
and scorn by the Turks, who held possession of Jerusalem and the 
country around it. The pilgrims returned to Europe, and gave an 
account of the treatment they received. This excited the indignation 
of the Christians, and they were easily induced to unite in a great 
effort for taking the Holy Land from the infidel Turks. 

4. The pope of Rome at this time had vast influence, and he 
wished to acquire more. When this project was proposed, therefore, 
he gave it his sanction, thinking that he should extend his dominion 
over Palestine, if the country should be taken. 

5. Peter the Hermit was the principal agent in exciting the people 
to the first crusade. He was a half-starved monk, and went about 
bareheaded, with a rope round his waist, and wearing a garment of 
coarse cloth. This was so short that it barely covered his body, 
leaving his arms and legs naked. 

(j. It might seem that such a scarecrow as this would rather have 
excited ridicule than reverence. But Peter had been in Palestine, and 

Ch. CX. — 1. What were the crusades ? Why were they undertaken ? Why did the 
Christians reverence Jerusalem ? 2 What of pilgrimages to Jerusalem ? 3. How were the 

pilgrims treated? What did they do ? What was the consequence of their representa- 
tions? 4* What of the pope of Rome? 5. Describe Fetor the Hermit? 


FRA NCE. 


179 


had experienced the insults of the Turks. He therefore spoke ol 
things he had seen, and the people listened with a willing sympathy. 

7. Thus Peter went from city to city, and everywhere crowds 
came to hear him. There was soon such a state of excitement, that 
the princes assembled, and armies were speedily gathered for the 
enterprise. Thus in the year 1096, Peter set out with two hundred 
thousand men at his heels. He carried a ponderous cross upon his 
shoulders, and his followers wore crosses of red cloth sewed upon 
their clothes. 

8. But scarcely had his army landed in Asia, when sultan Solyman 
attacked them, and made a terrible slaughter. As a trophy of his 
victory over the poor wretches, he built a pyramid of their bones. 
Other armies of crusaders met with similar misfortunes. 

9. It is computed, that eight hundred and fifty thousand Christians 
lost their lives in the course of the first crusade. And all this 
slaughter took place before they had even come in sight of Jerusalem. 

10. There was another army, however, belonging to the first 
crusade, that had better suceess. This consisted of eighty thousand 
men, and was led by a French prince called Godfrey of Bologne. He 
proceeded through Asia Minor, took several cities, and captured 
Jerusalem in 1099. From this period till the year 1187, the Holy 
City remained in the hands of the Christians, when it was again 
captured by the Turks, in whose hands it has since remained. 

11. No less than five other crusades took place; the last being 
commenced in 1248. This, with most of the others proved unsuc- 
cessful. The whole number of men who lost their lives in these 
wild expeditions was not less than two millions. 

12. It appears, that many of the crusaders were good men, and 
some, perhaps, were wise ones. Several of the leaders were brave 
knights, and they went forth clad in bright steel armor, and mounted 
upon fine horses. But a large portion of the armies were of a different 
character. Some were half crazy people, filled with religious zeal, 
and a larger portion were thieves and robbers, who joined the expedi- 
tions that they might share in the plunder of cities that should be v 
taken. 

13. But although the motives of many of the crusaders were 
selfish, though the great object of these expeditions was not very 
important, and though much slaughter and bloodshed flowed from 
them ; still the half barbarous inhabitants of Europe brought from 
the East many arts that tended to refine and civilize the people. In 
this, and other ways, the crusades produced some good results. 

6. What of him? 7. What effect had his preaching? What took place in 1096? 8. 

Who attacked the army in Asia ? What did the sultan do ? What of other crusaders ? 9 
What of the first crusade ? 10. What of the army under Godfrey of Bologne ? What city 

did he take? When did the Turks retake Jerusalem? 11. How many crusades were 
there? When was the first crusade begun ? The last? How many men lost their lives in 
the crusades ? 12. What appears concerning many of the crusaders ? Their leaders 

What of a large portion of the armies ? 13. What good results did the crusades produce 1 


180 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


CHAPTER CXI. -EUROPE CONTINUED. 

About the Feudal System . 



Ruins qf an ancient feudal castle. 


1. I suppose you think it is now time to proceed with the history of 
France ; but do not be impatient. It is not right for one who under- 
takes to tell the history of mankind, to speak only of kings and the 
great battles which they fight. We must not forget to consider how 
the people lived, and what they were about while their rulers were 
thus engaged. 

2. If I were only to speak of little king Pepin and Charlemagne, 
and the popes and other rulers, and tell you what they did, you might 
still be ignorant of what their subjects were doing. You might not 
know whether they were happy or unhappy, whether they were in a 
state of poverty or plenty, whether they were in the enjoyment of 
freedom, or suffering the miseries of despotism. 

3. I trust you will therefore excuse me for talking a little about the 
Feudal System, Chivalry, and a few other big words, which it is 
proper you should understand. I have told you that the northern 
tribes of Europe were fond of war, and of a restless, roving character. 

0 War was indeed the chief business of the men. A few of them were 
engaged in agriculture ; but a large portion of them led the lives of 
soldiers, either wholly, or at such times as their services were re- 
quired. 

4. A few were devoted to the building of houses, to the manufac- 
ture of armor, and such other articles as the simple manners of the 

Ch. CXI. — 1. What must not be forgotten? 2. Why must the history of the people not 
© neglected ’ 3, What of the northern tribes of Europe ? What of the men ? 


FRANCE. 


181 


people rendered necessary. But even these artisans occasionally bore 
arms, and went with their countrymen to the field of battle if they 
were needed. 

5. But, as I have said before, the great business of society in these 
times was war; either for defence against the attacks of other tribes, 
or for the purpose of conquering other tribes. The chiefs, or leaders, 
were generally the bravest and strongest men, those who would be 
most likely in a battle of hard blows to insure victory. 

6. When a country was conquered, the lands, towns, cities, gold, 
silver, merchandise, horses, cattle, and all other property belonging 
to the conquered people, were considered the spoils of th>e victors. 
The people who were defeated, were either killed, driven away, or 
reduced to a state of servitude. 

7. Strange as it may seem, this making of war and robbing people 
of their lands and possessions, was not only considered lawful, but it 
was reckoned grand sport. It is true, that the soldiers had often hard 
fare and hard knocks; occasionally they were wounded, and many of 
them were slain. But when the battle was over, those who survived 
celebrated their victory with feasting and drinking, and other amuse- 
ments suited to the tastes of barbarous men. 

8. Between the intervals of fighting, they had mimic battles among 
themselves, or two stout fellows would fight with swords in the pre- 
sence of the whole people. At other times, during a wet day, or a 
dull night, they would prolong their festivities by telling stories of the 
great deeds they had done, or seen, or heard of, or by singing ballads 
of bloodshed and battle. 

9. It frequently happened that some person in the camp had a 
great talent for singing and story-telling ; he therefore would be often 
called upon to exercise his gift. So he would amuse the company 
with wild legends of the chase, in which a king or prince had a terri- 
ble battle with a fierce boar or a rough bear. 

10. Or he would tell of some chief who had performed wonderful 
deeds, or perhaps he would weave some superstitious tale of ghosts 
that walked abroad by moonlight, or of some murdered prince whose 
spirit often came at night to haunt the castle where he once dwelt. 

11. Such were some of the amusements which repaid these barba- 
rians for the toils of war. But these were by no means all. The 
real object of most of the wars among these people was plunder. 
War took the place of trade and commerce among them, and the prin- 
cipal inducement to carry it on was to obtain the lands and the goods 
of other nations. It was, in short, a system of plunder, and the sev- 
eral tribes might be considered as so many bands of robbers. 

12. When a country was conquered, the spoils were distributed 
among the victors according to their rank. The king, or chief, had a 
large share, the inferior chiefs had a smaller share, and the common 
soldiers had still less. The lands were divided in this way ; but it 

5. What was the great business of society in these times ? What of the chiefs ? 6 What 
of a conquered country ? The people ? 7. How were war and robbery considered ? The 
soldiers ? The survivors ? 8. What was done in the intervals of fighting ? 9. What of 
story telling ? 11. What was the real object of war among these ancient nations ? What 

of war ? How might the tribes be considered ? 


182 


SCHOOL HISTORY 


was always understood, that ihose who received the land were after-/ 
wards bound to go and fight whenever called upon by their chiefs. 

13. The lands were not held in those times as they are now among 
as ; each individual did not own a piece of land and build upon it, or 
cultivate it as he liked. But a large tract might belong to the king, 
and a smaller tract might belong to the inferior chiefs or barons. 

14. The king or baron built upon his land an immense strong castle 
of stone ; around it, the people, who were called his vassals or slaves, 
built their little huts. These tilled the land, taking what was neces- 
sary for their own support, but giving the best of every thing to their 
liege lord. 

15. Now what is meant by the Feudal System is this; that the 
vassals of a baron who lived upon his land were bound to do military 
service whenever the baron required it. So also the barons, under 
the Feudal System, were required to do military service, bringing into 
the field all the men they could muster, whenever their king re- 
quired it. 

16. In return for these services, the lord of the manor, or owner of 
the land, was expected to protect his people in time of war ; and as 
the castle was usually large and strong the people fled to it, when- 
ever an enemy appeared in sight. 

17. Here in the castle they would make the best defence in their 
power. Sometimes they would be besieged for months ; but so long 
as the wines lasted, and the stores of provisions held out, the besieged 
inmates of the castle would hold their revels, tell their stories, and 
sing their songs. 


CHAPTER CXIL— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

About Chivalry , or Knight-Errantry . 

1. I hope you now understand how matters and things went on 
among the rude tribes of France, Germany, and most oth^r northern 
countries of Europe, in early times. I hope also you understand what 
is meant by the Feudal System. 

2. If you will reflect a moment you will perceive that Europe at 
this time was divided among a great number of warlike tribes or na- 
tions; each tribe having a king, each king having under him several 
powerful barons, and each baron having a good many vassals. 

3. You will remember, that the kings and barons dwelt in strong 
stone castles, and if you should ever go to Europe, you will see many 
of these still in existence, some of which were built more than a 
thousand years ago. Most of them are in ruins, but they are interest- 

12 . What of the division of spoils? What of lands? 13. How were the lands held in 
these times ? 14. What of a king or baron ? The people or vassals ? 15. What was the 

Feudal System ? What were the vassals and barons required to do ? 16. What was ex 

pected of the lord of the manor ? 17. What of a besieged castle ? Ch. CXII. — 2. Wha 

can you say of Europe in feudal times ? 


FRANCE. 1Q3 

ing on account of the tales and legends of the olden times which are 
connected with them. 

4. It is not certain when the Feudal System commenced, but it ap- 
pears to have been first in use among the German tribes, and was in- 
troduced into France by the Franks, who entered that country 420 
A. D., and who laid the foundation of the French monarchy, about 
486 years after Christ. It continued in full force in the time of Char- 
lemagne, and, for some centuries after, it formed the basis of all the 
political systems of Europe. 

5. Now I must tell you, that among the rough kings and barons 
°f the feudal times, it often happened that private acts of violence 
and injustice took place. Sometimes a powerful baron would come 
suddenly upon a weaker one, seize his castle, and either murder him 
or shut him up in a dungeon. Sometimes one of these barons would 
carry off the beautiful daughter of another king or baron, and take 
her home to his castle. 



A Knight-errant in complete Armor . 


6. Even in these rude times, such things were considered wrong, 
and sometimes a brave warrior, called a knight, would take it upon 
himself to redress these grievances. He would perhaps go and chal- 
lenge the baron, who had been guilty of injustice, to come out and 
fight with him, or in some other way would endeavor to repair the 
injury done. 

7. The people applauded these knights, and cheered them on to 
acts of daring, in the cause of justice and benevolence. Thus, by de- 
grees, their numbers increased, and about the time of the crusades, 
there appear to have been a good many of them. 

3. What must you remember? 4. What of the feudal system? Who introduced it into 
France? When? When was the foundation of the French monarchy laid ? How long 
Jid the feudal system continue ? Of what did it form the basis? 5. What happened in feu- 
dal times? 6. How were such things considered ? What would a knight sometimes do r 
f What of the people Knight*? 


184 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


8. The crusades themselves seemed to establish knight-errantry as 
• regular profession, and from the period 1100 after Christ, we may 
consider it as one of the most remarkable institutions in Europe. 

9. When knight-errantry, or chivalry, had become thus established 
those who belonged to the profession were considered as under a re- 
ligious vow to devote themselves to the cause of justice and humani- 
ty. If any person had suffered an act of injustice, they considered 
themselves bound to set the matter right. If any person was in dis- 
tress, they were under obligation to peril their lives for his relief. 

10. Besides this, the knights were required always to tell the truth, 
and always to perform their promises; they were expected to be full 
of generosity and courage, and never to be guilty of any act of mean- 
ness. They were, in short, expected to devote themselves to the 
cause of humanity, and remedy, as far as in their power, the injustice 
and violence which belonged to the age in which they lived. 

11. Many of these knights spent their whole time in riding about 
the country in search of adventures. These were called knights- 
errant. If, in the course of their travels, they heard of any body in 
distress, they would offer their services for relief. 

12. They were particularly devoted to the cause of ladies who had 
been stolen away, and shut up in castles. In behalf of these, they of- 
ten performed wonderful feats of strength and valor. Sometimes, it is 
true, the knights acted wickedly, but in so doing they violated their 
vows. 


CHAPTER CXIIL— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

More About Chivalry. 

1. If one knight-errant chanced to meet another, they usually went 
to fighting, either for sport or renown. Some of them acquired great 
fame, and a multitude of songs and ballads were composed in celebra- 
tion of their deeds. 

2. The knights were very particular to ride fine, strong horses. 
Some of these are almost as famous in the legends of chivalry, as their 
riders. The knight was powerfully armed, his chief weapon being a 
long pointed lance. Beside this, he had a sword, dagger, battle-axe, 
and mace, which was a heavy sort of club. 

3. In addition to these weapons for attack, he had a defensive armor, 
consisting of a shield of metal, a helmet of steel with a vizor to cover 
his face, a body-harness made of plates of steel, and sometimes a shirt 
of mail consisting of a multitude of iron links, the whole fitting close 


8 . What of the crusades ? When did knight-errantry become a regular profession ? 9 
What of those who belonged to the profession ? 10. What was required and expected of 

the knights? 11. Who were knighls-errant? 12. What did they perform for ladies? 
* ^h. CXIIL— 1. What happened if two knights-errant met? What was done in celebration 
of their deeds ? 2. What of their horses ? How was the knight armed ? 


FRANCE. 185 

to the body. Over all this, the knight wore a long flowing robe, which 
came down to his heels. 

4. The horse also was carefully defended by mail or steel plates. 
His head, chest, and sides were usually covered, and sometimes the 
whole body was shielded by glittering steel. Nothing indeed could 
exceed the care and preparation usually bestowed by the knights in 
training their horses, in selecting their armor, in having it carefully 
fitted, and in keeping it bright. 



A Tournament. 


5. They were also very attentive to their daily exercise, as well to 
preserve their health and acquire strength, as to keep themselves in 
perfect practice. 

6. A knight was always attended by a squire, and sometimes by 
several squires. These attended upon their masters, and were con- 
sidered as learning to become knights themselves. As the institution 
of chivalry advanced, it became a matter of honor to be a knight; and 
therefore most kings, princes, and military leaders, look upon them- 
selves the vows of knighthood. The celebrated leaders of the crusades, 
Richard of England, Godfrey of France, and others were knights. 

7. In after times, there were several orders of knights ; those of each 
order taking upon themselves peculiar vows. Such were the Knights 
of St. John of Jerusalem, the Knights of Malta, the Knights of the 
Cross, Knights Templars, &c. 

8. When society had became somewhat more civilized, it was the 
custom in different parts of Europe to have tilts and tournaments. 
These were occasions of great ceremony, and multitudes of people 


4 . What of the horse’s caparison ? Knight’s armor ? 5. What of exercise? 6. What 

of squires? How was the profession of knighthood consider*, d ? Who were some cele 
brated knights in the crusades ? 7. What can ^ou say of orders of knights ? 4 



186 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


collected together to witness them. They were often splendid beyond 
description. Kings, princes, and fair ladies delighted in these exhibi- 
tions. 

9. They consisted of encounters between celebrated knights, clad 
m complete armor. They took place in some open plain, surrounded 
with tents and pavilions filled with spectators. The victorious knights 
were honored with applause from the people, and with marks of favor 
even from kings and queens. 

10. Such was the institution of chivalry. If I had time, I could 
fill a book with stories of knights. A multitude of tales called 
romances were written in the age of chivalry. These recounted 
the deeds, or pretended deeds of celebrated champions. Some of 
them are very amusing, but they are nearly all filled with incredible 
fables. 

11. Chivalry was at its height from the year 1200 to about J 400. 
From this latter period it rapidly declined, and in the time of Eliza- 
beth of England, that is, about 1600, it had ceased. If there were a 
few tilts and tournaments after this, they were only as relics of an 
age that had passed. 

12. Thus I have told you about the Feudal System, the Crusades, 
and Chivalry ; and I have told you of these things, in connexion with 
the history of France, because the people of that country were largely 
concerned in all these matters. 


CHAPTER CXIV.— EUROPE CONTINUED. 


King Philip and Pope Boniface. Wars of the French 
and English. 


1. I will now go on with my story about France. After Charles 
the Fat, Hugh Capet, and the other kings I have mentioned, there 
were many sovereigns, but I shall pass them over till 1 come to 
Philip the Fair, who began to reign in 1285. He possessed great 
personal beauty, but had many bad qualities of mind and heart. The 
most remarkable event of his reign was a great quarrel with pope 
Boniface. 

2. This potentate was one of the haughtiest popes that ever wore 
a triple crown. He spoke to the sovereigns of Europe as if he were 
sovereign of them all, and king of kings. But Philip the Fair refused 
to acknowledge his authority. Pope Boniface excommunicated king 


8. What of tilts and tournaments ? 9. Describe them. What of the knights ? 10. Whar 

romances? 11. When was chivalry at its height? What of it after 1400? When did 
cease ? 12. Why is the story of the Feudal System, Chivalry, &c. told in connexion with 

the history of France ? Ch. CXIV. — 1. When did Philip the Fair begin to reign? What 
of him ? 


FRANCE. 


187 

Philip for his disobedience, and king Philip called pope Boniface all 
the bad names he could think of. 

3. One day, some of Philip’s friends took pope Boniface prisoner. 
They put him on a horse, without saddle or bridle, and made him 
ride with his face towards the horse’s tail. Nobody could help 
laughing to see what a ridiculous figure was cut by his Holiness. 
But as for poor pope Boniface, he took the joke so much to heart, 
that, together with the loss of his treasures, it actually killed him. 
Philip the Fair survived him several years. 



Philip the Fair. Charles V., called, the Wise. Jane , wife 6f Charles V. 


4. The French have always been a warlike people. They have 
been so often at war with England, that Frenchmen and Englishmen 
used to think themselves born to be each other’s enemies. 

5. On the death of Charles the Fourth, in 1328, Philip of Valois 
became king of France. But Edward the Third, king of England, 
asserted, that he himself was the rightful king of France, because his 
mother was the daughter of Philip the Fair. He undertook to enforce 
his claim by invading France with an English army. 

6. King Edward challenged Philip of Valois to fight him in single 
combat; but Philip preferred to meet him with an army. At the 
bloody battle of Cressy, in France, in 1346, the French lost the 
bravest of their nobles, and thirty thousand men. 

2. What of pope Boniface? What took place between him and Philip the Fair? 3. 
What did Philip do to poor pope Boniface ? What effect had his treatment upon the pope ? 
4. What of the French ? How did the French and Englishmen consider themselves ? ft. 
When did Charles IV. die ? When did Philip of Valois become king? What did Edward 
III. claim 6. What did king Edward do? What of the battle of Cressy 


188 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


7. In 1350, John the Good, son of Philip of Valois, succeeded to the 
throne of France. The country was invaded by an English army 
under the eldest son of Edward the Third. He was called the Black 
Prince, on account of the color of his armor. 

8. King John of France, with sixty thousand men, encountered the 
Black Prince of England, near Poictiers. The Black Prince had only 
eight thousand soldiers. But the English archers and cross-bow men, 
let fly their arrows at the French, and made a dreadful havoc among 
them. King John was taken and kept prisoner four years in London. 

9. John the Good, was succeeded by his son, Charles the Wise. 
King Edward of England had now grown old, and his son, the brave 
Black Prince, was dead. The French therefore got back all the 
territories which the English had won of them, except the town ol 
Calais. 

10. But when Charles the Well-beloved was king of France, the 
English renewed the war. Henry the Fifth, now king of England, 
invaded France. At the battle of Agincourt, he had but fifteen thou- 
sand men, while the French had nearly a hundred thousand. 

1 1. Yet the English gained a glorious victory, with the loss of only 
forty men. On the side of the French, there were seven princes, the 
high constable of France, and ten thousand gentlemen killed, besides 
many prisoners. In 1420, the English king entered Paris in triumph. 

12. But Henry, king of England, died soon afterwards ; and then 
the French began to beat the English. The chief leader of the 
French at this time, was a girl of eighteen, named Joan of Arc, or 
the Maid of Orleans. She was very beautiful. The French believed 
that Heaven had sent her to rescue their country from the English in- 
vaders. The English believed her to be a witch, and that the evil 
one assisted her in fighting against them. 

13. For a considerable time, it was found impossible to withstand 
holy Joan, the Maid of Orleans. She was clad in bright steel armor, 
and rode in front of the French army, on a snow-white horse. In her 
hand, she carried a consecrated banner, on which was painted the 
image of our Saviour. But, at last, she was wounded and taken 
prisoner. The English condemned her to be burnt alive for witch- 
craft. 

14. She was accordingly bound to a stake, in the marketplace of 
Rouen. The English army looked on, rejoicing, while the flames 
roared and whirled around her. When the fire had burned out, 
there remained nothing but ashes and whitened bones of the valiant 
Maid of Orleans. 


7. Who became king in 1350 ? Who was the Black Prince ? 8. Who encountered the 
Black Prince ? Describe the battle of Poictiers : ' 9. Who succeeded John the Good ? 
Why were the French able to win back their territories from the English ? 10. Who was 

the next king of France ? What battle was fought with Henry V. ? 11. Which side won 

the victory? What was the loss of the French? What took place in 1420? 12. What 

happened after the death of Henry V. ? Describe the Maid of Orleans ? What did the 
French and English think of her ? 13. How did she appear at the head of the army ? 14. 

What was her sad fate ? 


FRA NCE. 


189 


CHAPTER CXV. — EUROPE CONTINUED. 

The Reigns of several French Kings 



Murder of Hcmy IV. 

1. But, though the Maid of Orleans was no longer their leader, the 
French were still successful. The English lost nearly all that Henry 
the Fifth had won. The French monarch was called Charles the 
Victorious, on account of his many triumphs. 

2. Yet he was an unhappy king. His son hated him, and attempted 
to kill him by poison. After the discovery of this plot, the poor old 
king was afraid to take food enough to support life, lest he should 
take poison with it. So he wasted away, and died miserably. 

3. His son, Louis the Eleventh, succeeded him in 1461. He was a 
crafty, treacherous, and cruel king. Once, when a nobleman was to 
be beheaded, Louis ordered his infant children to be placed under the 
scaffold, that they might be sprinkled with their father’s blood. 

4. One of the most famous of the French kings, was Francis the 
First, who ascended the throne in 1515. He fought against the 
Swiss, and against the emperor of Germany; but the emperor took 
him prisoner at the battle of Pavia. 

5. There was no war with England during the reign of Francis the 
First ; but he once held an interview with the English king near Ca- 
lais. So much magnificence was displayed on both sides, that the 
place of meeting was called the Field of the Cloth of Gold. 

Ch. CXV. — 1. What of the French people ? The English ? The French king ? 3. 
What of Charles the Victorious? 3. What of Louis XI.? When did Francis I. ascend 
(he throne ? What of him ? Describe the interview at Calais ? 


190 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


6. In 1 560, Charles the Ninth became king of France. He was 
then a boy of ten years old. His reign was disgraced by one of the 
bloodiest scenes in history. It is called the Massacre of St. Bartholo- 
mew. 

7. The Catholics (those who were attac'ied to the pope of Rome) 
had conspired to murder all the Protestants, (those who did not like 
the pope) throughout France. On the night of Saint Bartholomew’s 
day, their wicked project was put in execution. Some writers affirm, 
that a hundred thousand Protestants were murdered. 

8. The king himself sat at one of his palace windows, with a mus- 
ket in his hand, and shot some of the poor wretches. But he was 
soon called to receive the recompense of his crimes. After the mas- 
sacre, he was afflicted with disease, and he died in 1574. 

9. The next king, but one, was Henry the Fourth, who ascended 
the throne in 1 589. He was a good king, a brave warrior, and a gen- 
erous man. His subjects loved him, and the French have always 
been proud of Henry the Fourth. 

10. Yet the affection of his people could not save his life. One 
day he was riding through the streets of Paris in his coach. Seven 
courtiers were with him. Other vehicles were in the way, so that 
the coachman was compelled to stop the horses. The king chose to 
alight. 

11. There was a man near the coach, named Ravaillac. He was 
waiting for a chance to kill the king; and now, seeing him about to 
get out of the coach, he drew a poniard. All the power of France 
could not now be of any avail. The first blow of the poniard wounded 
the king, and the second killed him. 


CHAPTER CXVI.— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

The Reigns of Louis the Grand and his Successor . 

1. The murdered Henry was succeeded by his son, Louis the Thir- 
teenth. The government was chiefly directed by Cardinal Richelieu, 
an ambitious priest. He grew more powerful than the king himself. 

2. The next king was Louis the Fourteenth, whom the French call 
Louis the Grand. He was a very proud and haughty monarch. He 
endeavored to make France the greatest country on earth; not tl at 
he really cared for the welfare of his subjects, but because he wished 
to exalt himself above all other kings. 

3. He had a peculiar manner of walking, which would have been 
ridiculous in a common man, but was thought extremely majestic in 
a king. He used to wear a large curled wig, and nobody ever saw 

6. When did Charles IX. come to the throne ? Describe the massacre of St. R iholo- 
Inew. 8. When did Charles IX. die ? 9. When did Henry IV. come to the throne What 
of him? 11. How did he lose his life? Ch. CXVI. — 1. Who succeeded Het ,1V.? 
What of cardinal Richelieu ? 2. Who was the next king ? What can you say of l 

Grand ? 


FRANCE. 


191 

him without it. He would never pull off his wig till he had got into 
bed and closed the curtains. 

4. This king began to reign at five years old, and reigned no less 
than severity-two years. He was continually at war. In the early 
part of his reign, his armies achieved many splendid victories. 

5. But, in the king’s old age, the English duke of Marlborough 
wasted his troops, and reduced his kingdom to great distress. The 
French people now grew weary of their grand monarch. 

6. And well they n ght be weary of him, for he had taken all their 
money, in order that i i might have the means of going to war. He 
seemed to think it moi necessary that he should have glory, than 
that they should have mead. 



Louis XIV. Maria Theresa, wife of Louis XIV. Louis XV. 


7. At last, in 1715, the old king died. As he had been so grand in 
his lifetime, his courtiers deemed it proper that he should carry as 
much grandeur with him to the tomb as possible. They therefore 
prepared a magnificent funeral. 

8. But wherever the procession passed, the people heaped curses 
on the royal corpse. They hissed so loudly, that, if the king had not 
been stone dead, he would have started up in his coffin. Thus ended 
the glorious reign of Louis the Grand. 

9. All the sons and grandsons of old Louis the Grand had died be- 
fore him. He was therefore succeeded by his great-grandson, a child 
of five years old, who now became Louis the Fifteenth. 

4. What of his wars ? 5. What of the Duke of Marlborough ? 6. What of the French 
people ? 7. When did Louis le Graud die ? Describe the funeral ? 9. Who succeede4 
Louis XIV. ? 


192 


SCHOOL HISTORY 


10. Until the little king should become of age to take the sceptr6 
into his own hands, the duke of Orleans was declared regent of 
France. He was a profligate man. Instead of teaching the young 
king how to make his subjects prosperous and happy, he set him an 
example of all sorts of wickedness. 

11. And Louis the Fifteenth turned out just such a king as might 
have been expected. In his whole reign, of fifty-nine years, he seems 
to have thought of nothing but his own selfish pleasures. 

12. His kingdom was almost ruined and his subjects were starv- 
ing. Put if an earthquake had swallowed France and all its inhabit- 
ants, the king would hardly have cared. The reign of this odious 
monarch prepared the French to hate the very name of monarchy. 
He died in 1774, and was succeeded by his grandson, Louis the Six- 
teenth, who was then a young man of twenty. 

13. Thus by the extravagance of Louis the Fourteenth and the 
profligacy of Louis the Fifteenth, a foundation was laid for what is 
called the French Revolution, of which I shall tell you in the next 
chapter. 

14. I should be very glad to pass by the story of that awful period, 
for I know it can give my reader no pleasure to read of violence and 
bloodshed. But it is necessary to read the dark as well as the bright 
pages of history. 

lo. We may learn from the French revolution how much evil may 
be brought upon a country by bad rulers, and as some of my young 
pupils will hereafter be men, and be called upon to assist in choosing 
rulers, they may be made to feel the duty of choosing good ones. 


CHAPTER CXVII.— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

The French Revolution. 

1. Louis the Sixteenth had no talents which could render him fit 
to govern a nation. But he was a man of good heart, kind disposi- 
tion, and upright intentions. With all his defects, there has seldom 
been a better king ; for, if he was unable to do good, he was unwill- 
ing to do harm. 

2. The king was married to an Austrian archduchess, named Ma- 
rie Antoinette. She had great beauty and accomplishments; but she 
was never a favorite of the French people. 

3. Not long after this king and queen were crowned, the American 
revolution broke out. The United States declared themselves a free 
and independent republic. The people of France took a great inter- 
est in the affairs of America; and they began to think that a repub- 
lic was a better kind of government than a monarchy. 


10. What of the duke of Orleans? H. What of Louis XV. ? 12. When did he die ? 
What of the French Revolution ? Ch. CXVII. — 1. What of Louis XVI.? 2 What of 
Marie Antoinette ? 3. When did the American revolution begin ? What of the French 
people ? 


FRANCE. 


193 

4. They compared the tyranny under which they and their fore- 
fathers had groaned for ages, with the freedom which made the 
Americans so prosperous and happy. The more they reflected upon 
the subject, the more discontented they became with their own con 
dition. 



Louis XVI. Marie Antoinette, wife of Louis XVI. Louis XVIII. 


o. The French are a people whose minds are easily excited, and 
whenever any thinsr remarkable is going on among them, you would 
think that the whole nation was almost mad, or perhaps had been 
drinking too much wine. So it happened in this case. They now 
began to rave against the king, queen, and nobles, the priests, the 
gentlemen, and all others whom they formerly respected. They 
eten blasphemed against Heaven itself. 

6. In 1789, the mob of Paris tore down the Bastile. This was an 
old caswej, where the kings of France had been accustomed to confine 
such of their subjects as offended them. Many a poor wretch had 
been thrown into the dungeons of the Bastile, and never again beheld 
the sunshine. 

7. The destruction of the Bastile was a good thing ; and so like- 
wise were many other of the first movements of the French revolu- 
tion. But when the people had once begun to change their ancient 
government, they knew not where to stop. 

8. It was not long before blood began to flow. No man nor wo- 
man in the kingdom was now safe, unless they wore a red cap upon 
their heads, which was called the cap of liberty. 

5. How do the French appear when any thing remarkable is going on ? 6. Wha‘ was 
done in 1689 r What of the Baslile ? 7. What of the destruction of this old castle? 8. 
W^kt were people obliged to wear upon the ir head* ? 

w 17 


194 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


9. A this period, it was no uncommon thing to see a mob of men 
ana women in the streets of Paris, carrying a bloody head upon a pole. 
And those who looked at the features would perhaps recognise the 
countenance of some great nobleman or beautiful princess. 

10. In a little while longer, there were so many heads to be cutoff, 
„hat the work could not be done fast enough in the ordinary way. It 
was therefore necessary to do it by machinery ; and a horrible instru- 
ment, called the guillotine, was invented for the purpose. 

11. This infernal contrivance was set to work upon the proud no- 
bles, and the holy priesthood, and the beautiful ladies of France. 
Hundreds of their heads fell upon the pavement of Paris, and their 
blood run like a river through the streets. 

12. When many of the loftiest heads in the kingdom had been cut 
off, the people fixed their eyes on the head that wore a crown. “ Off 
with the king’s head too !” cried they. So they dragged the poor, 
harmless king before the national convention, and he was forthwith 
sentenced to the guillotine. 

13. As the poor king mounted the steps of the scaffold, he gazed 
around at the fierce and cruel multitude. It seemed all like a dream, 
that they, his born subjects, should be waiting there to see him die. 
Then he looked at the guillotine, and beheld it stained with the blood 
of the thousand victims who had been dragged thither before him. 

14. He could not yet believe but that his royal blood was precious 
to his people. He lingered, — he was loth to lay down his head, — he 
shivered with the agony of his spirit. There stood a holy priest be- 
side him on the scaffold. Other priests, in those dreadful times, had 
abjured their God ; but here was one who held fast his faith. Other 
subjects had betrayed their king; but here was one who revered him 
most upon the scaffold. 

15. He whispered consolation to the unhappy king, and pointed 
heavenward. The victim mustered his fainting courage, and laid his 
head upon the block. “ Son of saint Louis,” said the priest, “ ascend 
to heaven !” 

16. Down came the axe of the guillotine, and the head that had 
worn a crown was severed from the body ! The blood of a kingly 
race gushed out upon the scaffold. Thus the crimes and misused 
power of many kings had brought vengeance on their innooent de- 
scendant. 


CHAPTER CXVIII.— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

The Rise of Napoleon Bonaparte. 

1. The day of the king’s execution was the 21st of January, 1793 
Not many months afterwards, the queen was likewise beheaded. 


9. What was common in Paris at this time ? 10. Why was the guillotine invented ? 11. 

What u9e w'*»»nade of it? 13. Describe the execution of Louis XVI. 


FRANCE. 


195 


France was now ruled by a succession of bloody mon«tcts, who, one 
day, were sending crowds to the guillotine, and, the next day, were 
sent thither themselves. This anarchy was what the French called 
a Republic. 

2. In the mean time, war was breaking out on all sides. Austria, 
Prussia, England, Holland. Spain, and Russia sent armies against 
France. The French raised a million of men, and bade defiance t* 
all Europe. 



3. In the French army, there was a young lieutenant of artillery, 
named Napoleon Bonaparte. When the war began, he was an un 
known and friendless youth. But he distinguished himself in everj 
battle and every siege, till, in a very few years, the whole world had 
heard of Bonaparte. 

4. When he was only twenti «ix years old, he conquered Italy. 
The next year he compelled the emperor of Austria to make peace. 
In 1798, he invaded Egypt, and fought many battles in the sandy 
deserts, and among the pyramids. 

5. The French were now tired of being governed by men whose 
only engine of government was the guillotine. They wanted a ruler 
who would deserve their obedience by his sagacity and energy, and 
not merely compel them to obedience by the fear of having their 
heads cut off. 

6. Napoleon Bonaparte was such a man. He was not a good man, 
nor a truly wise one. He was a selfish and ambitious despot. But, 
perhaps he was a more suitable ruler for such a people as the French, 
than if he had been a different man. 

Ch. CXVIII. — 1. When was Louis XVI. beheaded ? Describe the French republic f 
2- What countries now went to war with France ? 3. What of Napoleon Bonaparte ? 4. 
What acts did Napoleon perform ? 6. What of the French people at this time ? 6, What 
of Napoleo* ? 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


196 

7. He saw that the French were now so excited, that it would be 
difficult, perhaps impossible, to restrain them. He thought it better 
that they should make war on foreigners than slaughter each other, 
and with the sword rather than the guillotine. So, partly because 
ne could not help it, but chiefly because he was ambitious, Napoleon 
Bonaparte became a mighty conqueror. 


CHAPTER CXIX.— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

The Fall of Bonaparte . 



The Burning qf Moscow. 


1. In 1802, Bonaparte was elected consul of the French republic, 
for life. Two years afterwards he was proclaimed emperor, by the 
name of Napoleon. He had now more power than any of the ancient 
kings. 

2. I cannot follow this great general in his marches all oveT 
Europe, nor even number the victories which he won. Wherever 
he went, monarchs humbled themselves before him. He drove them 
from their thrones, and placed his own brothers and chief officers 
there instead. He gave away royal diadems like playthings. He 

' was called the Man of Destiny, because fate seemed to have ordained 
that he should always be victorious. 

3. But, in 1812, the spell of his success began to be broken. He 
invaied Russia with a vast army, and penetrated to the city of Mos- 


7. What were his thoughts upon the French ? What did he become ? Ch. CXIX.— 
1. What were the titles of Napoleon ? 2. What happened wherever he wen.. ? Wha. 
w»« he called ? 


FRANCE. 197 

cow. The Russians set the city on fire. Winter was coming on, 
and the French soldiers had nowhere to shelter themselves. 

4. They retreated towards Poland. On their way thither, they 
fought many battles with the Russians, and the weather was so bitter 
cold, that the bodies of the slain were frozen stiff. The snow was 
crimsoned with their blood. 

5. Before they reached the frontiers of Poland, three-fourths of the 
army were destroyed. The emperor Napoleon fled homeward in a 
sledge, and returned to Paris. He soon raised new armies, and wa> 
ready to take the field again. 

6. But all the nations of Europe were now allied against him, and 
after a few more battles, he was driven from Germany into France. 
The enemy followed him. They compelled him to surrender the 
imperial crown of France in exchange for the sovereignty of the little 
.sland of Elba, in the Mediterranean. 

7. Napoleon went to Elba, and remained there almost a year. But 
in March, 1815, he suddenly landed again on the French coast. He 
was almost alone when he set his foot on the shore. But there were 
a multitude of his grim old veterans throughout the country. These 
shouted for joy, and trampled on the white flag of the Bourbon kings, 
who had succeeded him. In a few days, Napoleon’s banner again 
waved triumphant all over France. 

8. The nations of Europe now mustered their armies once more. 
They were led by the English Duke of Wellington. Napoleon 
marched into Flanders, or Belgium, to meet them. He was followed 
by almost every young Frenchman that could shoulder a musket. 

9. The emperor Napoleon’s last battle was fought at Waterloo, on 
the 18th of June, 1815. There he was utterly overthrown, and 
France was overthrown with him. The warlike emperor was sent 
to die on the Island of St. Helena, and the Bourbon king was again 
established on the throne of Louis the Sixteenth. 

10. But a strange and interesting scene has lately been witnessed 
in France relating to Napoleon. The French people did not like to 
think that the remains of Napoleon were far away upon the rock of 
St. Helena. So in 1840, Louis Philippe, king of the French, sent his 
son in a national ship, and he brought the body of the late emperor 
back to France. 

11. The people received the body with military honors, and many 
of Napoleon’s old soldiers and officers, rushed to the side of the coffin, 
and wept over it as if he had been their father. With vast ceremony 
the body was taken to Paris, and there it is now interred, in the 
famous edifice called the Hotel of Invalids. 

8. What happened in 1812? What of the French army ? 5. What of Napoleca? 6. 
What happened to him ? 7. How long did Napoleon remain at Elba ? What of him in 
1815? Describe his landing in France? 8. Who led the nations of Europe ? What did 
Napoleon do? Who followed him ? 9. When was the battle of Waterloo fought ? Fate 
of Napoleon ? 10. What has lately been witnessed in France ? 

17* 


m 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 




CHAPTER CXX.— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

Recent Affairs of France. 

1. Louis the Eighteenth, the new king of France, was a fat, quiet, 
respectable sort of old gentleman, and seems to have been chiefly 
distinguished for his love of oysters. He died in 1824, and was suc- 
ceeded by his brother, Charles the Tenth. 

2. It was said of all the Bourbon family, that they had learnt 
nothing during their exile from France, nor forgotten anything. And 
Charles soon proved that he had not forgotten that his ancestors had 
exercised absolute power, nor learnt that such power is very danger- 
ous to possess or exercise. 

3. In 1830, when Charles the Tenth had sat on the throne about 
six years, he forbade the printing of any newspapers, except such as 
praised his conduct and government. 

4. The mob of Paris immediately rose, and began a war against 
the royal troops. They beat out the brains of the king’s soldiers with 
paving stones, and shot them from the windows of the houses. The 
old king, who had not forgotten the days of the revolution, began to 
tremble for his head. 

5. In order to keep it on his shoulders, he took off his golden 
crown, and put it on the head of his grandson. But the French 
would not acknowledge the little fellow for their king. They raised 
large armies, and drove Charles the Tenth and his family out of the 
kingdom. 

6. They then asked the good and glorious La Fayette, (the man 
who came and fought with our countrymen in the time of the Revo- 
lution,) what sort of a government they should have. He would 
have chosen a republic, like our own ; but he knew that his country- 
men were not like us. 

7. He therefore told them, 'hat the government must be a limited 
monarchy, and that Louis Philippe, the Duke of Orleans, must be 
their king. Louis Phillippe was accordingly raised to the throne. 

8. He went on prosperously for a time, and was considered the 
most successful sovereign oi the age. But in February 1848, a 
revolution broke out in Paris, which extended over France. 

9. In December 1848, Louis Napoleon Bonaparte (a nephew of 
the emperor Napoleon) was elected President. He assumed the 
duties of the office immediately, thus becoming the first President 
of the ReDublic of France. 

Ch. CXX. — l. What of Louis XVIII. ? When did he die ? 2. What was said of the 
Bourbon family ? What did Charles prove ? 3. What took place in 1830 ? 4. What o( 
the mob of Paris? 5. What did the old king do? 6. What did the French ask La Favette J 
7. What did he tell them ? Who was im.de king ? What has since occurred ? 


GERMANY. 


199 


CHAPTER CXXL— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

About Germany. 

1. Germany lies to the east of France, and contains no less than 
thirty-six different kingdoms and states, beside Austria and Prussia, 
which are sometimes considered as making a part of Germany, and 
of which I shall tell you by and by. These thirty-six states and king- 
doms contain about twelve millions of inhabitants. 

2. Some of the principal kingdoms of Germany are Bavaria, Wur- 
temburg, Hanover, and Saxony. They are nearly all governed by a 
king, or grand duke, or prince of some kind ; yet they are leagued to- 
gether under a sort of congress, called a diet, which meets at Frank- 
fort. To this diet the states send deputies. 

3. There are a great many large towns and cities in Germany. 
Among these, the principal are Hamburgh, which carries on a good 
deal of commerce with this country ; Munich, which is a very splen- 
did city ; Carlesruhe, which has its streets arranged like the sticks of 
an open fan ; Dresden, which is famous for the beautiful country 
arpund it, and Frankfort, which is encircled by a belt of fine gardens 
and public walks. 

4. I could easily write a book about Germany, for it is full of curi- 
ous and interesting things. In the cities there are a great many 
churches, in the Gothic style, which excite the wonder and admira- 
tion of a traveller, on account of their grandeur, and the skill with 
which many parts of them are carved. 

5. In many of the towns there are very curious manufactures, par- 
ticularly of musical boxes, toys for children, and clocks of all kinds. 
The Germans are very ingenious in these matters, and sometimes 
they make clocks so cunningly contrived, that at every hour a little 
bird will come out, flutter his wings, and sing a song, or perhaps tell 
you the time of day. 

6. If you ever travel in Germany, you will find that the people are 
very fond of music. All the boys and girls are taught music as a part 
of their education. Most of them can play upon some instrument. 
The flute is a great favorite, and is called the German flute, either 
because it was invented in Germany, or because it is more in use 
amongst the Germans than elsewhere. 

7. In passing through Germany, you will often notice the ruins of 
castles, some of which were built a thousand or twelve hundred years 
ago. These belonged to the barons who occupied the country in the 
old feudal times, of which I have told you in the history of France. 

Ch. CXXI. — 1. Where is Germany and what does it contain ? Population of the thirty 
six states and kingdoms ? 2. What are some of the principal kingdoms of Germany ? How 

are they governed ? How are they united ? Where does the diet meet ? What do the 
States send to this diet? 3. Describe some of the principal cities of Germany. 4. What 
of churches? 5. What are some of the manufactures? 6. What of Music? The flute? 
1 What of old castles ? 


200 


SCHOOL IIISTORl. 


CHAPTER CXXII. -EUROPE CONTINUED. 

About the ancient Tribes of Germany , Charlemagne, See 

1. In ancient days, Germany, as I have told you, was inhabited br 
uumerous tribes of barbarians. Among these were the Goths, Visi 
goths, Vandals, Suevi, Cimbri, Teutones, Heruli, Alemanni, and many 
others. As there was no Peter Parley among them to write their his* 
tory in early times, we know little or nothing of them till two or three 
hundred years before Christ. 

2. At this time they were numerous, but they were mere savages. 
They were clothed in the skins of wild beasts, and seemed to delight 
only in war and plunder. In the time of Caesar, they were very pow- 
erful, but that famous conqueror marched against them, and, after 
many bloody battles, they were reduced to submission. 

3. I have already told you that wherever the Romans extended 
their arms, they carried their arts. Thus the rude tribes of Germany 
became partially civilized ; many of the people exchanged their skins 
of beasts for the Roman toga or gown. They also learnt how to 
make better weapons of war, how to build better houses, and how to 
live more comfortably. 

4. But you remember, that four or five hundred years after Caesar, 
poor old Rome was tottering to decay. It was therefore unable to 
keep these restless tribes of the north in subjection ; nay, Rome was 
now incapable even of defending herself. 

5. The Germans soon discovered how matters stood. They saw 
that in Spain, Italy, and Greece, there were a great many rich cities, 
and pleasant towns, and fruitful valleys. They saw that in these 
countries the Romans had collected the wealth of the whole world, 
and these shrewd barbarians thought it would be a good speculation 
to go to these countries and live there. 

6. They thought it would be much better to go and live in palaces 
and fine houses, and have a plenty of wine, and plenty of gold, silver, 
and jewels, than to live in their own less fruitful country, and earn 
their bread by toil, or by plundering each other. 

7. Accordingly, some of them set out under their daring leaders, 
and marched into Italy. Others soon followed ; and in the course of 
a few years, these hordes had settled like swarms of bees in all the 
southern countries of Europe. 

8. But still many remained behind in Germany, and thus increased, 
so that in the time of Charlemagne they were numerous and power- 
ful. But he conquered them, as I have said in the history of France. 

Ch. CXXII. — 1. How was Germany anciently inhabited? Mention some of the barba 
rian tribes. 2. What of them in ancient times? In the time of Caesar? 3. What of th* 
arts of the Romans ? How did the rude tribes become partly civilized ? WiiAt did the) 
do? 4. What of Rome several hundred years after Caesar? 6. W'hat did the Germai# 
soon discover ? 6. What did they think ? 7. What did some of them do ? Whai hap 
pened in a few years ? 


GERMANY. 


201 


Thus, having made himself master of Germany, he became its empe- 
ror, and resided there. You will recollect, that his empire included 
France, Germany, and many other countries. 

9. The empire of Germany, thus established, was, however, com- 
posed of many separate sovereignties, each of which had its own 
ruler. In the year 912, it became the custom for these rulers to make 
choice of one of their number, and declare him emperor. He then pre- 
sided over the whole of Germany. Thus Germany was what is 
called an elective monarchy, and so it continued, even so late as the 
year 1806. 

10. In 1056, Henry the Fourth was emperor. He had a sharp quar- 
rel with pope Gregory the Seventh. The pope’s power was so great, 
that he compelled the emperor to come to Italy to ask his pardon. 

11. When Henry arrived at the gate of the pope’s palace, the 
weather was exceedingly cold, and there was snow on the ground. 
Pope Gregory was sitting by a comfortable fire. He sent the empe- 
ror word that he would have nothing to say to him, till he had stood 
three whole days barefooted in the snow, without tasting a moutnful 
of food. 

12. This penance the poor emperor was compelled to undergo. On 
the fourth day, pope Gregory gave him absolution for his sins, and al- 
lowed him to warm himself and eat his dinner. 

13. Another emperor, also named Henry, who reigned about a 
hundred years afterwards, quarrelled with pope Celestinus. In order 
to make peace, he was persuaded to kneel down and kiss the pope’s 
toe. Put no sooner had his lips touched the toe, than pope Celestinus 
drew back his foot, and hit the emperor’s crown a kick, which sent 
it half way across the room. 

14. In 1273, Rodolph of Hapsburgh, a native of Switzerland, was 
elected emperor of Germany. He was the ancestor of the present 
sovereigns of Austria. Most of the German emperors, since his reign, 
have been his descendants. 


CHAPTER CXXIII.— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

Affairs of Switzerland. 

1. Until the year 1307, Switzerland was under the government of 
Germany. Switzerland, as you know, is a mountainous little coun- 
try, which is hemmed in between Germany, France, and Italy. 

2. As I have many kind wishes for my young readers, 1 hope it may 
be their pleasant fortune some day or other to visit Switzerland 

8. What of the barbarians that remained in Germany ? What of Charlemagne ? Wha 
did his empire include ? 9. What of the sovereignties of Germany ? What was the cus 
tom in 912 ? What of the emperor ? What was the government of Germany ? 10. When 

was Henry IV. emperor ? What of the pope ? 1 1. What of the penance laid by the pope 

upon the king ? 13. Relate the anecdote of Henry and pope Celestinus. 14. Who was 

king of Germany in 1273? What of him? Ch. CXXIII.— 1. What of the government of 
Switzerland? Where is Switzerland ? 


202 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


When you go there, you will find good roads, but I advise you to tra- 
vel on foot. There are so many pleasant things to see, so many tall 
mountains looking like white clouds up in the sky, so many little 
blue lakes, seeming like mirrors, encircled with frames made of hills, 
many bright green valleys, so many old ruinous castles, in short, 
so many interesting things to see, that you will be stopping every 
moment, and a carriage would therefore be a great trouble. 



Chamois. 


3. 1 have been over this country myself, and I went on foot. Swit- 
zerland seemed to me like a little world of itself. Every thing was 
strange, but still interesting. Among such wild mountains, you would 
perh'aps expect to meet with a Avild and fierce people. Yet the Swiss 
are a gentle and honest race. I should like to visit the country again, 
but my old limbs will never more toil up and down those hills. 

4. But I must now proceed with my brief account of the history of 
Switzerland. When Albert the First h ?came Emperor, in 1298, he 
acted like a tyrant towards Switzerland. He appointed governors, 
who were worse tyrants than himself. One of them, named Gesler, 
set his cap upon a pole, and ordered all the people to bow down to it. 

5. The famous peasant, William Tell, would not bow down to 
Gesler’s cap. My readers have heard the story, how Gesler com- 
manded Tell to shoot at an apple on his own son’s head, and how 
Tell hit the apple without hurting his son. 

6. When the Swiss rebelled against the emperor of Germany, Teil 
was their principal leader. After sixty pitched battles with the em- 
peror’s troops, the liberty of Switzerland was established, and it be- 
came a free and independent republic. 


2. Describe the appearance of the country there. 3. What of the people ? 4. What ol 
Alberti.? What of Gesler ? 5. What of William Tell? 6. How did Switzerland ob • 
tain her liberty ? 


X 


GERMANY. 


203 


7. It is said, that some of the Swiss still believe that William Tell 
is not yet dead, though it is nearly five hundred years since he was 
seen on earth. They suppose, that he lies asleep in a cavern near 
the lake of Lucerne, with two other men who assisted in founding 
die public. 



8. These three slumberers are called the Men of Grutle. If ever 
Switzerland shall be enslaved, it is fancied that they will start from 
their sleep, and come forth with their ancient garb and weapons, and 
rouse up the people to fight for their freedom. 

9. Since the time of William Tell, who died in the year 1534, 
Switzerland has generally been a fine country. But during the French 
revolution it was conquered ; it has since been restored to independ- 
ence, yet the people are overawed by the kings that reign in the 
neighboring countries. 

12. Many of the Swiss leave their beautiful, but poor country, to 
seek their fortunes in other lands. Some enter foreign armies as sol- 
diers, and some go to Paris and London, to sing songs, or carry about 
shows, and thus get a little money. You often find a Swiss boy in 
the streets of these great cities, doing what he can to get a living. 


CHAPTER CXXIV.— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

Sequel of German History. 

I. I will now proceed with the history of Germany. Charles the 
Fifth was the most renowned of the emperors of Germany. He was 
likewise king of Spain, and ruler of the Netherlands, and part of Italy. 

7. What legend have the Swiss concerning William Tell and his two companions ? 9, 
When did Tell die ? What of Switzerland since the time of Tell ? 10. What of the S wis* 
people ? Civ CXXIV.— 1. What of Charles V. ? 



204 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


2. When this great potentate was fifty-seven years old, he grew 
weary of pomp and power. He therefore took off his crown, and 
gave it to his son Philip, and went to live in a monastery in Estra- 
madura, in Spain. He dressed very plainly, and busied himself in 
saying his prayers and working in a garden. 

3. One day, he wrapped himself in a shroud and lay down in a cof- 
fin, stretching himself out as if he were dead. He then ordered his 
attendants to carry him to the tomb. The reader must not suppose 
that the emperor meant to be buried alive. He merely wished to re- 
mind himself that his life must soon close. But die ceremony has- 
tened his end ; for it brought on a fever, of which he died, in 1588. 

4. Ferdinand the Second, who began to reign in 1619, was called 
by the Catholics the Apostolic emperor, because he was a bitter per- 
secutor of the Protestant inhabitants of Germany. His cruelties 
forced them to ask the aid of the Swedish king, Gustavus Adolphus, 
who accordingly invaded Germany, and gained many victories. 

5. The subsequent history of Germany does not abound with the 
sort of events which my young readers would be desirous of knowing. 
Few or none of the later emperors performed any remarkable actions. 
But they appear to have been better than most sovereigns, for they 
cannot be accused of great crimes. 

6. The emperor of Germany, as I have mentioned above, was gen- 
erally a prince of the Hapsburgh family. The kingdom of Austria 
was enlarged by the successive emperors, and finally became great 
and powerful. 

7. It was now able to carry on war by itself, and was at different 
times engaged in struggles with Turkey, with France and Spain, with 
Prussia, and sometimes with several of the sovereign states of Ger- 
many. 

8. In 1792, Francis the Second became emperor of Germany. He 
undertook a war against Napoleon Bonaparte, but his armies were 
routed, and, in 1S06, he was compelled to resign the title of emperor 
of Germany. He was afterwards called emperor of Austria. His 
empire at the time of his death, which took place in 1836, was one 
of the most powerful sovereignties of Europe, and deserves a seperate 
chapter. 

9. There is now no German emperor. The seperate states and 
kingdoms and governed by their own sovereigns and their own laws. 
After the revolution in France in February 1848, great agitation 
took place in several of the German states. The general diet now 
consists of members chosen by general suffrage, and there is a free 
press throughout Germany. Most of the kings have been compelled 
to give charters to the people. 

2. Relate an anecdote of him. 3. When did Charles V. die ? 4. When did Ferdinand II 
begin to reign? What of him? What were the Protestants forced to do? 6. What o r 
the late emperors of Germany? 6. What of the emperor of Germany ? Kingdom of Atis 
tria? 7. With what countries has Austria waged war? 8. Who became emperor of Ger 
many in 1792? What took place in 1806? What of the Austrian Empire ? 


AUSTRIA. 


205 


CHAPTER CXXV.— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

About Austria , Hungary, See. 



1. Austria is an extensive and powerful empire, lying south of 
Russia and Poland, and north of Turkey. On the west it is bounded 
by the German States, Switzerland, and Italy. 

2. Austria formerly belonged to Germany, and is still considered as 
belonging to it. But of late years other countries have been added to 
it which do not belong to Germany. It now includes Hungary, Bo- 
hemia, a part of Poland, a part of Italy, and many other states which 
were formerly independent. Its present population is about thirty-two 
millions, including all these places. 

3. Vienna is the capital of the German part of Austria, and is one 
of the most splendid cities in Europe. It is situated on the Danube, 
which is a large river. In winter, this is frozen over, and the people 
amuse themselves by sliding, skating, and driving upon it with vari- 
ous kinds of sledges or sleighs. The scene presented at such a time 
is very gay and pleasant. 

4. In summer, the inhabitants resort to the public gardens, which 
are extensive and beautiful. Here are fine walks, where you may 
see people of all kinds. There are ladies and gentlemen taking the 
air, boys and girls scampering about, men with monkeys taught to 
dance, and a multitude of curious sports. The gentlemen of Austria 
are much addicted to hunting wild boars, which are common in that 
country. 

5. In the German part of Austria which is the eastern portion, the 
inhabitants speak the German language, and have the manners and 

Ch. CXXV. — 1. Where does Austria lie ? Its boundaries? 2. To what does Austria 
belong? What does it now include? 3. What of Vienna? What of the Danube* 
Amusement* •’ 4. What of the oublic gardens ? 

18 


206 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


customs of Germany. The history of this country has been partly 
told. In early times it was occupied by tribes of barbarians. At a 
later period it formed one of the states of the German empire. 

6. At this time it was called an archduchy, and was governed by 
an archduke, who was, however, subject to the emperor. Rodolph of 
Hapsburgh succeeded to the government of the empire in 1273, as I 
have told you, and from him the sovereigns of Austria have since de- 
scended. After his time, Austria rapidly increased in power, and its 
archduke was at length considered as of course the emperor of all 
Germany. 

7. It has since been engaged in many wars, particularly with Swe- 
den, Turkey, and France. In 1688, the Turks pushed their arms in 
to the heart of the empire, and laid siege to Vienna, but were finally 
driven back. 

8. In 1809, Austria was involved in a war with Bonaparte. She 
had well trained soldiers and able generals, but the French emperor 
beat them in several pitched battles, and finally entered Vienna. Here 
he made peace with the emperor, but took from him a large portion 
of his dominions. 

9. These, however, were afterwards restored, and at the present 
day, Austria may be considered as one of the leading kingdoms of 
Europe. It is a curious fact, that the emperors of Austria have had 
a great many beautiful daughters. Many of these have been married 
to the kings and princes of Europe, and it is owing to this, more than 
to success in war, that Austria has been able to acquire its vast pos- 
sessions, and extensive dominions. 


CHAPTER CXXVI. — EUROPE CONTINUED. 

About Hungary , Bohemia , the Tyrol , Sf c. 

1. I must now give you a very brief account of some of the depend- 
encies of Austria. Hungary is an extensive country, and includes 
several provinces. Buda, the capital, is a fine city, situated upon the 
Danube. 

2. The climate of Hungary is pleasant and the soil yields very fine 
grapes, of which some choice wines are made. The mountains af- 
ford considerable quantities of gold and silver. The inhabitants are 
divided into two classes, the rich and the poor. The former live in 
splendid palaces, and the latter are but little better than their slaves. 

3. The original inhabitants of Hungary consisted of several fierce 
tribes, who appear to have come from Asia into Europe at a very early 


5. What of the German part of Austria ? What of it in ancient times ? At a later period ? 
6. What was it called at this time? Who succeeded to the crown in 1273? What of 
Austria and its archduke ? 7. What of the wars of Austria ? What happened in 1638 ? 8. 
What happened in 1809? What did Bonaparte do? 9. How may Austria be considered 
at the present day ? What is a curious fact? Ch. CXXVI.— 1. What of Hung? ry ? IU 
capital ? 2. Climate and soil of Hungary ? Mountains ? Inhabitants ? 


BOHEMIA. 


207 


date, by crossing the Altai Mountains. They probably resembled 
those Tartar tribes, called Turks, who fell upon the Saracen empire, 
and established the empire of Turkey.. 



Bohemian Gypseys. 


4. The principal of the Hungarian tribes were called Huns. An 
army of these, you will recollect, was led into Italy by the fierce and 
bloody Attila, about 450. He had already fought many battles, and 
made the Greek empire a tributary. He now crossed the Alps, and 
pouring down upon the plains of Italy, spread terror and desolation 
among the inhabitants. Pie approached the city of Rome, but was 
compelled to retire. He died in 451. 

5. For many years Hungary was the scene of perpetual wars. Its 
rulers did not acquire the title of king till the time of Stephen, who 
died in 1038, after a reign of forty-seven years. In 1563, Hungary 
became attached to the Austrian empire, and continues so to the pre- 
sent day. 

6. Bohemia is a country surrounded by mountains, containing about 
four millions of inhabitants. It is rich in mines of silver, tin, and 
precious stones. Many of the present inhabitants are Jews. There 
are also a great many of those strange, wandering people, called 
Gypseys. 

7. This country derives its name from a tribe of Celts from Asia, 
who settled there about 600 years B. C. About 450 after Christ, it 
appears, that the Celts had been driven out, for the people at that 
time were Germans, under the government of a duke. Charlemagne 
rendered the country tributary, but it afterwards became a kingdom. 


3. What of the original inhabitants ? Their origin ? Whom did they probably resetn 
ble ? 4. What of,the Huns? What of Attila? Where did he die p 5. What of Hunga 
ry for many years ? What of Stephen ? What took place in 1663 ? 6. What of Bohemia'’ 
Population? Mines? Inhabitants? 


208 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


In 1526, it was attached to the house of Austria, and has continued 
so from that day. 

8. 1 need not proceed to tell you more about the provinces belong- 
ing to the empire of Austria. I have already given you some account 
of Venice, and if I had room, I could tell you of the brave Tyrolese, 
who live in the mountains between Italy and Germany, and many 
other tribes under the government of Austria. 

9. But can only add that great political agitation has lately taken 
place in Austria, and it is probable that important changes will soon 
take place in the empire. 


CHAPTER CXXVII.— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

About Prussia. 

1. There are five great powers in Europe. Great Britain, France, 
Russia, Austria, and Prussia. Of these Prussia is the smallest, that 
is, it has the fewest people, the least wealth, the smallest number ot 
soldiers, and therefore the least power. Yet it is still an extensive 
country, and has about as many inhabitants as the United States. 

2. The kingdom of Prussia censists of two seperate tracts of terri- 
tory. The larger of the two is bounded north by the Baltic, east by 
Russia, south by Austria, and west by Germany. The smaller por- 
tion is a part of Germany, and is bounded on the north and east by the 
Netherlands and Belgium. 

3. The capital of Prussia is Berlin, situated on the river Spree, a 
river, by the way, with a very merry name. It is, however, a sober 
stream. The city is twelve miles in circumference, and is surrounded 
by a wall. It has a splendid palace, where the king resides, a fine 
university, where a great many young men are educated, and several 
places of public amusement. It is, on the whole, one of most splen- 
did cities in Europe. 

4. Beside Berlin, there are many other fine cities in Prussia. Among 
these are Potsdam, where there is a royal palace, and Dantzic, a 
wealthy town and the chief seaport of Prussia. At this place, there 
is a powerful fortress, with immense stone walls and a multitude of 
cannon. It is defended by a large number of soldiers, who always 
remain in it. 

5. The inhabitants of Prussia are chiefly of German origin, and 
speak the German language. These are industrious, and a multitude 
of schools having been established by the emperor among them, they 

7. What of a tribe of Celts? Who occupied the country in 450? What of Charle- 
magne? What took place in 1526? 8. Where do the Tyrolese live ? Ch. CXXVII,— 
1. What are the five great powers of Europe? Which is the smallest? What of it 5 It* 
inhabitants? 2. How is the kingdom of Prussia divided ? Bound the two portions : r ? 
Capital of Prussia ? River Spree ? What of the city ? 4. W'hat of Potsdam ? Dantzic t 
Wf> at of the fortress J 


PRUSSIA. 209 

are tolerably well educated. But they are not a free people ; and 
without freedom even education cannot make a nation happy. 

6. Beside the German population, Prussia has a good many Jews. 
There are also the remains of tribes that settled in the country long 
ago, who speak their original languages. These people are generally 
ignorant, and appear unwilling to be taught. 


CHAPTER CXXVIIL— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

History of Prussia. 

1- Prussia did not become a kingdom till the year 1701. Previous 
to that time it was governed by dukes. Its ancient inhabitants were 
called Borussi, from whom the country took the name of Prussia. 

2. Frederic William the First, who ascended the throne in 1713, 
was a very odd sort of a king. He used to wear an old blue coat, 
which was ornamented with rows of copper buttons, reaching from 
his chin half-way down his legs. Whenever he got a new coat, he 
made the tailor sew on these same old copper buttons. 

3. He prided himself greatly on a regiment of his guards, which 
consisted of very tall men, many of whom were seven feet high. 
These gigantic fellows came from all parts of Europe ; and if they 
would not come of their own accord, the king hired people to bring 
them by force. 

4. Frederic William was in the habbit of walking about the streets 
of Berlin, with a big cane in his hand, and if he happened to see any 
idle people, he would give them a sound threshing. He beat his own 
son oftener than anybody else. The princess, his daughter, got like- 
wise a good many hard knocks. 

5. When this ill-tempered old king was dead, his son Frederic 
came into possession of an enormous quantity of treasure, as well as 
an army of sixty thousand men. He soon found uses enough for his 
money and soldiers, in a war with Austria, Russia, and France. 

6. The war between Prussia and these three kingdoms began in 
1756, and was called the Seven Years’ War. Saxony and Sweden 
joined the enemies of Frederic. At one time, he seemed on the point 
of losing all his dominions. But he finally brought the war to an 
honorable close. He was then the most celebrated sovereign of his 
time, and is known in history by the title of Frederic the Great. 

7. He was almost as peculiar in his dress as his father had been. 
He always wore a uniform, consisting of a blue coat faced with 
red, and a yellow waistcoat and breeches. But his clothes were 


5. What of the inhabitants of Prussia ? Schools? Of what blessing are the people in 
want? 6. What of the Jews? Ancient tribes? Ch. CXXVIII. — 1. When did Prussia 
become a kingdom ? How was it previously governed ? Its ancient inhabitants ? 2. W hat 
of Frederic William I. ? When did he ascend the throne ? Give an account of him ? 5. 
Who succeeded him ? In what wars did he engage ? 6. What war began in 1756 ? What 
Kingdoms joined the enemies of Frederic? What was he called? 

o 18* 


210 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


often tom, and generally soiled with snuff. On his head was a very 
large cocked hat, and he wore a long cue behind. 

8. When Frederic the great was grown an old man, he used to 
sit in an easy chair, wrapped in a large cloak. He appeared to 
take no pleasure in his palace nor in all the pomp and power of his 
kingdom. 

9. He looked very sad and wobegone, and might be heard mut- 
tering to himself: — “ A little while longer, and I shall be gone ,n 
He died in 1786, at the age of seventy-five. 

10. He was succeeded by his nephew, Frederic William the 
Second, who reigned eleven years. The next king was Frederic 
William the Third. He had a large army, and thought himself 
powerful enough to withstand the emperor Napoleon. 

LI. But at the battle of Jena, in 1806, Napoleon wasted the 
Prussian army, and killed or wounded twenty thousand men. About 
forty thousand were taken prisoners. Frederic William was then 
deprived of a great part oi his territories. 

12. After the battle of Waterloo, and the final defeat of Napoleon, 
the losses of Prussia were repaired. Frederic William has shown 
himself a well-meaning man. He declared, that there should be a 
Bible in every cottage in his kingdom, and I believe he has tried to 
keep his word. 

13. He has taken more pains than any other king that ever lived 
to have all the children sent to school ; and the good state of educa- 
tion in the country is owing to his efforts. 

14. But unhappily the government was despotic, and the king 
refusing to give liberty to his people, they have recently (1848) 
rebelled, and much bloodshed and confusion have followed. A charter 
and free press have been granted, but affairs are still unsettled. 


CHAPTER CXXIX.— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

Description of Russia. 

1. The Russian empire, like that of Turkey, lies partly in Europe 
and partly in Asia. The whole of the northern part of Asia belongs 
to Russia. This is thinly scattered over with a great number of differ- 
ent tribes, who chiefly wander about from place to place in search of 
food for their cattle. 

2. Siberia is a name given to nearly all the northern part of Asia. 
It is a bleak, cold region, and almost makes one shiver to think of it. 
The people are poor, and dress in the skins of wild animals, and for 
the most part live in poor huts. It is to this country of winter and 

7 What was the dress of Frederic the Great? What of him when he had grown 
old? 9. When did he die? 10. What two kings succeeded him? What of Frederic 
William III. ? 11. What took place at the battle of Jena? What of the Prussian king 

12. What took place after the battle of Waterloo ? What else can you say of this king 
Ch. CXXIX. — 1. What of the Russian empire ? What of northern Asia ? Tribe! 


RUSSIA. 


211 


j*overty, that the Russian emperor banishes those of his subjects 
whom he does not like. 



d. f will now tell you of that part of Russia which lies in Europe. 
It is a vast territory, about equal in extent to all the United States, 
and embraces more land than all the other kingdoms of Europe. The 
population is not less than sixty millions. 

4. You will see by this, that the emperor of Russia is a very 
powerful king. He reigns over his subjects pretty much as he 
pleases, there being no law superior to his will. He is not only a 
despot in his own country, but he is a terror to all Europe. 

5. He has a great many palaces in different parts of his kingdom, 
but he resides chiefly at St. Petersburg. He has an immense army, 
and is always surrounded with a great many soldiers. 

6. By looking on a map, you will see that Russia in Europe extends 
from the Northern or Frozen Ocean on the north, to the Black Sea on 
the south, a distance of nearly two thousand miles. On the east, it is 
separated from Asia by the Ural mountains ; on the west, it is bounded 
by the Gulf of Finland, the Baltic Sea, Prussia, Austria, and Turkey. 

7. In such a vast territory as this, you may well suppose that the 
climate is various. Along the borders of the Frozen Ocean, the lakes 
are covered with ice for nine months in the year. In the middle 
parts of Russia, the winter is about as severe as in Canada; in the 
southern parts, the climate is very warm and pleasant. Here, grapes 
grow in abundance, with many other nice fruits. 

8. The capital of Russia is St. Petersburg, situated on the river 
Neva, which flows into the Gulf of Finland. It is a splendid city, 
and contains twice as many inhabitants as New York. There is no 
place in the world where you would see more strange sights than 
in St. Petersburg!!. Here are a great many palaces, inhabited by 


2. To what country is the name of Siberia given? Whit of the country? People. 
Russian emperor ? 3. What of Russia in Europe ? Its population ? 4. What can you say 
of the emperor of Russia ? 6. What is the extent of Russia in Europe? Boundaries? 7 
Climate of Russia in Europe ? Productions? 


212 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


people so rich, that some of them keep two or three hundred servants, 
or slaves. 

9. In the streets, you see a great many soldiers gayly dressed, gilt 
coaches, drawn by three or four horses, beggars covered with rags 
and people dressed in all the strange fashions you can think of. 


CHAPTER CXXX.— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

Description of Russia continued . 



1. Moscow is next to St. Petersburg in size, and contains about as 
many inhabitants as New York. It is a famous old city, where the 
kings of Russia used to live. But in 1812, a great part of it was 
burnt, in order to drive out Napoleon and his soldiers, pretty much as 
people in our country sometimes set fire to a heap of brush in order 
to drive out a rabbit or a woodchuck. In this way, Moscow was 
nearly destroyed, but it has since been rebuilt. 

2. St. Petersburg carries on a great deal of commerce by sea, and 
many of our ships go there to get hemp, iron, hides, and other things. 
But Moscow is situated far inland, and therefore carries on no tra.de 
by sea. 

3. There is no king in the world who reigns over so many kinds of 
people as the czar, or the emperor of Russia. In his European do- 
minions, he has at least sixty different tribes or nations under his 
sway, who speak different languages, and have different modes of life. 
In his Asiatic dominions he probably has as many more. 

4. In the northern part of European Russia, there are a good many 

8. What of St. Petersburg!) ? Palaces ? People ? 9. What may you see in t'n* 

streets ? Ch. CXXX. — 1. What of Moscow ? What was done iu 1812 ? 2. What of the 
commerce of St. Petersburgh? That of Moscow ? 3. What of the czar of Russia ? 



RUSSIA. 


213 


tribes of short, swarthy people, called Laplanders, Samoiedes, &c. 
These live almost in a savage state. Those that dwell near the sea, 
live so much upon fish, that they always carry about with them a 
fishy smell. These races resemble the Esquimaux Indians that oc- 
cupy the northern parts of our continent. 

5. It would seem, that these people would have a very dull time 
of it, up in their cold country, where three fourths of the time it is 
winter, and where the nights are sometimes six months long. But 
they appear to enjoy themselves pretty well. They have no books, 
but they tell long stories, and crack their jokes, as well as other 
people. 

6. They have no history, for they seem to keep no more record of 
what passes among them than a hive of bees. One generation suc- 
ceeds another, and so things pass from age to age. They are not 
warlike, and have no great events to tell. Thus they go on, living 
as their great-grandfathers lived before them. They acknowledge 
the authority of the emperor; but the country is so cold he never 
comes among them, so they do pretty much as they please. 

7. In the southern and western portions of European Russia, there 
are a good many Tartars, who are very fond of riding about on swift 
horses. Along the river Don, there is a race of Cossacks. These too 
are fond of horses, and in battles fight terribly with long spears, 
which they hurl to th~ distance of two hundred feet. 

8. Besides these trit es, there are many Jews, several millions of 
Poles, a good many Germans, and some gypseys in Russia. In the 
cities, the people generally live pretty much as they like, each man 
pursuing what occupation he pleases. 

9. But the country people, who till the land, are held in a state of 
bondage similar to that of the vassals in old feudal times. These are 
called boors, and are in a sad state of ignorance and poverty. They 
belong either to the emperor or the rich people. 

10. Like all other slaves, they are degraded and miserable, and, 
like other slaves, they grow worse rather than better. They are, in 
short, the property of their masters, who look upon them as animals, 
made for their service; and they care little about them, except to get 
as much out of them as they can. 

1 1. That golden rule, Do to another as you would have another do 
to you, seems never to be thought of by these Russian masters. What 
a sad thing it is to think of, that there are thirty-six millions of people 
living in this state of slavery and degradation in European Russia! 

4. What tribes live in European Russia ? Whom do they resemble ? 5. What of their 
employments? Their life ? 7. What of Tartars ? Cossacks? 8. What of other inhabit- 
ants > 9. Who are the boors ? What of them ? 10. How are they like other slave* 

11. What rule do the masters of these slaves never practise ? What is a sad reflection? 


214 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


CHAPTER CXXXI.— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

The Reign of Peter the Great . 


1. Although Russia is such an immense empire, its history will 
not detain us long. It was n country of barbarians, till within a little 
more than a hundred years. It cannot be said to have taken a rank 
among civilized nations, till Peter the Great ascended the throne. 



House where Peter the Great lived while in Holland. 


2. Peter was a very strange man, and though he began the work 
of civilizing his empire, he found it a more difficult task to civilize 
himself. In fact, he was somewhat of a barbarian all his life. 

3. The emperors of Russia are called czars. When the czar Peter 
was twenty-five years old, he left his throne, and travelled over Europe 
oi search of knowledge. He did not go to any of the learned univer- 
sities, nor apply himself to the study of the dead languages. 

4. That was not the sort of knowledge which Peter wanted. The 
first thing he did was to go to Holland, and put himself apprentice to 
a ship carpenter. The house is still standing where he used to live 
while there. He afterwards went to England, and followed the same 
trade as in Holland. 

5. Besides learning the business of ship-carpentry, he took lessons 
«i other branches of mechanics, and also in surgery. In short, he neg- 
ected no kind of knowledge which he thought would be useful to 
himself or his subjects. 

6. In a little more than a year, he heard that his sister was en- 


Ch. CXXXI.— 1. What of Russia ? Peter the Great ? 2. What can you say of Peter ? 
3. W'..o are called czars ? Describe the manner in which the czar Peter set about acqui- 
ring knowledge 


RUSSIA. 


215 


deavonng to make herself empress of Russia. This intelligence 
compelled him to break off his studies and labors, and hasten back to 
the city of Moscow. On arriving there, he put some of the conspi- 
rators to death, and confined his sister in prison. 

7. His time was afterwards so much occupied in war, and in taking 
care of the empire, that he never had leisure to finish his education. 
But he had already learnt a great deal, and the effect of his know- 
ledge was soon seen in the improvement of Russia. 

8. Peter used to rise at five in the morning, and busy himself all 
day about the affairs of the empire. But in the evening, when his 
work was over, he would seat himself beside a big round tattle of 
brandy, and drink till his reason was quite gone. 

9. This habit, together with the natural violence of his temper, 
rendered him almost as dangerous to his friends as to his enemies. 
He often said, that he had corrected the faults of Russia, but that he 
could not correct his own. 

10. Peter was in the habit of beating those who offended him, with 
his cane. The highest noblemen in Russia often underwent this pun- 
ishment. Even the empress Catherine, his wife, sometimes got 
soundly beaten ; but perhaps not oftener than she deserved it. 

11. It is supposed that the czar Peter ordered his own son to be 
put to death, and that he was himself privately executed in prison. 
He had many faults, and was guilty of some great crimes, but his 
name stands high on the list of sovereigns; for he was one of the very 
few who have labored hard for the welfare of their subjects. He did 
more for the good of Russia than all the czars who went before and 
have come after him. 


CHAPTER CXXXII.— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

The Successors of Peter the Great 

1. Peter died in 1725, at the age of fifty-three, and was succeeded 
by his wife, the empress Catherine. She had been a country girl, and 
the czar Peter had married her for the sake of her beauty. In some 
respects, Catherine was a good sort of woman ; but, among other 
faults, she was rather too fond of wine. 

2. She reigned only about two years, and was succeeded by her 
husband’s grandson, named Peter the Second. He died in 1730, and 
left the throne to Anne Jwanowna, his niece. The empress Anne 
was a good sovereign, and performed many praiseworthy acts. None 
of her deeds, however, have been more famous than the building of 
a palace of ice. 

8. In what vice did Peter indulge ? 10. What habit had he? 11. What is supposed to 

have been the fate of Peter’s son ? His own fate ? The character of the czar Peter 
Ch. CXXXII. — 1. When did the czar Peter die ? Who succeeded him? What of th# 
empress Catherine ? 2. How long did she reign ? Who succeeded her ? When did Pe 
ter II die ? Who succeeded him ? What of the empress Anne ? 


‘216 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


3. This stately and beautiful structure was built on a frozen latte. 
Instead of wood or hewn stone, it was composed entirely of blocks of 
jce. The furniture was likewise of ice ; and even the beds were of 
the same material. When it was illuminated within, the whole edi- 
fice glittered and sparkled as if it were made of diamonds. 

4. Bright as it was, however, I would far rather dwell in the mean- 
est mud-cottage, than in so cold a mansion. Yet, my dear readers, 
any other palace is almost as uncomfortable as the empress Anne’s 
palace of ice. There is little in them but cold and glittering grandeur. 

5. The successor of Anne was the princess Elizabeth, a daughter of 
Peter the Great. She mounted the throne in 1740, and reigned twen- 
ty-two years. Her successor was Peter the Third, who began to 
reign in 1762. 

6. He, like Peter the Great, had a wife named Catherine. They 
had not long sat together on the throne, when she contrived to de- 
pose Peter, and made herself sole ruler of Russia. It is supposed that 
she afterwards caused him to be murdered. 

7. But although so wicked a woman, Catherine was endowed with 
admirable talents, and she became one of the most illustrious sover- 
eigns in the world. Some people called her Catherine the Great 
Man ; for many of her great qualities would have been more becom- 
ing in a man than a woman. 

8. In 1796, when she died, Catherine was on the point of driving 
the Turks from their territories. If she had succeeded in doing so, 
she would have governed the whole of the vast region between the 
Mediterranean Sea and' the Arctic Ocean. 

9. But death hurried the great empress away, to answer for the 
murder of her husband, and many other crimes. She was succeeded 
by her son Paul, who was then forty-three years old. 

10. The czar Paul possessed none of his mother’s talents, and was 
of a very stern and unamiable disposition. People suspected him of 
being insane. His conduct grew so intolerable, that some of his prin- 
cipal nobles conspired to kill him. 

11. Paul was succeeded by Alexander, his eldest son. This empe- 
ror reigned from 1801 till 1 825. He was engaged in war with the em- 
peror Napoleon, who penetrated with his army to the city of Moscow. 
But the Russians burnt that ancient capital of their country ; and its 
destruction ruined the French army. 

12. The present czar of Russia is named Nicholas. He succeeded 
his brother Alexander in 1825. Though Nicholas has too much pow- 
er, he still wishes for more. His tyranny drove his Polish subjects 
to revolt, a few years since, but they were subdued. Thousands of 
them fled to other countries, thousands were slain, and thousands 
were imprisoned, or banished to Siberia. 

13. Nicholas has an im nense army, and usually has a war on hia 

3. Describe a palace of ice? 5. Who succeeded the empress Anne? What of her? 
When did Peter III. begin to reign ? 6. What of his wife ? What can you say of her ? 8. 
What plan had Catherine the Great before her death ? When did she die ? 9. Who suc- 
ceeded her? 10. What of the czar Paul ? 11. Who succeeded him ? What of Alexan- 

der ? How was the French army ruined? 12. Who is the present czar of Russia ? What 
of him ? 


217 


SWEDEN. 

hands. He is however a man of great talent, and is rapidly impro- 
ving the condition of his people, and at the same time increasing 
the power of/the nation. 


CHAPTER CXXXIIL— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

About Sweden . 



Swedish people celebrating the return of Spring. 


1. The Swedish territories at present, comprise Sweden, Norway, 
and part of Lapland. These are bounded north by the Arctic Ocean* 
east by Lapland, the Gulf of Bothnia, and the Baltic; south by the 
Baltic, the Kattigat, and the Stager Rack ; and west by the Atlantic. 

2. Sweden is a eold and mountainous country, celebrated for its iron, 
of which large quantities are brought to this country. The people 
are industrious," bold, frank, and independent. A large part of the 
inhabitants live upon milk, cheese, and fish. In winter they clothe 
themselves in furs and sheepskin. 

3. The Swedes are a. sensible people, and are disposed to make the 
best of every thing. When their long winter goes away, they cele- 
brate the return of spring, by dancing around a May-pole. They 
love their country, and insist that it is the pleasantest part of the 
world. 

4. Though they dress in sheepskins, and live in a homespun sort 
of a way, they are still very polite. They are, in short, much more 
amiable, respectable, and well-behaved than many of the kings and 
princes about whom 1 have been telling you. 

5. I may not have a better opportunity to tell you, that good man- 
ners are a great recommendation to everybody; but they are especial- 

Ch. CXXXIIL — 1. What do the Swedish territories comprise ? 2. What of Sweden 
The people ? 3. What of the Swedes ? 4. Their dress ? Manners ? 

19 


218 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


ly necessary to people who are not rich. Rich people are sometimes 
haughty and proud. This is very wrong and very silly, and though 
everybody despises such people, still their wealth will bring flatterers 
around them. 

6. But people in more humble circumstances, cannot afford to 
throw away the happiness, respectability, and comfort which arise 
from being amiable, gentle, and polite to everybody. 

7. Not much is known about the early history of Sweden. In an- 
cient times it was under the government of Denmark. A Danish 
Queen, called Margaret, ruled over Denmark, Sweden, and Norway, 
in 1387. 

8. In 15i8, the Danish king Christian caused ninety-four Swedish 
senators to be massacred in the city of Stockholm. Gustavus Vasa, 
the son of one of these senators, incited the Swedes to revolt against 
Denmark. 

9. The king of Denmark sent an army to put down the rebels. But 
the ships in which the Danish soldiers had embarked, got embedded 
in the ice, on the coast of Sweden. The inhabitants skated off from 
the shore, and set the ships on fire. 

10. Gustavus Vasa succeeded in freeing his country, and was elect- 
ed king. The next sovereign of Sweden who is worth mentioning, 
was Gustavus Adolphus. He began to reign in 1611, at the age of 
eighteen. 

11. This king was a great warrior, and vanquished the best gene- 
rals in the service of the emperor of Germany. In 1633, he won the 
battle of Lutzen, but was killed at the moment of victory. 

12. Gustavus Adolphus left a daughter named Christiana, who 
was then only six years old. She was thought to possess remarkable 
talents, and great pains were taken with her education. But she was 
neither a good woman nor a good queen. 

13. After reigning a considerable time, queen Christiana became 
weary of the cares of government. She therefore abdicated the 
throne, and set out to seek a residence in some pleasanter country 
than Sweden. 

14. But her conduct was so bad, that all the kings of Europe were 
ashamed to have such a woman in their dominions. At last, she 
adopted the Catholic religion, and the pope permitted her to reside in 
Rome. 


6. What of good manners ? What of the rich ? 6. People in more humble life ? 7. 
History of Sweden ? Who ruled in 1387 ? 8. What was done in 1518? What, of Gusts 
vusVasa? 9. What of the king ? The ships? 10. What of Gustavus Vasa ? Who was 
king of Sweden in 1611 ? 11. What of Gustavus Adolphus ? In what bat tle did he di* 

12 What can you tell of queen Christiana ? 14. Where was she permitted to reside ? 


SWEDEN. 


219 


CHAPTER CXXXIV.— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

Charles the Twelfth and his Successors. 

1. The most famous sovereign that Sweden ever had, and one of 
the most famous in the world, was Charles the Twelfth. But my 
readers will long ago have become tired of hearing about conquerors; 
so that I shall speak very briefly of Charles. 

2. He began to reign in 1697, at fifteen years of age. From his 
youth upward, he thought of nothing but being a soldier. When he 
was only about seventeen years old, the czar of Russia, and the kings 
of Poland and Denmark, made war upon him. 

3. Charles beat them all in the first campaign. When he heard 
the bullets whistling by his ears, he showed great delight, and ex- 
claimed, — “ That shall be my music!” And, as long as he lived, he 
never wished for any other music. 

4. But it is a sad thing for a people when their king loves the 
whistling of bullets. Charles the Twelfth was a scourge to all Eu- 
rope, and to his own kingdom more than to any other. He delighted 
in war for its own sake, and not for any good which he expected to 
gain by it. 

5. During the first few years of his reign, Charles was constantly 
successful ; but in 1709, the czar of Russia gained a great victory over 
him, at Pultowa. Charles made his escape into Turkey. 

6. He continued in that country five years, although he might safe- 
ly have returned home. He seemed to care nothing about his own 
dominions. When the Swedes sent to inquire what they should do 
in his absence, Charles answered, that he would send one of bis old 
boots to govern them. 

7. At last, in 1714, he left Turkey and returned to Sweden. His 
first business was to make war again. But his warfare was now 
drawing to a close. 

8. One night, while besieging a fortress in Norway, he advanced 
m front of his troops to see how the siege was going on. A cannon- 
shot struck him on the head, and killed him. He was found gras- 
ping his sword, which was half drawn from the scabbard. Historians 
seem hardly decided whether to call Charles the Twelfih a hero or a 
madman. 

9. One of his successors, named Gustavus the Third, was shot at 
a masquerade, in 1792. Gustavus the Fourth behaved in such a 
manner that his subjects were compelled to dethrone him. This took 
place in 1809. 


Ch. CXXXIV. — 1. Who was the most famous of the kings of Sweden? 2. When did he 
begin to reign ? What did he principally think of when a boy ? Who made war upon 
nim ? 3. What anecdote can you tell of him? 4. What can you say of him? 5. What 
of Charles XII. for the first few years of his reign? When was the battle of Pultowa? 
Where did Charles fly ? 6. How long did he stay in Turkey ? What answer did he send 
to a message from the Swedes? 7. When did Charles return to Sweden ? What of him 
when there ? h How did he meet his death ? What do historians think of Charles XII.? 
9. Who succeed? . him ? When did Gustavus III. die ? When was Gustavus IV. dethroned? 


220 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


10. The next king was Charles the Thirteenth. The emperor 
Napoleon caused a French general, named Bernadotte, to be declared 
Crown-prince of Sweden, and heir to the throne. In 1818, when 
Charles the Thirteenth died, Bernadotte succeeded him. 

11. Though he had originally been only a common soldier, Berna- 
dotte proved to be a better king than most of the other European 
sovereigns, whose forefathers had worn crowns for a thousand years. 


CHAPTER CXXXV.— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

About Lapland , Norway , and Denmark . 



A Laplander travelling in a Sledge. 


1. L ayl and is the most northern country of Europe, and is divided 
between Russia and Sweden. The country is so cold, that the ho" 
liquor we call brandy sometimes freezes there. I am afraid, however 
that the Lapps find means of thawing more of it than is good for them 

2. I have already told you something about the Laplanders. The 
men are about four feet high, and the women not much taller than a 
cider-barrel. The people have a great many reindeer, whose flesh 
supplies food, and whose skins furnish clothing. They also take the 
place of horses, and drag the people over the snow in sledges, at a 
rapid rate. These people have no history that is worthy of being 
related here. 

3. Norway is an extensive country, bounded on the west by the 
A tlantic Ocean, and on the east by Sweden. It is a cold, bleak, and 

10. Who was the next king? What of Napoleon ? When did Bernodotte succeed to 
the throne of Sweden ? 11. What of Bernadotte ? Ch. CXXXV. — 1. Where is Lapland? 
What of the climate ? 2. What of the Laplanders ? Reindeer ? History ? 


DENMARK. 


221 


barren region, but the inhabitants live pretty comfortably. They 
have very fine cows, from which they make the best butter in the 
world. 

4. Bergen is the largest city, and has twenty thousand inhabitants. 
The houses are small, and generally built of wood. Fires sometimes 
do great damage, and therefore there are a good many watchmen 
who walk about the streets at night, muffled up in thick great coats. 
Every hour they cry out, “ God preserve our good city of Bergen !” 

5. Norway was early inhabited by rough tribes, who were adven- 
turous seamen. There seems to have been now and then a pirate 
among them, for in 8(30, a pirate, named Nadody, discovered Iceland, 
which was afterwards settled by the Norwegians. 

6. Norway was conquered by Canute, king of Denmark, in 1030; 
but six years after, it became independent, and for many years it was 
governed by its own king. In 1397, it was incorporated with Den- 
mark, and continued a part of that kingdom till 1814, when it was 
transferred to Sweden. 

7. Denmark is a Hr lie kingdom lying between Sweden and Ger- 
many. It is a level country, nearly surrounded by the sea. The 
people have light complexions, and the skin of the ladies is said to be 
exceedingly white. The people have a great many cattle, and they 
seem very fond of tilling the soil. Copenhagen, the capital, has one 
hundred and twenty thousand inhabitants. The whole population of 
the kingdom is two millions. The Danish language is spoken both 
in Denmark and Norway. 

8. The three kingdoms of Denmark, Sweden, and Norway, were 
anciently called Scandinavia. In very early times these were occu- 
pied by tribes of Fins and Germans ; afterwards, the Goths conquered 
these countries. They were led by Odin, of whom many marvellous 
tales are told, and who seems to have been worshipped as a kind of 
Jupiter, among these northern tribes. Skiold, the son of Odin, is said 
to have been the first king of Denmark. 

9. All that we really know of Denmark at this early period, is, 
that the people were composed of wild, adventurous warriors, who 
were generally considered by the more southern nations of Europe as 
pirates. About the time that the Roman empire fell, the Danes, 
Swedes, and Norwegians were known by the general name of 
Normans. 

L0. These bold freebooters sallied forth in their little vessels, and 
made conquests in different countries. Some of them settled in 
England, some in that part of France called Normandy, and some of 
them reached Spain and Italy. 


3. Where is Norway? What of the country? The people? Butter? 4. What of 
Bergen ? Its population ? What of the houses ? Are fires frequent ? What of the watch 
men? 5. How was Norway early inhabited ? What was done in 860 ? 6. When was Nor- 

way conquered, and by whom ? When did it become independent ? What of it in 1397 ? 
In 1814? 7. Where is Denmark ? What of it? The people? What of Copenhagen? 

Its population ? Population of the Danish kingdom? What language is spoken in Nor- 
way and Denmark ? 8. What three countries were called Scandinavia ? Who occupied 
it? Who led these tribes ? Who was the first king of Denmark ? 9. What of Denmark 
at this early period? What people were called Normans ? 10. What of these freeboot- 

ers ? Where did they settle ? 


322 


SCHOOL HISTORY 


11. In 920, the several Danish tribes appear to have been united 
under one government. Canute conquered England and a part of 
Scotland in 1016, and subdued Norway in 1030. Since his time, 
Denmark has had a great many sovereigns, and been engaged in 
several wars, but its history offers but little that is interesting. 


CHAPTER CXXXVL— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

Brief Notices of several Kingdoms and States. 

1. There are several countries of Europe, of which my limits will 
not permit me to give a separate history. Some of them have been 
spoken of in connexion with other kingdoms. The rest must be 
briefly noticed in one chapter. 

2. If I had time, 1 could make a long story about Holland, a coun- 
try once covered by the sea, but which is now walled out by a vast 
dyke. The people of Holland are called Dutch, and are known ail 
the world over as great smokers. They are, however, an industrious 
people, and I know of nothing more comfortable than the inside of a 
thrifty Dutchman’s house in his own country. Amsterdam, the capi- 
tal, contains two hundred thousand inhabitants. 

3. In Belgium, the people, strange as it may seem, appear to have 
a mixture of Dutch and French manners. They smoke a great deal 
of tobacco, yet speak the French language. The country is pleasant, 
and some parts are beautiful. Many of the cities are very interesting. 

4. The Netherlands, or Holland and Belgium, were formerly one 
country. The whole territory is bounded on the north by the North 
Sea, east by Germany, south by France, and west by the British 
Channel and the North Sea, These territories belonged at one time 
to Rome, afterwards to Germany, and finally to Spain. 

5. In 1581, the seven northern provinces revolted against Philip of 
Spain, and formed themselves into a republic, which was then called 
Holland. During the seventeenth century, it was a very powerful 
nation, especially by sea. At this time, her ships often disputed, and 
sometimes successfully, with the British fleets. 

6. The remaining provinces of the Netherlands were long under 
the government of Austria. In 1810, the whole of the Netherlands 
were united to France, but were afterwards formed into a separate 
kingdom. In 1830, there was a revolution, and the southern prov 
inces now compose the kingdom of Belgium. 

7. Poland was once a nation of Europe, but it is now no longer so. 
It was bounded north and east by the Russian dominions, south by 
the river Dniester, and west by Prussia. In 1772, the sovereigns of 

11. What took place in 920 ? What of Canute ? History of Denmark ? Ch. CXXXVI. — 
2. What of Holland ? The people ? What is the population of Amsterdam ? 3. What of 
the people of Belgium? The country? The cities? 4. What of Holland and Belgium? 
How is the territory bounded? To whom has it belonged at different times? 5. what 
took place in 1681 ? When was Holland very powerful : 6. What of the remaining pro- 
vinces of the Netherlands? What took place in 1810? In 1830? 7. What of Poland 
Its boundaries ? 


GREAT BRITAIN. 


223 


Russia, Prussia, and Austria, seized upon Poland, and divided the 
greater part of its territories among themselves. In 1 795, they seized 
the remainder. The inhabitants have struggled bravely for their 
freedom, but in vain. They have been cruelly treated by the empe- 
ror of Russia, who has sent thousands into exile, and banished thou- 
sands to other countries. Some of the Poles have fled from oppression 
to this country. 

8. I have already given you a short account of the states of Italy. 
It may be well, however, to repeat a few things here. The republic 
of Venice, as you will recollect, was founded in the fifth century. It 
at first comprehended only some marshy islands, at the head of the 
Gulf of Venice. Afterwards, a considerable tract of territory on the 
mainland was annexed to its government. 

9. Venice carried on an extensive commerce ; and, in the thirteenth 
century, the republic was very powerful. It was customary for the 
Doge of Venice, who was the chief ruler, to espouse the sea as a wife, 
with pompous ceremonies. Venice has long been going to decay, and 
is now under the government of Austria. The city of Venice is, how- 
ever, the admiration of all travellers. 

10. Genoa, on the northwestern coast of Italy, formerly resembled 
Venice in its government, although it never was so powerful. In 
1815, it was annexed to the territories of Sardinia. Sardinia is an 
island in the Mediterranean Sea, and has been a kingdom since the 
year 1720. Besides Genoa, it has the territories of Piedmont and 
Savoy in Italy. 

11. The kingdom of Naples is generally called the kingdom of the 
two Sicilies. Its territories comprise all the south of Italy, besides 
the islands of Sicily, and some small islands in the neighborhood. 
The former sovereigns of Naples came from Spain. 

12. In 1808, the emperor Napoleon gave the kingdom of Naples to 
one of his most distinguished generals, named Joachim Murat, who 
was the son of a pastry-cook. King Joachim was shot in 1816, and 
the- two Sicilies were restored to the former king. 


CHAPTER CXXXVIL— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland. 

1. I have now come to the most interesting country in Europe ; the 
country where there is more comfort, more good sense, more thorough 
civilization, more true religion than in any other place in Europe, in 
Asia, or Africa. 

2. The kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland embraces England, 

What took place in 1772? In 1795? What of the Poles? 8. What of Venice? 

9. When was it powerful ? What was an annual ceremony? What of Venice now? 

10. What of Genoa ? Sardinia ? Since when has it been a kingdom ? What territories 

belong to it? 11. What is the kingdom of Naples generally called? What of its territo- 
ries ? 12. What of Napoleon ? King Joachim? King Ferdinand? Ch. CXXXVII.— 

1 Which is the most extraordinary country in Europe ? 


224 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


Wales, Scotland, and Ireland. The three first countries are upon 
the island of Great Britain. This island is on the western coast of 
Europe, and is separated by the British Channel from France. At 
the narrowest part, this channel is twenty-five miles wide. Ireland 
lies west of Great Britain, at the distance of about sixty miles. 

3. These two islands are small in extent, but they contain nearly 
twenty-five millions of inhabitants. Besides this, the kingdom has 
colonies in various parts of America, Africa, and Asia, so that the 
King rules over nearly one hundred and fifty millions of people. Great 
Britain may be considered the richest and most powerful kingdom on 
the face of the globe. 

4. I suppose you know that the first settlers of our country came 
from England. They brought with them the manners and customs 
of the country where they lived. Thus the United States became 
very much like England ; the houses, the churches, the dress of the 
people in the two countries, are nearly the same. Besides this, the 
people speak the same language. 

5. But you must remember that England is an older and richer 
country than ours. It has larger cities, more splendid churches, more 
beautiful roads, finer gardens, and many other things superior to what 
can be found in this country. 

6. Beside all this, England has a king, who has several magnificent 
palaces. England, too, has a great many noblemen, who live in costly 
country-seats. ,These ride about in coaches, some of which cost ten 
thousand dollars. Thus there is a great deal more splendor in Eng- 
land than we find here. 

7. But, as an offset to this, there is more poverty there than in our 
happier country. Beggars throng the streets, even in London, and 
they are to be found in all parts of the kingdom. Thousands of people, 
too, who are not beggars, labor very hard, and yet are scarcely able 
to live. Sometimes a great many people die for want of foo*j. Thus 
England is a country which is wonderful for its magnificence and 
power, yet, with all its wealth, a large portion of the people suffer 
the pangs of poverty. 


CHAPTER CXXXVIIL— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

About London and other Cities of England, Wales, 
Scotland, and Ireland. 

1. London is the largest and finest city in Europe, and contains 
more than a million of inhabitants. The Thames, a considerable 

2. What is embraced in the kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland ? What of the island 
ol Great Britain ? What of the Britisn Channel ? Ireland ? 3. Population of Great Brit- 
am . Ireland . Colonies of Gieat Britain ? 4. How can you account for the United States 
resembling England ? 5. How does the latter country excel the former ? 6. What of the 
king ? Noblemen ? 6. What of poverty in England? What can you say of England? 

here is London . Direction of the following places from London : — Manchester ? Bir 
mmgham? Sheffield? Edinburgh? Dublin? Wales? 


GREAT BRITAIN 


225 


Map of Great Britain. 



iho£Forth 


•JslllU 


Giasaour 
\*K^Tti’ce d ' [\ 

« unt V^\ 

g=3 # Carlisle 


run 


JVCEflstle 

*tn • ZJTfT III Dll 


/y Ne ayht^J ' 
i o JiettO-S 
Dundalk 

dlJV'D 


t,aricasic)r£ls 

\v/£ 

Leeds, C 

Liu r pool 


WlRigia s E M 

I fJfoyhedci 

Wublin JHsmTdl„r£ 


•lAinufo rii 


— fl? JlcuncjR L 
-^Wicklow 

4 L f er ?^ . 1 

J /JtM^Ca./'/ouyg 
Tipperary^ 


£ Ca rd iy a 


Mil' minyhcLTTL t© N 


Ox ford 

f a /~s£° n d° n M 

Vind sor‘ TJtq£je^2^ 

•Salisbury Canter bur 
sr®, a ChicH.estcT^z 


Bristol Charing!; 


h 

?rton ‘ 
Durchesti 


iizardPt 


Lon a E ast 69 FromWasfiing 1 on 73 

"V 


IDQUHB&I II 3 o 


JTJCR R J 


G la) its' Caujw ay ■'2C 


trom* London . 


Q Longitude 


P 


226 


SCHOOL HISTORY 


river, runs through it. Across this, there are a number of handsome 
stone bridges. London has no wall around it like Paris, Berlin, and 
most large cities of the continent; but it is encircled by a beautiful 
country, dotted with villages, villas, and country-seats. 

2. London seems like a world of itself ; you might walk about foi 
a year, and go into some new street every day. In some parts of the city 
there are such streams of people, that it always seems there like thf 
Fourth of July, or Election day. The shops are filled with beautiful 
things, and the streets are crowded with coaches and carriages of all 
sorts. 



Westminster Mbey London. 


3. The palace of St. James is a dark old building, but the king has 
lately had a new one built for him, which is very fine. Westminster 
Abbey is an old Gothic church, which strikes every beholder with ad- 
miration and wonder. St. Paul’s is a more modern church, and is 
very handsome. 

4. I have not time to tell you of the other wonderful things 'in 
London, nor can I tell you of the other beautiful towns and cities in 
England. You must read about them in some larger book, or come 
and see me of a long winter night. 

5. I will then tell you of Manchester, where they make beautiful 
ginghams, calicoes, and other goods ; of Birmingham, where they 
make guns, pistols, swords, locks, and lamps; of Sheffield, where they 
make knives, forks, and scissors , and of other places, where they make 
a great variety of articles. 

(3. Wales is a country of mountains, lying on the west of England. 
Most of the people talk the Welsh language, which you could not 
understand. They are very industrious, and live in a comfortable 
manner. Their mountains are celebrated for producing coal, tin, iron, 
and copper. 

Ch. CXXXVIII. — 1. Population of London ? The Thames? Country around London ? 
2. Describe the appearance of London. 3. Palace of St. James? Westminster Abbey ? 
St. Paul’s ? 5. What of Manchester? Birmingham? Sheffield? 6. Where is Wales. 
What of the people ? Mountains ? 


ENGLAND. 


227 

7. Scotland is also a land of mountains. In the southern part, the 
people speak the Scotch language, which perhaps you could partly 
understand. But in the highlands of the north, the inhabitants speak 
Gaelic, which would be as strange to you as the language of an Arab. 

8. The capital of Scotland is Edinburgh, a fine smoky old city, 
with an immense high castle in the midst of it. Besides this, there 
are many fine towns in Scotland. Glasgow is a large place and cele- 
brated for its manufactures. 

9. Ireland is a bright, green island, containing seven millions of 
people. It is the native land of those cheerful, witty Irishmen, who 
come out to this country in such abundance. If their country were 
happily governed, they would not come here; but the truth is, that 
Ireland has felt the miseries of bad government for many years, and a 
large part of the people are therefore kept in a state of distressing 
poverty. 

10. The Irish, however, are a very interesting people. At home 
or abroad, they seem to be full of wit and hospitality. It is by their 
lively disposi tion and cheerful turn of mind, that they seem to soften 
the evils which too often pursue them. 

11. Dublin is the capital of Ireland, and some of its streets are 
magnificent, but many portions of it are filled with inhabitants who 
present the most woful aspect of raggedness and misery. Beggary 
is common in all parts of the kingdom. 


CHAPTER CXXXIX.— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

Origin of the British Nation. The Druids . 

1. It is supposed that Great Britain and Ireland were originally 
settled by a colony from Gaul. These were called Gaels, or Celts. 
Their descendants are found, at this day, in Ireland and Wales, and 
the highlands of Scotland. Some of these still speak the ancient 
Gaelic or Celtic language. 

2. Very little is known about these islands till the time of Julius 
Caesar. He invaded England in the year 55, before the Christian era. 
The country was then called Britannia, or Britain. It was inhabited 
by barbarians, some of whom wore the skins of wild beasts, while 
others were entirely naked. They were painted like the American 
Indians. Their weapons were clubs, spears, and swords, with which 
I »ey fiercely attacked the Roman invaders. 

3. The ancient Britons, like the other northern nations of Europe, 
were idolaters. Their priests were called Druids. Their places of 
worship were in the open air, and consisted of huge stone pillars, 

7. What of Scotland 5 Language? 8. What of Edinburgh? Glasgow? 9. What of 
Ireland? Government? 10. What of the Irish people? 11. What of Dublin ? Ch. 
CXXXIX. — 1. What of the Gaels or Celts? 2. W r hen did Caesar invade England? W T hat 
was Great Britain then called ? What of the people ? 3. Religion of the ancient Britons * 
Who were *he Druids ’ What -)f their places of worship? 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


*28 

standing in a circle. A large stone in the middle was used as an al* 
lar, and human victims were sacrificed upon it. The ruins of one of 
these temples still remains at Stonehenge, and is very wonderful. 

4. The druids considered the oak a sacred tree. They set a great 
value on ;he mistletoe, a sort of plant which sometimes grows on the 
oak. Wherever they found the mistletoe, they held a banquet be* 
neath the spreading branches of the oak on which it grew. 



Celtic Inhabitants of Britain . 


5. The druids incited the Britons to oppose the Roman power. 
They fought fiercely, and the country was not entirely subdued till 
sixty years after the Christian era. Suetonius, a Roman general, 
then cut down the sacred groves of oak, destroyed the temples, and 
threw the druids into the fires which they had themselves kindled to 
roast the Romans. 

6. The Scots, who inhabited the northern part of the island, were a 
fierce people, and were still unconquered. To prevent them from 
making incursions into Britain, the Romans built a wall from the 
river Tyne to the Frith of Solway. 

7. The Britons remained quietly under the government ol Rome 
for nearly five centuries after the Christian era ; adopting during this 
oeriod, many of the Roman customs. They never attempted to free 
themselves. But, at last, the Roman empire became so weak, that 
he emperor Valentinian withdrew his troops from Britain. 

8. The inhabitants had grown so unwarlike, that, when the Roman 
soldiers were gone, they found themselves unable to resist the Scots. 
They therefore asked the assistance of two tribes of people from Ger- 
many, called Saxons, and Angles. 

4. How was the oak considered by the Druids ? The mistletoe ? 5. When was the coun- 
try entirely pubdued ? What of Suetonius? 6. What of the Scots? What did the Ro- 
mans do ? 7. How long did Rome gorern Britain ? What of the emperor Valentinian? 
8. Whose aid did the Britons ask against the Scots * 


ENGLAND. 


229 


9. These people drove back the Scots into their own part of the 
island. Then, instead of returning to Germany, they took possession 
of Britain by the right of the strongest. It was divided by them into 
seven small kingdoms, called the Saxon Heptarchy. 


CHAPTER CXL. — EUROPE CONTINUED. 

S axon and Danish Kings of England . 

•1. In the year 827 of the Christian era, all the seven kingdoms of 
the Saxon Heptarchy were united into one, under the government of 
Egbert. He was therefore the first king of England. 

2. Egbert was a native of England, but had been educated in 
France, at the court of Charlemagne. He was therefore more pol- 
ished and enlightened than most of the Saxon kings. During the 
reign of Egbert, and for many years afterwards, the Danes made in- 
cursions into England. They sometimes overran the whole country. 

3. Alfred, who ascended the throne in 872, fought fifty-six battles 
with them, by sea and land. On one occasion, he went into the camp 
of the Danes in the disguise of a harper. He took notice of every 
thing, and planned an attack upon the camp. Returning to his own 
men, he led them against the Danes, whom he completely routed. 

4. This king was called Afred the Great ; and he had a better 
right to the epithet of Great than most other kings who have borne 
it. He made wise laws, and instituted the custom of trial by jury. 
He likewise founded the university of Oxford. Nearly a hundred 
years after his death, the Danes again broke into England. There 
was now no Alfred to oppose them. They were accordingly victo- 
rious, and three Danish kings governed the country in succession. 

5. Canute the Great was one of them. He appears to have been 
an old pirate, or, as they were called in those days, a sea-king. One 
day, when he and his courtiers were walking on the shore, they called 
him king of the sea, and told him that he had but to command, and 
the waves would obey him. 

6. Canute desired a chair of state to be brought and placed on the 
hard, smooth sand. Then, seating himself in the chair, he stretched 
out his sceptre over the waves, with a very commanding aspect. 

7. “Roll back thy waves, thou sea!” cried Canute. “I am thy 
king and master ! How darest thou foam and thunder in my pre- 
sence ?” But the sea, nowise abashed, came roaring and whitening 
onward, and threw a sheet of spray over Canute and all the courtiers. 
The giant waves rolled upward on the beach, far beyond the mon- 
arch’s chair. They would soon have swallowed him up, together 
with his courtiers, if they had not all scampered to the dry land. 


9. What did these two tribes do ? How was Britain then divided ? Ch. CXL. — 1. Who 
was the first king of England ? What kingdoms did he govern ? 2. What of Egbert ? 

What of the Danes ’ 3. When did Alfred ascend the throne ? What did he do ? 4. Why 
was he called Alfred the Great? What of the Danes after his death? 5. 6. 7. Tell a 
story of Canute 

20 


230 


SCHOOL HISTORY 


8. In the year 1041, the Danes were driven out of England, and 
nn other Saxon king, called Edward the Confessor, was placed 
upon the throne. At his death in 1066, Harold, who was also a 
Saxon, became king. 

9. But he was the last of the Saxon kings. No sooner had he 
mounted the throne, than William, duke of Normandy in France in- 
vaded England, at the head of sixty thousand men. 

10. Harold led an army of Saxons against the Norman invaders, 
and fought with them at Hastings. In the midst of the battle, an 
arrow was shot through his steel helmet, and penetrated his brain. 
Tne duke of Normandy gained the victory, and became king of Eng- 
land. 


CHAPTER CXLI. -EUROPE CONTINUED. 

Norman Kings of England. 



1. William the Conqueror (as the duke of Normandy was now 
called) reigned about twenty years. He was succeeded by his second 
son, William Rufus, or the Red, who was so named from the color 
of his hair. 

2. The Red king was very fond of hunting. One day, while he 
was chasing a deer in the forest, a gentleman by the name of Walter 
Tyrrel let fly an arrow. It glanced against a tree, and hit the king 
in the breast ; so that befell from his horse and died. 

3. This took place in the year 1100, and William Rufus was suc- 
ceeded by his brother Henry. This king was called Beaucler v, or Ex- 


8. When were the Danes driven out of England ? Who was then placed uprn the throne? 
When did Harold become king ? 9. Who now invaded England ? 10. Where was the 

battle fought between Harold and William? Who became king of England ? Ch. CXLI 
1. Who succeeded William the Conqueror? 2. What was the fate of William Rufus ? 


ENGLAND. 


231 


cellent Scholar, because he was able to write his name. Kings were 
not expected to have much learning in those days. On the death of 
king Henry Beauclerk, in 1135, the throne was usurped by Stephen 
of Blois. Bui he died in 1154, and was succeeded by Henry the Se- 
cond, who wasson to the former Henry. 

4. This monarch had a violent quarrel with Thomas Becket, arch« 
bishop of Canterbury. Hoping to please the king, four knights went 
lo Canterbury, and murdered Becket at the foot of the Altar. But this 
bloody deed was a cause of great trouble to king Henry ; for the pope 
threatened to excommunicate him. 

5. In order to pacify his holiness, the king set out on a pilgrimage 
to the tomb of Becket. When he entered the abbey where the tomb 
was situated, the whole community of monks assaulted him with 
rods. The king, being afraid to resist them, was soundly whipped ; 
and, as a reward for his patience, he received the pope’s pardon. 

6. During the reign of this king, Ireland was conquered and annex- 
ed to the realm of England. It had previously been divided into seve- 
ral separate kingdoms. 

7. Richard the Lion-hearted was crowned king of England in 1189, 
He was a valiant man, and possessed prodigious strength; and he de- 
lighted in nothing so much as battle and slaughter. After gaining 
great renown in Palestine, he was, on his way back, taken and impris- 
oned for two years by the duke of Austria. 

8. The English obtained Richard’s release by paying a heavy ran- 
som ; but soon afterwards, while besieging a casile in Normandy, he 
was killed by an arrow from a cross-bow. The next king was Rich 
ard’s brother John, surnamed Lackland, or Loseland. 

9. This epithet was bestowed on John because he lost the territo 
ries which the English kings had hitherto possessed in France. Johr 
was one of the worst kings that ever England had. Among other 
crimes, he murdered his nephew, Arthur of Bretagne, who was right 
ful heir to the crown. 

10. The barons of England were so disgusted with the conduct of 
John, that they assembled at Runnymede, and compelled him to sigi 
a written deed, called Magna Charta. This famous charter was da 
ted the 19th of June, 1215. It is considered the foundation of English 
liberty. It deprived John, and all his successors, of the despotic pow- 
er which former kings had exercised. 

11. King John died in 1216, and left the crown to his son, who was 
then only nine years old. He was called Henry the Third. His reign 
coniinued fifty-five years; but, though he was a well meaning man, 
he had not sufficient wisdom and firmness for a ruler. 

3. When did Henry Beauclerk begin his reign ? When did Stephen succeed to the 
throne ? When did he die? 4 . Who murdered Thomas Becket? 5. What happeued to 
Henrj II.? 6. What of Ireland ? 7. When was Richard made king of England ? What 
of him? 8. How was he killed? 9. Why was John called Lackland? What of him? 
His crimes ? 10. Who signed Magna Charta? How is it considered? II. When did 

king Johs die? What of Henry III. ? 


232 


SCHOOL HISTORY 


CHAPTER CXLII.— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

English Wars and Rebellions. 



1. The next king, Edward the First, was crowned in 1272. The 
people gave him the nickname of Longshanks, because his legs were 
of unusual length. He was a great warrior, and fought bravely in 
Palestine, and in the civil wars of England. 

2. Edward conquered Wales, which had hitherto been a separate 
kingdom. He attempted to conquer Scotland likewise, but did not 
entirely succeed. The illustrious William Wallace resisted him, and 
beat the English troops in many battles. But, at last, Wallace was 
taken prisoner and carried in chains to London, and there executed. 

3. Robert Bruce laid claim to the crown of Scotland, and renewed 
the war against Edward. But old Longshanks was determined not 
to let go his hold of poor Scotland. He mustered an immense'army, 
and was marching northward, when a sudden sickness put an end to 
his life. 

4. His son, Edward the Second, ascended the throne in 1307. He 
led an army of a hundred thousand men into Scotland. But he wai 
not such a warrior as old king Longshanks. Robert Bruce encoun- 
tered him at Bannockburn, with only thirty thousand men, and gain- 
ed a glorious victory. By this, Scotland was set free. Edward the 
Second reigned about twenty years. He was a foolish and misera- 
ble king. His own wife made war against him, and took him prison- 
er. By her instigation, he was cruelly murdered in prison. 

Ch. CXLII. — 1. When was Edward I. crowned? What did the people call him? 
What of him ? 2. What of Wales ? Who resisted Edward in Scotland ? Fate of Wil- 
liam Wallace ? 3. What of Bobert Bruce ? Death of Edward Longshanks ? 4.Whatol 
Edward II. ? Battle of Bannockburn? How was Scotland set free ? What happened to 
Edward II.? 


ENGLAND 


233 

5. His son, Edward the Third, began to reign in 1327, at the age 
of eighteen. He had not long been on the throne, before he showed 
Himself very unlike his father. He beat the Scots at Halidown Hill, 
and afterwards invaded France. I have spoken of his French wars, in 
the hist ory of France. 

6. The king’s son, surnamed the Black Prince, was even more va- 
cant than his father. He was also as kind and generous as he was 
brave. He conquered king John of France, and took him prisoner, 
hut he did not exult over him. When they entered London together, 
the Black Prince rode bareheaded by the side of the captive monarch, 
as if he were merely an attendant, instead of a conqueror. 

7. This brave prince died in 1376, and his father lived only one 
year longer. The next king was Richard the Second, a boy of eleven 
years old. When he grew up, Richard neglected the government, 
and cared for nothing but his own pleasures. 

8. During his reign a rebellion was headed by a blacksmith, named 
Wat Tyler. The rebels had also other leaders, nicknamed Jack 
Straw and Hob Carter. They marched to London with a hundred 
thousand followers, and did a great deal of mischief. 

9. The king, attended by a few of his nobles, rode out to hold a 
conference with Wat Tyler. The blacksmith was very rude, and 
treated king Richard as if he were no better than a common man, or 
perhaps not quite so good. He even threatened the king with a 
drawn sword. 

10. William Walworth the lord mayor of London, was standing 
near the king. He was so offended at Wat Tyler’s insolence, that he 
uplifted a mace, or club, and smote Wat to the ground. A knight 
then killed him with a sword. 

11. When the rebels 'saw that the valiant blacksmith was beat 
down and slain, they gave an angry shout, and were rushing forward 
to attack the king’s party. But king Richard rode boldly to meet 
them, and waved his hand with a majestic air. 

12. “ Be not troubled for the death of your leader !” he cried, “ I, 
your king, will be a better leader than Wat Tyler!” The king’s 
words and looks made such an impression, that the rebels imme 
Jiately submitted, and Wat Tyler’s murder was unavenged. 


CHAPTER CXLIIL— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

The Lancastrian Kings of England. 

1. -Notwithstanding his promise to the rebels, king Richard was 
not half so good a ruler as the blacksmith would probably have 
been. His subjects grew more and more discontented, and his cousin, 

5. What of Edward III. ? When did he begin to reign ? 6. What of the Black Prince r 
How did he treat John <Jf France ? 7. What of Richard II. ? 8. 9. What of Wat Tyler’s 
rebellion 5 10. What did William Walworth do? 11. What of the rebels when Wat 

Tyler was killed ? What did Richard do ? 

20 * 


234 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


tne Duke of Lancaster, formed the project of making himself king. 
Richard was dethroned, and imprisoned at Pontefract castle, where 
he was either killed or starved to death. The Duke of Lancaster 
began to reign in the year 1400, and was called Henry the Fourth. 

2 . There were two rebellions against this king. One was headed 
by the Earl of Northumberland, and the other by the Archbishop of 
York; for, in those times, bishops often put on armor and turned 
soldiers. Henry conquered the rebels and reigned several years in 
peace. 

3. As long as his father lived, the king’s eldest son was a wild ana 
dissipated young man. But no sooner was the old king dead, than 
nis character underwent a complete change. He now threw off his 
dissipation and devoted himself carefully to the business of governing 
his kingdom. He was crowned, as Henrv the Fifth,, in 1413. Two 
years afterwards he invaded France. 

4. I have already told, in the history of France, how Henry van- 
quished the French in the famous battle of Agincourt, and how he 
afterwards became master of the whole kingdom of France. His 
death took place in 1422, in the midst of his triumphs, at the age ol 
thirty-four. 

5. The new king of England, Henry the Sixth, was a baby, only 
nine months old. At that tender age, while he was still in his nurse’s 
arms, the heavy crowns of England and France were put upon his 
head. The ceremony of this poor child’s coronation was performed 
in the city of Paris. He soon lost the crown of France. But the 
crown of England continued a torment to him as long as he lived, and 
it caused his death at last. 

6. When he grew up, he turned out to be a mild, quiet, simple 
sort of man, with barely sense enough to get along respectably as a 
private person. As a king, he was an object of contempt. His wife 
had far more manhood than himself, and she governed him like a 
child. 

7. During this king’s reign began the war of the Roses. The 
reader will recollect, that the Duke of Lancaster had unlawfully 
taken the crown from Richard the Second. But he and his son 
reigned without much opposition, because they were warlike men, 
and could have defended the crown with their swords. 

8. Henry the Sixth, on the contrary, was soft, meek, and peaceable, 
without spirit enough to fight for the crown which his father left him. 
The heirs of Richard the Second therefore thought this a proper 
time to get back their lawful inheritance. The Duke of York was 
the nearest heir. 

9. He began a war in 1445. If there had been nobody but Henry 
the Sixth to resist him, he might have got the crown at once. Eut 
Henry’s wife, whose name was Margaret, and many of the nobility, 


Ch. CXLIII. — 1. What of England under Richard? Who dethroned him ? His fate ? 
Who was Henry IV.? When did he begin to reign ? 2. What rebellions were ther*: 
against this kingr 3. What of Henry V. ? When did he invade France ? Who fought 
the battle of Agincourt ? When did Henry V. die ? 5. Describe the coronation of Henry 
VI. 6. What of him ? His queen ? 7. W T hat of the Duke of Lancaster ? His son 
Henry V. 8. What did the heiis of Richard II. do ? 


ENGLAND. 235 

took up arms for the king. Otjier noblemen lent assistance to the 
Duke of York. 

10. All the Yorkists, or partisans of the Duke of York, wore white 
roses, either in their hats or at their breasts. The Lancastrians, or 
those of the king’s party, wore a red rose in the same manner. 
Whenever two persons happened to meet, one wearing a red rose and 
the other a white, they drew their swords and fought. 

11. Thus the people of England were divided into two great 
parties, who were ready to cut each others throats, merely for the 
difference between a white and red rose. 


CHAPTER CXLIV.— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

Wars of the Roses. 

1. The wars of the roses lasted thirty years. Sometimes the 
white rose was uppermost, a .d sometimes the red. The most cele- 
brated general in these wars was the Earl of Warwick. It was 
chiefly by his means that the soldiers of the white rose gained a 
decisive victory at Towton, in which thirty-six thousand of the red 
rose men were killed. The young Duke of York was then proclaimed 
king, under the name of Edward the Fourth. 

2. This was in 1461. But, not long afterwards, the Earl of War- 
wick quarreled with king Edward, and quitted the party of the 
Yorkists. He took king Henry the Sixth out of prison, and placed 
him on the throne again, and Edward was compelled to flee ove'r to 
France. 

3. As the Earl of Warwick showed himself so powerful in pulling 
down kings and setting them up again, he gained the name of the 
King-maker. But he was finally killed in battle, while fighting 
bravely for the Lancastrians; and then the white rose flourished 
again. 

4. Henry the Sixth and his son were murdered in 1464, and 
Edward the Fourth became the undisputed king of England. He 
had fought bravely for the crown, but now that he had got firm pos- 
session of it, he became idle and voluptuous. 

5. He was a cruel tyrant, too. Having resolved to put one of his 
brothers to death, he gave him the choice of dying in whatever 
manner he pleased. His brother, who was a great lover of good 
Jiquor, chose to be drowned in a hogshead of wine. 

6. Edward the Fourth died in 1483. He left two young children, 
the eldesi of whom now became Edward the Fifth. But these poor 
children had a w/cked uncle for a guardian. He was called Richard 

9. When did the Duke of York begin the war? Who took up arms for Henry ? 10. 

What did the followers of the Duke of York wear? Those of the king? What often 
happened ? Ch. CXLIV. — 1. How long did the wars of the roes last? What of the Earl 
of Warwick? 2. When was Edward IV. made king? What did Warwick do? What 
was he called? How was he killed? When did the party of the white roses flourish 
again? 4. What of Et'ward T V. ? 5. How did he treat his brother? 


236 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


Crookback, Duke of Gloucester. Most historians say, that ne was a 
horrible figure to look at, having a hump-back, a withered arm, and 
a very ugly face. This frightful personage was determined to make 
himself king. 

7. He took care that the little king Edward and his brother should 
lodge in the tower of London. One night, while the two children 
were sound asleep in each other’s arms, some villains came and 
smothered them with the bolsters of the bed. They were buried 



at the foot of a staircase. So Richard Crookback, the murderer, be- 
came king of England. He committed a thousand crimes for the 
sake of getting the crown, but he did not keep it long. 

8. Henry Tudor, the young earl of Richmond, was now the only 
remaining heir of king Henry the Sixth. The French supplied him 
with the means of making war against Richard Crookback. He 
landed in England, and gained a victory at Bosworth. 

9. When the soldiers of Richmond examined the dead bodies that 
lay in heaps on the battle-field, they found the hump-backed Richard 
among them, with the golden crown upon his head. They put it on 
the head of Richmond, and hailed him king Henry the Seven thr 

10. The new king married a daughter of Edward the Fourth; and 
at their wedding, they each wore a red rose intertwined with a white 
one ; for the wars of the roses were now over at last. 


6. When did he die ? What children did he leave ? Describe Richard Crookback ? 7 
What cruelty did he commit ? Did he become king ? 8. Who gained the battle of Bos 
worth ? 9. Where was Richard found ? 10. Who did Henry VII. marry i Why w**« 

the wars of the roses now at an end ? 


ENGLAND 


23 ? 


CHAPTER CXLV.— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

Reigns of the Tudor Princes . 



Richard Crookback. 



Henry VIII. 


1. Henry the Seventh (the former earl of Itichmond) began his 
reign in 1485. He was a crafty king, and cared much more" for his 
own power and wealth than for'the happiness of his subjects. But, 
for his own sake, he desired to reign peaceably, without foreign wars 
or civil commotions. 

2. During his reign, two impostors appeared in England, each of 
whom pretended that he had a better right to the crown than Henry 
the Seventh had. One was Lambert Simnel, the son of a baker; but 
he called himself a nephew of Edward the Fourth. The other was 
Perkin Warbeck, the son of a Flemish butcher. He pretended to be 
one of the little princes whom Richard Crookback had smothered in 
the tower. 

3. Many knights and noblemen of England were led into rebellion 
by each of these impostors. But finally they were both taken prison- 
ers. Perkin Warbeck was hanged, and Lambert Simnel was set to 
washing dishes in the king’s kitchen. 

4. Henry the Seventh died in 1509. He had been a g lover of 
money, and put all that he could lay his hands on into his own purse. 
A sum equal to fifty millions of dollars was found in his palace, after 
fiis death. 

5. His son, Henry the Eighth, began to reign at the age of eighteea. 
He was a haughty, stern, hard-hearted, and tyrannical king. When- 
ever he got angry, and that was not seldom, the heads of some of his 
subjects were sure to be cut off. This royal villain had six wives. 


Ch. CXLV. — 1. When did Henry VII. begin to reign ? What of him? 2. What of 
two impostors ? Their names? Whom did they pretend to be ? 3. What became of them ? 
1. What of the riches of Henry VII. ? 6. When did Henry VHI. begin to reign? What 
•I him ? W bat of his wi* ? 



238 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


One died a natural death ; he was divorced from two, cut off the 
heads of two others, and one outlived him. 

6 The reign of Henry the Eighth was chiefly remarkable on ac- 
count of the Reformation in England. By this term is meant the 
substitution of the Protestant religion for the Roman Catholic. Until 
this period, the pope of Rome had claimed authority over England. 

7. But Henry the Eighth took all the power to himself. If any of 
his subjects dared to have a religion unlike the king’s, they were eith- 
er beheaded or burnt. The king was so proud of his religious char- 
acter, that he called himself Defender of the Faith ! 

8. The old tyrant died in 1547, at the age of fifty-six. One of his 
last acts was to cause the earl or Surrey to be beheaded, although he 
was guilty of no crime; and with that innocent blood upon his soul, 
king Henry the Eighth was summoned to the judgment-seat. 

9. His son, Edward the Sixth, was but nine or ten years old when 
he ascended the throne. He was a fine and promising boy, but lived 
only to the age of sixteen. His sister Mary succeeded him in 1553. 

10. She bears the dreadful title of Bloody Queen Mary. She was 
blinded by the errors of the age, and being a Roman Catholic, she 
caused persons to be burnt alive who denied the authority of the 
pope. Many bishops and godly ministers thus perished at the stake. 

11. But, even in the midst of the flames, they were happier than 
Queen Mary. It seemed as if a fire were consuming her miserable 
heart. She knew that everybody hated her, and, after a reign of only 
five years, she died of mere trouble and anguish of mind. 


CHAPTER CXLVI.— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

The Reign of Elizabeth . 

1. The famous Elizabeth, sister to the Bloody Mary, became queen 
in 1558. She was a Protestant, and therefore there were no more 
martyrdoms in England. She was, however, very hard and cruel to 
those who held a different faith from her own. 

2. Elizabeth, however, in all that related to the power of England 
was truly a great queen, and the nation was never more respected 
than while this mighty woman held the sceptre in her hand. But 
she possessed hardly any of the kindly virtues that a woman ought 
to have. Yet she prided herself greatly on her beauty. 

3. Many princes and great men desired to marry Elizabeth ; but she 
chose to remain sole mistress of her person and her kingdom. And 
as she herself refused to take a husband, it made her very angiy 
whenever any of the ladies of her court got married. 

6. What great event occurred in this reign ? What is meant by the Reformation ? Who 
had claimed authority over England? 7. Why was the king called Defender of the Faith? 
8. When did Kenry VIII. die? What was the last act of his reign ? 9. What of Edward 
VI. ? When did Mary begin to reign ? 10. Why is she called Bloody Mary? 11. How 

loug did she reten ? Ch. CXLVI. — 1. When did Elizabeth ascend the throne ? What 
was her religion* 2. What of her ? 3. Why did she not marry ? What made her angry ? 


ENGLAND 


239 


4. Philip the Second of Spain asked her hand in marriage. On hei 
refusal, he sent his Invincible Armada to invade England. But a storm 
destroyed part of the ships, and the English fleet conquered the re- 
mainder. 



Bloody Mary. Elizabeth. 


5. Some of the actions of queen Elizabeth were almost as bad as 
those of old Harry, her father. When Mary, thp beautiful queen of 
Scots, fled into England for protection, she caused her to be imprison- 
ed eighteeen years. And after those long and weary years, the poor 
queen was tried and condemned lo die. 

6. Elizabeth was resolved upon her death, but she was loth to in- 
cur the odium of such a crime. She therefore endeavored to per- 
suade the jailer to murder her. But, as he steadfastly refused, Eliza- 
beth signed the death-warrant, and the unfortunate Mary was be- 
headed. 

7. When queen Elizabeth grew old, she could not bear to look at 
her gray hairs, and withered and wrinkled visage, in a glass. Her 
maids of honor, therefore, had all the trouble of dressing her. Part 
of their business was to paint her face. The queen of course expect- 
ed them to make her cheeks look red and rosy. 

8. But, instead of putting the red paint on her cheeks, these mis- 
chievous maids of honor used sometimes to put it all upon her nose. 
So they set this great queen on her throne, in the presence of her court, 
with her nose as bright as if it had caught fire. 

9. The courtiers often made a fool of Elizabeth by pretending to be 
in love with her, even when she was old enough to be their grand- 
mother. Among others, the earl of Essex paid his addresses to her, 
and became her chief favorite. But, at last, he offended her, and was 
sentenced to lose his head. 

4 What of Philip of Spain ? What of the Invincible Armada ? 5. What was one of the 
worst actions of queen Elizabeth? What was the fate of Mary queen of Scots? 7, 9. 
What trick did the maids of honor put upon queen Elizabeth ? 9. What of the earl of Essex? 


240 


SCHOOL HISTORY 


10. When the earl of Essex was dead and gone, queen Elizabeth 
bitterly repented of her cruelty. She was now very old, and she 
Knew that nobody loved her, and there were none that she could love. 
She pined away, and never held up her head again ; and in her seven- 
tieth year she died. 

11. The bishops, and the wise and learned men of her court, came 
to look at her dead body. They were sad, for they doubted whether 
England would ever be so prosperous again, as while it was under the 
government of this mighty queen. And, in truth, of all the monarchs 
who have held the sceptre since that day, there has not been one who 
could sway it like the gray-haired woman, whose spirit had now 
passed into eternity. 


CHAPTER CXLVII.— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

Accession of the House of Stuart. 



1 Elizabeth was succeeded by James Stuart, king of Scotland. 
He was the sixth James that had ruled over that kingdom, but was 
James the First of England. He began to reign in 1603. James in- 
herited the English crown, because he was the grandson of a da ugh 
ter of Henry the Seventh. His mother was Mary, queen of Scots 
whom Elizabeth had beheaded. 

2. The whole island of Great Britain was now under the sam 

f overnment. This event put an end to the wars which had raged 
etween England and Scotland during many centuries. But it was a 


10. How did Elisabeth feel after his death? 11. How did the great men of the court 
fee! when (hey saw Elizabeth’s dead body? What may be said of her government* 
Lh. CALVII.— 1 . When did James I. begin to reign ? Who was he? 2. What put a* 
etd to the wars between England and Scotland ? r 


ENGLAND. 


an 

long time before the English and Scotch could live ogethei like 
brethren. 

3. As for king James, he was much fitter for a schoolmaster than 
for a king. He had a good deal of learning, and wrote several books. 
He delighted to talk Hebrew, and Greek, and Latin ; and his courtiers 
were often puzzled to understand him. 

4. James thought himself as wise as Solomon ; and it must be own- 
ed that he possessed a sort of cunning, which greatly resembled wis- 
dom. This was seen in his discovery of the Gunpowder Plot. Some 
misguided Catholics had laid a plan to blow up the parliament house, 
at a time when the king, the lords, and all the members of parlia- 
ment, would be assembled there. If it had succeeded, the whole 
government of England would have been destroyed. 

5. But king James smelled out the plot. He set people on the 
watch, and they caught a man by the name of Guy Fawkes, in a cel- 
lar, where thirty-six barrels of gunpowder were concealed. Fawkes 
told the king the names of eighty of his accomplices. He and they 
were all put to death. 

6. James had one good quality which Kings have not very often 
possessed. He hated war. His reign was therefore peaceable. He 
died in 1625, and was succeeded by Charles the First, his son. 

7. It was easy to foresee that this king would have a more trouble- 
some reign than his father. There were now many Puritans in Eng- 
land. These people were opposed to the Church of England, to the 
bishops, and to all the ceremonies which had not been cast off when 
the Roman Catholic faith was abolished. 

8. They likewise thought that the kings of England had too much 
power. They were determined that, thenceforward, the king should 
not reign merely for his own pleasure and glory, but for the good of 
the people. 'Charles, on the other hand, seemed to think that the 
common people were created only that kings might have subjects to 
rule over. 

9. In the early part of his reign, the king persecuted the Puritans. 
He would not allow the Puritan ministers to preach, nor the people 
to attend their meetings. Their sufferings were great, although the 
king dared not burn them, as the bloody queen Mary would have 
done. 

10. Many of them crossed the ocean, and sought religious freedom 
in New England. John Hampden, John Pyne, and Oliver Cromwell 
were once on the point of coming to this country. But the king pre- 
vented them, and these three persons afterwards became his most 
powerful enemies. 

3. What of king James? 4. What plot had the Roman Catholics laid? 5. How did 
James discover the plot? What of Guy Fawkes ? 6. What good quality did James pos- 
sess? When did he die ? Who succeeded him ? 7. What of the Puritans? 8. What did 
they think? What of Charles? 9 How did he treat the Puritans ? 10. What did many 

of them do ? What of three principal enemies of Charles ? 

Q 21 


242 


SCHOOL HISTORY 


CHAPTER CXLVIII. — EUROPE CONTINUED. 

Wars of the King and Parliament. 



Oliver Cromwell. Charles II. 


1. Till the reign of Charles the First, the English parliament had 
hardly ever dared to oppose the wishes of the king. But now there 
were continual disputes between the king and parliament. And if 
Charles dissolved one parliament, the next was sure to be still more 
obstinate. 

2. Matters went on in this way, till at length the quarrel grew too 
violent to be settled by mere words. Both parties then betook them- 
selves to their weapons. The king was supported by a great major- 
ity of the lords and gentlemen of England and Scotland, and by all 
the bishops and clergy of the English church. All the gay and wild 
young men in the kingdom likewise drew their swords for the crown. 
The whole of king Charles’ party were called cavaliers. 

3. Some of the noblemen and gentry took the side of the parlia 
ment ; but its adherents were chiefly mechanics, tradesmen, and com- 
mon people. Because their hair was cropped close to their skulls, 
their enemies gave them the nickname of roundheads. The cavaliers 
dressed magnificently, and wore long hair, hanging in love-locks down 
their temples. They drank wine, and sang songs, and rode merrilv 
to the battle-field. 

4. The roundheads wore steeple-crowned hats and sadcolored gar 
ments. They sang nothing but psalms, and spent much of theii 
leasure time in praying and hearing sermons. They were a stern 
and resolute set of men, and when once they had made up tneif 

Ch. CXLVIII. — 1. What of the parliaments during the reign of Charles I. ? 2. Hoy? 
Was the king supported ? What were the king’s partycalled ? 3. Who were on Iho side 

of the parliament ? Describe the cavaliers ? 4. What of the roundheads ? 


ENGLAND. 243 

minds to tear down the throne, it must be done, though the realm of 
England should be rent asunder in the struggle. 

5. The civil war between the cavaliers and roundheads began m 
1642. Many battles were fought, and rivers of English blood were 
shed on both sides. 

6. It was not long before Oliver Cromwell began to be a famous 
leader, on the side of the parliament. He pretended to fight only for 
religion and the good of the people. But he was an ambitious man, 
and meant to place himself in the king’s empty seat. 

7. Cromwell gained one battle after another, and rose from step to 
step, till there was no man so powerful and renowned as he. Final- 
l y, in 1645, he defeated the king’s army at the bloody battle of Nase- 
by. King Charles afterwards surrendered himself to the Scots, and 
they delivered him to the parliament. 

8. The parliament brought the king to trial as a traitor. The court 
that tried him consisted of a hundred and thirty-three persons. They 
declared him guilty, and sentenced him to lose his head. When the 
people of England heard the sentence, they trembled. 

9. For it was a great and terrible thing, that their anointed sover- 
eign should die the death of a traitor. Many kings, it is true, had 
died by the hands of their enemies, but it had always been in dark- 
ness and secrecy. But king Charles was tried and condemned in the 
face of all the world. 

10. On the thirtieth of January, 1649, they brought the king from 
his palace to the scaffold. It was covered with black cloth. In the 
centre of the scaffold stood a block, and by the block stood an execu- 
tioner, with an axe in his hand, and a black mask over his face. 

11. The steel-clad soldiers of Cromwell surrounded the scaffold. 
But the king walked to his death with as firm a step as when he 
went to his coronation. “ They have taken away my corruptible 
crown,” said he, “ but I go to receive an incorruptible one.” 

12. When king Charles had knelt down and prayed, he cast a 
pitying glance upon the people round the scaffold; for he feared that 
direful judgments would come upon the land which was now to be 
stained with its monarch’s blood. 

13. Bui, as he saw that his enemies were resolved to slay him, he 
calmly laid his head upon the block. The executioner raised his axe, 
and smote off the king’s head at a single blow. Then lifting it in 
his hand, he cried aloud, — “ This is the head of a traitor !” But the 
people shuddered ; for they doubted whether it was the head of a 
traitor, and they knew that it was the head of a king. 

6. What war began in 1642 ? 6. What of Oliver Cromwell ? 7. When was the battle 
of Nassby fought? 8. What was done to king Charles? How did the people feel when 
he was sentenced to death? 10. 11. 12. 13. Describe the execution of Charles J, In what 
fear did it take place ? 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


m 


CHAPTER CXLIX.— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

The Protectorate and the Restoration. 

1. And now the throne of England was empty. The king, indeed, 
\ad left a son, but if he had shown himself in London, he would 
sx>n have died the same death as his father. The young prince was 
s.efeated in battle, and compelled to flee. At one time, his enemies 
pressed him so hard, that he' climbed up among the thick branches 
c.-f an oak, and thus saved his life. 

2. The government, at this period, was called a republic. There 
was no king, no lords, no bishops, nothing but the House of Com- 
mons, or the lower House of Parliament. All the real power of the 
kingdom was possessed by Oliver Cromwell, because he was at the 
head of the army. 

3. ISo sooner did the parliament dare to oppose Cromwell’s wishes, 
than he led three hundred soldiers into the hall where they were 
sitting. He told the parliament men that they were a pack of 
traitors, and bade them get out of the house. When they were 
gone, he summoned another parliament. The principal man in it 
was called Praise-God Barebone. This name sounded so well, that 
it was bestowed on the whole parliament. 

4. But Praise-God Barebone’s parliament did not keep together a 
great while. At the end of five months they besought Cromwell to 
send them about their business, and take the government into his 
own hands. This was just what Cromwell wanted. 

5. In 1654, he was proclaimed Lord Protector of the Common- 
wealth of England- He held this high office four years. He was a 
sagacious and powerful ruler, and made himself feared and respected, 
both in England and foreign countries. 

6. But he had no peace nor quiet as long as he lived. He con- 
stantly wore iron armor under his clothes, dreading that some of his 
joemies would attempt to stab him. He never enjoyed any quiet 
sleep, for the thought always haunted him, that conspirators might 
be hidden in the closet or under the bed. 

7. Cromwell was released from this miserable way of life by a 
slow fever, of which he died in 1658, at the age of fifty-nine. His 
son Richard succeeded him in the office of Lord Protector ; but he had 
not ability enough to Keep the kingdom in subjection. 

8. Richard Cromwell soon resigned his office, and the government 
then became unsettled. The people began to think that England 
would never be prosperous again, unless the hereditary sovereigns 
were re-established on the throne. 


Ch. CXLIX.— 1. What of king Charles’s son ? 2. What was the government called at 
this time ? Who had all the power ? 3. Describe the dispersing of the parliament by 
Cromwell? What parliament was then called ? What of it? 5. When was Cromwell 
proclaimed Lord Protector ? How long did he hold the office? What was his character? 
6. What fears deprived him of peace ? 7. When did he die ? Who succeeded him ? 8. 
What of Kichard Cromwell ? 


ENGLAND 


245 


9. The man who had most influence in the army, after Oliver 
Cromwell’s death, was General George Monk. He invit-ed the eldest 
son of Charles the First to return to England, promising that the 
soldiers would assist in making him king. 

10. The banished prince had been living in different parts of 
Europe, and was reduced to great poverty. He lost no time in coining 
to England, and entered London in triumph. At sight of their new 
king, it seemed as if the people were mad with joy. He was 
crowned in 1660, by the title of Charles the Second. 

11. Many of the persons who had assisted in dethroning and be- 
heading the king’s father were hanged. The body of Oliver Crom- 
well was taken out of the grave and hung upon the gallows, and 
afterwards buried beneath it. Yet it would have been well for 
England, if that stern but valiant ruler could have come to life again. 


CHAPTER CL. — EUROPE CONTINUED 

The Revolution of 1688 , and other matters . 



James II. 



Queen Anne. 


1. Charles the Second had lived a careless and viscious life during 
his banishment, and his habits did not improve now that he was on 
the throne. He spent whole days and nights in drinking wine, and 
in all sorts of profligate pleasures. 

2. In the year 1665, there was a great plague in London, of which 
nearly a hundred thousand persons died. The next year, a terrible 
fire broke out. which consumed a great part of the city. But neither 
of these calamities made any impression on the king. 


9. What did General Monk do ? 10. What of the banished prince ? When was Charlei 

II. crowned? 11. What of the body of Cromwell? Ch. CL.— 1. What of Charles il 
during hu banishment ( 2. What of the plague ? What of a great fire ? 


246 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


3. He suffered the nation to be ruled by unprincipled and wicked 
men. It was safer to be wicked, in those days, than to be virtuous 
and upright. Virtue and religion were looked upon as treason, in 
the reign of Charles the Second. This good-for-nothing monarch 
died, in the midst of his drunkenness and debauchery, in the year 
1685. His brother sacceed him, and was called James the Second. 

4. James was a Roman Catholic ; and, from the moment that he 
ascended the throne, he thought of nothing but how to bring Great 
Britain again under the power of the pope of Rome. This project 
rendered him hateful to his subjects. 

5. He had not been on the throne more than three years, when 
some of the greatest men in England determined to get rid of him. 
They invited William, Prince of Orange, to come over from Holland 
and be their king. 

6. This prince had no title to the crown, except that he married 
the daughter of James the Second. But no sooner had he landed in 
England, than all the courtiers left king James, and hurried to pay 
obeisance to the Prince of Orange. He and his wife were crowned 
in 1689, as king William and queen Mary. James had made his 
escape into France. Some of his adherents endeavored to set him on 
the throne again, but without success. 

7. This change of government of which I have been speaking, is 
generally called the glorious revolution of 1688. Some regulations 
were now adopted, in order to restrain the royal power. 

8. King William was very fond of hunting, and this amusement 
hastened his death. He was thrown from his horse in the year 1702, 
and died in about a month. His queen had died some years before 
him. 

9. Anne, another daughter of the banished James, now ascended 
the throne. The reign of this queen was a glorious one for England. 
The renowned Duke of Marlborough gained many splendid victories 
over the French. But the chief glory of the age proceeded from the 
great writers who lived in her time. 

10. Queen Anne reigned twelve years, and died in 1714, at the age 
of forty-nine. She was the last sovereign of England who belonged 
to the family of the Stuarts, which, as you remember, began to reign 
in England in 1603. 


3. What was the state of morals and religion during this reign ? When did he die ? 
Who succeeded him ? 4. What did James wish to do ? 5. What did some of the o-reat 
« t en do? Whom did they invite from Holland? 6. What title had William to the 
throne? When was he crowned? What of king James? 7. What of the revolution 
of 1688? 8. When did William die? 9. What of Anne? Her reign •* What of the 
Puke of Marlborough ? What was the chief glory of Anne’s reign ? 10. When did Anne 

die ? When did the Stuarts begin to reign ? 


ENGLAND. 


347 


CHAPTER CLI. — EUROPE CONTINUED. 

The Hanoverian King's of Great Britain. 



George I. George IV. 


1. The old banished king James had died in France, in the year 
1701. He left a son, whom Louis the Fourteenth caused to be pro- 
claimed king of England. But the English people called him the 
Pretender. They were determined not to have a Roman Catholic 
king. The nearest Protestant heir to the throne was the elector of 
Hanover, a German prince, whose mother wt.s a granddaughter of 
James the First. He was now about fifty-five years old. 

2. This old German elector was proclaimed king of England, by 
the title of George the First. With him began the dynasty of the 
House of Hanover. He could not speak a word of English, and knew 
nothing about the kingdom which he was to govern. 

3. He spent much of his time in his native country, for he dearly 
loved Hanover, and could never feel at home in the palace of the 
English kings. He died in 1727, and was succeeded by his son. 
George the Second, who was likewise a native of Germany. 

4. "During part of George the Second’s reign, England was at war 
with Spain and France. The king commanded his army in person. 
The English were victorious in the battle of Dettingen, but they lost 
the battle of Fontenoye. 

5. In 1745, the grandson of James the Second attempted to wm 
back the crown of his ancestors. He landed in Scotland, and marched 
jito England with a small army of Scotch mountaineers. But he 

Ch. CLI. — 1. When and where had James II. died ? What did the English call James’* 
jon ; Whc was the nearest heir to the throne? 2. Who was George I . What of him ? 
3. When did George II. come to the throne ? 4. With what countries was England at war 
during this reig& W^hat battle did the English gain ? What did they lose * 


248 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


was at last defeated, and forced to fly ; and many of his adherents 
were beheaded or hanged. 

6. In 1755, another war began between the French and English, 
and some of their principal battles were fought in America. The 
city of Quebec and the Canadas were conquered by the English 
during this war. Shortly after this event, George the Second died, 
at the age of seventy-seven. 

7. His grandson, George the Third, began to reign in 1760, when 
he was about twenty-one years old. No king ever ascended the 
throne with better prospects. Yet so many misfortunes befell him, 
that it would have been far better for him to have died on his cor- 
olla t ion day. 

8. George the Third was a man of respectable common sense. In 
his pr ; ate conduct he was much better than the generality of kings. 
But ! e was very obstinate, and often would not take the advice of 
men wiser than himself. Had he done so, it is probable that the 
American Revolution would not have have happened in his reign. 

9. I shall speak of this great event hereafter. The loss of America, 
together with many other troubles, contributed to drive George the 
Third to madness. His first fit of derangement happened in 1788, 
and lasted several months. 

10. In 1805, he had another turn, and a third in 1810. From this 
latter period, he continued a madman till his dying day. While the 
armies of England were gaining glorious victories, and grand events 
were continually taking place, the poor old crazy king knew nothing 
of the matter. Death released him from this miserable condition, in 
the eighty-second year of his age. 

11. The son of the old king was very wild in his youth, and lie 
never became a really good man. He had been declared Prince 
Regent in consequence of his father’s insanity. In 1820, he was 
crowned as king George the Fourth. 

12. Even when he was quite an old man, this king cared as much 
about dress as any young coxcomb. He had a great deal of taste in 
such matters, and it is a pity that he was a king, because he might 
otherwise have been an excellent tailor. 

13. During his regency and reign, England combated the power of 
Bonaparte. With her gigantic power, and aided by the other king- 
doms of Europe, that famous conqueror was finally overthrown. The 
other events of king George’s reign are so recent, that they scarcely 
yet belong to history. He died in 1830, and was succeeded by hi» 
brother, William the Fourth ; he died in 1837, and was succeeded by 
Victoria, the present queen. 


5. What took place in 1745 ? 6. What of the war in 1755 ? What of Quebec and the 
Canadas? 7. When did George III. begin to reign? 8. Character of George III. ? 9 
What happened to him ? 18. What of his insanity ? When did he die ? 11. When was 

George IV. crowned ? 12 . What of his taste in dress ? 13. What events took place during 

his reign ? When did he die ? Who succeeded him ? 


WALES. 


249 


CHAPTER CLII.— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

The Story of Wales. 


1. If you ever go to Wales and mingle with the people, you will 
hardly believe that you are in any part of Great Britain. The names 
of the inhabitants are very different from English names. What 
would you think of Mr. Llewellyn ap Griffith ap Jones, and Mrs. 
Catesby ap Catesby ? Yet such names are common in Wales. 

2. Some of the people speak English, but most of them use the 
same language that was spoken by their ancestors. It is nearly the 
same as the original language of Ireland and the Highlands of Scot- 
land. This seems to show that the people are of the same stock as 
the Irish and the Scotch Higlanders. 

3. The early history of Wales is involved in obscurity. When the 
Romans came to Britain, the Welsh mountains were inhabited by a 
rough set of people, who gave terrible blows with their clubs. They 
defended their mountains so fiercely, that the Romans never got pos- 
session of the country. 

4. When the Saxons came, they subdued all England, and a small 
portion of Wales ; but the greater part held out against them to the 
last. Thus the Welsh princes maintained their independence, as 
well against the Roman as the Saxon invaders. These princes ap- 
pear to have lived in strong stone castles, which, in time of war, were 
defended by the people around them. The ruins of some of these 
castles are still to be seen. 

5. In these ancient times there was a strange set of men in Wales, 
called bards. These sung songs and told stories about the brave 
deeds of the Welsh princes and heroes. The people loved to listen to 
these men, for their tales related to fierce war and bloody battles, of 
which such rude nations are ever fond. 

6. Some of these bards had a wonderful gift for singing and story- 
telling. These were often taken into the castles of the princes, and 
here they led a merry life, between singing and feasting. In order to 
keep up their influence they pretended to be prophets, and both the 
people and the princes believed they could foretell future events. 
Perhaps, too, the bards believed it themselves, for nothing is more 
easy than self-deception. At all events, the people paid them the 
greatest reverence. 

7. There is nothing so troublesome to a king as a tribe of people 
maintaining their independence in his neighborhood. His pride is 
mortified, his indignation roused, by seeing people thus set up for 
themselves. He thinks everybody ought to bow to power, and feels 
toward them very much as an old hunter does towards a family of 


Ch. CLII. — 1. What of the names in Wales ? 2. Their language ? Of what stock are 
the Welsh people ? 3. What of the early history of Wales ? The ancieut inhabitants ? 
< What of the Saxons? What of the Welsh princes? 5. 6. What of the bard ? 


250 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


wolves cr foxes, that persist in living among the rocks near him, in 
spite of all his efforts to kill them. 

8. So it was with the kings of England with regard to Wales. 
With a view therefore to subdue these Welsh wolves and foxes ol 
the mountains, they sent a great many armies against them. But 
the mountaineers were too cunning to be caught, until about the 
year 1285. Edward the first was then king of England, and Llewellyn 
prince of Wales. 

9. The bards were always great lovers of hard fighting, and there 
fore they incited the Welsh princes to the boldest deeds. Llewellyn 
had been told by one of these bards, that he should become master ol 
the whole island of Britain. 

10. Accordingly', when the army of Edward the First came against 
him, he rashly led his little army against the English, and was de- 
feated and slain. He was succeeded by his brother David, but he 
too was taken and hung on a gibbet, for the crime of bravely defend- 
ing his country. 

11 King Edward was very angry at the bards for stirring up the 
people to resist his arms. He therefore caused them all to be as- 
sembled and put to death. These acts did not make the king a 
favorite, but the next king was born in Wales, and received the title 
of Prince of Wales. They appear to have liked him a little better. 
From this time, the eldest son of the king of England has been called 
Prince of Wales. 

16. Thus, with the death of David, ended the line of Welsh 
princes, and thus ended the independence of Wales. Since that time, 
the Welsh have been a part of the British nation, and they now 
weave stockings and dig coal and iron, instead of fighting, as their 
fathers did in the times of Llewellyn. 


CHAPTER CLIIL— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

The Story of Scotland . 

1. The first inhabitants of Scotland appear to have been Celts, and 
probably were the same as the early Britons, Welsh, and Irish. They 
defended themselves against the Romans, who could never subdue 
the people of the Highlands. They were so troublesome that the 
Roman generals caused a wall to be built from the Solway Frith to 
the river Tyne. 

2. Thus the Scots were shut up in their own country, like a herd 
of unruly cattle; but they contrived to get over the wall pretty often. 

7. What is very troublesome to a king? 8. What did the kings of England do ? Who 
was Prince of Wales in 1295? 9. What did the bards dof What did one of them 
tell Llewellyn ? 10. What did Llewellyn do? His fate? Who defeated him ? What 

of his brother David? 11. What did king Edward do to the bards? Where was the next 
king of England born ? 12. Since when have the Welsh become a part of the British 

nation? What of the Welsh people now? Ch. CLIIL— 1. What of the first inhabitants 
of Scotland ? What did the Roman generals do ? 


SCOTLAND. 


251 

In three or four hundred years after Christ, a tribe of Goths, called 
Piets, came over from the continent, and settled in this country. 
These inhabited the Lowlands, and lived by agriculture. The 
Scots dwelt in the mountains, carrying on war, and subsisting by the 
chase. 



3. Thus the nation became divided into Highlanders and Lowlan- 
ders, and thus, to some extent, the people remain to this day. They 
live peaceably now, but in early days, they quarrelled very fiercely, I 
cannot undertake to tell you of their battles, and indeed we know 
but little about them. 

4. In 839, it is said that Kenneth the Second, who was a Highland 
leader, subdued the Piets, and became the first king of all Scotland. 
From his time to Edward the First of England, there were a good 
many sovereigns, but their story is not worth repeating. 

5. I have told you in the history of England, how Edward Long- 
shanks, the same that subdued* Wales, made war upon the Scotch, 
imprisoned Wallace, and had prepared a great army for the final 
subjugation of the Scotland, when he died. I have told you how his 
son, Edward the Second, was beaten by Robert Bruce at the glorious 
battle of Bannockburn. This event occurred in 1313, and secured 
the freedom of Scotland, which had been threatened by the English 
kings. 

6. From this time the history of Scotland tells of little but civil 
wars and bloody battles with England, till the time of James the 
Fifth. He assumed the reins of government in 1513, at the age of 
thirteen years. He lost the confidence of his array, and they deserted 
him in the hour of need. This broke his heart, and he starved him- 
self to death, at the age of thirty-one. 


2. What of the Piets ? The Scots ? 3. How was the nation divided r How did they 
live in the early times ? 4. Who was king of Scotland in 839 * 5. What can you tell of 
Edward Longshanks ? Of Edward II. ? When was the battle of Bannockburn ? Its 
effects? 6. How long were the Scots at war with the English? When did James V. 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


7. His daughter was the beautiful and unfortunate Mary, queen of 
Scots, as she is called, and whom I have mentioned in the history of 
England. She was educated in France, and was not only very hand- 
some, but she was very accomplished. While she was yet a young 
ladv, she was takeu to Scotland and became queen. 

8. But beauty, accomplishments, and power, cannot insure happi- 
ness. Mary’s kingdom was in a state of great trouble ; the people 
were divided among themselves, and Mary found it impossible to 
govern them. At length, she became afraid that they would kill 
her, and, to save her life, she set out for England, and placed herself 
under the protection of Elizabeth. 

9. This was about as wise as it would be in a fly to seek protection 
of a spider. Elizabeth treated Mary very much as a spider would a 
fly who falls into his power. She caused her to be put in prison, and 
finally took her life. 

10. The son of Mary, James Sixth of Scotland, succeeded his 
mother, and after the death of Elizabeth, he became kin" of England 
also, under the title of James the First. Though he lived in England, 
he did not forget Scotland. He loved learning, and caused schools to 
be established in his native country, where all the boys and girls might 
learn to read and write. These schools are continued to this day, 
and therefore it is very uncommon to meet with a Scotchman who is 
not a fair match for a Yankee. 

11. From the time of King James, in 1603, Scotland h^s been 
attached to the British crown. She has sometimes rebelled, and in 
the cause of the Stuarts she fought a good many battles. But for 
many years, Scotland has been a peaceful portion of the British 
kingdom. 


CHAPTER CL.IV. -EUROPE CONTINUED. 

About Ireland . 

1. The history of Ireland, or “ Green Erin,” as it is called, is full 
of interesting matter, and I am sorry that I can only bestow upon 
it one brief chapter. The first inhabitants, like the Britons, were 
hard-fisted Celts, who fought with clubs, and seemed to love fighting 
better than feasting. 

2. They were divided into many tribes, and their leaders were 
called kings. These were constantly quarrelling with each other, 
and thus the people had plenty of their favorite sport. The early 
Irish, like the other Celtic tribes, were devoted to the religion of the 
Druids, but about the year 430, a Christian missionary came into the 
country, whose name was Patrick. 


7. 8. 9. Tell the story of Mary of Scotland ? 10. Who succeeded Mary ? What did 

James do ? 11. What of Scotland since 1603? Ch. CLIV. — 1. What is Ireland called^ 
Who were its first inhabitants ? i. What of the Celts ? Religion of the early Irish 
What took place in 430 5 


IRELAND. 


253 


3. He seems to have been a wise and good man, and tne people 
iked him very much. In thirty years he spread Christianity over all 
Ireland, and under its influence the Irish gradually became civilized. 
Patrick lived to a great age, but at length he was buried at Doune. 

4. When he was gone, the people told pretty large stories about 
him, and Anally they considered him more holy than other men, and 
called him a saint. To this day, they regard St. Patrick as in heaven, 
watching over the interests of Ireland. 

5. Among the curious notions still entertained by the Irish with 
regard to St. Patrick, is this. In Ireland there are no serpents or 
venemous reptiles, and the people firmly believe that St. Patrick put 
an end to them, and freed the island from them all for ever ! 

6. In the time of Henry the Second of England, Ireland was con- 
quered, and since that period has been under the English kings, it 
has, however, been very ill governed. King James the First did 
something towards improving the condition of the people, but neither 
he nor any subsequent king has been able to get St. Patrick out of 
their heads. 

7. The saint was a Roman Catholic, and the greater part of the 
people are Catholics to this day. They are dissatisfied with the Eng- 
lish government ; and well they may be, for its conduct has been sel- 
fish, cruel, and unwise. The people have often been in a state of re- 
bellion, and though the leaders are ever crushed by the power of the 
government, still others rise up to head the people. 

8. Thus Ireland has been for years in an almost constant state of 
agitation Thousands of lives have been lost in attempts to obtain 
the freedom of the country, but in vain. The people are thus kept in 
subjection, and generation follows generation, living in wretchedness 
and dying in poverty. It is some consolation to know that such a 
country as America exists, in which the oppressed Irish may find an 
asylum. 


CHAPTER CLV. — EUROPE CONTINUED. 

Matters and Things. 

1. I have now told you something about England, Wales, Scotland, 
and Ireland ; but it is impossible to do justice to so great a subject, in 
this little book. I have told you something about the kings, and the 
battles that have been fought. 

2. But there are a great many interesting stories that I have been 
obliged to omit. If I had time, I could give you a more particular 
account of the Celtic religion taught by the druids, which was very 

3. What of Patrick? What influence civilized the people ? 4. What did the people 

think of Patrick? How do they consider him? How do they honor him? 5. What 
curious notions have the Irish with respect to St. Patrick? 6. When was^ Ireland con- 
tue! , ?(l? How has it since been governed? What of king James I.? 7. What is the re 

ligion of Ireland. Do the people like the government of England? What excites them to 
rebellion ? 8. What is the present state of Ireland ? 

22 


254 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


curious, together with the manners of these Celts in other respects, 
which you would find very amusing. 

3. I could tell you of Odin, or Woden, the Scandinavian hero, who 
established a strange mythology, which pervaded the northern nations 
of Europe, and became, for a time, the religion of some of the inhabi- 
tants of Britain. I could tell you how Christianity was introduced 
into England, sixty years after Christ; and how at first the pec pie 
built rude churches of wood, and how they afterwards constructed 
those fine Gothic buildings in which the people worship now. 


An English church in very early times. 



4. If I had time, I could tell of the Gypseys, a strange race of 
people to be found in most countries of Europe, but particularly in 
England, Spain, Hungary, and Bohemia ; who wander from place to 
place, having no fixed homes ; who come from some far land, but 
whether from Egypt or Asia, none can tell ; who continue from age 
to age the same, while the nations, among which they wander, rise 
and fall, flourish and decay. 

5. If J had time, I. could tell you some curious stories about a fa- 
mous robber by the name of Robin Hood, who lived in the woods, and 
performed strange things. I could also tell you of many celebrated 
people more worthy of being remembered than this freebooter. 

6. I could tell you of Dr. Watts, who wrote that beautiful little 
book entitled Hymns for Infant Minds; a work which has given more 
pleasure, and done more good, than all the battles of the greatest 
conqueror that ever lived. 

7. 1 could tell you of Hannah More, who wrote that beautiful story 
entitled the Shepherd of Salisbury Plain ; of Miss Edgeworth, who 
wrote the story of Frank; and Daniel De Foe, who made up that 
beautiful fancy-story called Robinson Crusoe. 

8. It would be very pleasant to read about these people ; they seem 
like friends to us. and we should like to know where they lived, how 


Ch CLV. — 3. Who was Woden? What did his mythology become ? When was Chris 
tianity introduced into England ? 4. What of the Gypseys ? Where do they live? 5. Wha 
was Robin Hood? 6. What of Dr. Watts? 7. What other celebrated writers could bs 
Mentioned 5 


EUROPE. 


255 


they looked, and what adventures they met with. But tne&e and 
other matters relating to the history of that beautiful and interesting 
country from which our forefathers came, I must leave for the present. 

9. I have then only to add, that while you can read the history of 
the British nation in books, you can best study the character and man- 
ners of the people at home, in their own country. An Englishman is 
very agreeable in his own house ; but out of his country, he is too of- 
ten disagreeable, ill-mannered, and unreasonable. 

10. The Scotch are a shrewd, money-saving race, and if you will 
go to their wild country, and pay well for what you want, you will be 
well served. If a Scotchman leaves his own country, it is to better 
his fortune, and it is best to keep out of his way. He will get what 
he can, and give nothing. He will then go home and laugh at you. 

11. The Irish are much the same, wherever they may be; cheer- 
ful, witty, and generous. They live for to-day, and think little of to- 
morrow. They are generally without education, but if ignorant, they 
are better than most other ignorant people. Let us ever treat them 
kindly. They are of a nation possessing fine qualities, but injured b* 
ages of oppression. Beside, they are rapidly improving now, ar 
their children will be among our best and happiest citizens. 


CHAPTER CLVL— EUROPE CONTINUED. 

Review. The Dark Ages. Important Inventions , Sfc. 

1. Such is my brief story about Europe. I hope 1 have told you 
enough to excite your curiosity, and lead you to read larger works 
than mine, about the nations I have mentioned. You will find the 
subject very interesting, and worthy of your careful study. I have 
room now only to mention a few things that have been omitted in the 
progress of my story. 

2. You will remember that Greece was settled before any other 
portion of Europe, and that the Greeks became a polished and pow- 
erful people. You will remember that Rome became a mighty em- 
pire, and extended its sway over nearly all parts of the world that 
were then known. 

3. .You will remember that four or five hundred years after Christ, 
file Roman empire was dismembered, and that the northern tribes of 
Europe spread themselves over Spain, Italy, and Greece. Thus the 
arts, learning, and refinement, which had been cultivated in these 
countries, were for a time extinguished, and ail Europe was reduced 
to a nearly barbarous state. 

4. This period is called the Dark Ages, because the nations were 
generally ignorant, fierce, and barbarous. So things continued, till 
about five hundred years ago, when the light of learning began to re- 

9. What of Englishmen ? 10. What of the Scotch ? 11. What of the Irish ? Ch. CLVI, 
—2 Which of tiie nations of Europe was first settled * What of Rome ? 3 What hap- 
pened four or five hundred years after Christ? 


256 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


turn. Since that time, society has advanced in civilization, till it has 
reached a higher state of improvement than was ever known before. 

5. The history of the church of Christ is a subject at which I have 
been able only to take an occasional glance. After our Saviour’s 
death, in the year 33, his apostles proceeded to spread the Gospel 
throughout different countries. Paul was the most active and suc- 
cessful of these missionaries. He went several times through Asia 
Minor, travelled to Greece, and finally to Rome ; everywhere preach- 
ing the truths of the Christian religion. He died at Rome A. D. 61. 

6. At first, the Christians were persecuted by the Roman emperors, 
but the Gospel continued to flourish, until it pervaded most parts of 
the Roman empire. It was introduced into Britain in the year 60, 
and into most other parts of Europe at an early period. But it was 
not till the year 306, when Constantine adopted it, that it found favor 
with any king or prince in Europe. 

7. From this period it advanced rapidly. The mythology of 
Greece and Rome gave way before it. The horrid sacrifices and 
gloomy superstitions of the druids yielded to the gentle worship of 
one God, and the mysterious rites of Odin were forsaken for the reli- 
gion of the Cross. 

8. The popes of Rome succeeded in placing themselves at the head 
of the Christian religion, thereby obtaining a controlling influence over 
mankind. They gradually acquired an immense power, which, mis- 
led by the spirit of the time, they often used improperly. 

9. In process of time, their authority was lessened, and a large part 
of the people of Christendom protested against their authority, and 
were thence called Protestants. At the present day, the pope of 
Rome has but little power, and the catholic church, which, like other 
religious communities in the dark ages, was addicted to persecution, 
has ceased thus to exercise its authority. The popes of modern times 
have been distinguished for their piety. 

10. I have mentioned the Inquisition, in the history of Spain. This 
was a secret court, whose business it was to arrest and bring to trial 
those who were suspected of not being true followers of the Catholic 
religion, which was believed to be the only sound faith. 

11. It appears that this institution was sanctioned by pope Inno- 
cent III., in the year 1215. From that time, it was gradually ex- 
tended, and at length was established in Spain, 1481 . Here it acquired 
great power, and became the most cruel and bloody tribunal on earth. 

12. It was for many years a favorite instrument by which the pope 
of Rome carried on his schemes of tyranny. It was introduced into 
most countries of Europe where the Catholic religion prevailed, but 
n no country did it exercise its terrible power with such cruel despot' 
ism as in Spain. It was not finally abolished till the year 1820. 


4. What period was called the Dark Ages ? How long is it since learning began to re- 
vive ? 5. When did Christ die ? What of the Apostles? Paul? 6. How did the Roman# 
at first treat the Christians? When, was Christianity introduced into Britain? What took 
place in 3(X> ? 7. What of the progress of Christianity? 8. What of the popes? 9. Who 
were called Protestants? What of the pope at present? 10. W r hat was the Inquisition 
11. Bv whom sanctioned ? When ? When established in Spain ? What did u there b® 
come? 12. Where was it introduced? Where was its power most cruelly exercised? 


EUROPE. 


257 


13. I have not had an opportunity to mention the abbeys and mon- 
asteries of Europe. These curious institutions, however, deserve no- 
tice. It appears that in most countries there have ever been some 
people who retire from the active business of life, and shut themselves 
up for religious contemplation. Such has been the case in Asia; and 
among the worshippers of Brama, Fo, Lama, and Mahomet, they are 
still found. Such was also the case among the idolaters of ancient 
Egypt, Greece, and Rome. Such was the case among the ancient 
Jews and such has been the pase among the believers of Christy from 
very early ages. 

14. The first monastery was founded by St. Anthony, in Upper 
Egypt, A. D. 305. This consisted of a number of huts, in which sev- 
eral hermits dwelt, devoting themselves to penance and prayer. 
Another monastery was established in France, in the year 300, by St. 
Martin. From this time, these institutions were multiplied, and be- 
came established in all Catholic countries. From the eighth to the 
fifteenth century, they received great encouragement, and many splen- 
did edifices were erected for their use. 

15. Some were called abbeys, and some monasteries. Many of 
them were filled with monks and friars, and others with females, 
called nuns. The splendid remains of many of these edifices are still 
to be found in England, France, Germany, and other parts of Europe. 
At first, the inhabitants of monasteries lived in a simple manner, and 
devoted themselves to religious contemplations. But in after times 
the abbeys and monasteries became seats of voluptuousness. None 
were permitted to enter them but the monks and nuns ; these, there- 
fore, while they pretended to be engaged in religious duties, screened 
from the eyes of the world, often gave themselves up to luxurious 
pleasures. 

16. These institutions were, however, greatly encouraged by the 
popes; and it was not until the corruptions of the Catholic religion 
brought on the Reformation, in the sixteenth century, that monastic 
institutions began to decline. They were abolished in England in 
1539, and in France in 1790. In several other countries of Europe 
they have ceased, but still continue in Italy and Spain. 

17. In me early ages, war was carried on without guns and cannon. 
The Creeks and ftomans were armed with swords, spears, and bat- 
de-axps, and they carried shields for defence. The troops of Egypt, 
Canhage, and Persia, were armed in a similar manner. In the year 
1 339, gunpowder was invented, and cannon began to be used about 
he same time. They were first employed by the English at the bat- 
le of Cressy in 1346. On that occasion, king Edward had four pieces 
T cannon, which greatly aided in gaining the victory. 

18. From this time, fire-arms were rapidly introduced, and soon the 

13, What appears to be the case in most countries? Mention some instances. 14. Who 
ftundrd the first monastery ? When ? Of what did it consist? When and by whom was a 
monastery established in France ? What of monasteries from this time ? 15. Who inhab- 

ited them? How did the monks and nuns formerly live ? How in later times? _ 16. By 
Whom were these institutions encouraged ? When did monastic institutions begin to de 
Cline ? When were they abolished in England ? In France ? Where do they still exist? 
17 What of war in early times ? Anns ? When was gunpowder invented ? When were 
•anuon first used by the English ? 

It 


259 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


whole art of wai was changed. Bows and arrows, spears and shields* 
were thrown aside, and contending armies, instead of coming up 
close to each other, and fighting face to face, learned to shoot each 
other down at a distance. 

19. One of the greatest discoveries of modem times is that quality 
of the mariner’s compass by which it always points to the north pole. 
This useful instrument, which enables the seaman to traverse the 
trackless deep, appears to have been in use as early as 1 180. 

20. But a still more important invention was that of printing, in 
1441. Previous to that time, all books were written with the pen. 
A copy of the Bible was worth as much in ancient times as a good 
house or a good farm is now. Of course, very few people could learn 
to read for the want of books. If Peter Parley had lived in those 
times., 1 am inclined to think he would have obtained a poor living. 


CHAPTER CLVII.— EUROPE CONTINUED. 
Chronology of Europe . 


b. c. 

Greece founded by Inachus 1856 

Athens founded by Cecrops 1556 

Corinth founded 1520 

Sparta founded by Lelex 1516 

Thebes founded by Cadmus 1500 

Argonautic expedition 1263 

Twelve States of Greece unite 1257 

Siege of Troy 1193 

Phoenicians trade to Spain, about 900 

Homer born about . . . 900 

Lycurgus gives laws to Sparta 884 

Building of Home by Romulus 752 

Numa Pompilius made king of Rome 715 

Tulius Hostilius “ “ “ 672 

Solon lawgiver of Athens 643 

Bias the Greek philosopher flourished 617 

The Celts settled in Bohemia 600 

Death of Tarquin, and his family expelled from Rome . . . 509 

The Carthaginians make conquests in Spain, about .... 500 

Tribunes chosen at Rome 490 

Battle of Marathon 490 

Decemviri chosen at Rome 451 

D eioponnesian war begins 446 


18. What happened from this time ? 19. What is a great discovery of modern times 

When was the mariner’s compass first used ? 20. When was printing invented ? How were 
books formerly made ? 

Ch. CLVII. — Let the teacher examine the pupil carefully in the Chronological table « 
and let him direct the pupil to tell what events were takmg place in Asia and Africa, 
while the several events were occurring in Europe. 


CHRONOLOGY. 


259 


B. C, 

Censors established at Rome 437 

Death of Pericles 429 

General migration of Gauls to different parts of Europe . . 397 

Italy ravaged by the Gauls and Rome taken 396 

Battle of Leuctra 371 

Death of Epaminondas 363 

Theatres established in Rome 361 

War between the Romans and Samnites ....... 343 

Battle of Cheronea 338 

Death of Philip, king of Macedon 336 

Death of Alexander, king of Macedon 323 

Greece subjected by Cassander 322 

Sundial introduced into Rome 312 

Aqueducts built in Rome 311 

The Gauls make destructive incursions into Macedon and 

Greece 280 to 278 

Greece invaded by the Gauls 278 

All Italy submits to Rome 270 

First Punic war begins 264 

Second Punic war begins 218 

Spain subjected to the Roman power 206 

A colony of Belgae settled in Gaul 200 

Greece becomes a Roman province 146 

Carthage destroyed 146 

Spain becomes a province of Rome 134 

The southern part of Gaul along the Mediterranean conquered 

by the Romans 128 to 122 

Social war in Greece begins 91 

War between Marius and Sylla 88 

Pompey defeats Mithridates 63 

Triumvirate formed in Rome 59 

France invaded by Julius Caesar 58 

Switzerland subdued by Caesar 57 

Caesar invades Britain 55 

Battle of Pharsalia and death of Pompey 48 

Death of Caesar 44 

All France finally conquered by the Romans 25 

Hungary, anciently Pannonia, subject to the Romans ... 11 

A. D. 

Death of Augustus Caesar, emperor of Rome 14 

Tiberius emperor of Rome died 37 

Caligula emperor of Rome died 41 

England finally subdued by Claudius a Roman general ... 44 

Claudius ascends the throne 54 

Nero emperor of Rome died 54 

Christianity introduced into England 60 

Hygenus, first bishop of Rome who took the trie of pope . . 154 

Scotland received the Christian faith 203 

The Romans expelled from Germany ........ 290 


260 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


Constantine began to reign . . 306 

Christianity adopted by the emperor of Rome . . . . . 311 

Constantine removes the seat of the Roman Empire to Con- 
stantinople 329 

Rome divided into the Eastern and Western empire by Theodo- 
sius 395 

France invaded by the Goths and other Germanic tribes . . 400 

Rome taken by Alaric 410 

Pharamond a Frank becomes first king of France .... 41P 

Kingdom of the Visigoths founded in Spain 419 

Venice founded 421 

Germany conquered by the Huns 432 

Hungary possessed by the Huns under Attila 433 

Italy invaded by Attila 445 

The Saxons conquer England • . • • 445 

Rome taken by Odoacer 476 

Kingdom of Sweden began 481 

Monarchy of France established 486 

Goths driven from Rome by Belisarius 537 

Patrick visits Ireland 550 

The pope’s supremacy over the Christian church established . 607 

Custom of kissing the pope’s toe introduced 708 

Roderick, king of Spain, defeated by the Moors 712 

The first king reigns in Denmark 714 

Gregory III., founder of the pope’s temporal power, became 

pope 731 

Pepin the Short, first of the Carlovingian race in France . . 751 

The pope’s temporal power established 755 

Charlemagne began to reign in France 772 

Charlemagne crowned at Rome .......... 800 

Charlemagne master of Germany 802 

Venice becomes an independent republic 803 

City of Venice built 809 

Charlemagne died 814 

Egbert I., king of England 827 

Kenneth II., first king of Scotland 839 

Iceland discovered by the Norwegians 860 

Alfred ascends the English throne 872 

The Danes conquer England 877 

Emperors first chosen in Germany 912 

Canute, king of Denmark, conquered England ...... 1016 

Danes driven out of England 1041 

Leo IX., the first pope that kept an army 1054 

Henry IV., emperor of Germany 1056 

Harold became king of England 1066 

William the Conqueror ascends the throne of England . . . 1066 
Henry P\, emperor of Germany, obliged to stand three days at 

the pope’s gate 1077 

Pope's authority introduced into England ....... 1079 


CHRONOLOGY. 


A. D. 

Peter the Hermit heads the first Crusade 1096 

Godfrey of Boulogne takes Jerusalem 1099 

Kingdom of Portugal founded . • • . 1139 

Richard ascends the throne of England 1189 

Chivalry at its height 1200 

Magna Charta granted by king John 1215 

Last Crusade began 1248 

Othman first emperor of Turkey 1268 

Rodolph of Hapsburg governs Austria 1273 

Wales annexed to the crown of England 1283 

Othman empire founded 1299 

Residence of the pope removed to Avignon in France, where it 

remained seventy years 1308 

Battle of Bannockburn 1313 

Battle of Cressy . . . . . 1346 

William Tell died 1354 

Battle of Poictiers . . . 1356 

Norway incorporated with Denmark 1397 

Battle of Agincourt 1420 

Joan of Arc raises the siege of Orleans .••••••• 1428 

The Turks conquer the Eastern empire • . 1453 

Wars of York and Lancaster began 1455 

The Portuguese discover the Cape of Good Hope 1481 

The first court of the Inquisition in Spain 1481 

Richard Crookback king of England died 1485 

America discovered by Columbus • • 1492 

The Moors of Granada driven out of Spain ....... 1492 

The Portuguese discover Brazil . . 1501 

Reformation commenced by Martin Luther ...... 1517 

Gustavus Vasa expelled the Danes from Sweden .... 1525 

Rome sacked and pope Clement imprisoned 1527 

Gustavus Vasa ascended the throne of Sweden 1528 

Pope’s residence removed a second time to Avignon .... 1531 

Henry VIII. of England died 1547 

Bloody Mary, queen of England 1553 

The first czar reigned in Russia 1553 

Elizabeth ascended the throne of England 1558 

Massacre of the Protestants in France 1572 

The republic of Holland founded 1581 

Henry the IV. ascended the throne of France ...... 1589 

James I. ascends the throne of England 1603 

Portugal becomes independent of Spain 1604 

Henry IV. of France, killed by Ravaillac, a Jesuit .... 1610 

Gustavus Adolphus king of Sweden 1611 

The Moors finally expelled from Spain 1620 

Charles I. ascends the throne of England 1625 

Battle of Lutzen and death of Adolphus Gustavus .... 1633 

Civil war began in England between the Cavaliers and Round- 
heads. 1643 


4l_ 

2(52 SCHOOL HI8TORY. 

A.D. 

Charles I. beheaded 1649 

Cromwell made Lord Protector of England 1654 

Charles II. king of England 1660 

Great Plague in London 1665 

Great Fire in London 1666 

The Turks lay siege to Vienna 1688 

William and Mary crowned in England 1689 

Peter the Great begins to reign 1696 

Prussia became a kingdom 1701 

Anne ascended the throne of England 1702 

Peter the Great defeats Charles XII. at Pultowa 1709 

Russia becomes an empire 1721 

Peter the Great died 1725 

Hungary annexed to Germany 1739 

Lisbon destroyed by an earthquake 1755 

War between Austria, Russia, France, and Prussia .... 1756 

George III. king of England 1760 

Partition of Poland 1772 

Kissing the pope’s toe abolished 1773 

Political influence of the popes ceased in Europe 1787 

The Bastile at Paris destroyed 1789 

Execution of Louis XVI., king of France 1793 

Catherine II. of Russia died 1796 

Venice attached to Austria 1798 

Switzerland conquered by the French 1798 

Napoleon took possession of Egypt 1798 

Napoleon gained the battle of Marengo 1800 

Napoleon created emperor of France 1804 

King of Portugal removes to Brazil 1807 

Joachim Murat made king of Sardinia 1808 

Napoleon removes Ferdinand from the throne of Spain . . . 1808 

Austria at war with France 1809 

The city of Moscow burnt 1812 

Norway transferred to Sweden 1814 

Inquisition abolished in Portugal 1815 

Revolution in Portugal 1820 

Inquisition abolished in Spain 1820 

George IV. made king of England 1820 

Greece rises against the Turks 1821 

Death of Lord Byron at Missilonghi 1824 

Alexander emperor of Russia dies 1825 

Nicholas ascends the throne of Russia . 1825 

Massacre of the Janizaries in Turkey 1826 

Battle of Navarino 1827 

A ccession of Otho to the throne of Greece ....... 1829 

William IV. ascended the throne of England ...... 1830 

Netherlands divided into Holland and Belgium 1830 

Ferdinand VII., king of Spain, died 1833 

Revolution in France, . February 22d, 1848 


AMERICA. 

CHAPTER CLVIII. — AMERICA. 

About America, 



1. We have long been occupied with the three great divisions oi 
the eastern continent, Asia, Africa, and Europe. Let us now leave 
these countries, cross the Atlantic, and come to our continent of 
America. 

2. This continent, as you will see by the map, consists of two 
parts, North and South America. These are united by a narrow 
strip of land called the isthmus of Darien, about sixty miles in 
width ; at the narrowest part it is but thirty-seven miles. This vast 
continent is about nine thousand miles in length, and is nearly equal 
in extent to Asia. The whole population is estimated at forty- 
millions. 

3. The northern part of America is excessively cold. Whether it 
is there bounded by the sea, or whether it extends to the north pole, 
we cannot tell. Greenland, the coldest inhabited country on the 
globe, was formerly considered a part of our continent, but is now 
thought to be an island. 

4. The countries in North America, are the island of Iceland, 
Greenland, the Polar Regions, inhabited by the Esquimaux and other 
tribes of Indians, British America, Russian America, the United 
States, Mexico, and Guatimala. 

5. Between North and South America are a number of beautiful 
islands, called the West Indies. South America is divided into 
Venezuela, New Grenada, Equator, Peru, Bolivia, Chili, the United 
Provinces, Uruguay, and Paraguay. These are republics. Brazil is 

Ch. CLVIII. — ii. What does the continent of America consist of? What of the isthmus 
of Darien? Extent and population of America ? 3. What is known of the northern part 
of America? What of Greenland? 4. Countries of North America? 6. What of the 
We»t Indies Divisions of South America ? Drazil? 


SCHOOL HISTORY 


264 

a province of Portugal; and Patagonia, at the southern end of South 
America, is a land thinly settled by uncivilized tribes. Guiana 
belongs to Great Britain, France, and Holland. 



View in the Polar Regions. 


6. I have said that it was extremely cold at the northern part oi 
North America. In this dreary region, no trees are to be found, no 
plants flourish. For nine months in the year, the sea is frozen, and 
scarcely a living thing is able to dwell there. Even in summer, 
nothing is seen but now and then ,a lonely white bear, or a solitary 
rein-deer feeding upon moss. 

7. As you proceed south, you meet with a few willow and birch 
trees, ancl some hardy plants. Still farther south, the vegetation im- 
proves, wild animals become abundant, and wild birds are seen 
swimming in the waters, or hovering in the air. 

8. Here you meet with tribes of Esquimaux and Chippewa In- 
dians. When you get to Canada, you find a fruitful country. When 
you get as far south as the United States, the climate becomes pleas- 
ant. In the West Indies, around the Gulf of Mexico, and throughout 
all the northern parts of South America, the climate is that of perpet- 
ual spring or summer. 

9. As you go farther south, it grows cold, and when you get to 
Cape Horn, you will find it a frozen country, where winter reigns 
three-fourths of the year. The wild animals of America are very 
numerous. The bison, wild goat, wild sheep, antelope, many kinds 
of deer, several kinds of bears, wolves, foxes, and many smaller 
quadrupeds, together with birds of many kinds, are natives ol 
America. 


6. What of the northern part of North America ? 7. What of vegetation as you proceed 
south ? 8. What of Indian tribes ? What of the climate as you proceed south to the north 
of South America ? 9 . What of Cape Horn ? Animals of America ? Birds ? 


AMERICA. 


265 


10. Most of our domestic animals were not found here when the 
country was first discovered. It is said that the Newfoundland dog, 
and one or two other species, are natives of this country. But our 
domestic cattle, all our breeds of sheep, our horses, asses, mules, 
goats, hens, and cats, were originally brought from Europe. The 
domestic turkey, goose, and duck, are native birds. 

11. The people of America may be divided into two great classes. 
First, the Indians, who were found scattered throughout the American 
continent when it was first discovered. They consisted of many 
tribes, living seperately, and speaking different languages. And 
second, the descendants of the Europeans who have come to this 
country at various times, and settled here. To these we might add 
several. millions of negroes, who have been brought from Africa as 
slaves, or their descendants. 

12. America is remarkable for three things: it has the largest 
lakes, the longest rivers, and the longest chain of mountains to be 
found in the world. The largest lake is Lake Superior, the longest 
river is the Mississippi, the longest chain of mountains is that which 
extends nearly the whole length of the contineni, being called the 
Andes in South America, the Cordilleras in Guatemala and Mexico, 
and the Rocky Mountains in the United States. 


CHAPTER CLIX. -AMERICA CONTINUED. 

c 

The first Inhabitants of America . 

1. When we look around us, and see such fine cities as Boston, 
New- York, Philadelphia, Baltimore, New Orleans, Louisville, and 
Cincinnati; when we see the whole country dotted all over with 
towns, cities, and villages, we can hardly believe that three hundred 
and fifty years ago, our whole continent of America was unknown to 
the inhabitants of Europe, Asia, and Africa. 

2. Such, however, was the fact. The country was indeed inhab- 
ited by many tribes of Indians, but these people had no books, and 
knew nothing of the rest of the world. Where they came from or 
when they first settled in America, no one can tell. 

3. It appears that the northern portions of North America are in- 
habited by a race of people called Esquimaux. These differ from 
all the other Indians, and bear a close resemblance to the Laplanders. 
It seems likely, therefore, that these polar regions were settled by 
people who came from Europe in boats, many centuries since. 

4. That such a thing is possible, appears from the fact that the 
Norwegians are known to have discovered Iceland, in the eighth 
century, and that they actually made settlements in Greenland in the 

10. What animals were found here? What of cattle ? Native Birds ? 11. Describe 

the two classes of people in America ? 12. For what is America remarkable ? Ch. 

CLIX. — 1. What of America three hundred and fifty years ago p 2. What of the Indians? 
8. The Esquimaux ? What seems probable ? 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


266 

ninth century. It appears, then, that portions of America were 
actually visited by these northern Europeans, who possessed no other 
ban small vessels, and little knowledge in the arts of navigation. 



Esquimaux Indians. 


5. But how did the other Indians get to this country? If you will 
look on a map of the Pacific Ocean, you will see, at the northern 
part, that America and Asia come very close together. They are 
separated only by Behring’s Straits, which are but eighteen miles 
wide. 

6. Across this narrow channel, the people of the present day, 
living in the neighborhood, are accustomed to pass in their little 
boats. There is reason to believe, then, that many ages since, some 
of the Asiatic tribes of Tartars wandered to Behring’s Straits and 
crossed over to America. These may have been numerous, and con- 
sisting of different tribes ; a foundation may thus have been laid for 
the peopling of the American continent. 

7. That such was the fact, there is little reason to doubt. There 
is considerable resemblance between the American Indians and some 
Asiatic tribes, and they appear to possess some singular customs 
anown in Asia. Thus it would seem that Asia, which furnished the 
first inhabitants of Africa and Europe, also supplied this continent 
with the first human beings that trod its shores. 


4. What of the Norwegians? 5. What- straits separate Asia and America? Their 
vidlh? 6. What is there reason to believe? 7. Whom do our Indians resemble ? Ho* 
pa* Ameriaa probably first peopled ? 


AMERICA. 


267 


CHAPTER CLX.— AMERICA CONTINUED. 

Discovery of America by Columbus . 



Picture of one of the Vessels of Columbus, 


1. It has been conjectured that the ancient Carthaginians discovered 
South America, and made settlements there. But this is very un- 
likely; if it was the case, the event had been forgotten for two or 
three thousand years. It appears probable, that the first inhabitant 
of the Old World, who gave any information of what was called the 
New World, was Christopher Columbus. He may therefore fairly 
be called the discoverer of America. 

2. This illustrious person was born at Genoa, in Italy, in 1442. As 
he grew up, he paid great attention to the study of geography. The 
idea entered his mind, that there must be vast tracts of undiscovered 
country, somewhere on the face of the broad ocean. 

3. Columbus was poor, and had not the means of sailing in search 
of these unknown lands. He applied for assistance to the rulers of 
his native country ; but they refused it. He next went to Portugal ; 
but there he met with no better success. 

4. At last, he came to the court of Spain. Ferdinand and Isabella 
were king and queen of that country. The king, like almost every- 
body else, treated Columbus with neglect and scorn. 

5. But the queen thought so favorably of his project, that she sold 
her jewels to defray the expenses of the voyage. Three small vessels 
were equipped with ninety men, and with provisions for one year. 
Columbus took the command, and sailed from Spain on the 3rd of 
August, 1492 

Ch. CLX. — 1. What has been conjectured? What of Christophar Columbus ? 2, 

When and where was he born ? Tell the story of Columbus till the time when he sel 
rail ? 


268 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


6. He first held his course southward, and touched at the Canary 
Islands. Thence he steered straight towards the west. After a few 
weeks, his men became alarmed. They feared they should nevei 
again behold their native country, nor any land whatever, but should 
perish in the trackless sea. 

7. Columbus did his utmost to encourage them. He promised tc 
turn back, if land were not discovered within three days. On tilt 
evening of the la :t day, at about ten o’clock, he looked from the deck 
of his vessel, and beheld a light gleaming over the sea. He knew 
that this light must be on land. In the morning an island was seen, 
to which Columbus gave the name of St. Salvador. 

8. This is one of the Bahama Islands. The natives thronged to 
the shore, and gazed with wonder at the three ships. Perhaps they 
mistook them for living monsters, and thought that their white sails 
were wings. 

9. Columbus clothed himself magnificently, and landed with a 
drawn sword in his hand. His first act was to knell down and kiss 
the shore. He then erected a cross, as a symbol that Christianity 
was now to take the place of paganism. He declared the island to 
be the property of queen Isabella. He then visited other islands, 
and returned to Spain, giving an account of the wonderful things he 
had seen. He made a second; but it was not till his third voyage 
that he discovered the continent of America. 

10. No sooner had Columbus proved that there really was a new 
world beyond the sea, than several other navigators made voyages 
thitherward. Americus Yespucius, a native of Florence, came here 
and contrived to have the whole continent called by his name. 

11. By degrees, discoveries were made along the whole coast of 
North and South America. People came from various nations of 
Europe, and formed settlements there. In relating the history of 
these settlements, I shall begin with the most northerly, although 
the earliest colonies were planted in the tropical regions. 


CHAPTER CLXI.— AMERICA CONTINUED. 

A few words about Iceland and Greenland . Settlements 
of the French in America . 

1. I have already told you that the island of Iceland was discovered 
by a Norwegian pirate, in 860. After this, the Norwegians sent 
people to settle there. It is a cold, dreary country, and there is a 
terrible mountain in the island, called Hecla, which sometimes sends 
out fire, smoke, and ashes, and shakes the whole island with its 
frightful rumblings. 

6. Which way did he first steer his course ? What of his men? 7. How did Columbus 
encourage them ? What land was first discovered? 8. What of the people ? 9. What 
did Columbus now do ? 10. What of Americus Vespucius ? 1 1. What of other discoveries * 
Ch. CLXI.— 1. When was Iceland discovered ? What of it ? Mt. Hecla 2 


AMERICA. 


269 


2. But still the inhabitants increased, and Christianity was intro 
cfuced in 981. From that time to the present, they have continued a 
quiet, honest set of people. Their number is now fifty thousand, and 
they are under the government of Denmark. Greenland was dis- 
covered about the same time as Iceland, and settled soon after. 



Hecla, a volcanic mountain in Iceln' 


3. The colony continued to flourish till the year 1408. At this 

time, the winter was so severe as to block up the sea, and since that 
time nothing has been known of the colony of settlers. It is proba- 
ble they all perished long since. This settlement was on the northern 
part of Greenland. colony was settled in the southwestern 

part of Greenland ; this continues to the present day, but the inhab- 
itants are few in number. Most of them are native Esquimaux ; the 
rest are the descendants of the Norwegian settlers. 

4. The portion of America which is now under the government of 
Great Britain, consists of Nova Scotia, New Brunswick, Newfound- 
land, Upper and Lower Canada, and New Britain. 

5. All these provinces together compose a tract of country equal in 
extent to the United States. They are bounded north by the Arctic 
Sea and Baffin’s Bay, east by the Atlantic, south by the United States, 
and west by Russian America and the Pacific Ocean. 

6. The first people who formed settlements in America, to the 
northward of the present limits of the United States, were the French. 
Nearly three hundred years ago, they were in the habit of sending 
fishing-vessels to this coast. 

7. In 1^24, a Frenchman, named James Cartier, sailed up the St. 
Lawrence and built a fort, in which he passed the winter. Settle- 

2. When was Christianity introduced into Iceland? People? What of Greenland? 
Colonv at Greenland? When was it last heard of? Colony in the south ? The people ? 
4. Wnat does British America consist of ? S. How large is it ? Boundaries? 6. What 
of the French ? ~ What was done in 1624 ? 

23* 


>70 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


merits were soon after formed in Canada and Nova Scotia. King 
Henry the Fourth of France appointed the Marquis de la Roche to be 
governor-general of Canada and the neighboring territories. 

8. The city of Quebec was founded in the year 1608. It stands on 
the river St. Lawrence, about five hundred miles from the sea. Its 
foundation is on a rock of marble and slate. 

9. The French settlers were on very friendly terms with the In- 
dians. They purchased the furs which the red men obtained in their 
hunting expeditions. These were sent to Europe, and sold at a great 
profit. Some of the French were married to Indian wives. 

10. When the English began to form settlements to tlje southward 
of Canada, the French incited the savages to make war upon them. 
Parties of French and Indians would sometimes come from Quebec 
or Montreal, and bum the New England villages. The inhabitants 
were killed, or carried captive to Canada. 

11. In 1629, Sir David Keith, a British officer, took Quebec ; but it 
was afterwards restored to the French. The people of New England 
made several attempts to get it back again. 

12. In 1711, the British government sent a strong fleet up the St. 
Lawrence, under the command of Admiral Sir Hovender Walker. 
There was an army of seven thousand men on board the ships. 

13. If they had landed in safety, they would probably have suc- 
ceeded in taking Quebec. But when they were entering the river, 
the vessels became involved in a fog. A strong wind began to blow, 
and drove eight or nine of them upon the rocky shore. 

14. The next morning, the French found the dead bodies of a thou- 
sand men in scarlet coats, heaped among the rocks. These were the 
drowned English soldiers. This sad event caused the English to give 
up the design of conquering Canada. 


CHAPTER CLXII.— AMERICA CONTINUED. 

The French Colonies conquered by the English. 

1. Whenever there was a war between France and Old England, 
there was likewise a war between New England and the French pro- 
vinces in America. The French built strong fortresses, and the Eng- 
lish, or Americans made great efforts to take them. 

2. The French had carefully fortified the city of Louisbourg, on the 
island of Cape Breton. In 1745, the New England people formed a 
project of taking it. They raised a strong army, and gave the com- 
mand to a Boston merchant, named William Pepperell. 

Who was appointed governor of Canada? 8. When and where was Quebec founded* 
9. What of the French and Indians ? 10. In what way were the English treated by them • 

11. When and by whom was Quebec taken ? 12. 13. 14. What was done in 1711 ? Give 

an account of the expedition. What was the object of it? Ch. CLXII. — 1. What wai 
the consequence of a war between France and England ? 2. Where was Louisbourjf 
What was done in 1746 ? 


AMERICA. 


271 


3. The army sailed under the escort of an English fleet and landed 
on the island of Cape Breton. General PepperelPs men were merely 
farmers and mechanics; and he himself knew but little about taking 
fortresses. 

4. But if the New Englanders had no skill, they had plenty of cour- 
age. They erected batteries, and cannonaded the city for about a fort- 
night; and then the French commander hauled down his flag. The 
conquest of Louisbourg was considered a very brillant exploit. 

5. Louisbourg was restored to the French, at the close of the war. 
But it was again taken by general Wolfe, in 1758. The same gen- 
eral soon afterwards led an army against Quebec. 

6. This city was so strongly fortified, that it appeared almost im- 
possible to take it. It had a citadel, which was built upon a rock, 
several hundred feet high ; and there were strong walls all round the 
city. And besides the French garrison within the walls, there was a 
large French army on the outside. 

7. But general Wolfe was determined to take Quebec, or lose his 
life in the attempt. After trying various other methods, he led his 
army from the shore of the river up a steep precipice. When they 
reached the top, they were on a level with the walls of Quebec. 

8. This bold movement was performed in the night. As soon as 
the Marquis de Montcalm, who commanded the French army, heard 
of it, he marched to meet the British. A battle was begun imme- 
diately. 

9. General Wolfe put himself at the head of his troops, and led 
them bravely onward. Though he had received two wounds, he re- 
fused to quit the field. At last, a ball struck him in the body, and 
stretched him on the ground. 

10. A few of his soldiers carried him to the rear. But, though the 
hand of death was on him, general Wolfe thought only of the battle 
that was raging around. He heard a voice shouting, “ They flee ! 
They flee !” and he asked who it was that fled. 

11. “ It is the French !” said one of his attendants. “ They are 
beaten ! The victory is ours !” A glad smile appeared on the gen- 
eral’s face. “ Then I die happy !” he cried v and expired. 

12. The victory was complete. The Marquis de Montcalm was 
mortally wounded. In a few days after the battle, Quebec was sur- 
rendered. The whole province, and all the French possessions in the 
north, soon fell into the hands of the British. 

13. They have ever since continued under the British government. 
When the other American territories of Great Britain became inde- 
pendent, these old French colonies continued attached to the crown 
af Britain. 


Describe the capture of Louisbourg. 5. When was it restored to the French ? When 
taken by general Wolfe? 6. Describe the capture of Quebec. 8. Who commanded the 
French army ? 9. Describe general Wolfe’s death. 12. Consequence of the victory r 

French possessions. 13. To what are the old French colonies attached ? 


272 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


CHAPTER CLXIII.— AMERICA CONTINUED. 

Description of the United States. 


1. We have been travelling all about the world, but we have now 
got home again. We have been reading about countries where there 
are kings and emperors, but we have now come to a land where the 
people govern themselves in their own way, and get along very well 
without any king or emperor. 

2. We have been listening to the story of nations who are governed 
by despots and tyrants ; let us now hear what can be said about a 
land of freedom. Let us, in the first place, go to a map ; for the 
first step in studying the history of a country, should be to learn its 
situation, boundaries, shape, rivers, mountains, &c. 

3. The United States, then, are bounded on the north by the British 
possessions, east by the Atlantic Ocean, south by the Gulf of Mexico 
and the states of Mexico, and west by the Pacific Ocean. The whole 
country is about two thirds as extensive as all Europe, and contains 
about fifteen millions of inhabitants. 

4. Not more than half of this vast country is settled. The whole 

western portion is unoccupied, or t’ ' 1 with Indian 



tribes. The United States are 


states, each 


having a governor, and a legislature to make laws. The whole are 
united under a national government, over which a president is placed 
as the chief ruler. 

5. The United States are frequently spoken of under four sections. 
The Northern, Eastern, or New England states, are Maine, New 
Hampshire, Vermont, Massachusetts, Rhode Island, and Connecticut. 
The Middle states are New York, New Jersey, Pennsylvania, Dela- 
ware, and Maryland. The Southern states are Virginia, North Car- 
olina, South Carolina, Florida, Georgia, Alabama, Mississippi, 
Louisiana, and Texas. The Western states are Arkansas, Tennessee, 
Kentucky, Missouri, Illinois, Indiana, Ohio, Michigan, Iowa, and 
Wisconsin. Besides these states, there are several territories. 

6. The United States are favored by a great many fine rivers, flow- 
ing through fertile valleys. There are many mourf.ains, but none are 
so lofty as the Andes of South America, the Alps of Europe, or the 
Himlaya mountains of Asia. The climate of the north is temperate, 
and the soil yields apples, pears, peaches, and other fruits. In the 
south it is warm, and oranges, figs, and lemons flourish. 

Ch. CLXIII.— 1. What of the people of the United States ? 3. Boundaries of the Uni- 
ted States? Extent? Population? How large a portion is settled? What of the gov 
ernmei*? 6 . Divisions of the United States ? 6. Face of the country ? Climate? Soil? 
Productions ? 


AMERICA 


273 


n ; j ' 

3/V//? of North America. 


y 



yfycHi Circle 
— 1""« 
cJusU^ftna 


— o-^ cc J 

A e?W^ -ffiwvji. J? 




Aoi/innirtLS — ■/ ,V ! . \ \ ^ 

cwii \l 


‘^HERtC* 

X^ALA^ 


DC V£R£XLXjlSC& 



274 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


CHAPTER CLXIV. — AMERICA CONTINUED. 

Settlement and Colonial History of New England. 

1. Before speaking of the United States as one whole country, I 
must give a brief account of the settlements of the several colonies. 
I shall begin with New England, because that section of the Union 
is the most northerly, though not first settled. 

2. New England, as I have said, contains the states of Maine, New 
Hampshire, Vermont, Massachusetts, Rhode Island, and Connecticut. 
It is bounded north by Lower Canada, east by New Brunswick and 
the Atlantic Ocean, south by the Atlantic anil Long Island Sound, 
and west by New York. 

3. In the year 1620, a ship called the Mayflower arrived on the 
coast of New England. On board of this vessel were a number of 
ministers, and pious men and women. They had brought their chil- 
dren with them, for they never expected to return to their native land. 

4. They had been driven from England by persecution, and they 
nad come to this dreary wilderness, in order to worship God accor- 
ding to their own consciences. It was in the cold wintry month of 
December, when the Mayflower anchored in the harbour of Plymouth. 
The people went on shore, and the rock on which they landed has 
ever since been considered sacred. 

5. They went to work and built themselves some poor huts. At 
first, they met with great difficulties and hardships. Many of them 
fell sick and died. The survivors were often in want of food, and 
were forced to dig for shellfish on the sea-shore. 

6. In addition to their other troubles, the wild Indians sometimes 
threatened to attack them. But the Pilgrims were as brave and pa- 
tient as they were pious. They put their trust in God, and steadily 
pursued their design of making a permanent settlement in the country. 

7. Soon after this settlement at Plymouth, other companies of reli- 
gious persons came to different parts of New England. Some settled 
at Salem, and others at Boston. Thus a good many English people 
were established in the country. In the year 1 635, sixty men, women, 
and children, journeyed from Massachusetts to Connecticut, to make 
a settlement there. 

8. They went through the woods on foot, and drove their cattle 
before them. At night, they lay down to sleep, with no shelter but 
the boughs of the trees. When they reached the Connecticut river, 
they began to build Windsor, Hartford, and other towns. These 
were the first settlements in Connecticut. 

9. In 1636, a pious minister, named Roger Williams, was banished 
from Massachusetts. He went to Rhode Island, and settled at Provi- 
dence. This good man was a great friend of the Indians, and they 
had a strong affection for him. 

Ch. (LXIV. — 2. What of New England ? Boundaries? 3. What took place in 1620? 
Describe the settlement of Plymouth ? 7. What of other settlements ? What took place 
In 1635 ? 9 When and by whom was Providence settled ? 


AMERICA. 


27 5 


10. By degrees, villages were built all along the sea-coast of New 
England, and settlements began to be formed on the inland rivers. 
But a thick and dreary forest still overshadowed the greater part of 
the country, and bears and wolves often prowled around the cottages. 


CHAPTER CLXV.— AMERICA CONTINUED. 

Affairs of New England continued. 

1. The settlers of New England were good and pious people; but 
many of them seemed to have pretty much the same feelings towards 
the Indians that they had towards the bears and woives. They con- 
sidered them a sort of wild animal, or if men, very wicked ones. 

2. The best friend that ever the red men had, was John Eliot. He 
considered them his fellow-beings, and went about preaching to them; 
and so he was called the Apostle of the Indians. He spent a great 
many years in translating the Bible into their language, and in teach- 
ing the Indians to read it. 

3. There were, however, very few white men that loved the In- 
dians; and the latter looked upon the settlers as their enemies. They 
were afraid that, in time, they would cut down all the trees of the 
forest, and change their hunting grounds into cultivated fields. 

4. The settlers had, therefore, many wars with the Indians ; but 
the most terrible one broke out in the year 1675, and was called king 
Philip’s war. King Philip, though an Indian, was a man of great 
sagacity, and it was his design to destroy all the settlers, and make 
New England a wilderness again. 

5. King Philip first made an attack on the people of Swanzey, in 
Massachusetts, as they were coming out of the meetinghouse, on Fast 
day. Eight or nine persons were shot. Many others were killed and 
scalped in different parts of the country, and many houses were set 
on fire. 

6. Almost every man in New England now shouldered his musket, 
and went out to fight king Philip. Even the ministers, instead of 
teaching the Indians to read the Bible, as John Eliot did, now took 
their guns and sent bullets at them, whenever they had a chance. 

7. In the course of the next winter, the settlers formed themselves 
into an army of nearly two thousand men, and drove king Philip and 
the other Indians into a strong fort, in Rhode Island. It stood in the 
midst of a swamp, and contained six hundred wigwams. All the 
Indian women and children had taken refuge there. 

8. Four thousand Indian warriors were in the fort. But the settlers 
boldly attacked them, broke into the fort, and set the wigwams on 

10. What was done by degrees? What of the greater part of New England? 
Ch. CLXV. — 1. How were the Indians considered by the settlers? 2. What of John Eli- 
ot? 3. How did the Indians look upon the white men? When did king Philip’s wai be- 
gin? What of king Philip? 5. When did he first attack the Americans? 6. What did tl»a 
people do ? 7. What aid they do the next winter ? What of the fort? 


276 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


fire. Many of the old and infirm Indians, as well as the women and 
poor helpless children, were burnt alive. 

9. A thousand Indian warriors were killed and wounded, and 
several hundred were taken prisoners. The remainder fled. The 
fort presented a horrible spectacle, with half-burnt bodies of men, 
women, and children, strewn among the ashes of the wigwams. 

10. But still the war was not an end, for king Philip was alive. 
The next summer, it was known that he had taken refuge at Moun 
Hope, in Rhode Island. Captain Church pursued him thither with a 
small party of men. 

11. King Philip happened to come towards a clump of bushes, 
where an Englishman and a friendly Indian lay concealed. The 
Englishman fired at him, but missed. The Indian then took aim 
and fired, and the valiant king Philip fell dead. 

12. After ifiis war, the Indians were never again able to do so 
much mischief to the New England people. But, for many years 
afterwards, they would sometimes steal out of the woods by night, 
set the villages on fire, and slaughter the inhabitants. The New 
England colonies, however, increased rapidly, and in time, the country 
had many pleasant towns and villages. 


CHAPTER CLXVI.— AMERICA CONTINUED. 

Early History of Virginia . 

1. The colony of Virginia was settled some years before New Eng- 
land. Jamestown, on James river, was founded by captain Christo- 
pher Newport, in 1607. The first settlers of Virginia were not such 
pious people as those of New England. They had not come to 
America for the sake of worshipping God, but were influenced by 
more worldly motives. 

2. Many of them were wild young men, and it was difficult to 
keep them in order. Owing to this and other causes, the colony was 
sometimes on the brink of ruin. The Indians gave the settlers great 
trouble, and would probably have destroyed them, if it had not been 
for Captain John Smith. 

3. Captain Smith was a gallant man, and had been a warrior all 
his lifetime. Before he came to Virginia, he had fought against the 
Turks, and had cut off the heads of three Turkish lords, in single 
combat. He showed himself equally valiant in his engagements 
with the Indians. 

4. But one day, when captain Smith was retreating from a large 

K of savages, lie sunk almost up to his neck in a swamp, so that 
uld neither fight nor flee. The Indians pulled him out of the 
swamp, and carried him to their king Powhatan. 

9. 9. Describe the destruction of the fort? 10. 11. Describe the death of king Philip 7 
12. What of the Indians after this war ? Ch. CLXVI. — 1 . When was Jamestown settled > 
What of the settlers of Virginia ? 2. What of the Indians ? 


UNITED STATES. 


277 


5. Powhatan was rejoiced to have captain Smith in his power, for 
he had been more afraid of him than of all the other Englishmen 
together. In order to prevent any further trouble, he determined im- 
mediately to put him to death. Accordingly, captain Smith's hands 
were tied, and he was stretched on the ground, with his head on a 
large stone. 

6. King Powhatan, who was a man of immense size and strength, 
then seized a great club, intending to kill captain Smith. He lifted 
the club on high for this purpose ; but just as the blow was falling, 
his daughter Pocahontas rushed forward. 

7. This beautiful Indian maiden threw herself upon the body of 
captain Smith. If Powhatan’s club had fallen, it would have killed 
her, instead of the prisoner. Pocahontas besought her father to 
.have mercy ; and the fierce Indian could not resist her tears and en- 
treaties. 

8. Captain Smith was therefore released, and sent back to James- 
town. The name of Pocahontas will always be honored in Virginia. 
She was afterwards married to one of the English settlers, and her 
descendants are living in Virginia to this day. 


CHAPTER CLXVIL— AMERICA CONTINUED. 

Braddock' s Defeat , and, other Matters . 

1. I must pass over the remainder of the history of Virginia, till 
the time of the old French war. This began in 1755. Not long 
after war was declared, the British general Braddock marched with 
an army to attack the French at Fort <Ju Quesne. This fort stood at 
the head of the Ohio river, where Pittsburgh is now situated. 

2. Many Virginians and other colonists were in Braddock’s army. 
Colonel George Washington, then a very young man. was one of his 
aids. Washington had already acquired much warlike skill; and if 
general Braddock had taken his advice, it would have saved his own 
life, and the lives of hundreds besides. 

3. Braddock and his army marched onward, till they were within 
about seven miles of Fort du Quesne. Thick woods were all around 
them, and the settlements of Virginia were hundreds of miles behind. 
Suddenly, a terrible volley of musketry was fired at them from be- 
hind the trees. 

4. General Braddock now knew that he had fallen into an ambus* 
cade of French and Indians. He galloped about, endeavoring to en 
courage his men ; but the bullets came so thick, that the bravest of 
them were appaled. 

5. The general had five horses killed under him. ^ At last, a bullet 
struck him” in the breast. Nearly all the other officers were either 

3.4. 5. C. 7. Relate the adventure of captain Smith with the Indians? 8. What of 
Pocahontas ? Ch. CLXVII. — 1. When did the old French war being ? Where was Fort 
Du Quesne ? 2. What of Washington ? 3. 4. 5. Describe the defeat and death o* 
Braddock ? 


24 


278 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


Killed or wounded; but Washington remained unhurt. It seems as 
if he were preserved to be the savior of his country. 

6. An Indian chief had taken aim and fired at him seventeen 
times, without once hitting him. It was Washington who rescued 
the army from total destruction. He and the Virginian troops kept 
off the Indians, and enabled the British to retreat. 

7. I shall now proceed to speak of the other colonies. The first 
settlement in New York was made in 1613, on the shores of the 
Hudson river, where Albany now stands. The city of New York, 
founded about the same time, was at first called New Amsterdam ; 
it derived its name from the capital of Holland, for the early settleis 
were natives of that country. 

8. In 1664, the province of New York was surrendered by the 
Dutch into the hands of the English. It grew and prospered very 
fast, and became one of the most powerful of the colonies. 

9. Pennsylvania was settled in 1681. Its founder was William 
Penn, a Quaker, and all the earliest settlers likewise belonged to the 
sect of Quakers. When William Penn arrived in the country, he 
bought lands of the Indians, and made a treaty with them. 

10. This treaty was always held sacred. The Indians saw that 
the Quakers were men of peace, and therefore they were careful 
never to do them any injury. There are no stories of Indian warfare 
with the Quakers of Pennsylvania. 

11. The province of Maryland was given by Charles the First to 
Lord Baltimore. He was a Roman Catholic, and in 1634, he brought 
over two hundred people of the same religion, and made the first 
settlement in Maryland. 

12. Carolina first began to be permanently settled in 1680. In 
1729, it was divided into North and South Carolina. The first set- 
tlement in Georgia was made in 1733. The principal founder was 
general James Oglethorpe. He came from England with one hun- 
dred and sixteen settlers, and began to build the city of Savannah. 


CHAPTER CLXVIII.— AMERICA CONTINUED. 

Causes which led to the Revolution . 

1. The reader will have learned, by the preceding chapters, how 
the whole of the sea-coast, between New Brunswick and Florida, 
became covered with colonies, which were all under the government 
of Great Britain. The inhabitants were growing numerous. 

6. What of Washington and his troops ? 7. When and where was the first settlement in 
New York? What was the city of New York first called ? 8. What of the province of 
New York? 9. When and by whom was Pennsylvania settled ? How did William Penn 
treat the Indians? 10. What was the consequence of his treaty with them ? 11. Who 

rave Maryland to Lord Baltimore ? What of Lord Baltimore? When did he settle 
Maryland f 12. When was Carolina settled? When divided?' First settlement in 
Georgia ? Who founded it : What city did he build ? 


UNITED STATES. 


279 


2. When the king of Great Britain and his ministers beheld the 
prosperous condition of the colonies, they determined to derive some 
profit from them. For this purpose, in 1765, the British parliament 
possed what was called the Stamp Act. 

3. Their object was, to take money out of the pockets of the Ameri- 
cans for the use of the king and ministry. But the Americans were 
resolved that no king on earth should take their property, without 
their own consent. 

4. They made so strong an opposition to the Stamp Act, that par- 
liament was forced to repeal it. But a tax was soon afterwards laid 
on tea ; so that no American lady could give a tea-party, without 
paying a tax to England. Soldiers were sent out to America to 
compel the people to obey these unjust laws. 

5. In the year 1770, a quarrel took place between some of these 
soldiers and the inhabitants of Boston. A company of the British 
red-coats assembled in State street, and fired upon a crowd of un- 
armed people. Three of them fell dead in the street, and five more 
were wounded. This affair was called the Boston Massacre. 

6. But instead of being affrighted by this bloodshed, the people 
grew more determined in their resistance to the tyranny of England. 
In the year 1773, some ships were sent from London to the colonies, 
laden with cargoes of tea. 

7. Three of the ships arrived in the harbor of Boston. One night, 
a number of persons went on board, in the disguise of Indians, and 
threw all the tea overboard. These Indian figures were never seen 
again; and, to this day, nobody can tell who they were. 

8. When tidings of this event were carried to England, the king 
and ministry saw that they could never make slaves of the Ameri- 
cans, unless by force of arms. They therefore sent over large bodies 
of troops to keep the people in subjection. 


CHAPTER CLXIX.— AMERICA CONTINUED. 

Account of the Battle of Lexington. 

1. In 1775, general Thomas Gage was the commander-in-chief of 
the British forces in America. His head-quarters were at Boston. 

2. On the night of the 18th of April, general Gage sent a detach- 
ment of eight hundred grenadiers to seize some cannon and ammuni- 
tion at Concord, about eighteen miles from Boston. The grenadiers 
marched all night, and reached the town of Lexington at sunrise. 


Ch. CLXVIII. — 2. What of the king and ministers of Great Britain? What did the 
parliament do ? 3. Their object .* What did the Americans resolve ? 4. What did they 
do ? What of a tax on tea ? What of soldiers ? 5. Describe the Boston massacre ? 6. 
What of th* Americans ? What happened in the year 1773 ? 7. Describe the destruction 
of the tea? 7. What did the king and ministers now do? Ch. CLXIX. — 1. What of 
general Gage ? 2. What did he do? What of the grenadiers? 


280 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


3. Lexington is a village about twelve miles from Boston. A 
meeting-house stood by the road-side, and near it there was a level 
tract of grass. On this green space, a company of militia were 
drawn up. 

4. Major Pitcairn was the British commander. As soon as he saw 
the militia, he galloped forward, brandishing his sword, and drawing 
a pistol from his holster. “Disperse, you rebels!” he shouted. 
“ Throw down your arms and disperse !” 

5. As he spoke, without giving the militia men time to run away, 
he discharged his pistol at them. The British soldiers followed the 
example of major Pitcairn, and fired a whole volley at the Ameri- 
cans. Several of them were killed and wounded. 

6. The British troops then continued their march to Concord. But 
the Americans were now collecting on all sides. When the British 
reached Concord, they had a skirmish with a party of militia there. 
They now found it necessary to retreat as fast as possible. 

7. As they marched along the road, the people fired at them from 
behind the fences and stone walls, and out of the windows of the 
houses. At every step, some of the British soldiers fell ; but their 
comrades hurried on, without heeding them. 

8. W r hen general Gage heard what was going on, he sent Lord 
Percy out of Boston, with nine hundred men and two brass cannon. 
Lord Percy met major Pitcairn and the grenadiers scampering back 
to Boston as fast as they could go ; and, by firing his cannon, he kept 
the Americans off. 

9. But the moment the troops resumed their march, the Americans 
shot at them again from behind the fences. Before the British 
arrived in sight of Boston, they had lost nearly three hundred men, 
in killed, wounded, and prisoners. The loss of the Americans was 
much less. 

10. The news of this battle spread all over the country, and wher- 
ever the story was told, the people quitted their business and turned 
soldiers. Fdr now the Revolution had broken out, and it was easy 
to foresee that there Would be a bloody war. 


CHAPTER CLXX.— AMERICA CONTINUED. 

V W , * ■ • * * . • ) 

The Battle of Bunker Hill . 

1. In a short time after the battle of Lexington, a large American 
army was assembled round Boston. The British troops could not 
venture out of the town. They found it difficult to get provisions 
enough to live upon. 

2. On the night of the sixtenth of June, colonel Prescott marched 

3. 4. 5. 6. What took place at Lexington? What followed? 7. How were the British 
annoyed in their retreat to Boston ? 8. What did general Gage do ? 8. What of the 
Americans and British? 10 1 What effect had the news of this battle ? Ch. CLXX.- 1. 
Where did an American army assemble? What of the British troops ? 


UNITED STATES. 


281 

with a thousand Americans to Bunker hill, in Charlestown. On the 
summit of this hill, with their spades, they threw up a wall of earth 
and sods as high as their breasts. 

3. They intended this as a fortification, from which they might 
fire upon the British fleet which lay in Boston harbor. No sooner did 
the British admiral see the wall of earth and sods, than he began to 
batter it with cannon-shot and bombs. At the same time, general 
Gage sent three thousand troops to take Bunker hill by storm. 

4. The troops landed in Charlestown, and marched boldly up the 
hill. They made a formidable appearance, moving in a long red line, 
with their glittering muskets. As they advanced, the cannon-balls 
from the British fleet flew high over their heads, and struck among 
the Americans. 

5. But when the British soldiers had come within twenty yards ol 
the fortification, the Americans suddenly saluted them with a tre- 
menduous volley of musketry. The smoke cleared away, and there 
were the king’s soldiers retreating in confusion to the water-side. 

6. But many of them lay dead or wounded upon the hill. In the 
mean time, Charlestown had been set on fire, and was blazing like 
an immense furnace, and throwing clouds of smoke over the whole 
scene. 

7. The officers encouraged the British troops and led them again 
into battle. But a second time they were driven back with terrible 
slaughter. It was not till the third trial that the British were able to 
reach the breast-work. 

8. The Americans had now fired away all their powder and ball, 
and were forced to retreat. General W arren was among the last to 
leave the breast-work. A British officer snatched a musket from a 
soldier, and shot the gallant Warren dead. 

9. But many a brave Englishman laid down his life that day, and 
blood enough had been shed to redden all the grass on Bunker hill. 

10. In about a fortnight after this hattle, general George Washing- 
ton arrived at Cambridge. The continental congress at Philadelphia 
had appointed him commander-in-chief of the American armies. He 
managed matters so skilfully, that the British were driven out oi 
Boston, in March, 1776. 


CHAPTER CLXXI. — AMERICA CONTINUED. 

Progress of the War. Capture of Burgoyne. 

1. It was on the fourth of July, 1776, that the continental congress 
declared the United States a free and independent nation. This 
declaration caused great rejoicings all over America. Yet our affairs 
were not in a very promising situation. 

2. What did colonel Prescott do ? 2. What of the British admiral and general Gage ? 
4. 5. 6. 7. S. 9. Describe the battle of Bunker hill? 10. What of general Washington? 
When were the British driven out of Boston ? Ch. CLXXI.— 1. When were the United 
States declared free and independent? 

24 * 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


282 

2. After the enemy evacuated Boston, general Washington marchea 
from that town to New York. Some important battles were fought 
between our troops and the British ; but Washington was finally com- 
pelled to retreat, by superior force. When winter came on, the 
American soldiers were almost naked. Wherever they marched, 
their bare feet left bloody tracks upon the frozen ground. 

3. But, on a dark, December night, Washington crossed the Dela- 
ware river with his troops, and marched to Trenton, in New Jersey. 
A large body of Hessian soldiers were encamped at this place. They 
Were suddenly startled by the shouts of the Americans, who had bro- 
ken into their camp, and they all laid down their arms. 

4. Lord Cornwallis, the British general, was now in pursuit of the 
Americans; but Washington marched to Princeton, and attacked a 
party of the enemy who had taken post in the college edifice. Sixty 
of them were killed, and three hundred taken prisoners. 

5. The next year, 1777, the gallant marquis de La Fayette came 
from France to assist the Americans. He was then only nineteen 
years old ; but congress appointed him major-general, and he became 
one of the bravest and best in the army. 

6. During this year, the British general Burgoyne marched with a 
large army from Canada. He sailed down Lake Champlain, and 
went from thence to Saratoga. But general Gates was waiting for 
him there, with ten thousand American troops. Many battles were 
fought between them and the British. 

7. In one of these battles, colonel Cilley, an American officer, took 
a brass cannon from the enemy with his own hands. He imme- 
diately got astride of it, shouting and encouraging his men, and 
waving his sword, as if he were seated on a war-horse. 

8. On the eighteenth of October, general Burgoyne was forced to sur- 
render. He and his aids rode out of the camp to meet general Gates ; 
and Burgoyne took his sword by the point, and offered the hilt to the 
American general. At this time all the British army grounded their 
arms. 

9. This great success of the Americans induced the French to make 
a treaty of alliance with them, and to declare war against Great 
Britain. France sent a fleet, and afterwards an army, to fight on 
our side. 


2. What of Washington ? What of the American soldiers ? 3. Describe the attack 
Upon Trenton. 4. Attack upon Princeton ? 5. What of La Fayette ? 6. What of Bur- 
goyne ? General Gates ? 7. What of Colonel Cilley ? S. Describe the surrender of gen- 
eral Burgoyne. 9.1 What did the French do ? 


UNITED STATES. 


283 


CHAPTER CLXXIL— AMERI CA CONTINUED. 

The Story of Major Arnold and Major Andre . 

1. It would fill a much larger hook than mine, if I were to relate 
tne particulars of all the battles, skirmishes, and other warlike events 
tuat occurred during the Revolution. I must therefore, leave far the 
greater part of them untold. 

2. One of the most interesting incidents in the whole war took 
pl&ce in 1780. General Arnold, who had shown himself a very brave 
officer,, became discontented, and resolved to desert the cause of his 
country. 

3. Pretending that his wounds rendered him unfit for active ser- 
vice, he requested that the command of West Point might be given 
him. Ttiis strong fortress was situated among the highlands, on the 
shore of </ie Hudson river. Its loss would have been a severe mis- 
fortune to the Americans. 

4. No sooner had Arnold got possession of West Point, than he 
sent to Henry Clinton, the British general at New York, offering to 
surrender the fortress. Sir Henry Clinton sent a young officer, named 
Andre, to meet Arnold, and contrive the means of completing this 
treacherous business. 

5. Major Andre had a meeting with Arnold, and they arranged the 
manner in which the fortress was to be given up to the British. Andre 
then wished to get on board the ship Vulture, which had brought 
him up the river from New York. 

6. But the Vulture had now sailed further down the stream, and 
it was necessary for major Andre to return by land. He therefore 
took off his uniform and put on a common coat, in order that the 
Americans might not know that he was a British officer. 

7. Then mounting a horse, he set out on the road to New York. 
He had to pass through a part of the country that was guarded by 
the American troops ; but he travelled most of the way without any 
trouble or hindrance. 

8. But when major Andre reached a place called Tarry town, he 
saw three young militia men by the road-side. They came up tr 
him and seized his horse by the bridle. Now Andre had a passpor 1 
from general Arnold in his pocket, and if he had shown it to the 
militia men, they would have let him go free. But instead of that, 
he asked them where they came from. 

9. “ From down the river,” they replied. When Andre heard this, 
he mistook the three militia men for tories, or friends of the British. 
“Iam a British officer,” said he. “Let me pass on; for I am in 
haste *” 

10. But these words were fatal to poor Andre. The three men 


Ch. CLXXII. — 2. What of general Arnold? 3. What did he request? 4. To whom 
did he send? What cua Sir Henry Clinton do? 5. What of Andre? 6. Describe his 
journey and capture 


284 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


took him prisoner, and found some treasonable papers in his boots. 
General Arnold made his escape to New York ; but poor major 
Andre remained in the hands of the Americans. 

11. He was tried as a spy, and condemned to death. Washington 
and all the army were sorry for him, but nothing could save him 
from the gallows. He was therefore executed. 


CHAPTER CLXXIIL— AMERICA CONTINUED. 

War in the South. Surrender of Cornwallis. 

1. In the latter part of the war, many important events were trans- 
acted in the Southern states. In 1780, general Gates, the conqueror 
of Burgoyne, was defeated by lord Cornwallis at Camden, in South 
Carolina. Congress then sent general Green to command the army 
of the South. 

2. General Green had been a Quaker in his youth; but when the 
revolution broke out, he became the best officer in the American 
army, except general Washington. This was proved by his good 
conduct in the Southern states. 

3. He fought several battles with the British, and though he was 
sometimes compelled to retreat by the enemy’s superior force, yet 
they never gained any real advantage over him. By his skill and 
valor the British troops were finally driven into the city of Charles- 
ton. After this event, there was no more trouble with the enemy in 
the South. 

4. Lord Cornwallis, with a large army, was now in Virginia. The 
American and French troops proceeded thither to attack him. Gen- 
eral Washington had command of the whole; and, under Washing 
ton, the count de Rochambeau was commander of the French. 

5 . They besieged the British at Yorktown ; for lord Cornwallis did 
not feel strong enough to meet them in the open field. The Ameri- 
cans built breastworks round about the intrenchments of the British, 
and cannonaded them night and day. 

6. Finally, on the nineteenth of October, 1781, lord Cornwallis 
agreed to surrender his army. But he was ashamed to go through 
the ceremony of delivering his sword to the conqueror ; and he there 
fore sent general O’Hara to do it in his stead. 

7. General O’Hara accordingly marched forth at the head of the 
vanquished army. When he came in the presence of general Wash- 
ington, he offered him his sword. But Washington pointed to gen- 
eral Lincoln ; for it was not proper that he himself should receive 
the sword of any but lord Cornwallis. 

8. General Lincoln took general O’Hara’s sword, and the whole 


Ch. CLXXIII-— I. What took place in 1780 ? 2. 3 What of general Greene? 

4. What of Lord Cornwallis ? Who headed the Americans and French ? 6, Describe the 
*iege of Yorktown. 6. Surrender of Lord Cornwallis ? 


UNITED STATES. 


28 

British army grounded their arms, and yielded their banners to the 
victorious Americans. 

9. After the surrender of Cornwallis, no important battles were 
fought, although peace was not declared till 1783. In the summer 
and autumn of that year, all the British troops sailed homewards, and 
left America free and independent. 

10. Thus you see that the revolutionary war, which began by the 
battle of Lexington, in 1775, was terminated, after having continued 
eight years. The sufferings of our countrymen were very great, but 
the reward of their patience and patriotism was also great. 


CHAPTER CLXXIV.— AMERICA CONTINUED. 

. Affairs of the United States since the Revolution. 

\ 

1. When the revolutionary war was over, the people of the United 
States found it necessary to adopt a constitution of government. The 
present Federal Constitution was prepared by some of the wisest 
men in the country. It went into operation in 1789. 

2. The good and illustrious Washington was our first president. 
He came into office in 1789, and was re-elected at the end of four 
years. In 1797, John Adams was chosen to succeed him, and be- 
came the second president of the United States. 

3. The most mournful event that had ever befallen America, was 
the death of Washington. It took place in 1799, when he was sixty- 
eight years old. The whole country was overwhelmed with sorrow. 
But Washington had done his work on earth, and it was fit that he 
should ascend to heaven. 

4. The next president, after John Adams, was Thomas Jefferson. 
He served during two lerms of office, and was succeeded by James 
Madison, in 1809. The most remarkable event of Jefferson’s adminis- 
tration, was the purchase of Louisiana from France, in the vear 1S03. 
This immense territory included the country between the Mississippi 
and the Rocky mountains. It was bought for fifteen millions of 
dollars. During the administration of Madison, the United States 
were on ill terms with Great Britain, and there was great reason to 
fear that hostilities would ensue. 

5. Accordingly, on the eighteenth of June, 1812, congress made a 
delaration of war. Troops were sent to invade Canada. There 
were several gallant conflicts on the Canadian frontier; but the 
Americans did not succeed in conquering the province. 

9. When was peace declared ? What of the British troops ? 10. How long did the rev 
olutionary war last? What of the sufferings of. the Americans? Their reward? Ch. 
CLXXIV. — 1'. When was the constitution of government formed ? v. Who was the first 
president? When did he come into office ? When Vras John Ad >ms chosen? 3. When 
did Washington’s death take place ? Effect of his death? 4. What did Jefferson pur- 
chase of the French ? In what year? How large a country was it? What did it cost ? 
When was Madison made president ? What of the United States during his administration ? 
6 . When was war declared ? What of wars in Canada? 


286 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


6 Many glorious victories were won by the American navy, both 
on the ocean and the lakes. Hitherto, the British navy had always 
been triumphant ; but now, our brave sailors often compelled them 
to haul down their flag. 

7. The last and most brilliant event of the war, was the battle of 
New Orleans. On the morning of the eighth of January, 1815, a 
strong British army advanced to take the city. But they were driven 
back with immense slaughter by the Americans, under general 
Jackson. Peace took place in a very short time after this battle. 

8. In 1817, president Madison retired from office, and was suc- 
ceeded by James Monroe. During the eight years of his administra- 
tion, the country was quiet and prosperous. John Quincy Adams 
became president in 1825. He was the son of old John Adams, who 
had been the next president after Washington. Neither the first nor 
the second president Adams continued in office longer than four years. 

9. The next president was general Andrew Jackson. He was in- 
augurated in 1829, and began his second term of office in 1833. He 
was succeeded by Martin Van Buren, in 1837. William Henry Har- 
rison became president in 1841, and died in thirty days after, being 
succeeded by John Tyler, then vice-president. James K. Polk 
became president in 1845, and Zachary Taylor in 1849. 


CHAPTER CLXXV.— AMERICA CONTINUED. 

General Remarks upon the History of the United States. 

1. I have now told you a short story about our own country. You 
will notice that the first settlement made by the white people in the 
United States, was at Virginia, in 1607 ; the next in New York by 
the Dutch, in 1613 ; the next by the Puritans, or, as we often call 
them, the Pilgrims, at Plymouth, in Massachusetts, in 1620. 

2. Other parts of the country were soon settled, chiefly by people 
from England ; but colonies were established also by Swedes, Ger- 
mans, and French. Thus the whole country along the Atlantic 
border became inhabited. By degrees, the settlers went farther and 
farther into the wilderness, until towns and cities rose up throughout 
the whole interior of the land. 

3. Thus you will observe that about two hundred and thirty years 
ago, there was not a white inhabitant throughout this vast country. 
The Indian tribes were numerous, and their whole numbei within 
the present boundary of the United States, might have been two 
hundred thousand. 


6. What of naval battles? 7. Describe the battle of New Orleans ? When did it take 
place ? What was done in 1817 ? In 1825 ? Whose son was John Quincy Adams ? 9. 
When did Jackson become president? When was Martin Van Buren made president? 
What of Harrison? Ch. CLXXV. — 1. Where and when was the first settlement in the 
United States ? The next? The next : 2. What of other parts of the country ? 3. What 
of this country two hundred and thirty years ago ? What of the Indians ? 


UNITED STATES. 


287 


4. But these lords of the forest gradually disappeared before the 
white people. Many of them were slain in battle with the settlers; 
the others gradually retired, as the forests were cut down, and the 
lands cleared. 

5. They lived by hunting wild deer, hears, buffaloes, and wild 
turkeys ; and as these animals fled from towns and cities, and took 
refuge in the forests, so the Indians went with theta. 

6. In this way the red men vanished from the settled portions ot 
the country, and at this day there are few of them to be seen, except 
in. the far western wilderness. There herds of wild deer, vast flocks 
ol bisons, bears, wild turkeys, and other wild animals are to be found, 
and there is now the home of the Indians. 

7. Well, as the Indians retired, the white people increased, being 
all under the government of the king of England. At the time of the 
Revolution, they were three millions in number, and as the king 
treated ihem ill, they threw off his authority and set up a govern- 
ment for themselves. 

8. This government, or constitution, was formed in 1789, and we 
have lived under it very happily for nearly fifty years; and the little 
nation of three millions has now become fifteen millions strong. 


CHAPTER CLXXVL— AMERICA CONTINUED. 

General Remarks on the History of the United States 
continued . 

*• v ' • 7 /“* _ 

1. In reviewing the history of our country, we shall notice that it 
has been involved in two wars since it became independent. Previous 
ta that event, the colonists had a great many battles with the Indian 
tribes, and they had a good deal of fighting to do in the old French 
wai, which commenced about 1755. 

S. The revolutionary war was a great affair. The people were 
fighting for independence, for liberty. America was poor, and Eng- 
land was rich and powerful. In this struggle, our country may be 
compared to a stout boy in the grasp of a strong man, who is trying 
to bind him in chains. But the boy breaks the chains asunder, 
turns upon his oppressor, and drives him out of the country. 

3. In looking back, then, we see that our forefathers toiled and 
suffered much to establish freedom in this country. We are now 
enjoying the fruits of their labors. Let us cherish their memory, for 
they were great and good men. Let us be thankful to Heaven, foi 
it has smilled upon their labors. 

4. Having taken a backward glance at the history of our country, 

4. 6. Tell the story of the Indians ? 6. Where are they now principally to be seen’ 
What of animals ? 7. What of the white people ? Their numbers at the time of the Re 
volution ? S. When was the American government completed ? Population of the United 
States at this time ? Ch. CLXXVI — 2 . To what may our country be compared in the 
revolutionary war ? 3 What of our forefathers? 


288 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


let us consider for a moment its present condition. Look at the 
towns and cities that are scattered over the country. Look at the 
hills arid valleys, covered with fruit trees and gardens, and yielding 
their annual harvests. 

5. Look at the rivers, ploughed with whizzing steamboats ; look 
at the canals, bearing along their burden of produce and merchandise. 
Look at the steam-cars, hurrying along like birds upon the wing; 
look at our seaports, and see the forest of shipping that is crowded 
into their harbors. 

6. Visit the city of New York, a busy, buzzing hive of men, con- 
taining nearly three hundred thousand people. Observe its beautiful 
streets, its fine houses, the banks, the churches, and other public 
edifices. 

7. Enter the shops and notice the beautiful articles of merchandise 
brought from China, from Java, from Hindostan, from Arabia, from 
all the shores of the Mediterranean Sea, from England, France, Hol- 
land, and all the borders of the Baltic. 

S. Go to the top of the City Hall, where you can have a view of 
the surrounding waters; notice the fringe of masts encircling the 
southern portion of the city. See there the flag of every commercial 
country under heaven. See there, too, ships, sloops, schooners, and 
steamboats, coming and going like bees in a summer morning, all 
bringing their burden to the hive. 

9. What a beautiful sight is this, and in a country, too, which has 
been settled but little more than two hundred years! And, if you 
would know more of our country, get into a steamboat and sail up 
the Hudson, one of the finest streams on the face of the globe. 

10. Visit Troy, Albany, Utica, Rochester, and Buffalo; all of them 
interesting and flourishing towns. Observe the numerous villages, 
the handsome houses, and the throngs of happy people that inhabit 
the state of New York. 

11. If you are fond of travelling, cross Lake Erie in a steamboat, 
and proceed to Ohio. See there a country that has not been settled 
sixty years, now studded over with thriving towns and villages. Go 
to Cincinnati, Louisville, Nashville, St. Louis, and proceed on the bo- 
som of the great Mississippi to New Orleans. 

12. If you are riot satisfied with all this, cross to the Pacific; visit 
the gold mines of California ; proceed to Oregon, and from this point 
of view consider the extent and resources of these United States. 

13. When you have seen these interesting things, go home and re- 
flect upon them. Sit quietly down, review the past, consider the 
present, and look forward to the future. What a glorious prospect 
for our co.untry, if our present government continues, if the people are 
true to their own interests, and maintain the liberty their fathers left 
them ! 


4. 5. What shail we see ii\ looking at our country ? 6. What shall we obse.re in the 
city of New York? 8. What shall we see on the waters around? 9. What of the Hud 
son? 10. Cities of New York? 11. State of Ohio? 12, What of the valley of the 
Mississippi ? 


AMERICA. 


289 


14. I say, if the people are true to their own interests. We live in 
a fine country, we have a good form of government, but these will 
not insure happiness. If the people become indolent, or if they be- 
come wicked, ruin and desolation will visit this land. Government 
may be compared to a house ; those who live in it must take good 
care of it. 

15. They must keep their doors and windows shut, to prevent 
storms from driving in. If any part decays, or is injured by a tempest, 
it must be repaired. The fires must be watched at night. In short, 
the whole establishment must be taken care of by people who are 
worthy of being trusted, people who are skilful, and who cannot be 
tempted to neglect their duty. 

16. If the house is intrusted to careless, ignorant, or faithless people, 
it may take fire, and the inhabitants be burned up. Or it may decay 
and fall down upon the heads of those who dwell in it. Or it may 
become leaky, so as to admit, the cold wind, or the driving rain or snow. 
It may thus become; a miserable and comfortless habitation. 

17. It is so with government. If careless, ignorant, or faithless ru- 
lers are chosen to take care of the country, wars and commotions may 
follow; poverty and vice may spread over the land ; ignorance and 
misery may take the place of knowledge and prosperity. Thus the 
government, which, like a house, is designed to protect us, when ill 
managed, like a house on fire, or borne down by the tempest, may be 
the cause of our ruin. 

18. Think of these things, my young readers, and when you be- 
come men, always use your influence to have no other rulers than 
those who are capable, honest, and sincere friends of the country. 


CHAPTER CLXXVII. — AMERICA CONTINUED. 

About South America. El Dorado , and the Fountain 

of Youth. 

1. No sooner had Columbus discovered America, than the pope of 
Borne claimed it all as his own. None of the Catholic kings of Europe 
were supposed to have any right to plant colonies there, unless his 
holiness granted them permission. 

2. Alexander the Sixth was pope at that time. He very generous-’ 
ly bestowed one half of the new world on the king of Spain, and the 
other half on the king of Portugal. These kings then sent out ships 
and men, who conquered immense territories, and reduced many of 
the inhabitants to slavery. 

3. The Spaniards first took possession of the West Indies. They 
built the city of Havana, on the island of Cuba, and the Spanish gov- 

14. To Vait may government be compared ? 17. What will happen to the land if faith* 
less ruler* chosen ? Ch. CLXXVII. — 1. What of the pope of Rome? 2. What did 
pope Alexander do i What of the kings of Spain and Portugal ? 


290 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


erno>* had his residence there. Other nations afterwards took pos- 
session of these islands. The great object of all who came to Ameri- 
ca, at this period, was to get gold and silver. The most wonderful 
stories were told about the abundance of these metals in some parts 
of the western continent. 



Natives of South America. 


4. There was supposed to be a kingdom, called El Dorado, or the 
Gilded, which was thus described. The king was every day covered 
with powdered gold, so that he looked like a golden image. The 
palace of this glittering monarch was built of brilliant marble as 
white as snow. The pillars of the palace were porphyry and alabas- 
ter. Its entrance was guarded by two lions, who were fastened to a 
tall column by chains of massive gold. 

5. After passing the lions, a fountain was seen, from which gushed 
a continual shower of liquid silver, through four large pipes of gold. 
The interior of the palace was too splendid to be described. 

6. It contained an alter of solid silver, on which was an immense 
golden sun. Lamps were continually burning, and their dazzling ra- 
diance was reflected from innumerable objects of silver and gold. 
Such was the splendid fiction, invented by somebody, and believed in 
Europe. 

7. Numbers of adventurers went in search of El Dorado, and some 
pretended that they had really visited this golden kingdom. But it 
has long since been ascertained that no such kingdom ever ex isted. 

8. Another thing which the Spaniards expected to find in America, 
was the fountain of youth. Far away beneath the shadows of the 
forest, they believed that there was a fountain, the bright waters of 
which would wash away wrinkles, and turn gray hair dark again. 

9. Oh, if there were any such fountain, old Peter Parley would 

S. What of the Spaniards? What was the great object of all who came to America? 
What of gold and silver ? 4. 5. 6. Describe the kingdom of El Dorado as it was supposed 
to eiiat. 8. 9 . 10. Describe the fountain of youth ? 


AMERICA. 


291 

journey thither, lame as he is, and plunge head foremost iiv o it 3 bo- 
som . Alter a while, the children of America would ask,— “ W here 
is that lame old gentleman who used to tell us stories ?” 

10. And there would be a little rosy boy among them, i s.rang^ 
whom they had never seen before. He would cry out,“l[ wss vi i 
reler rariey ; but 1 have been bathing in the fountain of youth, >« 
now l am a boy again I Come, let us see which will hop farthest !” 


CHAPTER CLXXVIIL— AMERICA CONTINUED. 

History of the Mexican Territories. Texas. Guatimala 

1. Though there was no El Dorado in America, there was golu 
enough to satisfy even the Spaniards, if such rapacious people evei 
could be satisfied. The empire of Mexico contained immense riches 

2. This country is in the southern part of North America. It ex 
tends across from the Gulf of Mexico to the Pacific Ocean. Its capi 
tal city, which is likewise called Mexico, is one of the most magnifi- 
cent in the world. 

3. When America was first discovered, the city of Mexico was 
even more splendid than it is now. It had stately temples and houses, 
which were profusely ornamented with gold. Its inhabitants were 
more civilized than any other natives of America. 

4. In the year 1519, Fernando Cortez, a Spaniard, invaded Mexico, 
with only about six hundred men. But, as his followers wore iron 
armor, and had muskets and cannon, they were able to fight whole 
armies of the Mexicans. 

5. The emperor of Mexico was named Montezuma. He received 
Cortez and his men with great civility, for he was afraid to quarrel 
with them. But, after a short time, Cortez threw Montezuma into 
prison, and loaded him with chains. 

6. Finding himself in so unhappy a situation, Montezuma consented 
to become a vassal of the king of Spain. But the Mexicans raised an 
insurrection, and when Montezuma endeavored to quiet them, they 
uttered shouts of scorn and anger. 

7. So offended were they, that they discharged arrows and stones 
at him. One arrow struck poor Montezuma in the breast, and stretched 
him on the ground. He would not suffer the wound to be dressed, 
and, in a few days, this ill-fated emperor died. 

8. The Mexicans elected Guatimozin, son-in-law of Montezuma, to 
succeed him. Pie made a vigorous attack on the Spaniards and 
drove them from the city of Mexico. But Cortez soon came back 
with an army, and conquered the whole country. 

9. The emperor Guatimozin was taken prisoner. He refused to 

Ch. CLXXVIir. — 1. What of gold in Mexico ? What of Mexico ? Capital? 3. De. 
scribe the city of Mexico ? 4. When did, Cortez invade Mexico? 5. What of Montezu- 
ma? Cortez? 6 What, did Montezuma do ? What of the Mexicans ? 7. Fate of Mon- 
tezuma 9. What did Guatimozin do ? Cortez ? 9. What was done to Guatimozin ? 


292 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


confess where his treasures were concealed. Some of the Spaniafds 
then laid him at full length on a bed of burning coals. There Guati- 
mozin writhed in agony, till he was delivered by Cortez, who had 
borne no part in this horrible cruelty. But, about three years after- 
wards, Guatimozin was suspected of being engaged in a conspiracy, 
and Cortez sentenced him to be hanged. 



10. It has been affirmed, that Cortez and his soldiers killed four 
millions of the Mexicans, in completing the conquest of the country. 
He pretended that his only object was to convert the people to the 
Christian religion. But he and his soldiers acted like fiends, rather 
than Christians. 

11. From the time of its conquest by Cortez, the Mexican empire 
continued under the government of Spain, till the year 1810. A re- 
volution then took place. 

12. In 1813, the Mexican provinces declared themselves free and 
independent. But their independence was not established till several 
years afterwards. They are now called the United Mexican States. 
One of these provinces was Texas, which has lately become inde- 
pendent. 

13. Texas became a republic, and its government was modeled 
after that of the United States. .The number of inhabitants is about 
250,000, chiefly emigrants from our country. Houston and Galves- 
ton are the principal towns. 

14. The country was declared independent in 1834. The Mexi- 
cans soon after sent an army against it, under Santa Anna, their Pre- 
sident. He was defeated and taken in the famous battle of San 
Jacinto. April 21, 1836. Texas was, however, annexed to the United 
States in 1845, and is now one of the thirty States of the Union. 

His fate? 10. What is said of Cortez? What excuse did he give for his cruelty? 
11. How long was the Mexican empire uuder the government of Spain ? What took placo 
|b 1810 ? 12 What in 1813? What are they now called ? What of Texas? 13 What 
o t Guatimala ( 


PERU. 


293 


15. The country called Guatimala, or the United States of Central 
America, is an independent republic ; the city of Guatimala is its capi- 
tal. It has been once destroyed by an earthquake, but it is now a 
large place. The history of the country is not worth relating here. 

16. The late travels of Mr. Stevens, however, has given a new in- 
terest to Guatimala. He has described the ruins of several ancient 
cities there, which belonged to the native Indians, and which show 
that they had made great advances in architecture, sculpture, and 
other arts. 


CHAPTER CLXXIX.— AMERICA CONTINUED. 


V 


Spanish Peruvian Territories, 



Spanish Inhabitants of Peru, 


1. A few years after the conquest of Mexico by Cortez, the Span 
iards also conquered the vast empire of Peru, in South America. At 
the present day, Peru is bounded north by the republic of Equator, 
east by Brazil, south by Bolivia and the Pacific Ocean, and west by 
the Pacific. But when the Spaniards first invaded it, the Peruvian 
empire included a much larger space. 

2 . The sovereigns of this empire were called Incas, and the Peru- 
vians believed that their first inca was a child of the sun. The in- 
habitants were worshippers of the sun. 

3. Peru contained many magnificent cities, and gold was more 
abundant even than in Mexico. Of course, no sooner did the Span- 
iards hear of it, than they determined to make themselves masters of 
the country. 

4. The first invader was Francis Pizarro. In 1531, he marched 

Ch. CLXXIX.— 1. When was Peru conquered ? What of Peru at the present tune? 
What of it when the Spaniards first invaded it ? 2. What of the native sovereigns of Peru ? 
The people? 3. What did Peru contain? What did the Spaniards determine to do? 
4 . When did Pizarro go to Peru* 


294 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


into Peru, and took the inca prisoner in his own palace. The inca’s 
name was Atabalipa. To regain his freedom, he offered Pizarro aa 
much gold as would fill a spacious hall of his palace, piled as high as 
he could reach. 

5. But after the gold had been delivered, Pizarro refused to give 
Atabalipa his freedom. He was not satisfied with the inca’s treasure, 
but was determined to have his blood. So he condemned him tc 
death ; and Atabalipa was accordingly strangled and burnt. 

6. When he had conquered the Peruvians, Pizarro quarrelled with 
one of his chief officers, named Almagro. They made war upon each 
other, and Pizarro caused Almagro to be beheaded. Soon afterwards 
he was himself murdered. 

7. In the course of time, the Peruvian empire was divided into sev- 
eral provinces. All of them were under the government of Spam. 
The Spanish territories comprised nearly all the western part of South 
America. 

8. But the kingdom of Spain became so weak that it lost its au- 
thority over these colonies. The first resistance to the government 
was made while Joseph Bonaparte was king of Spain ; and the people 
would not return to their allegiance, when the former king was again 
on the throne. 

9. The different states in America, which were once Spanish prov- 
inces, are called the United Mexican States, the Republic of Central 
America, New Grenada, Venezuela, Equator, Peru, Bolivia, Chili, 
Buenos Ayres, Uruguay, and Paraguay. Most of them are in a very 
unsettled condition. 


CHAPTER CLXXX.— AMERICA CONTINUED. 

Account of the Brazilian Territories. 

1. The vast country of Brazil is bounded north by New Grenada, 
Venezuela, and Guiana ; east by the Atlantic Ocean ; south by the At- 
lantic, Uruguay, and Paraguay ; and west by Bolivia, Peru, and the 
republic of Equator. It is larger than the whole United States to- 
gether. 

2. When the Spaniards were making conquests in other parts of 
America, the Portuguese came to Brazil. It is said that, near the 
river Amazon, they found a nation of women, whose lives were spent 
in war. 

3. We do not read that the Portuguese committed such horrible 
cruelties as the Spaniards did. The reason was, that the natives of 
Brazil possessed but little gold ; and the Portuguese hardly thought 
it worth their while to colonize the country. 

Who was the Inca ? What did he do ? 5. Fate of Atabalipa ? 6. What of Pizarro and 
Almag/o ? What became of Pizarro? 7. What of the Peruvian empire ? What of the 
Spauv** territories ? 8. What of the kingdom of Spain ? The people ? 9. What of the 
»ta - 1 a America once Spanish provinces ? Ch. CLXXX. — 1. Boundaries of Brazil ? Ex- 
e> i. What of the Portuguese ? Amazons i 3. Why were the Portuguese not as 
ei -s the Spaniards. 


WEST INDIES. 


295 


4. During many years the government of Portugal was accustomed 
to send nobody but criminals thither ; so that to be sent to Brazil was 
considered almost as bad as being sent out of the world. 

5. In 1548, a multitude of Jews were banished to Brazil. They 
planted the sugar-cane there and successfully cultivated it. When 
the king of Portugal found that the country was rjch and fruitful, he 
sent over a governor, in order that he might not lose his share of the 
wealth. 

6. France, Spain, and Holland, likewise attempted to get posses- 
sion of Brazil. But the Portuguese resisted them, and finally became 
sole masters of the country. Perhaps, if the other nations had known 
of the hidden riches of Brazil, they would not have given up their 
claims so easily. 

7. A long time after the settlement of the country, valuable mines 
of gold were discovered. Considerable quantities of this precious 
metal are also found in the beds of the rivers, mixed with sand and 
gravel. The topaz and the diamond are sometimes seen glittering 
among the gold. 

8. The Rio Pardo, though it is a very small and shallow stream, 
produces a great number of diamonds. Other rivers are likewise en- 
riched with them. Negro slaves are employed in washing the sand 
and gravel of these rivers, and when one of them finds a very large 
diamond, he receives his freedom. 

9. In 1806, the king of Portugal removed to Brazil, and established 
his court in the city of Rio Janeiro. Fifteen years afterwards, he re- 
turned to Lisbon. His son Pedro was then proclaimed emperor of 
Brazil. 

10. In 1831, the Brazilians became discontented with the govern- 
ment of Pedro. He therefore gave up the imperial crown to his son, 
who -was then only five years old. This boy was styled the empe- 
ror of Brazil ; but the government was carried on by a council of 
regency, till a few years since, when the emperor assumed the 
government. 

CHAPTER CLXXXI.— AMERICA CONTINUED. 


> „ 

The West Indies. 


1. I MUST not close my story about America, without giving you 
some little account of the West India islands, lying in the Atlantic 
Ocean between North and South America. These consist of three 
clusters, called the Bahamas, the Antilles, and the Caribbees. Ihe 
Bahamas are the most northerly of the three groups, and lie near to 


4. Who were sent to Brazil ? 5. What happened in lo4S ? What of | he * 1 5 p^M 

of other countries ? 7. What were discovered in Brazil? 8. What of the Rio Pardo . 

What of the negro slaves ? 9. When did the king of I ortugal remoye to ^azil - Where 
did he establish his court ? When did he return to Lisbon ? What of his son Pedro . 10. 

W h at of the Brazilians in the year 1831? What did Pedro do? How is Brazil now gov- 
erned? Ch. CLXXXI.— 1. Where are the West India Islands situated? Of what three 
groups do they consist? What of the Bahama islauds. 


296 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


Florida. They are about six hundred in number. Most of them are 
small, consisting of sand and rocks, and are uninhabited by man. 

2. These howeyer, are the resort of a great variety of sea-fowl. 
Many of the birds which visit the lakes and shores of the United 
States in summer, retire to these lonely islands in winter, where they 
find a secure and pleasant abode. The. Bahama islands belong tc 
Great Britain, and contain about seventeen thousand inhabitants 
The principal are Turks island, Providence, and San Salvador, or Cat 
Island. This last was that which Columbus first discovered. 

3. The Antilles, occupying the middle portion of the West Indies 
consist of Cuba, which is the largest, and belongs to Spain ; Hayti, or 
St. Domingo, which is independent, and governed by blacks ; Porto 
Kico, which belongs to Spain ; Jamaica, which belongs to Great Bri 
tain, and a few smaller islands. 

4. The Caribbee islands are very numerous, and lie southeasterly 
of the others. They stretch from Porto Rico in a semicircular grou; 
to the shores of South America. They belong to different European 
governments. The most celebrated of these islands are Martiniqui 
Barbadoes, St. Thomas, Tobago, St. Lucia, St. Vincent, Gaudaloup* 
Antigua, St. Christophers, Dominica, Santa Cruz, and Trinidad. 

5. The climate of the West Indies is that of perpetual summer; 
Frost and snow never come to visit them. The trees are ever cloth 
ed with leaves, and many of the shrubs and plants continue at all 
times to be adorned with blossoms. 

6. The fruits which are common to us, such as apples, pears, cher 
ries, and peaches, are unknown in these regions ; but oranges, figs 
lemons, pineapples, and many other nice things, are abundant. 

7. The people do not cultivate Indian corn, wheat, rye, oats, and 
barley, as we do, but they raise sugar-cane, from which they extract 
sugar and molasses, and they cultivate coffee, cotton, indigo, tobacco, 
cocoa, allspice, and other things. 

8. The forests contain mahogany, lignum vitae, iron wood, and 
other woods useful in the arts. Among the birds are parrots of vari- 
ous kinds, some of which are not bigger than a bluebird. A friend of 
mine made me a present of. one of these little fellows a few years 
since. Instead of sitting upon his perch, I have known him to hang 
by his claws to the top wires of the cage, with his head downwards, 
and thus remain during the whole night. 

9. Among the quadrupeds of the W est Indies are some curious little 
monkeys, and several kinds of lizards. The chameleon is the most 
interesting of these. He was formerly supposed to live on air, and 
to have the power of changing his color at will. But it is now ascer- 
tained that he often makes a sly meal upon insects that come in his 
way, and that his color does not vary more than that of several other 
animals of a similar kind. 

10. Although the West Indies are never disturbed by winter, they 


2. What of sea-fowl ? To whom do the Bahamas belong ? Which are the principal 
ones ? 3. What can you say of the Antilles ? 4. What of the Carribbee islands? The prin- 
cipal ones? 6. What of the climate of the West Indies? 6. Fruits? 7. Productions r 8 
Forests ? Birds ? 9. What of monkeys ? The chameleon ? 


WEST INDIES. 


207 


are often visited by terrible hurricanes. These sometimes come so 
suddenly as to tear the sails from the masts of vessels, and often over- 
turn the houses and trees upon the lapd. 


CHAPTER CLXXXII. — AMERICA CONTINUED. 

West Indies continued. 

1. If you were to visit the West Indies at the present day, yo7j 
would find them inhabited by Europeans and their descendants, to- 
gether with a great many negroes. But you would meet with none 
of the native Indians. These have long since disappeared. 

2. You already know that Columbus first discovered one of the Ba- 
hamas, to which he gave the name of St. Salvador, and which is now 
called Cat Island. Here he found a great many people who appear 
to have been nearly the same as the Indians which formerly inhabit- 
ed our country.^ 

' 3. After leaving S. Salvador, Columbus visited Cuba and St. Domin- 
go. Both of these were thronged with Indians. It is supposed that 
Cuba alone contained several millions. -They appeared to live very 
happily, for the climate was mild, and the soil fruitful. They receiv- 
ed Columbus with kindness, and rendered him every service in their 
power. They little thought of the cruel consequences which were 
soon to follow. 

4. Not many years after the discovery of the West India islands, 
the Largest and finest of them were taken possession of by the Spanish 
government. The Indians were a gentle race, and were easily subju- 
gated. The Spaniards did seem to regard them as human beings, 
but rather as wild animals, who were to be exterminated. They 
shot them down by thousands, and even trained bloodhounds to pur- 
sue them. 

5. In this way, the numerous islanders who once swarmed like 
bees upon every hill-side and in every valley of these beautiful regions, 
were reduced to a very small number. Most of these were treated 
like slaves, and many of them were compelled to work in mines, where 
they soon perished from hard labor, to which they were unaccustom- 
ed, and for want of that free air which Heaven had sent them before 
the Europeans came to deprive them of it. 

6. Thus, by degrees, the native West Indians vanished, and their 
fair lands came into the possession of various European governments. 
Spain held Cuba and Porto Rico in her firm grasp. England got pos- 
session of Jamaica, the Bermudas, and some other islands. France 
had St. Domingo, Martinique, Guadaloupe, and several others. Some 
of the smaller islands fell into the hands of the Dutch, Danes, &c. 

10. What of hurricanes ? Ch. CLXXXII.— 1. How are the West Indies inhabited.' 
2. What of Cat island? What people did Columbus find there? 3. What islands did he 
next visit’ What of the Indians ? 4. 5. Wbat of the Spanish government ? How did the 
Spaniards treat the Indians ? 6. Which islands did Spain obtain possession of ? England? 

France ? What of smaller islands ? 


298 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


7. The first object of the Europeans after the discovery of America, 
was to obtain gold and silver. They seemed to imagine that all the 
nibs and mountains in this continent were filled with these precious 
metals. But this illusion soon vanished, and in the West Indies the 
people began to cultivate the soil, instead of digging into the bosom 
of tlie earth for gold and silver. 

8. They discovered that the land was peculiarly suited to the rais- 
ing of sugar-cane, oranges, pineapples, and other productions of a tro- 

{ )ical climate. To these, then, they devoted their attention, and the 
ands soon became very productive. In order to till them, the people 
sent to Africa for negroes, who were brought by thousands and tens 
of thousands, and compelled to work as slaves. Nearly all the labor, 
at the present day, is Derformed by negro slaves. 


CHAPTER CLXXXIII.— AMERICA CONTINUED. 

West Indies continued. 

\ ' ' . / • 

1. I shall not undertake to tell you of all the interesting events 
which have occurred in the West Indies. Several of these islands 
have often changed hands, sometimes belonging to one government, 
and sometimes to another. They have frequently been shaken by 
earthquakes, and often desolated by whirlwinds. But of these events 
I cannot tell you now. 

2. I must not, however, overlook the story of Hayti. This fine 
island was discovered by Columbus on his first voyage, and here he 
left a part of his men, who made the first European settlement on this 
side of the Atlantic. The island was called Hayti by the natives, and 
Hispaniola by the Spaniards. The settlement increased rapidly, and 
soon the whole island became subject to Spain. In after times, the 
French-obtained possession of a portion of the country, and until about 
forty years ago, it was shared between the French and Spanish gov- 
ernments. 

3. But the negro slaves had become much more numerous than 
the white inhabitants, and, in 1791, they rose against their masters. 
France, at this time, was in a state of revolution, and could afford no 
aid to put down the insurrection. The negroes therefore slaughtered 
the white people by thousands, pillaging their houses^ and then set- 
ting them on fire. A few escaped, but a large proportion were 
killed. 

4. The negroes now considered themselves independent, and began 
to form a government of their own. After various revolutions, the 
whole island was formed into a sort of republic, the officers of which 

7. What did the Europeans expect to find abundant in America ? Result of these expect 
ations ? 8. What did they discover ? What of negro slaves ? Ch. CLXXXIII. — 1. What 
of some of the West India islands? 2. Who discovered Hayti? What settlement was 
made? Namesof the island ? To what country did it become subject? What of France? 
8. What was done in 1791 ? 4. What of the negroes ? Their government ? 


WEST INDIES. 


299 


were negroes or mulattoes, and so it continues *0 this day. The 
people are, on the whole, pretty well governed, and the state of so- 
ciety is improving. Nearly all jthe inhabitants are colored people, 
but many of them are intelligent, and carry on the various concerns 
of agriculture and commerce with skill and success. 

5. Before I leave the West Indies, I must say a few words about 
the buccaneers, a famous set of sea-robbers, who infested these 
islands during the seventeenth century. These at first consisted of 
men from England and France, who settled on the western coast of 
St. Domingo and the neighboring island of Tortuga, about the year 
1630 

6. For a while, they lived by hunting wild animals, but when they 
became numerous, they procured vessels, and went forth upon the 
sea to rob and plunder whomsoever they might meet. This business 
succeeded so well, that a great many desperate adventurers from all 
parts of Europe united themselves to the buccaneers. They therefore 
procured larger vessels, which were equipped in the best manner for 
attack. These were filled with daring seamen, and commanded by 
bold leaders. 

7. In this manner the buccaneers became very formidable. Their 
vessels hovered in the track of the merchant ships, ready, like hawks 
in the neighborhood of a barnyard, to pounce down upon whatever 
might come in their way. They often captured ships laden with rich 
merchandise, and sometimes with gold and silver. 

8. In this way, they amassed great wealth ; and such was their 
power at one time, that they made successful attacks upon large 
cities, sometimes pillaging the inhabitants, and sometimes laying 
them under contribution. But, at length, the European governments 
were roused, by the violence and cruelty of these robbers, to measures 
of retaliation. They sent large vessels to cruise in the neighborhood 
of the West Indies, and after many struggles, the buccaneers were 
finally exterminated. 

9. In later times, the West Indian seas have been infested by pi- 
rates, who have captured a good many trading vessels, but they are 
now seldom met with. 

State of society ? 5. What of the buccaneers ? Where were they originally from ? 
Where and in what year did they settle ? 6. How did they live for a while ? What did 
they afterwards do ? By whom were they joined ? 7. What of the ships of the buccaneers ? 
8. Wiat of the power of these pirates ? How were they finally subdued ? 9, What of 
other pirates i 





300 


SCHOOL HISTORY 


CHAPTER CLXXXIV.— AMERICA CONTINUED. 

Chronology of America . 

A. D 

Iceland and Greenland settled 86C 

Christianity introduced into Iceland 981 

Severe winter in Greenland, which destroyed the colony . . 1408 

Columbus born . 1442 

America discovered 1492 

Cortez invaded Mexico . 1519 

French settlements made in Canada 1524 

Pizarro goes to Peru 1531 

First settlement in Virginia at Jamestown 1607 

Quebec founded 1608 

First settlement in New York 1613 

Settlement at Plymouth 1620 

Buccaneers first assemble at St. Domingo and Tortuga . . . 1630 

Maryland settled 1634 

Fit st settlement in Connecticut 1635 

Providence settled 1636 

English got possession of New York 1664 

King Philip’s war begins 1675 

Carolina settled 1680 

Pennsylvania settled 1681 

The Carolina’s divided 1729 

Georgia founded 1733 

Capture of Louisbourg 1745 

Old French war begins 1755 

Capture of Louisbourg by Wolfe 1758 

Quebec taken by the English • . • • 1759 

Stamp act passed 1765 

Boston massacre 1770 

Destruction of tea 1773 

Commencement of the Revolutionary war 1775 

British troops driven out of Boston . 1776 

La Fayette came to America 1777 

Andre taken as a spy 1780 

Gates beat by Cornwallis 1780 

Surrender of Cornwallis 1780 

Peace between Great Britain and the United States .... 1783 
Constitution of the United States went into operation . . . 1789 

Washington made president 17S9 

John Adams made president 1797 

Death of Washington . . 1799 


tell what was happening in Europe , as events were occurring in America. 




MALAYSIA. 301 

A. D, 

Jefferson made president 1801 

Purchase of Louisiana 1803 

King cf Portugal goes to Brazil ...• ••••••• 1806 

Madison made president 1809 

Revolution in Mexico ....... 1810 

United States declare war against Great Britain 1812 

Mexican provinces become free 1813 

Battle of New Orleans , . . 1815 

James Monroe made president 1817 

Jackson made president . . . . 1829 

Don Pedro gives up the crown of Portugal to his son . . . 1831 

Van Buren made president 1837 

Harrison president 1841 

Jdin Tyler president 1841 

J. K. Polk president 1845 

Z. Taylor president 1849 


CHAPTER CLXXXV.— OCEANIA. 

About Oceania . The Malaysian Islands. 

1. Having now related the history of Asia, Europe, Africa, and 
America, the reader will probably think that my Universal History 
ought to close here. But, as an Irishman would say, there is a fifth 
quarter of the globe, on which I must now employ my pen. 

2. America ought no longer to be called the New World ; for there 
is a newer one, composed of the islands which lie in the Pacific and 
Indian Oceans. The name of Oceania has been given to this region. 
If all the islands were put together, they would cover a space of 
at least four millions of square miles. 

3. There are three divisions of Oceania. Those Islands which lie 
in the Indian Ocean, near the continent of Asia, are called Malaysia. 
The largest of them are Borneo, Sumatra, and Java. Scarcely any- 
thing has been written about the history of Malaysia, for the islands 
are chiefly inhabited by the natives, who keep no record of passing 
events, and have no desire to know the deeds of their forelathers. 

4. The history of Java is best known, but it is not very important 
or interesting. It was discovered by the Portuguese, in the year 
1510. They found it an exceedingly fertile island, producing abun- 
dance of sugar, coffee, rice, pepper, spices, and delicious fruits. There 
were also mines of gold, silver, diamonds, rubies, and emaralds. 

5. The island is six hundred and fifty miles in length. Soon after 
its discovery, the Dutch got possession of a large portion of it. They 
built the city of Batavia, on the northwestern coast of the island. 

6. The city is situated on a low, marshy plain, and canals of 
stagnant water are seen in many of the streets. But the edifices 

Ch. CLXXXV. — 2. What of Oceania ? Extent of Oceania ? 3. What of Malaysia ? 
The natives? 4. What of Java? When was it discovered ? What are its productions f 
Mines ? 5 . Length of Java ? Who built Batavia ? Describe the city ? 

2G 


302 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


were sc splendid, that Batavia was called the queen of the East. Its 
beauty was much increased by the trees that overshadowed the 
streets and canals. 

7. In the year 1780, the population amounted to a hundred and 
sixty thousand. People From all the different parts of the world 
were among them. But the Europeans were the fewest in number, 
although the government was in their hands. 

8. Of late years, Batavia has been fast going to decay. The 
climate is so unhealthy, that strangers are very liable to be attacked 
by dreadful fevers. Sometimes a vessel loses her whole crew by 
death. 

9. In the year 1811, the English took possession of the island of 
Java. They kept it till 1816, and then restored it to its former 
owners. The Dutch are said to exercise great tyranny over the 
natives. 


CHAPTER CLXXXVI.— OCEANIA CONTINUED. 

‘ * v . . 1 : •' > *■. ; r . 1 * 

The Australian Division of Oceania . 

1. The second division of Oceania is called Australia. This com- 
prises New Holland, New Guinea, Van Diemen’s Land, and other 
islands in the vicinity. New Holland is an immense island, contain- 
ing three millions of square miles, and is about as large as Europe. 

2. The natives of New Holland are described as the most degraded 
people in the world. They are negroes, and have very lean arms 
and legs. Their features have a resemblance to the monkey tribe, 
and they are said to be not much handsomer or more intellgent than 
the orang-outangs found in the Malaysian islands. 

3. This great island was discovered by the Dutch, in 1610, but the 
whole of it is now claimed as a territory of Great Britain. Captain 
Jamfes Cook, the celebrated navigator, took possession of it in 1770. 

4. It is now divided into two colonies. The eastern is called New 
South Wales, and the western the Swan-river colony. New South 
Wales is the oldest, and began to be settled in 1778. It was then 
called Botany Bay. 

5. The first colonists were not a very respectable sort of people. 
The English government conceived the plan of sending criminals to 
New Holland, instead of keeping them in jail, or sending them to the 
gallows. Accordingly, ship-loads were transported every year. 

6. This cannot be considered a severe punishment, for the soil of 
New Holland is fertile, and the climate is delightful. Perhaps the 

7. Population of Batavia in 1730? S. What of ti '« city of late years ? Its climate? 9. 

What happened in 1811? In 1816? What of the Dutch ? Ch. CLXXXVI 1. 

What is called Australia ? What is the size of New Holland ? 2. What of the natives? 
3. When and by whom was New Holland discovered? Who now hold it in possession? 
When was it taken by captain Cook? 4. What of the two colonies of New Holland? 
When was New South Wales settled? What was the settlement called ? 6. Who wer* 
the first colonists ? Who were sent every year to Botany Bay ? 


POLYNESIA. 303 

English would have acted more equitably, if they had transported 
the honest poor people, who were starving at home. 

7. But, during many years, there were hardly any honest men in 
the new colony. Few of the inhabitants felt any reluctance to commit 
crimes, or were ashamed to be found out; for they knew that their 
neighbors were as bad as themselves. 

8. In later years, however, the people began to improve. The 
children of the convicts were now growing up, and their parents had 
taught them to be more virtuous than they themselves had been. 

9. A young girl, who was born in New Holland, was once asked 
whether she would like to go to England. “ Oh, no !” said she ; “ I 
should be afraid to go there, for the people are all thieves !” The 
child knew that a gang of thieves arrived in every ship which came 
from England, and she naturally supposed that the English were all 
thieves alike. 

10. Criminals still continue to be transported from England ; and 
they are so numerous, that it has been found necessary to plant new 
colonies of them. Since the year 1804, Van Diemen’s Land has been 
appropriated to that purpose. 

1 1. This island lies south of New Holland, and is two hundred 
miles in length. The population is twenty-five thousand, of whom 
about one half are convicted criminals. 


CHAPTER CLXXXVIL— OCEANIA CONTINUED. 

Polynesia. The Sandwich Islands. 

1. The third division of Oceania is called Polynesia. It consists of 

many groups of small islands, which are scattered over a large ex- 
tent of the Pacific Ocean. None of them are inhabited by civilized 
people. . . 

2. The Sandwich islands are among the most important in Poly- 
nesia. They consist of ten islands, of which Owhyhee, or Hawaii, 
is the largest. These islands were discovered by Captain James 
Cook, in 1778. 

3. He found them inhabited by a race of people whose forms were 
very beautiful, although their complexions were darker than our own. 
They appeared to be of a gay, friendly, and sociable disposition. 

4. But there were some shocking customs among them. They 

were in the habit of feasting on human flesh, and offering human 
sacrifices to their idols. They were also great thieves, and had 
many other vices. ___ 

7. What can be said of the colonies for some years ? 8. What of them in later years ? 
9. Relate the anecdote of the young New Holland girl? 10. What has it been found 
necessary to do on account of the number of criminals sent to New_ Holland .What was 
done in 1804 ? 11. Where is Van Diemen’s Land ? Its population ? Ch. CLXXX VII.-— 

1 What of Polynesia ? Its inhabitants ? 2. Which are the most important islands of the 
group? Which is the largest of the Sandwich islands? Who discovered these islands in 
1778 ? 3 . What people did captain Cook find inhabiting the Sandwich islands ? 4 . What 
were some of their customs/ 


304 


8CHOOL HISTORY. 


5. The natives at first behaved in a very friendly manner to captain 
Cook. But, after some time, a part of them stole one of the boats 
belonging to his vessel. The captain went on shore, intending tc 
take the king of Hawaii prisoner, and keep him till the boat should 
he returned. 

6. But when he had landed, the natives mustered in great numbers 
Captain Cook found it necessary to retreat towards his own men 
who were waiting for him in a boat near the shore. The nativefc 
followed him, shouting, throwing stones, and brandishing theii 
weapons. 

7. Captain Cook pointed his musket at them, but it only mad$ 
them more tumultuous and violent. He then took aim and shot the 
foremost native dead. In a moment, before the smoke of his musket 
had blown away, the natives rushed upon him. One of them beat 
him down with a club; and then stabbed him with a dagger. His 
men fired their muskets at the natives, but could not rescue him. 

8. The Sandwich islands soon after became the resort of whale- 
ships, and of all other vessels that voyaged in that part of the Pacific 
Ocean. But the inhabitants did not derive any advantage from their 
intercourse with civilized people. 

9. On the contrary, they became a great deal more viscious than 
ever they were before. They contracted so many diseases, that their 
numbers were reduced from four hundred thousand to less than a 
hundred and fifty thousand. There was reason to fear that the 
islands would be depopulated. 

10. Some American missionaries crossed the ocean, in hopes to 
save these poor islanders from destruction. They preached the Gos- 
pel to them, and established schools, in which the natives were 
taught to read the Bible. 

11. Kaahumana, the queen-regent of the Sandwich islands, adopted 
the Christian religion. By her assistance, the missionaries met with 
great success. A number of schools were established. It appeared 
probable that the whole people would be civilized and christianized. 

12. But Kaahumana died a few years since, and her death was a 
great misfortune to the Sandwich islands. Many of the natives re- 
lapsed into their former vices. But the missionaries are still laboring 
earnestly for their good ; and such has been their success, that the 
people are, in a great degree, brought within the pale of Christianity 
and civilization. 


6. What took place between the natives and captain Cook ? 6. What did Cook find it 
necessary to do ? Relate what then happened ? 8. What ships soon resorted to the 
Sandwich islands? What was the consequence of the intercourse of the natives with the 
Whites ? What of American missionaries ? 11. What of Kaahumana ? 12. Consequence 
ef her death ? What of the missionaries ? 


THE SOCIETY ISLAND!. 


305 


CHAPTER CLXXXVIIL— OCEANIA CONTINUED. 

Polynesia continued. The Society Islands. 

1. The Society islands likewise belong to Polynesia. They are 
situated about a thousand miles south of the equator, which is nearly 
the same distance that the Sandwich islands are north of it. 

2. The largest of the Society islands is called Tahiti, or Otaheite. 
It is a hundred miles in circumference, and is inhabited by about ten 
thousand people. Like the natives of the Sandwich islands, they 
are generally handsome, and of agreeable manners. 

3. A very interesting event took place among these islands, many 
years ago. The brig Bounty, belonging to the British navy, was 
sent to the Society islands in order to carry bread-fruit trees from 
thence to the West Indies. Her commander was lieutenant William 
Bligh. 

4. He arrived at Otaheite in 1788. His crew were delighted with 
tne island. The air was balmy and full of sunshine. Fruits grew 
abundantly on every tree. There was no need of toiling for bread, 
since there were trees enough which produced it ready made, and 
almost as good as if it had been baked. 

5. The natives of Otaheite received the Englishmen with kindness. 
The women behaved with great affection towards the poor storm- 
beaten sailors. In short, the crew spent their time so pleasantly, 
that they were very reluctant to depart. 

6. They desired to spend their whole lives in these sunny islands, 
instead of wandering any more over the wide and dreary sea. When 
the Bounty sailed, they cast many a sad glance at the pleasant shores 
which they were leaving. They had not sailed many days, before 
they formed a resolution to return. 

7. A young man by the name of Christian was an officer on board 
the Bounty. He was not on good terms with lieutenant Bligh, and 
he incited the crew to mutiny against their commander, and take 
possession of the vessel. 

8. One morning, before sunrise, Christian and his associates entered 
lieutenant Bligh’s cabin, while he was asleep. They bound his 
hands behind his back, threatening him with death if he made the 
least resistance. He was then put into a leaky boat, with eighteen 
other persons, who refused to join in the mutiny. 

9. I can only say of lieutenant Bligh and his companions, that they 
arrived safe in England, after severe hardships. The British frigate 
Pandora was then sent to Otaheite in search of the mutineers, that 
they might be brought to justice. 

Ch. CLXXXVIII. — 1. Where are the Society islands? To what group do they belong? 
2. What is the size and population of Tahiti or Otaheite ? What of the natives. 3« 
What of the brig Bounty? Who was her commander? 4 . When did he arrive at Ota- 
neite ? How did his men like the island? 5. How did the natives treat the Englishmen ? 
6. What of the crew of the Bounty? What resolution did they form? 7. What did 
Christian do? S. How did he treat lieutenant Bligh and eighteen others? 9. Did they 
arrive in England? What ship was sent to Otaheite ? 


306 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


10. The frigate arrived at Otaheite and found fourteen of tiw 
mutineers. She took them on board and sailed for England, but was 
wrecked on her passage. Four of the mutineers were drowned. 
The other ten were carried to England, where three of them were 
hanged. 

11. Christian, the ringleader of the mutiny, had not been taken 
prisoner by the Pandora ; for he and several companions had sailed 
from Otheite in the Bounty. They had taken with them a plentiful 
supply of hogs, dogs, cats, and fowls, and also a number of Otaheitan 
men and women. 

12. For a great many years, nobody could tell what had become ot 
Christian and his friends, and of the brig Bounty, in which they had 
sailed away. As no news were heard of them, people universally 
believed that the vessel had gone to the bottom, with all her crew. 


CHAPTER CLXXXIX.- OCEANIA CONTINUED. 

Story of the Bounty concluded. 

1. But, after twenty years, when people had long ago done talking 
about the Bounty, it was found out what had become of her. In the 
year 1813, a British ship of war was sailing from the Marquesas 
islands to the port of Valparaiso, in South America. The captain of 
the vessel was Sir Thomas Staines. In the course of his voyage, he 
happened to cast anchor off Pitcairn’s island. 

2. This small island lies many leagues to the southwest of Ota- 
heite. It was first discovered by captain Carteret, in 1767 ; but very 
few people h-ad since visited it, for it produced no valuable commodi- 
ties, and it was supposed to be uninhabited. 

3. But, as Sir Thomas Staines looked from the deck of his vessel 
to the shore, he was amazed to perceive that the island was culti- 
vated, and that there were small houses on it. These houses were 
better built than those of the savages generally are, and they looked 
somethin" like the dwellings of poor people in England. 

4. While Sir Thomas Staines and his sailors were wondering at 
these circumstances, a small boat put off from the shore. The 
waves rolled very high, but the boat skimmed like a sea-bird over 
the tops of them, and soon came along side of the vessel. 

5. The boat was rowed by two young men. They were hand- 
some, though of rather a dark complexioh. When they came near 
the vessel, one of them called out, in good English, — “Won’t you 
throw us a rope, friends ?” 

10. W..nt happened to the Pandora? What became of the mutineers ? 11. What had 
Christian and his companions done ? 12. What was supposed to have become of them ? 

Ch. CLXXXIX. — 1. What happened in the year 1813? 2. Where is Pitcairn’s island? 
When was it discovered ? 3. What was seen from the deck of the ship ? How did the 
houses appear ? 4. What of a boat from shore ? 5. Describe the young men who rowed 
it ? What did they call out ? 


CHRONOLOGY. 


30 ? 

G. A rope was thrown to them, and they took hold of it and clam- 
bered on board of the vessel. Sir Thomas Staines asked them who 
they were, and how they came to be living on that lonely island. 
The mystery was soon explained. 

7. When Christian and his companions left Otaheite, they had 
steered for Pitcairn’s island, and had run the Bounty on the rocks and 
set her on fire. They had then built houses on the island, and had 
married the Otaheitan women whom they brought with them. 

8. Christian and all his associates were now dead, except one old 
man, whose name was John Adams. But they had left children and 
grandchildren, so that there was now quite a flourishing colony on 
the island. 

9. Old John Adams had taught the young people to read the 
Bible, to tell the truth, and to be honest and upright in their be- 
havior. They seemed to be the happiest set of creatures that ever 
lived ; for they hardly knew that there was any sin and sorrow in the 
world. 

10. Oh, it is a pity that Sir Thomas Staines ever anchored off Pit- 
cairn’s island ! It is a pity that those poor people could not have 
lived and died in their little sea-girt home, without ever beholding a 
human creature but themselves ! 

11. The more they learned about mankind, the worse it was for 
them. Their own island, though a little one, was large enough to 
be their world. I have only to add, that old John Adams is dead. 
Recent accounts assure us that the peoplp remain, about one hundred 
and ninety in number, very innocent and happy. 


CHAPTER CXC.— OCEANIA CONTINUED. 


Chronology of Oceania . 


A.D 

Java discovered by the Portuguese 1510 

New Holland discovered by the Dutch 1610 

Batavia, the capital of Java, built by the Dutch 1619 

Captain Cook took possession of New Holland 1770 

Botany Bay, in New South Wales, settled 1778 

Sandwich Islands discovered by Captain Cook ...... 1778 

Death of Captain Cook 1779 

Ship Bounty arrives at Otaheite 1788 

Convicts sent to Van Dieman’s Land 1804 

The English take Java from the Dutch 1811 

Sir Thomas Staines reaches Pitcairn’s island 1813 

The Dutch take Java again from the English 1816 

Missionaries established at the Sandwich Islands 1820 


7. Where had Christian and his companions steered on leaving Otaheite ? What did 
they then do ? 8 Who alone remained of the mutineers ? How was the colony peopled i 
&. What had John idams done for the young people ? 10. What reflections can you makd 
upon this incident. 


308 


SCHOOL HISTORY. 


CHAPTER CXCI. 

General Views. 

1. I will now give you some account of the origin of government, 
architecture, and other things. At the present day, some nations aie 
governed in one way and some in another. In this country, the 
people are governed by rulers of their own choice, and according to a 
constitution of their own formation. This nation is therefore called 
a Republic. 

2. Some nations are governed by kings or emperors, who rule ac- 
cording to their own will. These are called despotic monarchies. 
Other nations are ruled by kings or emperors, whose power is re- 
strained by legislative assemblies, who make laws for the country. 
These are called limited monarchies. 

3. In very early ages, there were no kings or emperors. A father 
would rule over his family, or a grandfather would rule over all his 
descendants. This kind of government was called patriarchal. It 
existed before the flood, and continued in some parts of Asia long after 
that event. 

4. But when the people became divided into nations, they went to 
war with each other. The boldest and strongest man would become 
the leader. Having the soldiers at his command he would acquire 
great power, and become a king or chief. As the people became 
rich, he would build palaces and live in great pomp. 

5. When a king conquered several nations he would be styled em- 
peror. Thus you perceive that the rulers went on acquiring power, 
until they made slaves of the people. In Europe and Asia, nearly all 
the nations are governed by kings or emperors. 

6. At various times, the people have become tired of being gov- 
erned by selfish monarchs, and have established governments for 
themselves. In ancient G-reece and Rome, the people threw off the 
yoke of their tyrant kings, and for a time enjoyed freedom. But it 
always happened that ambitious men have led the people astray and 
enslaved them. It is to be hoped that the Americans will not thus 
part with their liberty. 

7. In looking round upon the world, and observing the multitude 
of cities filled with beautiful buildings, you would hardly imagine 
that mankind once dwelt in huts, grottos, caverns, and tents; yet 
6uch was the case in early ages. 

8. But as people grew more civilized, they made themselves more 
comfortable houses. At first they were of stone or wood, rudely put 
together ; but after a time they learned to make them more neatly. 

9. Having pretty good houses for themselves, they began to erect 
temples for their gods. Thus architecture was improved and became 
a great art. The ancient Egyptians, Babylonians, Assyrians, Persians, 
and Phoenicians filled their cities with splendid edifices. But of all 
the ancients, the Greeks built the most pleasing and elegant struc 


T 


GENERAL VIEWS. 


309 


tures. The Romans carrying 1 their conquests over the civilized 
world, copied and combined the architecture of different countries. 
Many of their edifices were exceedingly splendid, but not so chaste 
and beautiful as those of the Greeks. 

10. Agriculture was one of the first arts of man. The Bible tells 
us, that Cain was a tiller of the ground, and that Noah was a hus- 
bandman, and planted a vineyard. For many ages, agriculture was 
almost the only art practised by mankind. 

11. The Chinese, Japanese, Chaldeans, Egyptians, and Phoenicians, 
held husbandry in high estimation, in the earliest ages. The Greeks 
had but few farming tools; but the Romans used a great variety. 
They particularly venerated the plough. 

12. The first mention made of nations trading together appears in 
the book of Genesis, chapter 38: 25, when Joseph’s brethren sold him 
to a band of Ishmaelites, who were conveying spices, balm, and myrrh 
into Egypt. The balm was from Gilead, and the myrrh was the pro- 
duce of Arabia. They were going through the land of Canaan into 
Egypt, which was then a highly cultivated kingdom. 

13. The central situation of Egypt made it the ancient emporium 
of commerce. By caravans, the treasures of Asia and Africa were 
brought thither. Trade was always held in esteem, because of the 
wealth it brought. Tyre and Sidon, cities of Phoenicia, were early 
devoted to commerce ; and Solomon carried on an extensive trade 
with them. 

14. The Greeks had great commerce along the borders of the 
Mediterranean Sea. The Carthaginians were also a highly commer- 
cial people. The Romans preferred acquiring wealth by conquest 
and plunder, rather than by trade. Of all modern nations, Great 
Britain is the most commercial. 

15. I have not space to tell you the history of music, painting and 
sculpture. Egypt was the birth-place of the arts and sciences, but 
most of the great nations of antiquity made some progress in them. 
The most beautiful specimens of sculpture in existence are those pro 
duced by Greek artists, at least two thousand years ago. In painting 
the modem Italians have excelled all other nations. 


the am 








RICHARDSON'S ENGLISH DICTIONARY., 


A New Dictionary of the English Language, by CHARLES RICHARDSON 

2 volumes quarto, 2295 pages. Price, $12. 

Richardson’s English Dictionary is acknowledged to be the great The-* 
taurus of English Philology and Lexicography. Its character as a work of 
standard authority is so well established, that few scholars or professional men 
will deem their libraries complete without it. Whatever other dictionaries a 
gentleman may have, he needs that of Richardson, for its ample chronological 
quotations from the older authors. These quotations give to any one who will 
consult them, the key by which he may learn for himself the true meaning and 
history of words, without relying implicitly upon the dictum of a lexicogra- 
pher. To Authors, Teachers, Professors in Colleges, Divines, Jurists, Physi- 
cians ; to gentlemen, in short, of every description, who wish to form or defend 
their opinions on original rather than second-hand authority, this work seems to 
be one of indispensable necessity. There is no profession in which important 
questions do not arise, depending for their solution upon the precise meaning of 
some particular word. This meaning can be settled only by usage, and usage is 
to be ascertained not by the opinions of Johnson, or Walker, or Webster, but 
by copious quotations from the old standard authors. The work of Richardson, 
consisting of over two thousand closely printed and compact pages, filled with 
pertinent extracts from the very fountain-heads of English literature, furnishes 
to the thoughtful student an immense storehouse of materials for the formation 
of original and independent opinions. 

In addition to this, which is perhaps the most striking feature of the book, the 
New English Dictionary is believed to be the most complete work extant on 
English Etymologies. The elaborate preface, setting forth the general princi- 
ples of comparative philology, shows in the strongest light the learning and 
“considerate diligence” of the author; while, under eac-h word, the careful 
array of its various forms in the different cognate dialects, gives to the student 
not only an inspiring confidence in the abilities of his guide, but the means of 
original research, hitherto requiring numerous and expensive works of refer- 
ence. In fact, the etymologies and the quotations combined, put it in the power 
of a mere English scholar to investigate for himself many important points, the 
truth of which he has been obliged hitherto to take entirely upon trust. 

« A Dictionary such as perhaps no other language could ever boast.” — London 
Quarterly Review. 

“ A valuable contribution to the accessible stores of English philology.”— 
North American Review. 

“ It embraces every desideratum in an English Dictionary.” — Southern Literary 
Messenger. 

» / t , * 

« Le plus savant, le plus consciencteux, le plus complet des dictionnaires do 
la langue Anglaise qui aient paru jusqu’ici.” — Courier des Etats Unis. 

“This Dictionary is a mine of wealth m English literature, and shows oo 
every page the immense erudition of its author.” — National Gazette. 

« The most important work which has ever issued from the American press ' 
— . National Intelligencer. 


PUBLISHED BY E. H. BUTLER & CO., PHILADELPHIA. 


DONNEGAN'S GREEK LEXICON; 


1422 Pages, Royal 8vo. Price $4. 


A new Greek and English Lexicon, on the plan of the Greek and German Lex 
icon of Schneider ; the words alphabetically arranged, — distinguishing such 
as are Poetical, of Dialectic variety, or peculiar to certain Writers and Classes 
of Writers; with Examples, literally translated, selected from the Claesioal 
Writers. By JAMES DONNEGAN, M.D., of London: Revised and En- 
larged, by ROBERT B. PATTON, Professor of Ancient Languages in the 
College of New Jersey ; with the assistance of J. ADDISON ALEXANDER, 
D.D., of the Theological Seminary at Princeton. 


HIT* The quick sale of so many large editions of this Lexicon , is the best evi- 
dence the publishers could desire of its acceptableness to scholars generally. They 
take pleasure , however , in publishing extracts from a few, out of many testimoni- 
als, which they have received respecting the merits of this work. 


From C. C. Felton, Professor of Greek 

Literature, Harvard University, Cam- 
bridge, Mass. 

I have, for some time past, been in 
the habit of consulting frequently the 
American edition of Donnegan’s 
“Greek and English Lexicon.” I 
have no hesitation in saying, that it is 
a most valuable addition to the means 
of acquiring a knowledge of the Greek 
language and literature; and that it 
deserves to be extensively adopted 
in the schools and colleges of the 
United States. Its claims upon the 
confidence of the public are threefold : 
1st. The admirable Greek and Ger- 
man Lexicon of Schneider, has been 
used as a basis by Dr Donnegan. 
Those who are acquainted with the 
unrivalled excellence of Schneider, 
will consider this fact no small recom- 
mendation. 2d. The English compiler 
is evidently a thorough scholar ; and 
even in his first edition, produced a 
work far superior to any before pub- 
lished in England. 3d. The American 
editor has long stood among the most 
distinguished men of letters in our 
country; and is well known, in par- 
ticular, for his masterly knowledge of 
Greek. He here gives the work a 
thorough revision; and, in many re- 
spects, renders it a more useful and 


practical lexicon than it was before. 
It has evidently been prepared with 
scrupulous and laborious fidelity. 

As far as my examination has gone, 
the typographical execution is very 
correct. I doubt not it will speedily 
and generally be adopted ; not only by 
tyros, but by those in mature life, 
who are desirous of renewing or re- 
viving the classical studies of youth. 

With great respect, your obedient 
servant, C. C. Felton. 

Cambridge College. 


From Calvin E. Stowe, Professor at 
Dartmouth College, N. H. 

Since the publication of the second 
edition of Dr. Donnegan’s woik, I 
have had it on my table for occasi mal 
reference. It is formed on the basil of 
Schneider, and possesses many of the 
characteristic excellencies of its origi- 
nal. The labours of Professor Patton, 
in preparing the American edition of 
Donnegan, have made it decidedly su- 
perior to the English ; and it is my 
earnest hope that the real merits pf this 
Lexicon, together with the moderate 
price for which it is now offered, may 
put it into the hands of every Greek 
scholar in the United Slates. 

Calvin E. Stows 
Dartmouth College 


PUBLISHED BY E. H. BUTLER Sc CO., PHILADELPHIA 


FLEMING & TIBBINS' FRENCH DICTIONARY 


An entirely new and complete French and English and English and Frenci 
Dictionary, adapted to the present state of the two Languages. By Prof 
FLEMING, Professor of English in the College of Louis le Grand, and Prof 
TIBBINS, author of several lexicographical works: with important additions, 
by CHARLES PICOT, Esq., Professor of French in the University of Pennsyl- 
vania, and JUDAH DOBSON, Esq., Member of the American Philosophical 
Society, of the Academy of Natural Sciences, Ac. Ac. 1400 pages royal 8vo 
Price, $4. Ditto, abridged, 724 pages 12mo. Price, $1.25. 

This work has been made on the basis of the ROYAL DICTIONARY 
ENGLISH AND FRENCH AND FRENCH AND ENGLISH, compiled from 
the Dictionaries of Johnson, Todd, Ash, Webster, and Richardson, from the last 
edition of Chambaud, Garner, and J. Descarrieres, the sixth edition of the 
Academy, the Supplement to the Academy, the Grammatical Dictionary of La- 
veaux, the Universal Lexicon of Boiste, and the standard technological works in 
either language. It contains, 1st, all the words in common use, with a copious 
selection of terms obsolescent or obsolete, connected with polite literature ; 2d, 
technical terms, or such as are in general use in the arts, manufactures, and 
sciences, in naval and military language, — in law, trade, and commerce ; 3d, 
terms, geographical, Ac. Ac., with adjectives or epithets elucidating history; 
4th, a literal and figured pronunciation for the use of Americans and English- 
men ; 5th, accurate and discriminating definitions, and, when necessary, with 
appropriate examples and illustrations tending to fix as well as display the signi- 
fication, import, rank, and character of each individual word ; 6th, peculiar 
constructions, modes of speech, idioms, Ac. Ac. ; 7th, synonymy; 8th, the diffi- 
culties of French Grammar presented and resolved in English, as they occur 
throughout the work. 

The American edition contains complete tables of the verbs on an entirely 
new plan, to which the verbs throughout the work are referred, by Professor 
Picot, with the addition, in their respective places, of a very great number of 
terms in the natural sciences, chemistry, medicine, Ac. Ac., which are not to be 
found in any other French and English Dictionary, by Judah Dobson, Esq., of 
Philadelphia. 

“ It unites the knowledge of the best lexicographers of France and England.” 

Peter S. Duponceau, President of the American Philosophical Society. 

/ • 

“The most comprehensive and satisfactory Dictionary of the French and 
English languages combined.”— Robley Dunglisson, M. D., Professor in th t 
Jefferson Medical College, and Secretary of the American Philosophical Society. 

a Indispensably necessary to students desirous of understanding the French of 
the nineteenth century.”— F. A. Brtgy, Professor of French and Spanish in tht 
Philadelphia High School. 

“The American editor has enriched it with more than five thousand words 
not in the French copy.”— Rev. Isaac Leeser. 

“ This Dictionary bears evident marks of superiority to any other that has 
ever been introduced into this country.” — Thomas Sherwin, A. M., Principal of 
tht Boston High School. 

PUBLISHED BY E. H. BUTLER A CO., PHILADELPHIA. 


WALKER’S PRONO UNC ING DICTIONARY. 

A Critical Pronouncing Dictionary and Expositor of the English Language ; to 
Which is annexed a Key to the Classical Pronunciation of Greek, Latin, and 
Scripture Proper Names, &c. By JOHN WALKER. Octavo — 782 pages 
Price: — Fine edition, $2.50. Common edition, $1.25. 

In offering to the public a new edition of Walker’s Dictionary, the pub- 
lishers do not feel it to be necessary to say anything in reference to the merits 
of the work itself. It is believed to be regarded very generally, on both sides 
of the Atlantic, as the best and most convenient standard of the language, for 
the purpose of immediate reference — as that of Richardson is for the purpose 
of research. All that it seems necessary to say is, that the utmost diligence has 
been used to make the edition typographically correct. For this purpose, the 
existing editions, English and American, have been collated, and their mistakes 
carefully corrected. The errors that have been found, in the course of tnis 
collation, are such as almost to stagger belief. These errors appear to have 
been creeping in for the last half century, each edition repeating the mistakes 
of its predecessors, and no general recension of the text being made, until much 
of the value of the work, as a standard of the language, was lost. It has been 
the aim of the publishers, in the present edition, by a careful revision of pre- 
vious ones, and by a diligent use of the other necessary means, to offer a text 
as nearly as possible faultless. 

NUGENT'S FRENCH AND ENGLISH DICTIONARY. 

A Pocket Dictionary of the two Languages. In two parts. 1. French and 
English— 2. English and French. By THOMAS NUGENT, LL. D. 452 
pages square 12mo. Price, 63 cents. 

This work contains, besides the words in general use, an alphabetical list of 
the most usual Christian, Proper, and Geographical Names. The present, 
which is from the last London edition, has all the new words inserted in Moutar- 
dier’s and Le Clerc’s last edition of the National French Dictionary, and a 
comprehensive view of the pronunciation and syntax of the French language 
By J. Ouiseau, A.M. 

AAAVNAAAA^AVVVVVVVVV 

LIBRARY OF ENGLISH LITERATURE. 

A Selection from the finest passages of the most distinguished English and 
American Authors, classified and arranged under convenient heads. With 
numerous authentic Portraits. 2 very thick vols. 8vo., 2382 pages. Price, $4. 

This work is truly a library in itself. It is especially suited to the wants of 
those who cannot afford to buy many books. They will find in this collection 
an inexhaustible fund of thought and information, suited to all tastes and all 
eeasons. It is a collection of the most useful and entertaining portions of the 
works of nearly all the standard authors in the English language. No book of 
extracts probably was ever made with more care. The pieces are selected 
with reference both to excellence of style and correctness of sentiment, and are 
carefully classified under the convenient heads of Religious, Moral, Didactic, 
Historical, Narrative, Descriptive, Pathetic, Rhetorical, Dramatic, Sentimental 
Lyric, Ludicrous, Odes, Sonnets, Riddles, Epigrams, Songs, Ballads, &c. Ac. 


PUBLISHED BY E. H. BUTLER & CO., PHILADELPHIA. 


HART'S ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 


An Exposition of the Principles and Usages of the English Language, by 
JOHN S. HART, A. M., Principal of the Philadelphia High School. 109 
pages 12mo. Price 38 cents. 

In the preparation of this work no special attempt has been made at 
novelty. The author’s aim has been chiefly to make a careful and accurate 
digest of those principles of the language which have been remarked by 
previous writers, and to state those principles with precision and perspicuity. 
At the same time, the work is believed to contain many observations that are 
new, and a satisfactory solution of many difficulties not solved in other works 
on the subject. Unusual pains have been taken in preparing the parts intended 
to be committed to memory ; viz., the Rules and the Definitions. In respect to 
these, it is believed, the qualities of clearness, brevity, and accuracy, have 
been attained in a higher degree than in any work on the subject heretofore 
offered to the public. Special care has been used also to distinguish by the 
typography the parts which are elementary from those which are not. By this 
means a large amount of matter is brought within a small compass, and the 
character and relative importance of the various parts of the text are indicated 
clearly to the eye. At the bottom of each page are questions and exercises on 
all the matter contained in that page. This gives great facility in hearing large 
classes, as it prevents the necessity of referring back and forth from the 
question to the answer. The questions are so prepared as to facilitate the des- 
patch of lessons to those teachers who have large and numerous classes, and at 
the same time they are of a suggestive character, suited to the wants of those 
who wish to vary the exercises from time to time. No pains, in short, have 
been spared to make the work, both in regard to the matter and the mechanical 
arrangements, such as seems to be required by the wants of the learner and the 
present advanced state of grammatical knowledge. 

The work has been adopted as a text book by the Controllers of the Public 
Schools of Philadelphia, by the Ward School Teachers’ Association of New 
York, and by a large number of other Schools, public and private. It it 
recommended in strong terms by great numbers of superintendents of public 
schools, and professors and teachers of the highest standing in every part ot 
the United States. Among those who have thus commended it to public con 
fidence are the following : 

A. D. Bache, LL. D., late Superintendent of Public Schools of Philadelphia. 
Hon. A. V. Parsons, late Superintendent of Common Schools of Pennsylvania 
Jesse Miller, Esq., present Superintendent of Common Schools of Penna. 

D. Moore, Esq., Deputy Superintendent of Common Schools of Penna. 
Ciiarles B. Trego, Esq., Chairman of Com. on Education , Penna. Legislatm 
Henry Vethake, LL. D., Professor in the University of Pennsylvania. 

Geo. Emlen Hare, D.D., Assistant Professor in the University of Penna. 

E. Loomis, Esq. Professor in the University of New York. 

Thomas C. Upham, D.D., Professor in Bowdoin College , Maine. 

D. K. Goodwin, Professor of Belles Lettres in do. 

E. W. Gilbert, D.D., President of Newark College , Delaware . 

W. A. Norton, A.M., Professor in the same. 

Rev. Charles Collins, President of Emory and Henry College , Virginia . 
Joseph R. Chandler, sq., late Editor of the United States Gazette. 

Charles Hodge, D. D., Editor of the Princeton Review. 

PUBLISHED BY E. H. BUTLER & CO., PHILADELPHIA. 


HART’S CONSTITUTION OF THE UNITED STATES. 


A Brief Exposition of the Constitution of the United States, in the form of 

Questions and Answers; for the use of Schools and Colleges. By JOHN S. 

HART, a. M., Principal of the Philadelphia High School, and Professor of 

Moral, Mental, and Political Science, in the same. 100 pages 12ino. Price 

34 cents 

“ What uuficulty is there in a boy’s learning that a representative is chosen 
for two years, while a senator is chosen for six ; that a representative must be 
twenty-five years old, while a senator must be thirty ; to know what body has 
the power to impeach, and what the power to try impeachments ; in short, to 
understand and recollect nine out of ten of all the provisions of the constitution ? 
Is it one whit more difficult than to comprehend and recollect the various 
details of geography and history ; to give off-hand the position of Timbuctoo or 
the Tagus, or to know in what year Rome was founded or Caesar slain ? 

“ The plan pursued in this little book is in accordance with the views here 
suggested. There has been no attempt to discuss knotty political questions, or 
to speculate upon abstract theories of government, but simply to present the 
constitution itself, with such questions and answers as might direct the attention 
of the learner to its plain and obvious meaning. The constitution provides for 
the duties and rights of every-day life, and is written in simple language, almost 
entirely free from technical and professional expressions. Is there any reason 
why children capable of learning, and teachers capable of teaching, history and 
geography, might not intelligently study and teach all the material facts and 
provisions of the constitution, as they are here presented ?” — Author's Prefact. 

“ It is a simple, but an accurate synopsis of the rudiments of the federal 
government ; so well adapted to the apprehension of youth, as to leave nothing 
further to be desired, in the shape of a political manual .” — Chief Justice Gibson. 

“ In this work the Constitution of the United States is examined and explained 
in such a manner as to make it plain and intelligible to any youth who is capable 
of studying the history of his country .” — Judge Randall. 

“ It ought to be adopted at once in every school district throughout the United 
States .” — North American. 

“ As a work for the instruction of the rising generation, it cannot be too 
highly commended.” — Neal's Gazette. 


HART'S CLASS BOOK. OF PROSE. 

384 Pages 12mo. Price, 75 cents. 

HART’S CLASS - B0“0"K OF POETRY. 

384 Pages 12mo. Price, 75 cents. 

Consisting of selections from distinguished English and American authors, from 
Chaucer to the present day ; the whole arranged in chronological order, with 
biographical and critical remarks. By JOHN S. HART, A. M., Principal of 
^ the Philadelphia High School. (Sold separately.) 

“ Better calculated to impart a knowledge of the English language than any 
works of similar design now extant.” — Pennsylvanian. 

“ Decidedly the best work of the kind that has fallen under our notice.”— 
Neal's Gazette. 

“ I have never seen a book of selections with which I have been so we** 
pleased .” — Professor Rhoads. 

PUBLISHED BY E. H. BUTLER & CO., PHILADELPHIA. 


COATES’S SCHOOL PHYSIOLOGY. 

First Lines of Physiology: being an Introduction to the Science of Life, 
written in Popular Language; designed for the use of Common Schools, 
Academies, and General Readers. By REYNELL COATES, M. D., Author 
of hirst Lines of Natural Philosophy. Sixth edition, revised; with an 
Appendix. 340 pages 12mo. Price, 

This work is designed expressly for the use of schools, and has been carefully- 
adapted to the capacities of children, while the matter and style are such as to 
render it at once attractive and instructive to youth who are advancing towards 
the conclusion of their studies, even in seminaries of the highest class. 

Technical terms are avoided, as much as possible ; and those which are neces- 
sarily employed, are fully explained in an accurate and simple manner. No 
term is given until the student is impressed with the want of a word, to express 
an idea already received; so that the memory ia not fatigued, at the very com- 
mencement of the study, with a long list of words, and abstract definitions, 
which he has no means of fixing in his mind by association. 

A text-book on Physiology has been anxiously sought for by the leading 
teachers and professors of our country ; but it has been supposed that, desirable 
as such knowledge must be for those who are charged with the care of the 
young, there is something in the nature of the study, rendering it unfit for intro 
duction into seminaries for young ladies. The error of this opinion is most 
clearly shown in the work now offered to the public. It contains not a word 
that can be regarded as objectionable by the most fastidious delicacy. 



COATES'S NATURAL PHILOSOPHY. 

• 

First Lines of Natural Philosophy, divested of mathematical formulae : being a 
practical and lucid Introduction to the study of the Science; designed for the 
use of Schools and Academies, and for readers generally, who have not been 
trained to the study of the exact sciences, and for those who wish to enter 
understandingly upon the study of the mixed sciences. By REYNELL 
COATES, M. D., Author of Physiology for Schools. Illustrated by 204 cuts. 
402 pages I2mo. Price, 75 cents. 

Unlike most works designed for a similar purpose, this volume is not a cora 
pilation merely. The author has evidently considered the Capacities and taste*) 
of his audience, matured his plan, and mastered all the necessary relations of 
his theme before putting pen to paper ; then, with the whole subject before 
him, and considering his pupil as utterly ignorant of the first principles of 
nature, he begins as though addressing the extremely young; and, throughout 
the entire work, he nowhere oversteps the ability of the pupil. Not a technical 
term is used unless fully and clearly explained, and no previous mathematical 
knowledge is demanded of the student ; although the reader is drawn, by light 
and easy, but logical and orderly stages, from the consideration of the simplest 
accidents of every-day life, to the comprehension of some of the grandest phe- 
nomena connected with astronomy. 

It is one of the peculiarities of this writer, that whatever he attempts te. 
tench, he teaches thoroughly; and while the appendix of well-digested ques- 
tions and references, greatly increases the value of the work to the practical 
preceptor of children acquiring the rudiments of education, its text will -ender 
it scarcely less valuable to the youth about commencing the study of the exacr 
•ctences, the man of liberal information, and even the professional teacher. 

PUBLISHED BY E. H. BUTLER & CO., PHILADELPHIA. 


ANGELL’S READING BOOKS. 


This is a series of Spelling and Reading Books, in Six Numbers ; compiled 6y 
OLIVER ANGELL, A. M., Principal of the Franklin High School, Providence. 
The numbers composing the series may be briefly described as follows : 

Angell’s Reader, No. 1—72 pages 12mo. Price, 8 cents. 

The arrangement of the lessons in this book is such, that the child commences 
reading as soon as he commences putting the letters together into syllables, the 
exercise of spelling and reading being simultaneous. The same syllables and 
words which form the Spelling Lessons, are arranged as Reading Lessons 
directly opposite, or immediately under the spelling columns. 

Angell’s Reader, No. 2 — 136 pages 12mo. Price, 14 cents. 

This is a continuation of the first number, containing Easy Reading Lessons, 
most of which are pleasing stories, designed to interest the mind of the learner, 
and afford instruction. Spelling Lessons, consisting of words from the Reading 
Lessons, precede every Reading Lesson. 

AngelPs Reader, No. 3—206 pages 12mo. Price, 17 cents. 

This is a gradual advance from the second number, having the reading ana 
Spelling Lessons arranged on the same plan. The Lessons, in each of the num- 
bers, are followed by a set of Questions, to exercise the reader on what he has 
read. 

AngelPs Reader, No. 4 — 252 pages 12mo. Price, 30 cents. 

Also designed as a Reading and Spelling Book, and containing a variety of 
other useful matter. 

AngelPs Read ef, No. 5—296 pages 12mo. Price, 50 cents. 

A Reading Book for the higher classes in Common Schools, with Spelling 
Lessons and Definitions adapted to each reading section ; with Tables, Mental 
Arithmetic, &c. 

AngelPs Reader, No. 6 — 504 pages 12mo. Price, 75 cents. 

Being a selection of pieces in prose and verse ; designed as a Reading Book 

for the highest classes in Academies and Schools. 

( 

These six volumes, compiled by Oliver Angell, comprise a series 
which is undoubtedly more suitable for the purpose for which they are 
designed, than any previous publications; and they are more popular among 
those who have the direction of education than any ever prepared in this 
country. There is a decided advantage in possessing sets of elementary book 9 
by the same author, who has pursued a similar plan with each, rising step by 
step, and who, it is presumed, would be better able to preserve the proper gra- 
dation of style and matter, than several individuals would. This will be found 
io be the case in the present series. No matter that appears in one, is inserted 
tn either of the others ; so that the six compilations may be used in different 
classes in the same school. 


PUBLISHED BY E H. BUTLER & CO., PHILADELPHIA. 


KENDALL'S URANOGRAPHY. 


’> i 


Uranography, or a Description of the Starry Heavens: designed for the use o» 
Schools and Academies ; accompanied by an Atlas of the Heavens, showing 
•he places of the principal Stars, Clusters, and Nebulae. By E. OTIS KEN- 
DALL, Professor of Mathematics and Astronomy in the Central High School 
of Philadelphia, and Member of the American Philosophical Society. The 
Uranography contains 365 pages 12mo., with nine fine Engravings. The 
Atlas is in 4to., and contains eighteen large Maps. Price of the Uranography 
and Atlas, $1.25. 

A great obstacle to the study of Uranography heretofore has been the diffi- 
culty of transferring to the heavens themselves, the ideas acquired in studying 
the maps. There was so much in the map that was not in the heavens, that it 
was extremely difficult for a beginner to conceive the one to be in any respect 
the representative of the other. A celestial map or globe, crowded with highly- 
colored pictures of birds, and beasts, and four-footed animals, and creeping 
things, might well look, to the eye of the uninitiated, more like the show-bill of 
a menagerie than a picture of the starry heavens. In the present work, how- 
ever, while a faint outline of the old constellations is preserved for the sake of 
their historical associations, prominence is given in the maps to that which is 
prominent in the heavens, viz., to the stars themselves. 

This feature of the work is made yet more striking by the introduction of 
another, of a character altogether novel. Not only are the objects which are 
not seen in the heavens, excluded from the maps, but the heavens themselves 
are represented more nearly in their true color. Instead of making, as hereto- 
fore, the stars black and the sky white, the groundwork of the map is here the 
deep blue of heavenly space, while the stars are a brilliant, spotless white. Such 
a representation of the subject seems to be the one least likely to confuse the 
mind of the student, when, from a contemplation of his Celestial Atlas, he turns 
to contemplate the august scene which it represents. 

“ This work, with its eighteen maps, is abundant, in the hands of a competent 
teacher, to create pure pleasures which shall be renewed and deepened through 
.ife.” — Rev. J. Todd, D. D. 

“ A capital work for schools and academies .” — Richmond Enquirer. 

“No text-book on the subject has ever been published at all equal to this of 
Professor Kendall’s .” — Watchman of the South. 

« The author has brought to the work a strong love for, which has led to a 
deep knowledge of, the science of which he treats; and his position as a 
teacher enables him to set forth his instruction in an available form.”— United 
States Gazette. 

“We commend this work with warmth and confidence.” — Philada. Inquirer 

“ It appears to us that this work supplies a desideratum with the schools, and 
will much facilitate the study of the ‘wonders of the heavens .’” — Richmond 
Compiler. 

“ We know of no work of the same nature equal to this in comprehensiveness 
end arrangement .” — North American. 


PUBI ISHED BY E. H. BUTLER & CO., PHILADELPHIA. 


MATHEMATICAL SERIES. 


I. 

Young’s Algebra. 

An Elementary Treatise on Algebra, 
Theoretical and Practical, for the use 
of Schools and Colleges. By J. R. 
Young, Prcj^essor of Mathematics in 
the Royal College, Belfast. A new 
Americalf, from the last London edi- 
tion. 324 pages 8vo. Price, $1.50. 

II. 

Young’s Geometry. 

The Elements of Geometry, for the use 
of Schools and Colleges. By J. R. 
Young, author of Elementary Trea- 
tise on Algebra ; with Additions and 
Corrections by M. Floy. A new 
American, from the last London edi- 
tion. 216 pages 8vo. Price, $1.50. 

III. 

Young’s Analytical Geometry. 

The Elements of Analytical Geometry, 
for the use of Schools and Colleges. 
By J. R. Young, author of Algebra 
and Geometry; with Additions and 
Corrections by John D. Williams. 
A new American, from the last Lon- 
don edition. 288 pages 8vo. Price, 
$1.50 

IV. 

Young’s Trigonometry. 

fhe Elements of Plane and Spherical 
Trigonometry, with Logarithmic and 
Trigonometrical Tables, for the use 
of Schools and Colleges. By J. R. 
Young, author of Algebra, Geome- 
try, &c. ; with important Additions 
by T S. Davies, F.R.S.E., F.R.A.S., 
&c.: the whole Revised and Cor- 
rected by John D. Williams. A 
new American, from the last London 
edition. 372 pages 8vo. Price, $1.50. 
v. 

Young’s Mathematical Tables. 

Logarithmic and Trigonometrical Ta- 
bles, adapted to the use of Navigation 
and Nautical Astronomy, and Practi- 
cal Mathematics generally. By J R. 
Young, author of Trigonometry, &c.; 
with Additions and Corrections by 
John D. Williams. A new Ameri- 
can, from the last London edition. 
224 pages 8vo. Price, $1.13. 


VI. 

Young’s Mechanics. 

The Elements of Mechanics, compre- 
hending Statics and Dynamics, for 
the use of Schools and Colleges. By 
J. R. Young, author of Analytica. 
Geometry, &c. ; with Additions and 
Corrections by John D. Williams. 
A new American, from the last Lon- 
don edition. 285 pages 8vo. Price, 
$1.50. • 

VII. 

M’Cartney’s Calculus. 

The Principles of the Differential and 
Integral Calculus, and their applica- 
tion to Geometry. By Washington 
M’Cartney, Professor of Mathema- 
tics in Lafayette College, Easton, Pa. 
340 pages 8vo. Price, $1.50. 

VIII. 

Lewis’s Trigonometry . 

A Treatise on Plane and Spherical 
Trigonometry, including the Con- 
struction of Tables, Conic Section*, 
and the principles of Spherical Pro- 
jection. By Enoch Lewis, of Phi- 
ladelphia. 228 pages. 8vo. Price, 
$1.50. 

IX. 

Green’s Algebra. 

Gradations in Algebra, with the First 
Principles of Analysis explained In- 
ductively , for the use of Primary and 
Common Schools. By Richard W 
Green, A. M., Teacher of Mathema* 
tics in the Grammar School of the 
University of Pennsylvania. 192 pages 
12mo. Price, 63 cents. Key to the 
above, for the use of Teachers. Price, 
$ 1 . 

X. 

Kendall’s Walker’s Geometry. 

Elements of Geometry, with Practical 
Applications, for the use of Schools 
By T. Walker, late Teacher of 
Mathematics in the Round Hill 
School, at Northampton, Massachu- 
setts; with Additions and Improve- 
ments by E. Otis Kendall, Professor 
of Mathematics in the Philadelphia 
High School. 132 pages 12ino. Price, 
75 cents. 


PUBLISHED BY E. H. BUTLER & CO., PHILADELPHIA. 


























■ 


























































» 







































































